JP2024045377A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] There is a demand for a gaming machine that can transmit appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine. [Solution] A gaming machine that starts accepting counting button operations between the time when a gaming machine information notification is output to the outside and the time when a counting notification is output to the outside, and is configured to be able to start updating the score displayed on the total score display device and to be able to output specific information, including counting information, to the outside even if the acceptance of counting button operations is then terminated. [Selected Figure] Fig. 167

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, a game starts when a start lever (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged on the outer periphery rotate. When the reels are stopped by using a reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, and a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on an active line, the machine generally transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small prize or the like is higher than usual) that is more profitable for the player than the normal game state. Here, in a slot machine, images for effects to increase the interest of the game may be displayed on a display such as an LCD in sync with the rotation and stopping of the reels, and many slot machines are configured so that when the reel stop device is operated, the player can enjoy predicting the outcome of the game by comparing the symbols displayed on the reels with the images for effects displayed on the display.

JP2017-182215

There is a need for a gaming machine that can transmit appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine, and there has been a need to construct a control process for transmitting appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, and is configured to be able to determine the lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and is characterized in that it is able to start updating the score displayed on the total score display device even if the operation of the counting switch is not accepted after the operation of the counting switch is accepted between the output of the predetermined information to the outside and the output of the specific information to the outside, and is able to output specific information including the counting information to the outside even if the operation of the counting switch is not accepted after the operation of the counting switch is accepted between the output of the predetermined information to the outside and the output of the specific information to the outside.

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to transmit appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine, and it is also possible to construct a control process for transmitting appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine according to this embodiment with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the drum-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a list 1 of symbol combinations in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a list of symbol combinations 2 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a list of symbol combinations 3 in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of the small winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and bonus appearance rates in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the process for handling an unrecoverable error on the main control board in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart (second page) of the game progress control process on the main control board side in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the process of adding game numbers on the main control board in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 28 is a RT state transition diagram in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process on the main control board side in the slot machine of this embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the reel drive control processing on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel drive control processing on the main control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram regarding the rotating operation of the reels in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram showing the push order display in the reel type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the sub-side power-off processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing one command processing on the sub-control board in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the process of determining the presentation-related information when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a process for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of AT performance determination processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the process of determining whether or not a revival is possible on the sub-control board side in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Figure 48 is a flowchart of processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of specialization precursor processing when operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Figure 50 is a flowchart of the special addition processing on the sub-control board when the start lever is operated in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the internal processing of the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the first reel stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the processing performed on the sub-control board when a second reel stop is accepted in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the process for determining the effects related to the third drum stop on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third drum stop reception process on the sub-control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of menu screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image diagram showing the transition to the standby screen in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay has been won, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this example. FIG. 61 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay has been won, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this example. FIG. 63 is an operational diagram of a game in which a replay has been won, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this example. FIG. 3 is a front view schematically showing the relative positions of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 3 is a side sectional view schematically showing the relative position of the reel and the hopper. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of a hopper. FIG. 3 is a front view schematically showing the relative positions of a reel and a hopper. 13 is an oblique view showing the arrangement of the medal auxiliary tank HS and the fullness detection electrode DE. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the size and position of a full-state detection electrode and a screw BS. It is a figure showing the composition of a reel band. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the structure of a reel strip. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of freeze execution determination processing at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the drum-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of freeze execution determination processing at the time of stop on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an image diagram showing the execution of the AT start effect in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 shows an example of a situation-based notification mode that can be applied to the slot machine of this example. FIG. 79 is an example of a configuration related to payout that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 80 shows one example of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that can be applied to the slot machine of this example. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 82 shows an example 3 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 83 shows an example 4 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp that can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 84 shows an example 1 of the effect when operating the payment button, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 85 shows an example 2 of the effect when operating the payment button, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 86 is a third example of the effect when operating the payment button, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 87 shows an example 4 of the action when the settlement button is operated, which is applicable to the slot machine of this example. FIG. 88(a) is a timing chart showing a first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88(b) is a timing chart showing a second aspect of the timing of power supply and power-off of the gaming machine. 3 is a timing chart showing an aspect of the invention. FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89(b) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the second mode. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process in which the number of credits is added, a process in which game medals are paid out, and a process in which a game medium awarding sound is output. Figure 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing on the main control board side, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 94 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is no wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 95 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is no wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 96 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is a wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 97 is an image diagram showing the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is a wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the start timing of the third push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 100 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of the start timing of the push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. Figure 102 is an image diagram showing the start timing of push order navigation including audio when there is no wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. Figure 103 is an image diagram showing the start timing of push order navigation including audio when there is a wait during AT, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. Figure 105 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the second push order navigation when the push order bell role is won during the AT state, which can be applied to the slot machine of this example. FIG. 106 is an image diagram of the end timing of the third push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. Figure 107 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order replay role is won during the AT state, which can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. Figure 108 is an image diagram showing the end timing of the second push order navigation when the push order replay role is won during the AT state, which can be applied to the reel type gaming machine of this example. FIG. 109 is an image diagram of reel stop control in the AT state and changes in the display mode of the push order navigation that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first input sensor and the second input sensor, which is applicable to the drum-type game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of game progress control processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of medal insertion error processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between detection of game medals by the first input sensor and second input sensor on the main control board side and credit addition processing, which can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. be. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of error detection by the shoot sensor on the main control board side, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Figure 115 is a timing chart showing the detection modes of game medals by the first insertion sensor, the second insertion sensor and the shoot sensor, which are applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal return member that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal return member applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals flowing down a medal return member, which is applicable to the drum-type game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a trajectory diagram of game medals paid out to the medal receiving port, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven, which is applicable to the drum type game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is an image diagram of the rotation mode of the disk from the start of driving the hopper motor to the stop of driving the hopper motor, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. Figure 122 is a first pattern diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, showing the audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on the control command sent from the main control board side when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during settlement processing and then communication is restored. Figure 123 is a second pattern diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, showing the audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on the control command sent from the main control board side when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during settlement processing and then communication is restored. FIG. 124 shows the main control board when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes unavailable during the wait period, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a pattern diagram which showed the audio output process by the side of a sub-control board based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 125 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper, which is applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a first pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on a control command transmitted from the main control board side of the device. Figure 126 is a second pattern diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, showing the audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on the control command sent from the main control board side when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board becomes impossible during the medal payout process from the hopper and then communication is restored. FIG. 127 is a table showing the numbers that can be used in this example. Figure 128 is a front view of a main board case applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 129 is a front view of a main control board housed in a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 130 is a perspective view and a side view of a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 131 is a structural pattern diagram of a gate portion included in a main board case applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an image diagram showing the inside of the medal selector when a gaming medal applicable to the reel type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment is inserted. FIG. 133 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the gaming medal credit addition processing that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is an example of an operational diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of game medals that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is an image diagram of the inside of the chute main body when game medals are inserted, which is applicable to the drum-type game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 136 is an example of an operational diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment and the counting processing by the coin insertion monitoring counter. FIG. 137 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 138 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the counting processing by the gaming medal input monitoring counter that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 139 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off processing and the game medal payout number counting process that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. Figure 140 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends after the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. Figure 141 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 142 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. It is. FIG. 143 is a display example of a performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of a ratio calculation process in the second ROM/RAM area that can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of ratio display processing in the second ROM/RAM area applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) (variation 1) on the main control board side that can be applied to the drum-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. Figure 149 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (variation 2) on the main control board side applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 150 is a test display example of the performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a test display example of the performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 152 shows a configuration related to stopping and automatic settlement in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram of each mode transition in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram of in-mode item selection in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing an example of an alert in the reel-type gaming machine according to the 11th embodiment. FIG. 156 is a display example of a performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. Figure 157 is a functional block diagram of a medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 158 is an example of the connection cable communication content for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 159 is an example of a gaming machine information notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 160 is an example of a counting notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 161 is an example of a lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 162 is an example of a loan receipt result response command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flow related to the gaming machine information notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 164 shows a flow concerning the lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. Figure 165 shows a flow concerning the lending notification command for the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flow related to the lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flow related to the count notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment.

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be explained. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery using an electronic computer, sometimes referred to as a lottery) to determine the content of a game in a reel-type gaming machine, and includes random numbers in a narrow sense. It also includes pseudo-random numbers (for example, the random numbers are hard random numbers, the built-in random numbers generated by the main control chip including the CPU, and the pseudo-random numbers are soft random numbers). For example, so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the outcome of games, specifically "winning random numbers" related to special roles and winning roles (small roles, replay roles) for transitioning to special games, etc. can be mentioned. "CPU" has the same meaning as is well known in the industry, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, etc. "Power outage" refers to when the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a certain level, regardless of whether the power switch installed on the gaming machine is operated or not. This also includes interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as damage to the unit or power outage. "ROM" has the same meaning as what is well known in the industry, and it physically holds information (for example, if the element configuration is conductive when a current for reading data is applied, it is "1", If the element configuration does not, it will be "0"). RAM has the same meaning as what is well known in the industry, and stores information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, it will be "1" if it is charged, and "1" if it is not stored). (Note that it is generally configured such that backup power is supplied to some or all of the data held in the RAM in the event of a power outage). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which game medals are easy to obtain and is advantageous for the player (so-called jackpot games, bonus games, type 1 BB, type 2 BB, etc.). ), a re-gaming probability variable gaming state (RT state) in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is a predetermined value, and a winning combination. The order in which the reels are stopped to win a prize, an AT (assist time) state that can notify the stop position, an ART (assist replay time) state that is a combination of the RT state and the AT state, and the like. In addition, even in the normal game state, there are RT state, AT state, high probability normal game state, low probability normal game state, etc. (referred to as lottery state in this example), which have different lottery probabilities for transitioning to the ART state. ). In addition, there is no problem even if the gaming states are combined {Furthermore, these gaming states and functions (for example, the lottery to transition to the AT state, the output of notification instructions related to the order in which the reels stop, etc.) control the progress of the game. There is no problem even if everything is mounted on the main control board. In addition, in this example, the AT-related state and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the AT-related state as "normal gaming state," but the RT state and the AT-related state are The states related to ART may be collectively referred to as the "normal gaming state" or the like. The "winning combination" is the type of conditional device (or conditional device number) that is won by an internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to AT that can execute the push order navigation described later, and even in a game where the condition device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order is won. , if the state related to AT is such that push-order navigation can be executed, it is configured to be in the "notification state". The "counter value" is also referred to as the "number of executable notification games" and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "Number of executable notification games" is 1 or more (this may include the game that is "0"), the push order navigation described later may be executed. In addition, the "number of playable information games" includes the difference number of game media obtained based on the winning of a small role (mainly the push order bell role) (the number of pieces that are paid out minus the number of pieces inserted), It is also possible to use the number of wins for the winning position. Further, the "special notification state" is the state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to AT, and in this example, is referred to as the "additional special state". Further, the "specific condition" is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted, and for example, one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell combination) is won, etc., are the specific conditions. "Type 1 special accessory" is a predetermined accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols for each specified number of winnings, or increases the probability that a conditional device for each specified number of winnings will operate. This is a bonus that can be activated when a bonus is received and can continue to operate until a result of no more than 12 games is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as an RB (Regular Bonus). "Class 1 special accessory continuous activation device" is a device that can operate the 1st class special accessory continuously, and it activates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when a predetermined case occurs. The operation ends at the end of the game, and is sometimes referred to as BB (Big Bonus) or Type 1 BB. "Second-class special accessory" is an accessory that activates a conditional device related to winning regardless of the result of the winning lottery, and is activated in predetermined cases to obtain the result of one game. The operation is terminated when the bonus is exceeded, and is sometimes referred to as CB (Challenge Bonus). "Second-class special accessory continuous activation device" is a device that can operate the second-class special accessory continuously, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when a predetermined case occurs. The operation ends at the end of the bonus period, and is sometimes referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. "Ordinary accessories" are accessories that increase the number of combinations of symbols related to winnings for each specified number, or increase the probability that a conditional device related to winnings for each specified number will operate. This is a bonus that is activated when a combination is displayed and ends when a result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as an SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which when the first type BB combination wins, it is regarded as JACIN, and the player is always in RB while the first type BB is being executed. Furthermore, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed during the execution of the first type BB. In addition, an "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state where retraction control that can be performed after a stop operation is not performed, and the reel is stopped at the closest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation was accepted. This is the reel. The "all CB type" is a configuration in which CB is always in progress when performing the second type BB. The “CB transition lottery type” is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

Note that this embodiment is merely one example, and is not limited to the following aspects with regard to the location and function of each means, the order of each step for various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the names of means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. Furthermore, the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples should not be interpreted as being limited to being applied to a specific thing, and any combination is acceptable. For example, a modified example of one embodiment should be understood to be a modified example of another embodiment, and even if one modified example and another modified example are described independently, it should be understood that a combination of the one modified example and the other modified example is also described.

(This embodiment) Before describing each component, we will now explain the characteristics (overview) of the slot machine P according to this embodiment. Each component will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the reel-type gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the structure). The reel-type gaming machine P mainly consists of a front door (also called a front door), a back box (also called a cabinet or base), a reel unit installed inside the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. It is composed of a board M (a board on which a main control chip C including a CPUMC is mounted) and a sub-control board S (a board on which a sub-control chip SC including a CPUSC is mounted). These will be explained in order below.

<Front door DU> The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for making it possible to input game media, a mechanism for operating the reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, as mechanisms for making the game state visible, a reel window D160, an insertion number indicator D210, a start lamp D180, a replay lamp D290, an insertion possible lamp D300, a special game state indicator D250, a credit number indicator D200, a payout number indicator (push sequence indicator) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push sequence indicator D270), an AT counter value indicator D280, a favorable zone indicator YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as mechanisms for making it possible to input game media and the number of bets (number of bets), a medal insertion slot D170 and a bet button D220 are attached, and as a mechanism for making it possible to pay out the inserted game media, a settlement button D60 is attached. And, as mechanisms for operating the reels, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. The slot machine of this embodiment includes an operation console that protrudes toward the player and on which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub-input button SB, a cross key SB2, etc. are attached. Each element will be described in detail below.

<Mechanism for making the gaming state visible> Next, the main parts of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible will be explained. The reel window D160 is a transparent member made of synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. In addition, the number of inputs indicator light D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs of the same number as the number of medals currently bet (injecting the game medals necessary to start a game) are lit. It is configured like this. Specifically, the input number indicator D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps): a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and indicates that only one game medal has been bet. In this case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: goes off, and the 3-bet lamp D213: goes off, and when the number of game medals bet is 2, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, and the 2-bet lamp D212 goes off. : lit, 3 bet lamp D213: turned off, and if there are 3 game medals bet, 1 bet lamp D211: lit, 2 bet lamp D212: lit, 3 bet lamp D213: lit (re-game) This does not apply to the next game where the display is stopped (details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is composed of an LED, and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off in certain cases. Further, the replay lamp D290 is constituted by an LED, and is configured to be turned on when the replay is displayed as stopped, and turned off when the next game for which the replay is displayed as stopped is completed. In addition, the insertion enable lamp D300 lights up (or may blink) when the insertion of game medals into the medal slot D170 is valid or when the operation of the bet button D220 is valid, and the insertion of game medals is activated. It is configured to turn off when the bet button D220 is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game status display device D250 is constituted by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts during the special game. It should be noted that the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of payouts will be displayed on the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display section), which will be described later. By displaying this, the player can recognize the total number of payouts made during the special game, and the game machine can be made user-friendly. Further, the credit number display device D200 is configured with a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine as medals owned by the player. The payout number display device (press order display device) D270 is configured with a 7-segment display, and displays the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button A conditional device in which the winning combination can differ depending on the stopping order of D43 (this is a so-called pressing order combination (also referred to as a pressing order combination), but when the winning combination or the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is different. is generally structured so that the profit rate given to the player (number of coins paid out, subsequent RT status, etc.) can vary. It is configured to be able to notify the stop order (this notification may be referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the payout number display device (press order display device) D270 is configured to be able to display two things: the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that provides the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of this display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 controls the game according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as the first information display section) among the AT-related states (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games in which the player can stay in an AT-related state that is advantageous to the player and will be guaranteed if the game progresses (in this example, it may also be referred to as a push-order navigation state or an information game, and the details will be described later). It is configured like this. Note that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a case, the number of games that can remain in the AT state can be displayed on the effect display device S40, so that the player can The game machine can recognize the number of games for which the advantageous AT-related state is guaranteed, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine. Note that the payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push order display device.

Also, the advantageous zone indicator YH is composed of an LED, and is configured to light up when it is in the "advantageous zone" and to turn off when it is not in the "advantageous zone" (the timing of lighting and turning off will be described later). Here, in the reel type gaming machine according to this example, as in the conventional reel type gaming machine, it is possible to adopt a special gaming state (a so-called jackpot game, which corresponds to what is called a bonus game, a first type BB, a second type BB, etc.) in which it is easy to obtain gaming medals and is advantageous to the player, a replay probability variable gaming state (RT state) in which the winning rate of the replay role is higher (or lower) than in the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the replay role is a predetermined value, an AT (assist time) state in which the stopping order and stopping position of the reels for winning the winning role can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, etc., but in addition to these "game states", it is possible to set one of three "game zones", namely, a "normal zone", a "standby zone", and a "advantageous zone". In this example, a "standby section" is not set, and either a "normal section" or an "advantageous section" is set as a game section. Among these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than other "game sections", and for example, the "game state" being in an AT state or an ART state is associated with the "advantageous section". That is, when the "game state" is in an AT state or an ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. As described later, the setting control of the "game section" is also performed on the main control board side that controls the game progress, similar to the setting control of the "game state", so that whether the game progress is relatively advantageous to the player or not can be conveyed to the player without any lies by the lighting/unlighting status of the advantageous section indicator YH. As described below, if the "advantageous zone" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the "normal zone" is forcibly set, but at that time, the remaining AT-related state is also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), so that the change in the set "game zone" can also affect the transition of the "game state", and this automatically prevents the "game state" such as the AT state or ART state, which has a relatively high degree of design freedom, from significantly increasing gambling. As described above, if the "advantageous zone" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the "normal zone" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous zone" ends, but the end condition of the "advantageous zone" is not limited to this. The end condition of the "favorable zone" in the reel-type gaming machine of this example is "execution of one push order navigation that can obtain the minor role with the largest payout number among the minor roles that make up the push order role (role with push order) (for example, if the minor roles that make up the push order role are 7, 3, and 1, the push order navigation that can obtain the largest payout number of 7 is the push order navigation that can obtain the push order role with 7 or 1 coins depending on the push order, and if there is a push order role that can obtain 3 coins depending on the push order, the push order navigation that can obtain 3 coins does not fall under the push order navigation referred to here)" or "winning either BB, RB, or MB" and "any end condition (non-winning in a 40G 1-set loop lottery (AT), fixed 32G has elapsed (false premonition), etc.)" or "favorable zone of 1500G" is satisfied. In addition, in the case of a specification where there is no push order bell role (for example, a specification where there is a replay push order for transitioning to the RT state, but no minor role with a different payout number depending on the push order), the condition for ending the advantageous zone of "one push order navigation that can obtain the minor role with the largest payout number" is excluded. Also, in this embodiment, the minor roles that make up the push order role are composed of minor roles including a minor role corresponding to an 11-coin role and a minor role corresponding to a 1-coin role, so "one push order navigation that can obtain the minor role with the largest payout number" refers to announcing a push order that can obtain 11 medals (a winning 11-coin role).

<Mechanism for enabling input of gaming media> Next, the main parts of the mechanism for enabling input of gaming media will be described. The medal insertion port D170 is an insertion port for gaming medals, and when the medal reception state is enabled, gaming medals inserted into the insertion port are guided into the gaming machine. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s as sensors for detecting insertion of medals, and is configured to detect the inserted medals as bet medals when it is determined that the gaming medals guided into the gaming machine have been inserted normally. In addition, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to bet the stored medals (credit medals) by operation. In addition, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to pay back the stored medals (credit medals) and/or bet medals to the player by operation. Furthermore, the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for Operating the Reel Unit> Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to be able to start the operation of the reels by operation. Further, the stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and is configured to be able to sequentially stop the operation of the reels by operating each stop button. has been done.

<Other mechanisms provided in the front door DU> Next, the main parts of the other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to the perspective view of the inside of the reel type gaming machine P with the front door DU opened in Fig. 2. The front door DU is provided with a performance display device S40 for displaying performances such as advance notice performances and background performances, a game effect lamp D26 (not shown) that can be lit in various lighting modes, a door board D for relaying signals, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 that can output sound, a middle panel (middle decorative panel), an upper panel D130, and a lower panel D140, which are members formed of synthetic resin, etc. The performance display device S40 is attached to the upper part of the back side of the front door DU so that the display unit that displays the performances, etc. can be seen through the see-through area formed in the upper panel. The decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have light sources that emit light according to the progress of the game on the reel type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamp unit D150 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, and the LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 are sometimes collectively referred to as the lamp unit). Also, a door board D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back of the front door DU, and this door board D has the function of a relay board that receives input signals such as the stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60, and outputs the input signals directly or after processing them to the main control board M described later. In addition, a medal selector DS, which corresponds to the medal insertion port D170 and is provided near the door board D on the back side of the front door DU, detects medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 and performs simple authenticity checks, guides proper medals to a hopper H40 described later, and returns improper medals to a medal tray D230 described later. Furthermore, a speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door board D. The middle panel is the upper side of the operation table and the lower side of the upper panel D130, and is a panel portion including the reel window described above. In addition, the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the operation table D190 described above are members used for operations on the menu screen described later, button rapid-fire performance on the sub-control board S side (by rapid-fire operation of the sub-input button SB, a performance regarding whether or not a bonus has been won) and mini-games (for example, a performance of the success or failure of entering the "AT state"), etc. In addition, the front door DU of the reel type gaming machine P is provided with a medal tray D230 that receives the game medals (or may be simply called medals) discharged from the discharge port D240, and a door switch D80 that can detect the open/closed state of the front door DU. In addition, the front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and is configured to be able to open the front door DU by inserting a key (door key) that matches the shape of the keyhole D260 into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured to be able to release an error state (door opening error, etc.) by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {and twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. In addition, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220, and the bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 lights up (or flashes), allowing the player to perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is valid. In addition, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons, the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). The stop button lamp S60 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the presence or absence of lighting (or blinking) and/or the lighting color of the stop button lamp S60 allows the player to recognize that the operation of the stop button D40 is valid. Note that since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 is lit in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, when the left stop button D41 is invalid, the center stop button D42 is valid, and the right stop button D43 is valid, the lighting modes of the three stop button lamps S60 can be different from each other, such as the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 being turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the center stop button D42 being turned on, and the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the right stop button D43 being turned on. In addition, by varying the lighting color or lighting pattern of the stop button lamp S60 (such as lighting/flashing, or slow/fast flashing), it may be possible to configure it so that it is easier for the player to determine which stop button should currently be operated to stop a game in which push order navigation is executed. For example, when all reels are spinning and a push order bell has been hit in which the push order of "left → middle → right" is the correct answer (maximum number of coins paid out), the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button may be made to flash in white, and the stop button lamps corresponding to the middle stop button and the right stop button may be made to light up in blue, and if the player then operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button may be made to turn off, the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button may be made to flash in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be made to light up in blue.

Next, the rear box (also called the cabinet or base) and each device installed in the rear box will be described. A reel unit is attached in approximately the center of the rear box so that a portion of it can be seen through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source for the reel M50 (such as a stepping motor). The reel M50 also includes a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel section is formed from a synthetic resin or the like, and multiple patterns are drawn on the outer circumference of the reel section (on the reel band MO). Each reel section is configured to be able to rotate and stop based on the operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and when the LEDs are lit, the light that passes through the outer periphery of the reel section makes it appear as if the outer periphery of the reel section is lit. Also, above the reel M50, a reel board K (described later) for driving each reel (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

Further, above the reels M50, a main control board M, which will be described later and controls the entire game, is stored, and on the left side of the reels M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, is stored therein, and which controls various effects performed using the above. The main control board M includes a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset switch that can change setting values, cancel errors, etc. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting/reset button M30 are not shown, but they may be provided at an appropriate position on the main control board M (i.e., if the front door DU is not opened). (If not, it is sufficient if it is located in a location that is difficult to access manually).

Below the reel M50 are a hopper H40 that collects inserted gaming medals, a medal payout device H that pays out the gaming medals, and a power supply board E that supplies power to the entire reel gaming machine P. The gaming medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through a coin shooter D90 and are paid out from a discharge port D240. A power switch E10 for turning on the power to the reel gaming machine P is also provided on the front of the power supply board E (sometimes referred to as a power supply unit E). Details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS> Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 inside the reel-type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an input reception sensor D10s that serves as a path for game medals inserted from the medal input port D170 near the door board D, and below the input reception sensor D10s, the game medals are transferred to a discharge port D240. A coin shooter D90 and the like are provided to guide the coin. The input reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medals input from the medal slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and only accepting game medals that conform to the standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals do not conform based on this function. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been removed are configured to be returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. When the player inserts game medals before operating the start lever D50 (while inserting game medals is valid), the game medals are sorted by the input acceptance sensor D10s, and only those that meet the specifications are selected. Medals that are thrown into the hopper H40 and do not meet the specifications are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, if a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of game medals is not valid), the inserted game medal is passes through the coin shooter D90 and is returned to the discharge port D240. Furthermore, inside the input reception sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path), there is provided a sensor related to medal input, which will be described in detail later. and a second input sensor D30s, and the signal thereof is supplied to a main control board M, which will be described later.

Next, the sensor related to medal insertion will be explained in detail. The game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first pass through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. The input reception sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when a game medal passes, two protruding mechanisms are pressed down and turned on, allowing the game medal to pass through the passage normally. . In addition, with this configuration, if a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not meet the standards, for example, one that is smaller in diameter than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms will be pressed down. Not done. Since such medals cannot maintain an upright state, they cannot pass through the passage (the medals fall down) and are returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured so that it can be determined that there is an error (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) if the input reception sensor D10s continues to be on for a predetermined period of time or more. .

When a gaming medal passes through the blocker D100 normally, it will pass the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing through. This insertion sensor (the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (placed adjacent to each other with a distance smaller than the standard diameter of the gaming medal), and is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the on/off status of each sensor (such as the order in which the on/off combinations of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s change) and the time they are on/off.

<Medal Payout Device H> Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail using a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. 4. The medal payout device H is operated when the settlement button is operated in a state where credits (gaming medals electronically stored inside the gaming machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start a game) are present. It will be activated when game medals are paid out due to winning or winning. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H displace the release biasing means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the release port D240. The dispensing sensor (the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors, and the on/off status of each sensor (the on/off status of the first dispensing sensor H10s and the second dispensing sensor H20s) It is configured to be able to detect various errors by monitoring the order in which the combination of off and on transitions, etc.) and the time during which the switch is on and off. More specifically, for example, when the game medals normally pass through the game medal outlet H60, the discharge biasing means H70 changes from the state where the first payout sensor H10s=off and the second payout sensor H20s=off to the state where the second payout sensor H20s=off. 1 payout sensor H10s=off・2nd payout sensor H20s=off→first payout sensor H10s=on・2nd payout sensor H20s=off→first payout sensor H10s=on・2nd payout sensor H20s=on→first payout The sensor state transition is sensor H10s=off, second dispensing sensor H20s=on→first dispensing sensor H10s=off, second dispensing sensor H20s=off, so if a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected, , an example of configuring it to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the reel type gaming machine in this embodiment. In the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment, the prescribed number (the maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) is 3, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is 20 frames each, and the effective line for winning is one line of "the upper row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the lower row of the right reel M53". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is 1 (the correspondence between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (draw-in priority order) is "replay combination → small combination (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus", and for example, when the replay combination and the bonus are established at the same time, the symbol combination that becomes the replay combination is displayed stopped and the bonus cannot be won. Also, when bells and watermelons are formed, if the stop button is pressed at a position where both can be drawn in (a position within four frames from the winning stop position), the small winning combination with the larger number of coins is drawn in first. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of frames on each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames) or the configuration of the effective lines is changed (for example, changed to 5 lines with 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines, or changed to 1 line on the bottom of the left reel M51, the middle of the center reel M52, and the top of the right reel M53). In addition, when a push order minor prize that gives different benefits to the player depending on the push order is won, the pull-in control is such that when the predetermined correct push order is used, the minor prize with the largest payout number is pulled in first (number-priority control), and when the push order is used incorrectly that differs from the correct push order, the pull-in control is such that the symbol that has the highest chance of winning (the symbol that has the highest chance of winning out of the multiple symbol combinations that can win) among the symbols that can be stopped and displayed (positioned within four frames from the stop operation) is pulled in (number-priority control).

Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of a slot machine in this embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames on the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (numbers 0 to 19), and there are 10 types of symbols: "Black Seven", "White Seven", "Sheep", "Blank", "Bell", "Replay A", "Replay B", "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B", and "Cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in a symbol combination that constitutes a winning role, just like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute a winning role. For example, a symbol combination that constitutes a winning role that includes "blank" is "Watermelon B, Replay A, Blank", which is Replay 02. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem if the types of symbols are increased, decreased, or changed.

Next, Figures 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as described below, one of the symbol combinations is displayed stopped on an active line (the one line mentioned above) depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53. Note that even if the same type of symbol is not lined up on an active line, it is configured so that the same symbols are likely to line up in a row on lines other than the active line as seen by the player (in the case of watermelon, it is configured so that three watermelon symbols line up in a straight line somewhere on the reel, such as lined up in a horizontal line in the middle row). In addition, in this embodiment, there are three pattern combinations that result in a first type BB role (a role continuous operation device related to a so-called first type special role, but hereinafter may be simply referred to as a BB role): "Sheep, Sheep, Sheep", which is a first type BB-A (RB-A is continuously operated and the payout ends with more than 264 coins), "Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven", which is a first type BB-B (RB-B is continuously operated and the payout ends with more than 132 coins), and "White Seven, White Seven, White Seven", which is a first type BB-C (RB-B is continuously operated and the payout ends with more than 132 coins). In this embodiment, when the first type BB role is won and the BB is executed (the role is activated), during the execution of the BB, one lottery table is referred to in all games during the BB to draw winning roles (small roles, replay roles) other than the role (this is a method in which the table referred to during the role drawing during one BB is not switched, and may be referred to as an all-JACIN type hereinafter). The format of the first type BB role is not limited to this, and may be configured to switch the table referred to during the role drawing during one BB. Also, when the RT state is "RT1", if a symbol combination corresponding to the 14th to 16th numbers that becomes replay 04 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to transition to RT0 (the details of the RT state will be described later). Since "RT0" is a more disadvantageous RT state to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" is sometimes referred to as falling. In addition, when a symbol combination resulting in replay 05 corresponding to the number 17 is displayed in a stopped state, a "black seven" may be displayed in the lower rows of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53, and when a symbol combination resulting in replay 05 corresponding to the number 18 is displayed in a stopped state, a "white seven" may be displayed in the lower rows of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 (details will be described later). In addition, when the push order bell, which is the condition device for "Winning-A1" to "Winning-A6" described later, is won, if the reels are stopped in the push order that is most advantageous to the player, the symbol combinations "Winning 01" to "Winning 03" corresponding to the numbers 21 to 27 will be displayed and 11 game medals will be paid out, while if the reels are stopped in a push order different from the most advantageous push order for the player, the symbol combinations "Winning 08" to "Winning 11" corresponding to the numbers 39 to 56 will be displayed and 1 game medal will be paid out. Note that the "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be displayed. For example, if the "Bell - - Bell" corresponding to the number 23 is displayed as a bell on the active line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53, 11 game medals can be won regardless of which symbol is displayed on the active line of the center reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in this embodiment. In this figure, the condition device number is called the winning number, and the condition device number may also be called the winning number hereafter. In this embodiment, the replay role is provided from replay-A to replay-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the replay role displayed in a stopped state may differ depending on the stopping order and stopping position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Here, in this embodiment, as shown in the rightmost column, "Condition Device", a plurality of types of condition devices are configured to be stopped and displayed depending on the stopping order and stopping position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and among the plurality of types of condition devices, the condition devices having the same winning number are grouped together and illustrated in the third column from the right, "Condition Device (Name)". Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, three types of condition devices, "replay 01", "replay 02" and "replay 03", can be displayed in a stopped state depending on the stopping order and stopping positions of the left reel M51, the center reel M52 and the right reel M53. Note that the "condition device (name)" may be simply referred to as the condition device. In addition, a condition device related to replay such as "replay 01" may be referred to as a replay role, a condition device that pays out game medals by winning such as "winner 01" may be referred to as a minor role, and a condition device that starts BB by being displayed in a stopped state such as "1st type BB-A" may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role will be won in overlapping fashion, and in such a case, when the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the symbol corresponding to the winning small role can be stopped and displayed, the symbol corresponding to the BB role will not be stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small role will be stopped and displayed, while when the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the symbol corresponding to the small role cannot be stopped and displayed (cannot be drawn in), the symbol corresponding to the BB role will not be stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small role will be stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, when the condition device "1 type BB-B + winning-C" of the winning number 21 is won, either the cherry which is "winning 12" or "winning 13" or the black seven which is "1 type BB-B" can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, in the case where the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → center reel M52 → right reel M53, (1) if the left stop button D41 is operated at a timing when the symbol numbers 0 to 4 (see the reel arrangement in FIG. 6) are located on the top of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the symbol number 4 corresponding to "prize winning 12" is stopped on the top of the left reel M51, and "prize winning 12" is displayed regardless of the stop positions of the center reel M52 and the right reel M53. (2) If the left stop button D41 is operated at a timing when the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located on the top of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the symbol numbers 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to "prize winning 13" are stopped on the top of the left reel M51, and "prize winning 13" is displayed regardless of the stop positions of the center reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located on the top row of the left reel M51 at the first stop, the symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" stops on the top row of the left reel M51. (3-2) When the center stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located on the middle row of the center reel M52 at the second stop, the symbol number 18 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" stops on the middle row of the center reel M52, and then, when the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located on the bottom row of the right reel M53 at the third stop, the symbol number 17 corresponding to "1 type BB-B" stops on the bottom row of the right reel M53, and the BB role is stopped and displayed. (3-3) If the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing when the pattern numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle row of the middle reel M52 at the second stop, the pattern number 18 corresponding to “Type 1 BB-B” cannot be stopped in the middle row of the middle reel M52, and none of the condition devices will be displayed as stopped.

Next, in the "Role" item, the role of the "condition device (name)" is illustrated, and the "normal replay" corresponding to winning number 1 is displayed in the order in which the stop button is pressed. Regardless, it is a condition device related to re-gaming in which re-gaming combinations that do not change to RT state are stopped and displayed, and "reverse push white 7 set replay" corresponding to winning number 2 is a condition device related to re-gaming where the re-gaming combination that does not change to RT state is stopped and displayed. This is a condition device related to re-gaming in which re-gaming combinations whose state does not change are displayed in a stopped state. The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2 on the middle reel M52, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 on the left reel M51, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 on the left reel M51 stop at the operation timing when they are located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "white sevens" are stopped and displayed at the bottom of the right reel M53, middle reel M52, and left reel M51, and from the player's perspective, it is configured so that the white sevens appear to be lined up in the bottom row. There is. In addition, in the game where you won Replay-B and won the AT add-on lottery, you could win the AT add-on lottery by executing a direction (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "white seven" by pushing backwards. The player is configured to be able to notify the player of this fact. "Sequential press black 7 set replay" corresponding to winning number 3 is a condition device related to replay in which replay combinations whose RT state does not change are stopped and displayed regardless of the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. (stop the reels in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 on the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 on the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" will be displayed at the bottom of left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. are displayed in a stopped state, and from the player's perspective, it appears as if the black sevens are lined up in the lower row. In addition, in the game where you won the replay-C and won the AT additional lottery, you could win the AT additional lottery by executing a production (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "black seven" in order. The player is configured to be able to notify the player of this fact.

In addition, "RT Maintenance RP1** (3 options)" corresponding to winning number 4 is a condition device in which the re-play role that is stopped can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); if the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, re-play 01, re-play 02, or re-play 03, which do not result in a transition to the RT state, are displayed as stopped roles, and if the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52 or right reel M53, re-play 04, which can transition the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0", is displayed as stopped roles. In addition, the "RT Maintenance RP*1* (3 options)" corresponding to the winning number 5 is a condition device in which the re-play role that is stopped and displayed can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); when the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52, re-play 03, which does not result in a transition to the RT state, is displayed as a stopped role, and when the first stopped reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, re-play 04, which may result in a transition from the RT state "RT1" to "RT0", is displayed as a stopped role. In addition, the "RT Maintenance RP**1 (3 options)" corresponding to the winning number 6 is a condition device in which the replay role displayed in a stopped state can differ depending on whether the first stopped reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated); if the first stopped reel is the right reel M53, replay 01 or replay 03, which do not transition to the RT state, are displayed in a stopped state, and if the first stopped reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, replay 04, which can transition the RT state from "RT1" to "RT0", is displayed in a stopped state.

The "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321", which correspond to winning numbers 7 to 12, are condition devices that can change the winning minor role depending on which of the six reel stopping orders is selected. For example, "left reel M51:1, middle reel M52:2, right reel M53:3", and "123" means that the reels are pressed in the order "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), if the reels are pressed in the order "123" = "left → middle → right" (the correct push order), the symbol combination "winning 01", which can win the maximum number of 11 game medals, will be displayed. Note that the "123" in "push order bell 123" indicates the push order (reel stopping order) that can win the maximum number of medals for that winning number. Furthermore, if the reels are stopped in a push sequence other than the one that allows the maximum number of coins to be won, i.e. if the push sequence is not correct, one coin will be paid out. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create multiple game states with different profit rates for the player, such as navigating the push sequence for a replay role or the push sequence for a bell in an AT-related state such as an "AT in progress state" (displaying the push sequence that will result in the highest profit on the push sequence display device D270), and not navigating the push sequence in an AT-related state such as a "normal game state." The AT-related states will be described later.

The "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can win 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of medals, regardless of which of the winning numbers 04 to 07 stops. In other words, it is a condition device that can win the maximum profit regardless of the order of pressing, and is sometimes called the "order-independent bell". The "watermelon A" corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured to make it easy to line up three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) in parallel lines. For example, the winning number 14 of number 60 in Figure 9 is three watermelons A lined up in the middle of each reel. The "watermelon B" corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured to make it easy to line up three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) in a diagonal line. For example, the winning number 16 of number 66 in Figure 9 is three watermelons lined up diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B in the top row of the left reel M51, watermelon B in the middle row of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A in the bottom row of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium weak rare minor symbol (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to winning number 17 is a condition device that can cause three bells to line up on an active line, and as will be described in more detail below, this is a condition device that executes an AT addition lottery when it is won during a BB. In addition, the "BB medium strong rare minor symbol (V-shaped bell alignment)" corresponding to winning number 18 is a condition device that can cause bells to stop and be displayed on the top row of the left reel M51, the middle row of the middle reel M52, and the top row of the right reel M53, and as will be described in more detail below, this is a condition device that executes an AT addition lottery when it is won during a BB.

Next, in the "bonus winning information" field, a number between 0 and 3 is assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, winning numbers that do not include a bonus (BB role) have a bonus winning information of 0, and for winning numbers that include a bonus (BB role), the bonus winning information for winning numbers (19) that include a type BB-A is 1, the bonus winning information for winning numbers (20-23) that include a type BB-B is 2, and the bonus winning information for winning numbers (24-27) that include a type BB-C is 3. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding whether or not a BB has been established and which BB role has been won. Details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the "prize winning/replay winning information" field, a numerical value from 0 to 18 is assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, the prize winning/replay winning information is set to 0 for winning numbers that do not include a replay role or a small role (winning number 0 corresponding to a miss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to a bonus), and prize winning/replay winning information from 1 to 18 is assigned to winning numbers that include a replay role or a small role for each condition device. By storing the prize winning/replay winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which replay role or small role has been won. Details of the prize winning/replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the "Performance Group Number" field, a number between 0 and 11 is assigned to each winning number. By sending the performance group number from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S is configured to be able to determine the performance to be executed. Details of the performance group number will be given later.

Next, in the "ball output group number" field, a number between 0 and 13 is assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the ball output group number, and the stored ball output group number is used when executing a lottery related to the AT (for example, an AT lottery, an AT additional lottery), thereby reducing the program and data capacity for executing the lottery process related to the AT. In addition, even if a condition device with a ball output group number of 0 wins, the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery are not executed. On the other hand, if a condition device with a ball output group number other than 0 wins, the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery can be executed. In addition, details of the ball output group number will be described later. In addition, even if a condition device with a ball output group number of 0 wins, it may be configured so that the AT lottery or the AT additional lottery can be executed. In such a case, it is preferable to configure the lottery result to always be a miss (non-winning) when a condition device with a ball output group number of 0 wins and an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery is executed.

Next, FIG. 11 is a list showing the lottery probability (also called the winning rate) of the winning numbers (also called the condition device number or winning role) and bonuses (BB or BB role) for the small role and replay role in this embodiment, which are determined by the role selection means. In this figure, the winning rate of the winning number is illustrated.

First, the lottery probability in "RT0", "RT1" and "RT2" when BB is not activated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning role (particularly the replay role) is configured to differ depending on the RT state, and the "replay role" (the total appearance rate of all replay roles) has a higher appearance rate in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "replay 04" (a so-called falling replay role, which is a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role that is stopped and displayed in a situation where the bonus is not won in "RT1" and the bonus is not won, the state will move to "RT0") that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 4 to 6 is mainly won in "RT1" and hardly appears in "RT0". In addition, in "RT2", "replay 04" that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 4 to 6 can appear, but even if "replay 04" is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not move. In addition, when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", a fall effect (for example, "unfortunate" is displayed on the effect display device S40) which is an effect that notifies that the replay has transitioned to "RT0", that is, that the RT state has fallen, may be executed, and when "replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT0", the fall effect may not be executed. By configuring in this way, even though "replay 04" is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that he has won the BB because the fall effect was not executed, and the interest of the game can be increased. In addition, in such a case, the sound effect output by "replay 04" being stopped and displayed and the sound effect output by a replay role other than "replay 04" (for example, "replay 01" which does not transition to the RT state) being stopped and displayed may be configured to be different, and by configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize that "replay 04" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the player may stay in "RT1" in both cases of an AT-related state where push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal game state" which may be referred to as a non-AT game state) and an AT-related state where push order navigation may occur (for example, "AT in-state" which may be referred to as an AT game state). At this time, when a winning number that may transition (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, in the non-AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall may not be output based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to transition the game state without making the player aware that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT game state. On the other hand, in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall may be output based on the operation of the start lever (and a push order navigation in which a replay role in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed is notified). This allows the player to be careful not to fall out of the RT state and to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is announced. In addition, "replay 05" (a replay role that can inform the player of the fact that the AT-addition lottery has been won when stopped and displayed in the AT state) that can be displayed as a stop with the winning number 2 or 3 mainly appears in "RT1" and is almost never displayed in other RT states. The transition of the state regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that becomes the replay role will be described later. In addition, as described later, in this embodiment, the push order navigation that informs the player of the most advantageous reel stop order is configured to be executed by the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40. It is to be noted that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the bonus is configured to overlap with the small role, and overlaps with a part of the watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are condition devices in which the bonus and the small role overlap.

In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not activated, the BB winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single winning number that does not overlap with the minor winning numbers) If the BB role is won (sometimes referred to as a single BB role or a single BB role), the new winning of the BB role will be invalidated, and only the winning of the minor role will be valid. Specifically, for example, if you are "RT2" and have won (carried over) the 1st type BB-A, and you win the ``1st type BB-C'' with winning number 24, , Type 1 BB-C related to the winning number 24 will be invalidated. In other words, the situation is similar to the case where the winning number 0 "loses" and wins. In addition, the 1st type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be won. In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB has been won and the BB is not activated, the small winning numbers 21-23 and winning numbers 25-27 and the BB winning numbers are different. In the event that a duplicate condition device is won, the new winning of the BB winning combination will be invalidated and only the winning of the minor winning combination will be valid. Specifically, for example, if you are "RT2" and have won (carried over) 1st type BB-A, you win ``1st type BB-B + prize-C'' with winning number 21. In this case, the first type BB-B related to the winning number 21 will be invalidated, and only the winning prize-C will be valid. In other words, the situation is similar to the case where winning number 14 "Win-C" is won. In addition, the 1st type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be won. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to small winnings, and may overlap with a part of the replay winning combination. For example, some of the replay winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus winning combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device that includes the RT transition replay (a re-gaming role that can change the RT state), the bonus can be won even when the conditional device that includes the RT transition replay is won. Even if there is a possibility that the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, making it possible to give players expectations. In addition, when configured in this way, the RT state is controlled so as not to shift even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, even though the player should have transitioned to an RT state (shifted to an RT state where the replay probability is relatively low), the replay probability has not become low (he frequently wins replays), etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the game, such as the possibility of winning a bonus.

Next, the lottery probability for "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" when the BB is activated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the system is configured so that three small prizes can be won during BB operation: the "common bell" of winning number 13, the "BB medium weak rare small prize (diagonal bells lined up)" of winning number 17, and the "BB medium strong rare small prize (V-shaped bells lined up)" of winning number 18. If the "BB medium weak rare small prize (diagonal bells lined up)" or the "BB medium strong rare small prize (V-shaped bells lined up)" is won during the operation of a BB that has been won in the "AT in progress state", an AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

The upper part of the figure illustrates the appearance rate of minor prizes when the setting value is 1, and the appearance rate of the common bell (winning number 13) is uniform regardless of the RT state, but as shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the setting value (6 levels in this example). Specifically, the number of balls placed in setting 1 is 3204, the number of balls placed in setting 2 is 3404, the number of balls placed in setting 3 is 3604, the number of balls placed in setting 4 is 3904, the number of balls placed in setting 5 is 4204, and the number of balls placed in setting 6 is 4504, and the appearance rate is configured to increase as the setting value increases. By configuring in this way, for example, if a player plays a game while measuring the number of times the common bell appears (the number of times it wins), he or she can play the game while hoping that the setting value related to the gaming machine he or she is playing is relatively high by frequently winning the common bell. Also, the higher the setting value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the setting value, the higher the ball payout rate. The appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the setting value, but if the common bell is won, the AT lottery, AT top-up lottery, and high probability state transition lottery described below will not be executed, so it is configured not to affect the AT state transition lottery (also called the AT lottery).

The middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when the push order navigation is available. In the same figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as in the "AT state", the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of medals paid out per game (the average number of medals paid out based on winning minor roles, also called the expected number of gaming media obtained in one game) and the expected increase/decrease value of medals per game ( This is the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted when playing with a 3-bet bet.If it is larger than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase, while if it is smaller than 1, the expected value The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). The average number of payouts per game is calculated as follows: "Total number of replay winning combinations (total number of winning numbers 1 to 6) x number of payouts for replaying winning combinations (3) + minor winning combination (11) The sum of the numbers placed (minor role appearance rate) for the winning combination (sum of the numbers placed for winning numbers 7 to 16) x the number of payouts in the small role (11-card role) (11 pieces) / the sum of all the numbers placed (65536) )" can be calculated as follows. Further, the expected increase/decrease value of medals per game can be calculated as follows: "Average number of payouts per game/Number of medals inserted per game (3)". The number of medals inserted per game (the number of gaming media inserted when playing one game) is 3, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, an increase or decrease in medals per game is expected. The value is configured to be greater than 1. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, "RT1" has the relatively largest expected value of medal increase/decrease per game. Note that the numerical values in the figure do not take into account increases or decreases in medals due to bonuses. That is, if the game is played in a situation where push order navigation occurs (also referred to as a case of operation in an optimal operation mode or a case of operation in an advantageous operation mode), the number of medals will increase in "RT1". In addition, in "RT0" and "RT2", although not shown, in a situation where push order navigation is not occurring, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game is a value smaller than 1, and the medal will continue to decrease. In addition, in this embodiment, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game is larger than 1 when push order navigation is available in "RT0" or "RT2", but this is not limited to this. ” or “RT2”, the expected value of medal increase/decrease per game when push order navigation is available may be configured to be smaller than 1. In addition, when the symbol combination that becomes a replaying role is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3 coins) in the previous game is actually automatically bet, but when calculating the expected value of medal increase/decrease in this embodiment, The calculation is based on the assumption that 3 coins will be paid out. Note that one game may be referred to as one game.

The average payout per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0", 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1", and 3.67137146 when the RT state is "RT2". The expected medal increase/decrease per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0", 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1", and 1.223790487 when the RT state is "RT2". When push order navigation is available, the RT state "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. Note that these values are for setting 1. The winning numbers and the probability of winning bonuses for the above-mentioned small roles and replay roles are merely examples, and for example, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game in "RT2" where BB is internally established (expected medal increase/decrease value when push order navigation is present) may be configured to be less than 1. By configuring in this way, even if a bonus is not lined up in a game in which a bonus can be lined up in a situation where push order navigation occurs and it is "RT2" (when BB is internally established), the number of medals held will gradually decrease, and it is possible to prevent an attack that increases the number of medals held by intentionally not lined up in a game in which a bonus can be lined up in a situation where push order navigation occurs and it is "RT2" (when BB is internally established). Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of a miss in "RT2" to be higher than the probability of all the small roles (Win-A1 to Win-I) that are won in "RT2", and it is preferable to determine the probability of a replay role so that it is designed in this way (if the winning probability of a replay role is designed to be high, the probability of a miss will be lowered accordingly, so it is preferable to design the winning probability of a replay role so that it is not too high). In this example, in "RT2", the winning probability of all the small roles combined is 18784/65536, the winning probability of all the replays combined is 12501/65536, and the probability of a miss is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of a miss is higher than the winning probability of all the small roles combined.

11, in this embodiment, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-A is assigned the same number of 40 for all of Settings 1 to 6. The appearance rate of Type 1 BB-C is assigned the same number of 160 for all of Settings 1 to 6. In contrast, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is assigned 160 for Setting 1, 180 for Setting 2, 200 for Setting 3, 220 for Setting 4, 240 for Setting 5, and 270 for Setting 6. In other words, the appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is assigned a different number of 40 depending on the setting value. In this way, 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C function as BB without setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C may be referred to as BB without setting difference or bonus without setting difference), and 1st type BB-B functions as BB with setting difference (1st type BB-B may be referred to as BB with setting difference or bonus with setting difference). Also, 1st type BB-A, 1st type BB-B and 1st type BB-C all have a uniform appearance rate regardless of the RT state (between "RT0" and "RT1"). Note that the appearance rate of 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C (combined) is the same regardless of the setting value, but the appearance rate of 1st type BB-B (combined) differs depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the combined appearance rate of Type 1 BB-B is the same even if the setting value is different, but the appearance rate of each winning number may be configured to differ depending on the setting value, and even in such a case, Type 1 BB-B may be referred to as BB with setting difference.

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the reel type gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram in Figure 12. First, the reel type gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured with a main control board M that controls the progress of the game at the center, and a sub-control board S, door board D, reel board K, power board E, relay board IN, setting key switch M20, set/reset button M30, etc., all connected so that data can be exchanged. Note that the solid lines in the figure indicate the movement related to data exchange, and the dashed lines in the figure indicate the power supply route. Note that the power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power board E to the relay board IN or door board D without passing through the main control board.

The main control board M (sometimes called the main control means, main board, main control means, main board, or main game section) is a board that manages the overall progress of the game played on the reel-type gaming machine P. The main control board M is equipped with a main control chip C, which is equipped with a CPUC100 (sometimes called CPUMC), built-in ROMC110, built-in RAMC120, etc., which are connected to each other via a bus so that data can be exchanged between them. The main control board M receives signals indicating that the start lever D50, etc. has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and outputs control commands (or control signals) to the sub-control board S, the door board D, the reel board K, etc., thereby controlling the operation of these various boards {for example, by outputting an instruction number (also called a push order number, instruction information, or operation information) to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S is able to execute push order navigation on the performance display device S40}.

The sub-control board S (sometimes called the sub-control means, sub-board, sub-control means, sub-board, or sub-game section) is also equipped with a sub-control chip SC, just like the main control board M described above. The sub-control chip SC is equipped with a CPU SC100, ROM, RAM, etc., and is configured to be connected to each other via a bus so that data can be exchanged between them. The sub-control board S is also connected to various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, a performance display device S40, a reel backlight (also called a back lamp) S30, etc. Here, the reel backlight S30 is a light that is provided inside each of the left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and illuminates the patterns drawn on the surface of the reel from behind. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M and outputs drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the performance display device S40, the reel backlight S30, etc., to perform various performances. In the reel type gaming machine of this example, multiple LEDs are provided as the reel backlight S30 so that the player can individually identify nine ranges, namely the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left reel, the upper, middle, and lower rows of the middle reel, and the upper, middle, and lower rows of the right reel. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper row of the left reel is lit and all other LEDs are turned off, so that the player can identify that the upper row of the left reel is lit. In addition, the reel type gaming machine of this example is configured to be able to execute a back lamp performance (sometimes called a backlight performance) that indicates to the player that the predetermined pattern combination has been stopped by changing the lighting state of the reel backlight S30 when the predetermined pattern combination is stopped.

Connected to the door board D are the aforementioned insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, a stop button D40 for stopping the spinning reel M50, a start lever D50 for starting the spinning of the reel M50, a settlement button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and ending the game, various display panels D70 for displaying the status of the game (not shown, but the aforementioned insertion number indicator light D210, start lamp D180, re-play lamp D290, insertion possible lamp D300, special game status display device D250, payout number display device (push order display device) D270 is a collection of display devices such as the credit number display device D200 and advantageous zone display device YH), a door switch D80 for determining whether the front door is open or closed, for clearing errors and for changing setting values, and a blocker D100 for paying out game medals (or other foreign objects) that are determined to be incompatible after being inserted to the release port D240. This door board D is also connected to the main control board M described above so that data can be exchanged. Therefore, when the start lever D50, stop button D40, settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. In addition, a signal when the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of a gaming medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

Further, connected to the drum board K are a drum motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a drum sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like. The reel board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the reel motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 using the reel sensor K20. There is. Furthermore, in the reel type gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used as the reel motor K10. Note that the step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. In addition, each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols of approximately uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is is set to 24 steps (=480/20). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per round of the reels are changed.

Further, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action of releasing. The medal dispensing device H includes a first dispensing sensor H10s and a second dispensing sensor H20s that determine whether or not medals are normally dispensed and measure the number of dispensed game medals, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

The power consumed by these various control boards and boards is supplied from a power supply board E (a board that controls whether or not power is supplied by a power switch E10). In FIG. 12, the manner in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by broken arrows. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied to the main control board M and the sub-control board S from the power supply board E, and the various boards (door board D, drum board K, relay board IN) are Power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and after converting this power into a DC voltage of a specified voltage, it is supplied to each control board and board.

The main control board M is also connected to a setting key switch M20 used to execute the setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting/reset button M30 that can change setting values and reset errors. The main control board M also has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), an AT lottery means for executing an AT transition lottery to transition to an "AT in progress state", which is an AT-related state that is advantageous to the player, and an AT addition lottery means for executing an AT addition lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can be played in the "AT in progress state".

Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in this embodiment.

The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (represented by rectangles), judgments (represented by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals indicating start, end, return, etc. (represented by rounded rectangles). ing. In addition, when the details of a processing step are illustrated in another flowchart, those that refer to the other flowchart are illustrated as subroutines (illustrated by a rectangle with double lines on the left and right). . At the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( The configuration is such that no subroutines (subroutines that are not normally used) are left behind, and processes related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed are prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC100 of the main control board M after the power of the reel type gaming machine P is turned on (or at the time of system reset or user reset). First, in step 1000, after the power of the reel type gaming machine P is turned on, in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is not started but only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to the timer interrupt processing described later is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the setting of serial communication (setting of speed, data length, data transmission method) etc. as the function setting of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data stored in the checksum area, checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC120 is correctly retained after the power is turned off and restored) and generates power-off restoration data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 is off.

If Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processed flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAM (in step 1006). check results) to determine whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPU 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the power-off processing (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the RAM area and determines whether the data related to the setting value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1036, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port in step 1038. Next, in step 1040, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the restored stack pointer.

If the answer is No in step 1016, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area) in step 1024. Next, in step 1300, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

Also, if the answer is No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) a setting value error display (for example, to be displayed on the payout number display device D270). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the unrecoverable error processing described below.

If No in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off processed flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAM (step 1028). 1006), it is determined whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM, and sets ( For example, it is set in a register area), and the process moves to step 1034. The range that is not included in the RAM initialization range is not limited to only the storage area that stores setting values (setting value data), but also includes the total cumulative number of games in the "advantageous section" and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous section + The number of games (normal section), the result of calculating the stay ratio in the "advantageous section", etc. are also outside the range of RAM initialization. With this configuration, it becomes possible to calculate and display the ratio of players staying in the "advantageous section" (advantageous section ratio) in the game. Further, the calculation process of the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Further, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (eg, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, the following is repeated at 5-second intervals in the order of "advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → character ratio per 6000 games → cumulative successive character ratio → cumulative character ratio" Is displayed. In addition, the continuous accessory ratio is "the number of payouts when RB is operating / the total number of payouts", and the accessory ratio is "the number of payouts when RB, CB, or SB is operating". /total number of payouts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range that includes a storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM. set (for example, set in a register area), and the process moves to step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

Although not shown, it is preferable to configure the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary memory area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M so that it is not a value that will result in the special game being executed (to prevent the special game from being executed by mistake if a process for determining whether or not a special game will be executed is executed due to noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the program processing begins). Although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, it is preferable to secure a dedicated memory area and configure the byte that stores information related to the random number to store only information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (to prevent information related to the random number from being overwritten by noise, etc. when manipulating other data stored in the same byte).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes it with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is not within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). Note that if the setting values (setting value data) are managed as 1 to 6, it is necessary to initialize the RAM and return the setting value to ``1'' when it becomes ``0''. Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) as 0 to 5, the setting value (setting value data) correction process (step 1106 and The process in step 1108) can be made unnecessary, making it possible to shorten the processing time and reduce the processing capacity. If Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the setting value (setting value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0 = the value that is most disadvantageous to the player), and proceeds to step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1106, the process also moves to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the payout number display device D270) that the setting change device is in operation (for example, "88" that lights up all segments). Then, the setting value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the setting value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 to move to. Incidentally, as described above, the payout number display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Because of this configuration, for example, when a part of the 7-segment LED is malfunctioning (some segments cannot be lit), incorrect information may be reported when announcing the press order. could be. In order to prevent such a situation, by having all 7 segments on the payout number display device D270 light up to "88" while the setting change device is operating, it is possible to confirm whether or not the 7 segments are out of order, and to notify the player of any inconvenience. It is possible to prevent the giving of benefits, etc. In addition, as a configuration related to the display of setting values (setting value data), a RAM memory for setting value display stores data obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) in the storage area for storing setting values. It may be configured to have a storage area and display the setting value by referring to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the sub-control board S is transitioning to the setting change mode is executed.

Next, in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the set/reset button M30 has switched from off to on. If the answer is Yes in step 1112, then in step 1114, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data) (if the setting value (setting value data) exceeds 5 as a result of the addition, the setting value (setting value data) becomes 0) and proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the answer is No in step 1112, then the CPU C100 of the main control board M also proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has switched from off to on. If the answer is No in step 1116, then the CPU C100 proceeds to step 1112 and loops the processing of steps 1112 to 1116. If the answer is Yes in step 1116, then in step 1118 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has switched from on to off. If the answer is No in step 1118, then the CPUC 100 of the main control board M loops through the process of step 1118. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 1118, then in step 1120 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has ended, erases the display of the setting value (setting value data) on the setting display LED (not shown), and proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, the CPUC 100 executes a process to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode has ended.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of unrecoverable error processing related to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in other flowcharts). First, in step 1302, the CPU 100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (from then on, the flowchart related to timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not output to each output port has been completed. If Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and The process repeats execution, and when the power supply voltage decreases, a reset signal is input and the process ends. (In other words, since it enters an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation that prompts a return). Note that if No in step 1310, the process moves to step 1306. Note that the processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is the processing for clearing the output to the LED/motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information regarding the error and the game progress status at the time of the error occurrence are transmitted to the hall computer). ).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes it with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, the winning line, etc.). Note that step 1203 includes data for clearing the data used in the previous game {for example, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} ("0" for clearing the RAM address). It also includes processing to set data) in RAM. Incidentally, the condition device number, performance group number, instruction information, etc. may not be cleared, but may be configured to be overwritten with the selected number when the next game is executed. Next, in step 1204, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, "RT0", etc.) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 of FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the RT state set in step 1204. Note that the process of setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. 27. Further, in step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when transmitting the RT state to the sub-side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the RT state may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming section is an "advantageous section". Next, in step 1206, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the state related to AT in the game (for example, "AT in progress state", etc.) (steps 1420 and 1429 in FIG. 21, step 1435 in FIG. 22, (Set the state regarding the AT determined in steps 1439, 1443, and steps 1444-3 and 1444-4 in FIG. 23). Next, in step 1207, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the state regarding the AT set in step 1206. Further, the process of setting the state regarding the AT may be executed in steps 1416 and 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 in FIG. 23. Further, when transmitting the AT-related status to the sub-side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the AT-related status may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-side only when the gaming section is an "advantageous section". Next, in step 1208, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets the game period (for example, "advantageous period", etc.) in the game (the game period determined in steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal payout device H is not full of game medals. Specifically, it is equipped with a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) that stores medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two fullness detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can penetrate into the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. Judgment is made based on whether the current is conductive or non-conductive (if the current is conductive through the medal, it is determined that the medal is full). If Yes in step 1209, the process moves to step 1218.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to ON). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error on a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal full error has been released (for example, whether the current is not conducted by the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS and the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1218. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC100 of the main control board M permits the insertion of a medal (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the replay role), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1220). Here, in step 1218, the on process of the blocker D100 (the process formed by the medal flow path) is performed. Specifically, if the replay role was established in the previous game, the on process of the blocker D100 is executed on the condition that the current number of accumulated credits is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). In other words, if the current number of accumulated credits is a predetermined value, the on process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, if the replay role was not established in the previous game, the on process of the blocker D100 is executed uniformly. By configuring it in this way, even if a replay role is established, if the number of accumulated credits (credits) has not reached a predetermined value, game medals can be inserted, and the player can play rhythmically (without feeling uncomfortable) even when the player is in an RT state (for example, "RT1") in which the probability of winning a replay role is higher than in RT states such as "RT1", or when a replay role that is difficult to tell from the outside is stopped (a replay disguised as a minor role: a symbol combination of bell-bell-bell on an invalid line or a cherry stopped on the left reel) stops.

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16. First, in step 1220, the CPU C100 of the main control board M judges whether or not game medals have not been bet or saved (no credits exist). If the answer is Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU C100 of the main control board M judges whether or not the setting value display condition is satisfied (for example, the condition is satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all on). If the answer is Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the setting value on the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the payout number display device D270, the credit number display device D200, and the input number display light D210) (transitions to the setting confirmation mode), and transitions to step 1221 on the condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition conditions for the setting change mode are met, a process is executed to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the setting change mode is to be started, and when the termination conditions for the setting change mode are met, a process is executed to send a command to terminate the setting change mode. If the answer is No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes management related to the insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC100 of the main control board M checks the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on or not. If the answer is Yes in step 1226, then in step 1227, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, there are two insertion sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on, it is judged that one game medal has been accepted). If the answer is Yes in step 1227, then in step 1230, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off (when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on and then the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off, it is judged that one accepted game medal has passed through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s). If the answer is Yes in step 1230, then in step 1231 the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that one normal game medal has been inserted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the credits are at the upper limit (50 in this example) and the number of bets is at the maximum (3 in this example), and if the answer is Yes, it controls the blocker D100 to be OFF (a state in which a medal flow path is not formed). If the answer is No in step 1230, the process of step 1230 is repeated, and if the answer is No in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payment button D60 has been operated. If Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of credits or a bet game medal. If Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and Execute the payout of one medal. Next, in step 1236, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in this embodiment, the CPU It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that a payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If YES in step 1236, the process moves to step 1247. Here, although it is not specified on the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay combination, only the remaining number of credits is subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). Specifically, it judges whether the situation in which it is judged that no medals have been dispensed has continued for a predetermined time even though the hopper drive signal is sent to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). If the answer is Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (e.g., updates the medal empty error flag area with a value equivalent to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the medal empty error has been released (e.g., whether the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1245, then in step 1246, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1247. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1245, then proceeds to step 1244.

Next, in step 1247, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (if the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s turns on and then the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s turn off, it is determined that the payout operation of the one game medal that was being paid out has been completed). If the answer is Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If the answer is No in step 1241 or step 1247, the CPUC100 proceeds to step 1236.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the start lever D50 is valid (for example, a specified number of game medals to start the game have been inserted, etc.) and whether the start lever D50 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the answer is Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a process of obtaining a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3600). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. If the answer is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16. First, in step 3600, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU C100 of the main control board M judges whether the current state of the AT is a state in which the AT addition lottery can be executed. Here, in this example, the states of the AT in which the AT addition lottery can be executed are "AT state", "addition special state", "specialized premonition state", and "advantageous BB state", and in "advantageous BB internal play", the AT counter value can be in a state greater than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from being advantageous in "advantageous BB internal play" by deliberately not matching the BB pattern combination. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the AT addition lottery can be executed during "play within advantageous BB". In such a configuration, even if the AT addition lottery is won during "play within advantageous BB", it may not be notified immediately, but rather, when the BB ends, the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won, or the number of remaining AT games after the number of AT games has been added, may be notified.

If the answer is Yes in step 1259, then in step 1500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1259, then the process also proceeds to step 1400. This game number addition execution process can also execute the lottery using different lottery tables depending on the state related to the AT, but it is preferable that the lottery probability does not differ depending on the setting value (the lottery is executed using the same lottery table). Next, in step 1400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the condition device number management process, which will be described later.

Here, the states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram in Figure 30). (1) "Low probability state" is a state in which the AT has not been won (the right to transition to the "AT state" has not been acquired) and the bonus role has not been won. In addition, since the "low probability state" is the so-called "normal state", it is also called the "normal state". (2) "Normal BB internal play" is a state in which the BB role has been won in the "low probability state", the BB role has not been awarded, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) "Normal BB state" is a state that is executed when the pattern combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in a situation in which the BB role has been won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery has not been won, or when the pattern combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "normal BB internal play". (4) "High probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to move to the "AT state" has not been acquired) and the bonus role has not been won, and is a state in which it is easier to win the AT than the above-mentioned "low probability state". In addition, as described later, when a new "high probability state" is entered, it is configured not to enter the "low probability state" until the high securing obstacle game number has passed. (5) "AT state" is a state in which the AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. In addition, even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the continuation lottery described later is won, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the "AT state" continues. (6) "Specialized premonition state" is a state in which the right to move to the "addition specialized state" in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT state" is acquired. (7) "Addition specialized state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT state". (8) "Game during advantageous BB" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state" or "addition specialization state", and the BB role is not a winning combination. (9) "Game during waiting BB" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", and the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not a winning combination. (10) "Advantageous BB state" refers to a state executed when the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state" or "addition specialized state" and a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB internal play", or when the BB role is won in the "low probability state", and the AT lottery is won by the BB role and a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or when a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal play". (12) "Revival possibility performance state" refers to a state related to the AT to which the AT counter value becomes 0 and the continuation lottery described later is not won. In the "revival possibility performance state", the revival lottery described later is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the "AT state" is entered (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and if the revival lottery is not won, the "low probability state" is entered.

Next, in step 1550, the CPUC100 of the main control board M starts the rotation of all reels, as described below, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there has been a request to create a pull-in point (requested to determine the stop positions of the spinning left reel M51, center reel M52, and right reel M53, and requested as appropriate depending on the stop order and the stop positions of other reels). If the answer is Yes in step 1261-1, then in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1261-1, then the CPUC100 also proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the "BB internal game", even if the stop buttons are not stopped in the correct order to pay out 11 coins in a game in which the push order bell is won (for example, in the case of winning-A1, the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of "left → center → right") (when the reels are stopped in an incorrect push order), the reel stop control is configured to win a symbol combination that will pay out 11 coins. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 1264, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1264, the process also proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. If the answer is Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if it does not match the combination that can win a prize determined by the internal lottery, it is judged to be abnormal). In addition, the judgment of whether the combination of the displayed symbols in step 1269 is normal or not is made by judging whether the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is completed normally or not. In a game in which a winning combination is won, when the operation of the stop button is executed in an operation mode in which the winning combination can be won, even if the reel position that actually stopped is not normal (the winning combination determined by the internal lottery is not displayed as stopped from the player's perspective), if the reel stop control is completed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medals based on the winning of the winning combination are paid out. If the answer is Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display judgment error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an irrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 1267, proceed to step 1261-1.

Next, in step 1274, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a process of paying out game medals based on winnings. Next, in step 1275, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a win that pays out game medals {if the game medals acquired by winning exceed the maximum number of credits (50 in this example) In this case, the game medals are paid out. If Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes the payout of one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on (the first dispensing sensor H10s or the second dispensing sensor H20s is on). In this case, it is determined that a payout operation for one game medal is being performed). If YES in step 1277, the process moves to step 1286.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1277, then in step 1279, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of processing step 1276). If the answer is Yes in step 1279, then in step 1280, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (e.g., updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display on the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the medal empty error has been released (e.g., whether the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). If the answer is Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value equivalent to OFF) and proceeds to step 1286. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1282, proceeds to step 1281.

Next, in step 1286, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (after the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s turns on, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s turn off, it judges that the payout operation of one game medal that was being paid out has been completed). If the answer is Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If the answer is No in step 1279 or step 1286, it proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning that is Yes in step 1275) has been completed. If the answer is Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If the answer is No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, if the answer is No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and if the answer is No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

Next, in step 3400, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the RT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the game end process (e.g., clearing the number of bets, transitioning the game state, etc.), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1202).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process related to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery, in which winning numbers and numbers to be compared with the acquired random number are stored) and proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. It is possible to generate winning information for winning and replay from the winning number. In addition, when a bonus and a small role are won in overlapping, or a bonus and a replay role are won in overlapping, it is possible to generate winning information for both winning and replay information and bonus winning information from the winning number. The specific generation process will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers that have the same payout group number and the same number of places to compare with the acquired random number, and is stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M. For example, payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers 4 to 12, and the number of places is the same for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push order replay roles, and the number of places is the same for six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are push order bell roles, so the number of repetitions related to the push order replay role is 3, and the number of repetitions related to the push order bell role is 6. The lottery table used when the winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push order replay roles are obtained and the lottery table used when the winning numbers 7 to 12 that are push order bell roles are obtained are configured as a single lottery table. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains setting value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery was won (whether or not the obtained random number existed in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, so the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1259) without executing determination (lottery) regarding the subsequent internal lottery table address. On the other hand, if No in step 3614, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions in step 3616. Next, in step 3618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. If Yes in step 3618, the process moves to step 3610, and the processes from step 3610 to step 3618 are repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates it to the address related to the next ball group number), moves to step 3604, and returns to step 3604. Execute the following processing. Note that the specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT-related state is "AT in progress", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state". If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game is the winning number that can add up the number of remaining AT games in the AT state. In this example, it is determined whether the ball group number (1, 3 in this example) is related to the replay-B, re-game-C, winning-D. If YES in step 1504, the process moves to step 1514. In addition, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, if the state related to AT is an advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game concerned is the BB medium bonus (" In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add up to the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). Determine. If Yes in step 1512, the process moves to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process moves to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding the AT is the "additional specialization state". If Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the ball group number for the game is a specialization bonus role (in the "addition specialization state", the number of remaining AT games can be added and In the "AT state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a winning group number related to re-play - A, re-play - D1 to D3, winning - A1 to A6) (in this example, 2, 13). If YES in step 1508, the process moves to step 1514. Note that if No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process moves to step 1518.

Next, in step 1514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the winning-time additional game number lottery table and determines the number of AT additional games based on the payout group number related to the game (for example, in the lottery table shown in the margin, it is determined whether the latched random number value falls within any range). In addition, determining the number of AT additional games is also referred to as executing an AT additional lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition to the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined number of AT additional games (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S can recognize whether the AT game number addition has been executed and how many games the additional number is by receiving the command), and proceeds to step 1518. In addition, when the payout group number is 7 to 11, which is the payout group number related to the winning number that includes a bonus (winning number 19 to 27), a lottery for the AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be held.

Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of a lottery table for the number of additional games upon winning. If the bonus combination is won in the AT state, specialization precursor state, specialization specialization state, or advantageous BB state), based on the ball payout group number related to the game, The number of AT add-on games is determined by lottery from 0 to 300, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Note that if "0" is determined, the number of AT remaining games will not increase (if "0" is determined, it may be referred to as not winning the AT additional lottery).

In addition, the average number of AT added games (expected value) when an additional role is won at the time of winning is the value shown in the figure, and a specific calculation method, when the winning role is watermelon A, can be calculated as follows: {number of places placed (600) x number of AT added games (0) + number of places placed (100) x number of AT added games (10) + number of places placed (300) x number of AT added games (30) + number of places placed (24) x number of AT added games (100)} / total number of places placed (1024) = 12.1 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is replay-B or replay-C, {set number (500) x number of AT add-on games (0) + set number (200) x number of AT add-on games (50) + Calculate as follows: Placement number (300) x Number of AT additional games (100) + Placement number (24) x Number of AT addition games (300)}/Total number of placements (1024) = 46.1 (games) be able to.

Next, if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the number of games can be calculated as follows: {Number of places (300) x Number of games added to the AT (10) + Number of places (600) x Number of games added to the AT (30) + Number of places (124) x Number of games added to the AT (50)} / Total number of places (1024) = 26.61 (games). Note that if the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, or Winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only if the AT status is "specialized for adding".

Next, if the winning combination is a weak rare combination in the BB, it can be calculated as follows: {Number of placements (800) x Number of games added to the AT (0) + Number of placements (100) x Number of games added to the AT (10) + Number of placements (100) x Number of games added to the AT (30) + Number of placements (24) x Number of games added to the AT (100)} / Total number of placements (1024) = 6.3 (games).

Next, if the winning combination is a strong rare combination in the BB, it can be calculated as follows: {number of places (300) x number of games added to the AT (0) + number of places (300) x number of games added to the AT (30) + number of places (400) x number of games added to the AT (50) + number of places (24) x number of games added to the AT (300)} / total number of places (1024) = 35.4 (games).

In this embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT addition games is configured to be different depending on the type of winning role, but the average value of the number of AT addition games is configured not to be different depending on the setting value. Here, when the AT addition lottery is executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same processing is executed as the AT addition lottery for the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, a process to determine whether the winning number is 7 or 8 must be executed, but as in this embodiment, by configuring the AT addition lottery to be executed based on the ball output group number, when the same processing is executed as the AT addition lottery for the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, it is possible to execute the processing related to the AT addition lottery for either the winning number 7 or the winning number 8 by simply determining whether the ball output group number is 2.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPU 100 of the main control board M may make a judgment based on the winning number (or winning/replay winning information, ball group number, etc.) related to the game. ) is a winning number related to replay-B (reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which white seven can line up in a straight line on the invalid line by stopping with a reverse push). If Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there was an additional AT game number due to replay B. In other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning replay B is determined. Determine whether it is not 0. If Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and a reverse push ("right → middle → left") to the invalid line. (to execute an effect instructing the player to line up the white sevens), and the process moves to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, other than a reverse push ("right → center → left") (This will instruct the pressing order and execute an effect to prevent white sevens from being aligned on the invalid line), and the process moves to step 1526. It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1518, the process moves to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number (or winning/replay winning information, or ball group number, etc.) related to the game is the replay-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a sequential push black 7 replay, which is a replay in which the black 7 can line up in a straight line with the invalid line by stopping with the sequential push. If Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there was an additional AT game number due to replay-C, in other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning replay-C. Determine whether it is not 0. If Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a sequential push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and presses in the order ("left → middle → right") to line up the invalid line. 1400) is set, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a sequential push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, other than sequential push ("left → middle → right") (This will instruct the pressing order and execute an effect that prevents black sevens from being aligned on the invalid line), and moves on to the next process (the process of step 1400). Note that even in the case of No in step 1526, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). In this embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are sent to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives these commands to prevent the sub-press. Although the control board S side is configured to be able to execute effects related to the push order navigation, the present invention is not limited to this, and when winning the AT additional lottery, it is possible to display the fact that the AT additional lottery has been won and the number of AT additional games. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the process of step 1517) is sent to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side selects the push order navigation. It may also be configured to determine the execution timing and performance mode of the performance related to the performance. As an example, in a game in which replay B is a winning game, the sub-control board S side receives the command (a game with an additional number of AT games), and selects an effect mode that instructs a reverse push. Alternatively, in the game in which the sub-control board S side receives the command, the effect instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions (for example, a specific replay combination (e.g., replay) It may be configured to execute an effect that instructs the pressing order in which a set of 7 is possible on the invalid line in a game that satisfies the condition (game-B or C) won. Or, in a game in which replay B is a winning game and the sub-control board S side receives the above command (a game with an additional number of AT games), the effect that instructs the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (continuous performances may be performed at the same time, in which case, the final game of the continuous performance) is satisfied, the AT game number additional performance (displayed on the performance display device S40) This is an effect in which the display related to the number of remaining AT games increases, for example, "+30G" may be executed.In addition, in this example, the effect display device S40 also displays an increase in the number of AT remaining games. The display is configured to display such a display, and the display and the number of AT remaining games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different. In the game in which B won and the sub-control board S side received the above command (a game with an additional number of AT games), the performance that instructs a reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. An example of a case where an AT game number addition effect is executed in a game is when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) to encourage winning of a bonus is executed on the sub-control board S side (within the bonus In this case, the winning probability of replay-B is low (including 0%), so if the pressing order in which a set of 7 is possible is announced, the player will realize that the bonus has not been won). An example is when the board S side is executing a special performance.In addition, the sub control board S side determines that the main control board M side has won the AT add-on lottery and the number of AT remaining games has been added. The information includes: (1) Information regarding the number of AT remaining games is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side after the AT additional lottery.Then, on the sub-control board S side, information regarding the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time is transmitted. (2) Calculate the difference between the information about the number of AT additional games and the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time, and grasp the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery. A command related to the number of AT add-on games received is sent to the sub-control board S side.In addition, if the AT add-on lottery is not won, a command related to the fact that the AT add-on lottery was not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. It may be configured such that when the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side determines the performance mode of the performance related to the push order navigation. In the winning game, in which the command was received on the sub-control board S side (game in which the number of AT games was not added), press the middle button (operate the middle stop button as the first stop, and press the middle button) It may also be configured to select and execute a performance mode that instructs the user to press the order of avoidance. Although the AT additional lottery was executed on the main control board M side, the information for the sub-control board S to determine that there was no additional AT remaining game number is (1) information regarding the AT remaining number of games. After the AT addition lottery, it is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. After that, the sub-control board S side calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time and the information regarding the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time, and grasps the number of AT additional games won in the AT additional lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information about the number of AT remaining games sent this time from the information about the number of AT remaining games sent last time is 1, it is determined that the AT additional lottery was not won), (2) Main control board A command regarding the fact that the number of AT add-on games is 0 as a result of the AT add-on lottery on the M side is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first page) of AT state transition control processing related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a state regarding the AT that can execute the AT lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, the only state regarding AT that can execute AT lottery is "high probability state", and by winning BB in "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game" After that, when the BB role wins, the state shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, the state shifts to the "AT in progress state", and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. The value 50 times will be set. Incidentally, even if the player wins the BB in the "low probability state", the game moves to the "normal BB internal game" and does not shift to the "AT state" thereafter. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that when a BB is won in the "normal gaming state", the AT lottery can be won using the BB combination as an opportunity. In such a configuration, if you win BB in the "normal gaming state" and win the AT lottery triggered by the BB role, you will be transferred to the "advantageous BB internal game" and then win the BB. By aligning them, you will move to an "advantageous BB state". In addition, in the internal state where the BB is won in the "normal gaming state" and the BBs are not lined up, the gaming section may be set as the "advantageous section" or may be set as the "standby section". If Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is the AT lottery winning combination (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB winning combination with no setting difference). Species BB-C). In addition, in this embodiment, the winning numbers of BB with no setting difference alone (winning numbers 19, 24) and the winning numbers of BB with no setting difference and the same small role (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27) Both are AT lottery roles. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to "advantageous BB internal medium game", and proceeds to step 1410. Also, if No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process moves to step 1410. Note that in this embodiment, the AT winning rate (can win or not) in the AT lottery is configured to differ when the AT-related states are different; however, when the AT-related states are the same, Even if the setting values are different, the AT winning rate for the AT lottery is the same (if you win BB in the "high probability state", you will always win AT regardless of the setting value = then " (transfers to "AT in progress state").

Next, in step 1410, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state regarding AT for the next game or later has not been determined. If Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a "low probability state". If Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is a state promotion win (a small number that can move from a "low probability state" to a "high probability state" by winning). It is determined whether the winning hand is a winning combination (in this example, a cherry). If Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPU 100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and there is no problem in changing it as long as it does not differ depending on the setting value). A high probability state transition lottery is executed. Next, in step 1418, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. If YES in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onwards to be the "high probability state", and proceeds to step 1430.

Further, if No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a "high probability state". If Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the high guarantee fault counter KHc is 1 (this is the final high guarantee fault game, and it is the 10th game after entering the "high probability state"). ). If Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPU 100 of the main control board M:
Determine whether the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state related to AT is a "high probability state", the game section is an "advantageous section", and when the game section is an "advantageous section", the pressing order The configuration is such that the "advantageous section" does not end unless the navigation is executed one or more times or the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) (i.e., Even if you win the low probability state transition lottery, if the low probability transition conditions are not met because the push order navigation has not been executed at least once, etc., the "high probability state" is configured not to end. ). In addition, if the BB role is won during the "advantageous section" and you execute BB, you can play the "advantageous section" at any timing even if you have not executed the push order navigation even once during the "advantageous section". It may be configured such that it can be terminated. If YES in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to be a "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low probability transition condition is satisfied by executing the push order navigation once. In addition, as the push order winnings (winning numbers that win different prizes depending on the order in which the reels stop and the player's profit rate differs), there are two types of winning numbers: a winning number with a maximum payout of 8 coins and a winning number with a maximum payout of 11 coins. In this case, the low probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation for a winning combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 pieces has been executed once. Note that the process also moves to step 1430 in the case of No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428. In this way, in this embodiment, when a new transition is made to the "high probability state", 10 games, which are high probability probability games, are set to the high probability probability counter KHc, and the counter value is kept at 0 until the counter value becomes 0. is configured so as not to transition to a "low probability state". Note that such a lottery method is just an example; for example, the lottery for transitioning to a low probability state is not executed for 10 games after transitioning to a "high probability state" (staying in a "high probability state" is guaranteed). ), it may be configured to perform a lottery to shift from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" at a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in every game after the 10 games have passed. Note that the AT lottery winnings (low-probability AT lottery winnings, high-probability AT lottery winnings) and status promotion winning combinations have the same probability of winning for all set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT-related state is "AT in progress" or not. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in this embodiment, when the AT-related state is "AT in progress" and the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, Watermelon B You can acquire the right to transition to the "additional specialization state" with a probability of 1/2 of winning the "specialization precursor state", but if the AT-related state is "AT in progress" , the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if you win Watermelon B, there will be a lottery (specialized (also referred to as a state transition lottery) is not executed, and the state is configured not to shift to the "specialization precursor state" or the "additional specialization state." However, this is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, there will be a lottery where you can win Watermelon B and gain the right to transition to the "additional specialization state" (also known as the specialization state transition lottery). It is also possible to configure the system so that it is possible to execute ``additional specialization state'' by winning watermelon B in a situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less. If a person wins a lottery to obtain a lottery, the configuration may be such that the state can be (transferred to) a "specialization precursor state" or an "additional specialization state" from the next game in which the lottery is won, or the AT counter value It may be configured so that it can become (transfer to) a "precursor state of specialization" or "additional specialization state" when it reaches a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), and the game that won the lottery may It may be configured such that after a predetermined number of games have been played, the game can enter (or transition to) a "precursor specialization state" or an "additional specialization state." In addition, when transitioning to the "additional specialization state", it is not necessarily necessary to go through the "specialization precursor state"; for example, the configuration is such that it is possible to directly transition from the "AT in progress state" to the "additional specialization state". You may. If Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a specialization transition role (a small number that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transition to an "additional specialization state"). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is Watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a specialized state transition lottery in which the lottery has a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2) of winning. Next, in step 1434, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. If YES in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT in the next game and subsequent games to be the "specialization precursor state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, it is the final AT game) in step 1436. judge. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery in which the lottery is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 2/3). Next, in step 1438, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and moves to step 1444-1 (defines the conditions for AT state transition. In order to satisfy this requirement, the AT initial number of games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT in the next game and subsequent games to be the "resurrection possibility state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434, or step 1436, the process moves to step 1444-1. As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set in the AT counter M60 again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not considered, the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. Note that the execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the last AT game, but for example, the first AT game (the first game in which the AT state is newly entered, or after the initial value is set to the AT counter M60). The continuous lottery may be executed in the first game). With such a configuration, it has already been determined in the "AT in progress" whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT will continue). , the performance during AT can be made different depending on whether you have won the continuous lottery or not. For example, if you have won the continuous lottery, the counter value of the AT counter M60 It is possible to change the BGM (playing a song, etc.) in a situation where is 1 or more (during AT execution), or to perform an effect that makes it certain that the player has won the continuous lottery.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third page) of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding the AT is a state for displaying whether or not it is possible to recover. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is a resurrection role (by winning in the “resurrection possibility state”), the CPU 100 of the main control board M It is determined whether the winning combination is a winning combination that can transition to the "AT state" (in other words, a winning combination that can bring back AT). Here, in this embodiment, the resurrection role is a role that includes any of Watermelon A, Watermelon B, Cherry, and a bonus role (only the BB role without setting difference, not including the BB role with setting difference). , and when the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection hand, it is called winning the resurrection lottery. If Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and proceeds to step 1445. Here, in order to satisfy the conditions for enabling transition to the AT state, the AT initial number of games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to be a "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1445. Incidentally, even if the answer is No in step 1441-1, the process moves to step 1445. In this way, in the present embodiment, even if it is the final AT game and the player is not selected for the continuation lottery, the system transitions to the "resurrection possibility state" and is revived in the "resurrection possibility state". If the player wins the lottery, the game is configured to shift to the "AT state" from the next game. In addition, although the "Restoration possibility state" is set to "Advantageous section", AT-related lottery (AT additional lottery, continuation lottery, etc.) in "AT status" is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. The manner in which the AT-related lottery is executed is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "restoration possibility state".

Next, in step 1445, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state of the AT from the next game onwards has not been determined. If the answer is Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the transition condition for the state of the AT has been met (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, this is met when the premonition game number of 10 games has been played in the "specialized premonition state"). If the answer is Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT from the next game onwards and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, when the premonition game number has been played in the "specialized premonition state", the "addition specialization state" is determined). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the CPU C100 also proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a high probability counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub side, the current high probability counter value, in other words, a command related to the remaining number of games for which a high probability state is guaranteed), and proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT from the next game onwards is determined to be "playing inside advantageous BB". If the answer is Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high probability counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1450). Note that if the answer is No in step 1499-1, the process also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1450).

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if you win the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) in the "low probability state", you will win the AT transfer lottery. On the other hand, if you win the BB role (BB role with no setting difference) in the "high probability state", you will win the AT transition lottery (then do not shift to the "AT state").
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery winning combination, and the state related to AT, which is an “advantageous section”, is “high probability state A”. and "high probability state B", if condition device A wins in "high probability state A", the AT transfer lottery is won at 1/10, and "high probability state B" is selected. It may be configured such that if the condition device A is won in , the AT transition lottery is won at 1/2. In addition, if you win the AT transition lottery, the AT-related state will transition to the "AT preparation state" which is a preparatory state until the transition to the "AT in progress state", and then the predetermined end condition (for example, "AT preparation state") will be entered. It may be configured such that when the condition (10 games have elapsed since the transition to the "AT state") is satisfied, the transition is made to the "AT in progress state."

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process related to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current play area is a "favorable area". If the answer is Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the winning/replay winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, a command related to the winning/replay winning information related to the game). Next, in step 1454, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game is a role with push order (a condition device in which the role that wins varies depending on the push order, for example, Win-A1, etc.). If the answer is Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the instruction number (also called the push order number) in the game based on the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and stores the instruction number in a RAM address for storing the instruction number (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the push order, and in this example, the main control board M determines it and transmits it to the sub-control board S (details will be described later). In addition, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. The instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number is initialized based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. When the push order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (e.g., AX) dedicated to the push order guessing game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (see FIG. 34 for the display image of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458, and proceeds to step 1472 (see FIG. 34 for the display image of the push order navigation display on the sub control board side). In this example, the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 display the reel stop order that will be the most profitable for the player, which is referred to as push order navigation, displaying the push order navigation display, etc. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number, and for example, the push order of "left → center → right" is configured to be displayed as "=1" on the push order display device D270, and is configured to be displayed as "=1" in both the push order bell and the push order replay. However, without being limited to this, the display mode may be different when the push order navigation "left → center → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270 in a game related to push order bells and when the push order navigation "left → center → right" is displayed on the push order display device D270 in a game related to push order replay. In other words, the number of types of display modes of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be configured to be the same as the number of types of winning/replay winning information.

Further, if No in step 1451 or step 1454, in step 1468, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs mask processing on the winning/replay winning information of the game, and transfers the masked information to a predetermined address in the RAM. to be memorized. Here, if winning/re-play winning information related to the game is sent to the sub-control board S side, and if the winning/re-play winning information is recognized due to fraudulent acts, the high profits related to the game will be lost. This means that the pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, after masking the winning/replay winning information related to the game (processing to make winning/replay winning information (particularly information related to the pressing order) confidential), the sub control board S By configuring the system to send the data to the user, the system is configured so that high-profit press orders cannot be recognized. In addition, as a method of mask processing in this embodiment, a plurality of winning/replay winning information (winning/replay winning information having a similar role is preferable; for example, the RT state changes depending on the order of pressing. Multiple pieces of winning/re-play winning information in which symbol combinations that become re-gaming roles can be stopped and displayed) are set as one performance group number (for example, winning/re-play winning information 4 to 6 are set to performance group 4), and the performance is The configuration is such that the group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this, and for example, after the winning/re-play winning information (in this example, 0 to 18) that has been provided, a new winning/re-play after mask processing is performed. It may be configured to provide winning information. In addition, even in such cases, multiple winning/re-play winning information such as performance group number among existing winning/re-play winning information can be treated as one winning/re-play winning information after mask processing. It is desirable to configure the system so that game winning information is provided (for example, the winning/replay winning information 4 to 6 is combined with the winning/replay winning information 19 (newly provided winning/replay winning information) which is the winning/replay winning information after mask processing.・Re-play winning information), etc.). Furthermore, if it is determined that the game is a game that notifies operation information (push order navigation) based on the state of AT on the main control board M, winning/replay winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S, In a game that does not notify operation information, the performance group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. When configured in this way, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., sets in a register area) a command (a command to the sub side) related to the performance group number after executing the mask process, and proceeds to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (e.g., sets in a register area) a command (a command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (which allows the sub side to recognize whether or not a bonus has been won), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1550). Note that in this embodiment, the system is configured to derive the prize/replay winning information and the bonus winning information from the winning number, and the method of derivation will be described later. Also, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of push order navigation display are configured as follows in the case of "AT in progress state": (1) if a fall replay role is included → navigate to a push order that does not stop and display the fall replay role, (2) if a bell (1 coin role or 11 coin role) → navigate to a push order that will pay out the most coins, etc. In this way, in this embodiment, when the play area is an "advantageous area", it is configured to be able to transmit winning/replay winning information (a number that can identify the type of winning role and the most advantageous push order for the player) and instruction number (a number that can identify the most advantageous push order for the player) to the sub-control board S side, while when the play area is a "normal area", it is configured to be able to transmit a performance group number (a number that can identify only the outline of the winning role) to the sub-control board S side. That is, in the "advantageous zone", the winning information for the game, including winning information for winning and replay in which the game outcome and the player's profit differ depending on the push order, can be sent directly to the sub-control board S, whereas in a game zone that is not the "advantageous zone", the winning information for the game is not sent, and in the case of winning information for winning and replay in which the game outcome and the player's profit differ depending on the push order, a performance group number that conceals the information regarding the push order is sent to the sub-control board S.

When the play area is not a "favorable area", etc., the main control board M is configured to execute a mask process to determine the performance group number when sending the winning/replay winning information determined by the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and to send the performance group number to the sub-control board S. The performance group number is a number that is assigned to the winning/replay winning information related to winning roles that play similar roles (for example, replay roles that include a falling replay role, push order bell, etc.) by grouping the winning/replay winning information related to the game and assigning a number to it. By executing a mask process (a process that keeps the winning/replay winning information (especially information related to the push order) secret) on the winning/replay winning information related to the game before sending it to the sub-control board S, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the winning/replay winning information is recognized through fraudulent acts and a highly profitable push order (reel stop order) related to the game is recognized.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0 or not. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is the time (in this example, 4.1 seconds) that should be ensured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). This is a timer that measures the If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the push order related to the finished game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the stopped reels and the request to create a draw point for the finished game. Next, in step 1560, the CPU 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data related to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request during standby for the start of reel rotation for the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command for the game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1260). In other words, the processing in steps 1562 and 1564 makes it possible to send a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reels will start rotating.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming section is an "advantageous section". Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the gaming sections, and is a gaming situation that is advantageous for the player, such as when the AT-related state is "AT in progress". This is a game section that is easy to set. If Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays a counter YKc-1 for the number of games remaining in the advantageous section (which is a decrement counter and is initially set to 1500, which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the "advantageous section"). The counter value (a counter that is set as a value and can be subtracted every game in a period that is an "advantageous section") is subtracted by 1.

Next, in step 3408, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state regarding AT is the "AT in progress state". If YES in step 3408, the CPU 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value in step 3410. Next, in step 3412, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to AT is a high probability state. If Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPU 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1700). Note that even in the case of No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1700). As described above, in this embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push order navigation is "AT in progress", the AT counter value is decremented every game, but "advantageous BB state", " In the case of "advantageous BB internal medium game", "specialization precursor state", or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is configured not to be subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, if the AT counter value remains (1 or more remains) and the transition is made from the "AT in progress state" to the "specialization precursor state", the "AT in progress state" is entered while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured so that it can transition (transition) from "state" → "specialization precursor state" → "additional specialization state". Incidentally, even if the state related to AT is "AT in progress", it is possible to prevent the AT counter value from being decremented by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is displayed so as to be subtracted. It may be controlled. For example, if the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", and a game is executed and a bonus is won, the AT counter value will be "30". , or store "30+α" which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained from the AT add-on lottery related to the game, but when the start lever D50 is operated, it is displayed on the effect display device S40. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained from the AT additional lottery (in addition, "α" obtained from the additional AT lottery is , "α" in a specific game after the game (games that meet the predetermined conditions at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the bonus game ends) without being notified in the game. may be notified). Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the performance display device S40 is subtracted by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal medium game", and a performance suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It is possible to configure the AT remaining game number to be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, even if the player wins a bonus in a state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as in the "AT state", it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing that the bonus has been won. That is, after a winning number including a bonus combination is determined, a continuous performance over a plurality of games that stimulates whether or not a bonus has been won can be executed using the performance display device S40 or the like, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, after the bonus game ends, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", or if the result of the AT add-on lottery is won and the result of the add-on is announced, it is a value of "30" or more. can be controlled to display. In addition, if a game is executed and a bonus is won when the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1," the bonus will be displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games will be "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous performance over multiple games will be performed to incite whether or not you have won the bonus, and the AT counter value will be "1". , a winning number (or winning/replay winning information, or ball group number) that allows a game to be executed and an AT additional lottery to be executed when the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1" is won and the AT additional lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes "0". Further, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the probability of executing the continuous performance may be set lower (including 0%) than when the AT remaining number of games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the RT state transition condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in this embodiment, the RT state transition condition is configured to be satisfied by the execution of RAM clear (initialization of RAM), the stop display of replay (in this example, the stop display of replay 04), and the winning, starting, and ending of BB. If the answer is Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the RT state transition is possible and the RT state from the next game onwards based on the satisfied RT state transition condition (see the RT state transition diagram in FIG. 28), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1750). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1750). In this embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels have stopped, but when transitioning to "RT1", the transition timing may be when the lever is turned on. The timing of transitioning to the RT state (storing the RT number in RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are four RT states: "RT0" to "RT2" and "Type 1 BB-A, B, C", and by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure, the RT state can be changed. will be transferred. As a specific example of transition of the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when re-gaming 04 is displayed as stopped, the state shifts to "RT0". Specifically, when replay 04 is displayed as stopped, if you win "Replay D1" in a situation where the RT status is "RT1" and operate the left stop button as the first stop. , regames 01 to 03 are displayed as stopped, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if you win "Regame-D1" in a situation where the RT status is "RT1" and you operate the middle stop button or right stop button as the first stop, replay 04 will be stopped and displayed. , the RT state shifts from "RT1" to "RT0".

Also, if the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", and you win the BB role, but do not win the BB role in the game in which you won (the condition device related to Type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the RT state will transition to "RT2". Also, if you win the BB role in "RT2" (Type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated), the state will transition to "Type 1 BB-A, B, C". Also, if BB ends in "Type 1 BB-A, B, C" (the activation of Type 1 BB-A, B, C ends), the state will transition to "RT1". Furthermore, when the BB is won when the AT state is a "low probability state" and the BB ends, the RT state will transition to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player. However, since the AT state is a state in which push order navigation does not occur, when "Replay-D1 to D3" is won, if the reels are stopped in an incorrect push order (the first stop is one of three options: left button, middle button, and right button, and one of the three options is the correct push order, so replays other than Replay 04 are displayed as stopped, and two of the three options are incorrect push orders, so Replay 04 is displayed as stopped), the reels will be displayed as stopped, and the replay will transition from "RT1" to "RT0". Furthermore, if the AT state is a "high probability state," "AT state," "specialized precursor state," or "addition specialized state," and BB is won, when BB ends, the RT state will transition to "RT1," which is highly profitable for the player, and since the AT state is a state in which push order navigation occurs, even if "Replay-D1 to D3" is won, Replay 04 will navigate you to the correct push order that does not display a stop, so "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process related to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the AT state transition possible condition is satisfied in the game. The AT state transition possible condition is satisfied, for example, when (1) the BB without setting difference that was won in the "high probability state" ends, (2) the continuation lottery is won, or (3) the revival lottery is won. If the answer is Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the AT initial game number (50 in this example, the number of games that starts to be subtracted after the transition to the "AT state") in the AT counter M60, triggered by the new transition to the "AT precursor state", and proceeds to step 1756. If the answer is No in step 1752, the CPUC100 also proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current AT state is not a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the AT state for the next game is a high probability state. If the answer is Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the number of high probability games (10 in this example) in the high probability counter and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3500). Note that even if the answer is No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (processing of step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and transitioning to "game inside advantageous BB", if the BB is won and the state transitions to the "advantageous BB state", and the number of AT games is added in the "advantageous BB state", when the BB ends and the state transitions from the "advantageous BB state" to the "AT in progress state", the initial value set in the AT counter will exceed 50. Specifically, if the number of AT games is added by 30 in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state transitions to the "AT in progress state", the AT counter will be set to 80 (initial value 50 + added 30). In this case, when a performance is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", it is desirable to inform the player that the initial number of AT games is 80 games at the start of the "AT state", but as another notification method, it is possible to consider a notification method in which, instead of performing a performance to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", a performance is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT state" or when the number of remaining AT games in the performance display device S40 is small), after presenting the player with the initial value of 50 games at the start of the "AT state". By doing this, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the AT game number has been added in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games have been added, so that the interest in the addition performance that suddenly occurs for an unknown reason during the AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur) can be increased. In this example, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the AT initial game number is not limited to that of this example, and the AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process of step 1400 described above. Also, the number of games (AT initial game number) set in the AT counter M60 is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game after the BB ends (the state related to the AT becomes "AT in progress state") (subtraction does not start during the BB). Also, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the memory area of the RAM of the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are 10 AT-related states, including "low probability state", "playing in normal BB", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state", "addition specialization state", "playing in favorable BB", "favorable BB state", and "state for revival possibility performance". The AT-related state will transition by satisfying the conditions shown by the arrows in the figure. For example, if you win watermelon B in the "AT state" and win the specialized state transition lottery with a 1/2 chance of winning, you will transition to the "specialized premonition state". In addition, if 10 games have passed (consumed) since transitioning to the "specialized premonition state", you will transition to the "addition specialization state". In addition, as for the game zone, the three AT-related states of "low probability state", "playing in normal BB", and "normal BB state" are set to the "normal zone", and the seven AT-related states of "high probability state", "AT state", "specialized premonition state", "addition specialization state", "playing in favorable BB", "favorable BB state", and "state for revival possibility performance" are set to the "favorable zone". In other words, even if the state of the seven ATs that are "favorable zones" has transitioned (shifted), if 1500 games have passed without being set to the "normal zone", the "favorable zone" will be forcibly ended and set to the "normal zone". In addition, when the push order navigation is displayed in the "AT state", "specialized premonition state", or "addition specialization state", which are the notification game states, the game state is maintained even if replay 04 is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the case of the "AT state", if the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 and the continuous lottery has not been won, the state becomes the "restoration possibility state". If you win the resurrection lottery in the ``resurrection availability state'', you can return to the ``AT state'' again. On the other hand, if the player does not win the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", the state shifts to the "low probability state" and changes from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section".

If you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the "high probability state", the BB with no setting difference activates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the "AT in progress state" ”. Also, if you win a BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-C) in the "AT state", the BB with no setting difference is activated, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the " Shifts to "AT in progress state". In addition, when you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-C) in the ``resurrection possibility state'', BB with no setting difference activates, and the ``advantageous BB state'' ends. will also transition to the "AT state" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, if you win the BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) in the "resurrection possibility state", the BB with setting difference activates, and the "advantageous BB state" ends, the BB with setting difference will be played alone. If the winning number (winning number 20) is related to the BB role of If the winning number overlaps with the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), it will be in the "AT state" after the BB ends (because the rare winning combination will be used as an opportunity to win the revival lottery).

In addition, if you are in the "advantageous zone" and in the "high probability state", you will win a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), and when the BB with setting difference is activated and the "advantageous BB state" ends, you will transition to the "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to the AT to which it transitions after the end of the "favorable BB state" is the "AT state", "specialized precursor state", or "add-on specialized state" which is the state related to the AT when the BB is won, after the end of a BB won during the AT ("AT state", "specialized precursor state", "add-on specialized state") (either a BB with a setting difference or a BB without a setting difference), and after the end of a BB without a setting difference won during a non-AT ("high probability state"), it transitions to the "AT state". In addition, after the end of a BB with a setting difference won during a non-AT ("high probability state"), it transitions to the "high probability state".

Note that the state related to AT is not limited to that of this embodiment, and for example, an AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in a "low probability state" or "high probability state", and the AT lottery is executed. It may be configured such that the player enters the "precursor state" by winning a game, and then shifts to the "AT state" after 16 to 32 games have passed, and in such a case, if the predetermined condition device is met. If you win, an AT lottery will be executed, and if you do not win the AT lottery, you will enter a "fake precursor state", and after 16 to 32 games, you will enter a "low probability state" or a "high probability state". It may be configured to do so. In addition, a "standby section" that is different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided as a game section. For example, if the AT lottery is executed by winning a "cherry", the BB If "BB+Cherry" with duplicate cherries is won and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until "BB" of "BB+Cherry" is won is a "standby section". It's okay. In this way, by providing a "waiting section," there are cases where a player wins BB in the "low probability state" and does not win the AT lottery, and a case where a player wins the BB in the "low probability state" and is AT lottery. In the case of winning the AT lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH is off during the period until the BB symbol combination is completed (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), so if you win the AT lottery. It is possible to incite the player as to whether or not there is a player. In addition, if a BB is won in the "additional specialization state", the "additional specialization state" may be restarted after the end of the BB, and in such a case, during the BB As the BB that won in the "addition specialization state", execute an AT additional lottery that is different from the BB that won in the "AT state" (for example, win the AT additional lottery than the BB that won in the "AT state") It may be configured such that it is easy to play, and the number of games per AT game addition is relatively large. In addition, if a BB is won in the "specialization precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialization state" after the end of the BB, and in such a case, during the BB It may also be configured such that an AT additional lottery is executed in the same way as for the winning BB in the “add-on specialization state”.

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game zone transition control process related to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in this embodiment, there is a game zone as a zone related to the game state, and there are two game zones, a "normal zone" that is relatively less profitable for the player, and a "profitable zone" that is relatively more profitable for the player. To explain the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the game zone related to the game is a "normal zone". If the answer is Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the game zone for the next game onwards as a game zone corresponding to the current AT state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3508, in other words, if the game zone is a "favorable zone", in step 3514, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0 or not, in other words, whether the "favorable zone" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. If the answer is Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (thereby, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of games stayed in the "specialized premonition state" also becomes 0). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M judges whether any favorable zone end condition is not satisfied. Here, any favorable zone end condition is an end condition of the "favorable zone" other than when the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, for example, when the AT counter value becomes 0 or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If the answer is No in step 3518, that is, if any favorable zone end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515. In this manner, in this embodiment, when the "favorable zone" ends and the "normal zone" is set after the next game, all information related to the AT (information related to the number of AT continuation games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) is cleared, so that the conditions for the "favorable zone" to be entered again in the "normal zone" thereafter will not be relaxed. Note that the information related to the AT that is cleared by the process of step 3515 (processing at the end of the favorable zone) includes the counter value of the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the game state, etc. In addition, these pieces of information are also cleared by clearing the RAM when changing the setting, but depending on the RAM clearing at the time of changing the setting, information related to the "condition device related to the continuous operation device of the role (BB)", "RT state", "number of reserved sheets", etc. is also cleared, whereas depending on the process of step 3515 (processing at the end of the favorable zone), information related to the "condition device related to the continuous operation device of the role (BB)", "RT state", "number of reserved sheets", etc. is not cleared. In this way, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the settings and the clear range at the end of the "advantageous zone" (for example, when the processing of step 3515 is executed) are different. It is also possible to configure the RAM clear at the time of changing the settings to hold the "condition device related to the continuous operation device of the role (BB)" and the "RT state". In addition, the addresses of the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous zone" are continuous. By making the addresses of the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous zone" continuous in this way, it is possible to clear it by a simple process of specifying the top address to be cleared during the clearing process and the range of addresses to be cleared. In addition, when the "advantageous zone" ends, a command to the effect that the "advantageous zone" has ended is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S receives this command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous zone" or information related to how many games have been played in the "AT state". However, when the RAM clear is executed at the time of changing the settings, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous zone" or information related to how many games have been played in the "AT state" on the sub-control board S side will also be erased.

In addition, if the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section counter YKc-1 becomes 0, (1) if the current state regarding AT is "high probability state"; (2) If the current state regarding AT is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the state regarding AT will be "low probability state" in the next game. (3) If the current AT-related state is "Advantageous BB state," the AT-related state will become "Normal BB state" in the next game. (4) Current If the AT-related state is "AT in progress", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", or "resurrection possibility state", in the next game the AT-related state will be "low probability state". state" (because information related to the AT is cleared).

Next, in step 3516, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets the game zone for the next game onwards to the "normal zone". Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous zone indicator YH because the "advantageous zone" has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. Note that the advantageous zone indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the "advantageous zone" ends and is set to the "normal zone", but the detailed timing of turning it off is not limited to the timing of this embodiment, and for example, the advantageous zone indicator YH may be configured to be turned off when a game medal is inserted for a game in which the "advantageous zone" ends and becomes the "normal zone". In other words, it is sufficient that the advantageous zone indicator YH is configured to be turned off before the start lever D50, which allows the next game to be started, is operated. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game zone for the next game onwards to be the "advantageous zone", and proceeds to step 3528.

Next, in step 3528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether it has been decided to set a new "favorable zone" in the next game (whether it has been decided to set the "favorable zone" from the "normal zone"). If the answer is Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value to the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set to the favorable zone remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the favorable zone indicator YH and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293). If the answer is No in step 3528, the CPU C100 also proceeds to the next process (processing of step 1293). In this embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous zone indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous zone indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting timing of the advantageous zone indicator YH may be appropriately set in the period from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous zone" (the game in the "normal zone") to the timing when it becomes possible to insert game medals in the game that will become the new "advantageous zone" (if the game before the new "advantageous zone" was a game related to replay, to the timing when the operation of the start lever in the game that will become the new "advantageous zone" becomes effective).

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for the subroutine of step 1600 in this embodiment. The processing of this subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is configured to be executed periodically thereafter at a predetermined time interval (T in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC 100, checking the input port of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt processing). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process, which will be described later. On the other hand, if YES in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software) in step 1606. Next, in step 1608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the payment button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, and first input sensor. D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (In other words, the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T. ).

Next, in step 1610, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on/off the door switch flag and setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. switching (for example, if the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over multiple samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU will be in the open state without being affected by noise) ). Next, in step 6100, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs a reel drive control process (a process related to controlling the drive of the reel M50) for all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and details will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0 or not. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU 100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that even if the answer in step 1612 is No, the process moves to step 1614. Note that if the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (although not shown, the inserted medal backflow error flag, the inserted number of medals error flag, the inserted medal retention error flag, the inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether flags related to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, etc. are all off). If Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error-undetected command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that no error has been detected) (for example, a register (set within the area), and the process moves to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, which indicates that an error has been detected) (for example, (set in the register area), and the process moves to step 1622. In step 1620, the configuration is such that information regarding the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the error state (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), or when the error is not detected, the It is not necessary to perform the information setting process (step 1618 may not be necessary). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from a state where the first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as a second error (for example, a paid-out medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPU 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control commands will be sent). Here, the commands sent to the sub-control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (sent when the stop button is operated as the first stop) Commands related to the second reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), Commands related to the third reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the third stop) (sent immediately after operation), commands related to the stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), commands related to stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), winning/return Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever), commands related to RT status (sent when all reels are Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels stop and when the next game starts); High security failure counter value command (sent immediately after operating the start lever), command related to the number of remaining AT games (from when all reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after operating the start lever) (transmitted), commands related to the game section (transmitted from the time all reels stop until the next game starts), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Although not shown, the information related to the error outputted by the external signal includes a door opening error, a loading abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a loading reception sensor retention error, and the like. Note that the door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the input reception sensor retention error occurs when the input reception sensor detects that game medals are retained. is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPU 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, lights up a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and A predetermined segment of the segment is lit (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (updating processing of random numbers managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is not set) Determine. If YES in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt termination processing in step 1638, and moves to the next processing (the processing in step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned unrecoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating drum drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 in FIG. 32 in this embodiment. Note that in this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it should be noted that processes corresponding to each of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 are executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6102, the process also moves to step 6106.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing when the reel rotation start standby state ends and the execution of reel acceleration processing starts, for example, in step 1260 of FIG. 18). It is determined whether the processing execution timing has been reached. If Yes in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6108. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel acceleration processing, and proceeds to step 6112. Note that if the reels are stopped, the reels will start rotating through this process. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6106, the process moves to step 6112.

Next, in step 6112, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel acceleration state. If the answer is Yes in step 6112, then in step 6114, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the end timing of the reel acceleration state has been reached (for example, the timing when all interrupt processes have been executed for the "interrupt execution count" in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described below). If the answer is Yes in step 6114, then in step 6116, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintenance process and proceeds to step 6120. Note that if the answer is No in step 6112 or step 6114, the process also proceeds to step 6120.

Next, in step 6120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel constant speed state. If the answer is Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the reel sensor has detected an index provided on the reel (the reel corresponding to the processing of this subroutine) since the reel has entered the constant speed state (after the processing of step 6116 has been executed). Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one index (it may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side of the reel, and is used to detect whether the reel has passed a predetermined position or has made one rotation. Each index is detected by the reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (turns off) an index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is configured to detect that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If the answer is Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) has elapsed since the reel drive state became the reel constant speed state. If the answer is No in step 6124, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. In this way, in this example, it is configured to be possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed has become normally constant by the reel sensor detecting the index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. In this example, the predetermined time is the time it takes to execute 400 interrupt processes (configured so that 400 interrupt processes can rotate 400 steps), which is longer than the time it takes for the reel to rotate once (one revolution) when the reel rotation speed is constant (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the time it takes to execute the interrupt process 336 times). By configuring it in this way, no matter how far the distance between the index and the reel sensor is at the time when the reel drive state becomes constant speed (the distance from when the reel rotates until the index is detected by the reel sensor), if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor is configured to detect the index within the predetermined time (the time it takes to execute the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes constant speed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state in step 6126. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel reacceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, , the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that even in the case of No in step 6120, the process proceeds to step 6130. Note that the reel reacceleration processing does not have to be the same as the reel acceleration processing described above, and the reel reacceleration processing and the reel acceleration processing can be used to perform interrupt processing for each combination of excitation phases of the stepping motor and for each combination of excitation phases. The number of executions may be made different.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 in FIG. 32 in this embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the reel deceleration standby state start timing (this is the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends; for example, when the stop button is operated, the reel deceleration standby state start timing is reached). ) is reached. If YES in step 6130, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel deceleration standby state in step 6132, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6130, the process moves to step 6134.

Next, in step 6134, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration standby state. If the answer is Yes in step 6136, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timing to end the reel deceleration standby state (the timing to start executing the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If the answer is Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts deceleration of the reel (reel deceleration process). Next, in step 6140, the CPU MC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to a reel deceleration state and proceeds to processing of step 6142. Note that if the answer is No in step 6134 or step 6136, the CPU MC also proceeds to processing of step 6142.

Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current reel drive state is a reel deceleration state. If Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and moves to the next process (the process in step 1612). Note that even in the case of No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1612).

Next, the rotating operation of the reel M50 of the reel type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail using FIG. 35. The reel-type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotational speed of the reels reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (the reel When the driving state becomes a reel constant speed state, a reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotational speed may not actually reach the constant speed). When any stop button is operated, stop control is performed for the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a 4-phase stepping motor (there is no problem even if it is not a 4-phase stepping motor) having 4 phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3. Rotation is controlled by phase excitation. That is, by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited), the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction. In the figure, a column of "phase to excite" indicates which phase among Φ0 to Φ3 is to be excited (details will be described later).

Also, as shown in the "Reel Rotation Speed Image" in the upper part of the figure, the driving state from when the stepping motor starts to rotate until it stops is divided into six states, and the stepping motor is driven and controlled according to a driving pattern corresponding to each driving state. Here, the driving states are "Reel Stop State", "Reel Rotation Start Waiting State", "Reel Acceleration State", "Reel Constant Speed State", "Reel Deceleration Waiting State", and "Reel Deceleration State". In the "Reel Rotation Speed Image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases upward, while the horizontal axis is time, and time is shown passing to the right. Also, the example shown in the figure illustrates a case where no reel rotation failure occurs, and this does not apply if a reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or loss of synchronism (the occurrence of a reel rotation failure will be described later).

The "reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the "reel stop state", the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are activated. is not excited.

Next, in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start standby state" based on the start lever D50 being operated at timing (1) in the figure. . Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from when the start lever D50 is operated until the stepping motor acceleration process (reel acceleration process) is started. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state." For example, the time from when the reel drive state became "reel acceleration state" in the previous game is measured, and the start lever D50 for the current game is operated before the minimum playing time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed. If it is, it will be in a "standby state for the reel rotation to start".

Next, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel spin start waiting state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerating from a stationary state to reach a constant speed. In this example, the acceleration state ends (the reel drive state is updated to the "reel constant speed state") when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times ("100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220", see the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left part of the figure). Next, at the timing of (3) in the figure, in other words, the timing when the "reel acceleration state" ends with one more timer interrupt process execution, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed. Note that at this timing, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start waiting state" to the "reel acceleration state", and the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times, so that the reel drive state is updated to the "reel constant speed state". In this way, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process. In other words, the final excitation phase combination in the "reel acceleration state" is configured to execute the interrupt process only once, "φ3, φ0", and the excitation mode is the same as the "reel constant speed state" in which the interrupt process is executed once for each excitation phase combination (when no reel rotation abnormality occurs). By configuring in this way, the acceleration process can be stably executed until the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is a "step motor excitation image". In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel acceleration state" and a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is a "reel constant speed state" are illustrated. First, a step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel acceleration state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower left of the figure. Note that the "phase to be excited" is a combination of phases to be excited, and the "number of times of interrupt execution" indicates the number of times that an interrupt process is executed to be excited by the combination of phases to be excited. In this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the step motor is excited for 220 timer interrupt processes, and (KA) interrupt process is executed 100 times at "φ0" → ( KB) Interrupt processing is performed 60 times with "φ0, φ1" → (KC) Interrupt processing is performed 30 times with "φ1" → (KD) Interrupt processing is performed 15 times with "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2" ” interrupt processing 8 times → (KF) “φ2, φ3” interrupt processing 4 times → (KG) “φ3” interrupt processing 2 times → (KH) “φ3, φ0” interrupt processing The interrupt processing is executed once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of executions of the interrupt processing is just an example, and there is no problem in changing it). In this way, in this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the configuration is such that the number of times the interrupt process is executed for one combination of excited phases is gradually reduced.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "constant reel speed state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in a constant speed state (when executing reel constant speed maintenance processing), (TA) interrupt processing once at "φ0" → (TB) interrupt processing once at "φ0, φ1" → (TC) interrupt processing once at "φ1" → (TD) interrupt processing once at "φ1, φ2" → (TE) interrupt processing once at "φ2" → (TF) interrupt processing once at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) interrupt processing once at "φ3" → (TH) interrupt processing once at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) interrupt processing once at "φ0" → (TB) interrupt processing once at "φ0, φ1" → ..., (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed one interrupt processing at a time to excite the step motor (stepping motor). Thus, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is being executed, the number of times that the interrupt process is executed for each combination of excitation phases is set to one.

Next, when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state," the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated at the timing of (5) in the figure, and the reel drive state is updated to the "reel deceleration standby state." Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the reel rotation speed is constant (a state in which the combination of excited phases is switched for each interrupt process), and the "reel deceleration standby state" refers to the state from when the stop button is operated by the player until the start of stop control (in the reel deceleration standby state, reel slippage occurs corresponding to the number of slipping frames). The duration of this drive state is determined based on the timing of the operation of the stop button.

Next, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reel begins to decelerate. When the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor continues to be excited for a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel; as an example, four-phase excitation is performed in which all four phases are excited. Then, after the predetermined time of excitation, at the timing of (7) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stopped state", and the reel comes to a stop.

As described above, the reel driving state of the gaming machine according to this example is configured to update the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state again and execute the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation state of the stepping motor is the same as that of the reel acceleration process) if the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state and the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, the time value for executing the interrupt process 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. Therefore, when the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, during the execution of the reel acceleration process, it is not determined whether the reel acceleration has been executed normally. In addition, whether the reel acceleration has been executed normally, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a reel rotation failure has occurred) is determined in the process of step 6124 (determined after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel driving state was updated to the reel constant speed state), but if the process of step 6124 determines that the reel is not at a constant speed (a reel rotation failure has occurred) because the reel sensor did not detect the index, the reel re-acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by configuring the reel acceleration process not to determine whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally during execution, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process, if the reel rotation failure is subsequently resolved and the reel rotation speed can be made to reach a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration process until the execution of the reel acceleration process is completed, the reel sensor detects an index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state, and the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process, making it difficult for a situation to occur in which the player cannot proceed with the game (cannot operate the stop button) due to the execution of the reel re-acceleration process. In addition, by configuring the reel acceleration process not to execute the process of determining whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally during execution, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. Note that, because of this configuration, if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process by the reel drum type gaming machine of this example, it will act as follows.

<Effect 1> Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel acceleration processing ends execution → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance processing Execution -> Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel constant speed maintenance process -> Detection of reel rotation failure -> Execution of reel re-acceleration process The system is configured to operate as described above. In addition, reel rotation failure means that the rotation of the reel is obstructed by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), or the reel is not accelerated due to loss of synchronization, etc. This refers to the case where the process is not executed normally. In this way, by configuring the reel reacceleration process to be executed even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the game can be smoothly played.

<Action 2> The reel starts to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the reel acceleration process is continued → the execution of the reel acceleration process is terminated → the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → a reel rotation failure is detected → the reel re-acceleration process is executed. In this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel re-acceleration process is executed if a reel rotation failure is detected thereafter, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Also, as described above, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continued, and the execution of the reel acceleration process is terminated when the reel acceleration process has been executed the same number of interrupts as when a reel rotation failure does not occur. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the reel rotation speed to easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process in cases such as when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the execution of the reel acceleration process is started.

<Effect 3> The reel starts spinning → the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state → the reel acceleration process is executed → a power cut process is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process → power is restored from the power cut → the reel acceleration process is continued (an unprocessed reel acceleration process is executed) → a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process → the reel acceleration process is continued (an unprocessed reel acceleration process is executed) → execution of the reel acceleration process is completed → the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state → a reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → a reel rotation failure is detected → a reel re-acceleration process is executed. In this way, even if a power cut process is executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continued after the power is restored, and if the reel sensor does not detect an index within a predetermined time after updating the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state, the reel re-acceleration process is executed, thereby allowing the game to proceed smoothly. Furthermore, if a power-off process is executed while a reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process will continue after the power is restored, and if the reel sensor detects an index within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to a constant reel speed state, the reel re-acceleration process will not be executed. This configuration makes it difficult for a situation to occur in which the player is unable to continue playing (cannot operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration process. The power-off process is sometimes referred to as a power-off process.

<<Operation after operating the final stop button>> The reel-type gaming machine according to the present example is configured to operate the final reel (the reel that has rotated to the end, and the third stop button) after operating the final stop button (third stop button). When the reels (also referred to as reels) stop and the symbol combination that becomes a winning combination is stopped and displayed, the payout of game medals can be executed. It's okay.

<Action 1> The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a power outage occurs → the third reel moves (spins) to the stopped display position → power outage is detected → process at time of power outage is executed → power is restored → the reels are displayed as stopped with a pattern combination corresponding to the winning role → process related to the payout of game medals is executed It may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game where a small combination such as the above-mentioned common bell, which can be won regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop button, is won, even if a power outage occurs in the game center immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding frames is at its maximum), the movement (spin) to the planned stop position can be completed before the power outage is detected. Also, if the symbol combination (for example, a common bell) that constitutes a winning combination is displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be paid out normally, making it difficult for the player to suffer any disadvantage.

<Action 2> The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning combination has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → A pattern corresponding to the winning combination appears on the reel as viewed by the player Although the combination is not stopped, the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning role, is not stopped on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is executed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → The process related to the payout of game medals is executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is not displayed on the reel from the player's perspective, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the winning role is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is normally executed, the payout of game medals can be executed, and it is possible to configure in such a way that it is difficult for a player to suffer a disadvantage. Note that the timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and it is applicable to all cases where a reel rotation failure occurs during the period from when the second reel is displayed to when the process related to the payout of game medals is executed, and as a result, the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot stop at the expected stop position (it is also applicable to the action related to the reel rotation failure exemplified below). Note that the above action 2 illustrates an action in a game in which a winning role is won. That is, if no reel rotation failure occurs, the following action will occur (it may be configured to have a similar action if no rotation failure or power outage occurs in other actions as well): The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the player If the reels show a stopped symbol combination corresponding to a winning role, the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → process related to the payout of game medals is executed. Note that the winning role in the actions described above and below may be a winning role that can be won regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop button in a winning game (for example, a common bell), or a winning role that may or may not be won depending on the timing of the operation of the stop button in a winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry). In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined game state, if a reel spin failure or power outage does not occur and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect in which the reel backlight (sometimes called a back lamp) flashes (sometimes called a back lamp effect). In addition, in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won in the predetermined game state, if a reel spin failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination may be executed. In addition, in this action, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot stop at the intended stop position, but this is not limited to this, and it may be applied to a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop cannot stop at the intended stop position due to a reel spin failure, or a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot stop at the intended stop position due to a reel spin failure (other actions can be applied in the same manner).

<Action 3> The reels start spinning as a game in which a winning combination has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the stable supply of power to the gaming machine is halted → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A power outage is detected → A process for maintaining a power outage is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → From the player's perspective, However, the determination process of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is a winning role, is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is executed normally by the processing within the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → the process related to the payout of game medals is executed. It may be configured to function as described above. Furthermore, the timing for detecting a power outage, the timing when a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing for the judgment process of step 1269 to determine that the symbol combination is normal, and the timing for power to be restored are not limited to the above timings, and it is sufficient that the timing for detecting a power outage, the timing when a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing for the judgment process of step 1269 to determine that the symbol combination is normal, and the timing for power to be restored exist during the period from when the second reel is displayed as stopped to when the process related to the payout of gaming medals is executed, and all of these are applicable to cases where the reel corresponding to the third stop button is unable to stop at the intended stop position due to a power outage (the same applies to actions including power outages exemplified below). By configuring in this way, even if a power outage occurs immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role cannot be displayed on the reels as seen by the player, if the winning role is won in the internal processing of the gaming machine and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role can be displayed, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is normally executed, the payout of game medals (payout of game medals includes not only payout from the discharge port by driving the hopper, but also an increase in the display (number of credits) of the credit number display device) can be executed after the power is restored, and it is possible to configure in such a way that it is difficult for a player to suffer a disadvantage. Note that the timing at which the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to the power outage is sometimes referred to as the timing at which the power outage occurs. In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined game state, if there is no reel rotation failure or power outage, and a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect (sometimes called a back lamp effect) in which the reel backlight (sometimes called a back lamp) flashes. In addition, in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is won in the predetermined game state, if a power outage occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination may be executed. In addition, in this action, an example is given of a case in which the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position, but this is not limited to this, and it may be applied to a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage, or a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot stop at the scheduled stop position due to a power outage (it can be applied to other actions as well). In this example, "power supply to the gaming machine is stopped" and "stable power supply to the gaming machine is stopped" do not mean that the power supplied to the gaming machine is zero, but may mean that the power supplied to the gaming machine is less than the power supplied when the gaming machine is in operation due to a power outage or the like, or the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.

<Action 4> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining the constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → The reel is displayed as a winning combination as viewed by the player. The corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (this is the case when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → the payout of game medals is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the third stop button is accepted, and even if the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to the winning role as seen by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine accepts the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be stopped and displayed, and when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is normally executed, the payout of game medals can be not executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed, making it possible to make the gaming machine fair and to make it possible to make the gaming machine not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 4 is not limited to only misses, and can also be applied to, for example, a game in which a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bell is displayed in a game in which a bell is not won (a game in which a replay role is won, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.). In such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to poor rotation, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal, so a display judgment error (irrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not judged that a display judgment error has occurred).

<Action 5> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → Power outage is detected → Processing at the time of power outage is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → The player It may be configured to operate as described above: when, as viewed from the player's perspective, the reels display a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, the reels do not display a symbol combination corresponding to a loss as viewed from the player's perspective, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing within the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → game medals are not paid out. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a loss, immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, the power-off process is executed, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed on the reel as seen by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be displayed in a stopped state in the internal process of the gaming machine, and when the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the payout of the game medals is not executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is displayed in a stopped state, making it possible to make the gaming machine fair and to make the gaming machine not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 5 is not limited to only loss, and can also be applied, for example, in a game in which the bell is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is displayed in a stopped state. In such a case, the symbol combination displayed as stopped from the player's perspective is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery results due to a rotation error, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal, so a display determination error (irrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 6> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (for example, a BB role) appears on the reel as viewed by the player. is displayed as a stopped symbol, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bonus role is not won and the game results in a loss, the reels display a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine in response to the player's operation of the stop button) → the bonus does not start, and freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed on the reel as seen by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be displayed as a miss in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is normally executed, it is possible to configure the bonus not to start even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as a stop, making it possible to make the gaming machine fair and to make the gaming machine not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above-mentioned action 6 is not limited to a miss, and can also be applied to, for example, a game in which a bonus role is not won (not within the bonus) and a game in which a bonus role is not won (a game in which a replay role is won, a game in which a watermelon is won, etc.) in which a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed as a stop. In addition, the above action 6 illustrates an action in a game in which a bonus role is not won. That is, when a reel rotation failure does not occur, the following action is taken (it is also applicable to other actions when a rotation failure and a power outage do not occur). The reel starts to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as a stop operation for the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the bonus does not start to be executed, and the freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if no reel rotation failure occurs during the game or bonus in which the bonus role is won, the following actions are taken: The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → the bonus starts to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, we have exemplified a case where a freeze is executed at the start of a bonus, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus role), there may be bonuses for which a freeze is executed and bonuses for which a freeze is not executed, and whether or not a freeze is executed may also differ depending on the game state in which a bonus role is won.

<Action 7> The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is halted → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed from the player → the reel appears to have a bonus role (for example, a BB role) as viewed from the player The corresponding symbol combination is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game in which a bonus role is not won and the game results in a loss, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the reels from the player's perspective, but the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → bonus does not start, and freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, the power off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed on the reel as seen by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the miss can be displayed as a miss in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the miss is normally executed, it is possible to configure so that the bonus of the gaming medal is not started even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as a stop, and it is possible to make the gaming machine fair and to make the gaming machine not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above action 6 is not limited to only misses, and can also be applied to, for example, a reel rotation failure occurs in a game in which the bonus role is not won (not in the bonus) and the bonus role is not won (a game in which the replay role is won, a game in which the watermelon is won, etc.), and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as a stop. In addition, the above action 6 illustrates an action in a game in which a bonus role is not won. That is, if a power outage does not occur, the following action will occur (it is also applicable to other actions in the case where a rotation failure and a power outage do not occur). The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as a stop operation for the third reel (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the bonus does not start to be executed, and the freezing at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, if the reel power supply has not been interrupted during the game or bonus in which the bonus role has been won, the following actions will occur: The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the reel as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → the bonus starts to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, an example was given of a case where a freeze is executed at the start of a bonus, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus role), there may be bonuses for which a freeze is executed and bonuses for which a freeze is not executed, and whether or not a freeze is executed may also differ depending on the game state in which a bonus role is won.

<Effect 8> The reels start rotating as a game executed during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus combination is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → 3rd reel Operate the third stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel reaches the expected stop position as seen from the player. Unable to move (rotate) → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role (for example, BB role) is not displayed in a stopped state on the reels, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → Bonus It may be configured to work as described above, in which the bonus is started and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus is won or a game where a bonus combination is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role will be displayed on each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is not being stopped and displayed. The system can also be configured to start the bonus and execute a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which is a significant problem for players whose bonus is prevented from starting due to poor reel rotation when the bonus should have started. It is possible to configure the system so as not to cause any disadvantages, and the player can proceed with the game without feeling any discomfort by executing the freeze at the start of the bonus, in the same way as if the reel rotation failure had not occurred. Become.

<Action 9> The reels start spinning as a game executed during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing during power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the reel does not display a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role (e.g., a BB role) as viewed by the player, but the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → power is restored → the bonus starts, and freezing at the start of the bonus is executed.It may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game that has been played in a situation where a bonus has been won or in a game in which a bonus role has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role can be displayed. If the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is normally executed, the bonus can be started and the freeze executed at the start of the bonus can be executed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed. This can be configured to prevent significant disadvantages for the player, such as a bonus not being started due to a power outage when the bonus should be started, and the freeze executed at the start of the bonus can be executed, as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur, allowing the player to proceed with the game without any discomfort.

<Action 10> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → As viewed by the player, the reel stops with a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role However, in the judgment process of step 1269, it is judged that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → an automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replay role is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped on the reels as viewed by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine will result in a miss, and the operation of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to a miss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is executed normally, an automatic bet will not be made even if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is displayed stopped, and the replay lamp D290 will not light up again. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role that will cause the RT state to transition when stopped and displayed in the current RT state is displayed as stopped from the player's perspective, the internal processing of the gaming machine will result in a loss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) will be accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the RT state will not transition (this can also be applied to the case where a symbol combination corresponding to a role that will cause the RT state to transition other than the replay role is stopped and displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above action 10 is not limited to only losses, and can be applied, for example, in a game in which the replay role is not won, when a reel rotation failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is stopped and displayed. That is, when a reel rotation failure does not occur, the following action will be taken (it can also be applied when a rotation failure and power outage do not occur in other actions). The reels start spinning -> the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state -> constant speed state maintenance process is executed -> acceptance of the stop button is enabled -> the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel -> the first reel is displayed as stopped -> the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel -> the second reel is displayed as stopped -> the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) -> the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state -> the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player -> the reel displays a pattern combination corresponding to a miss as seen by the player, and the pattern combination is determined to be normal by the judgment process of step 1269 -> an automatic bet is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. In addition, the automatic bet means that the specified number of game medals (for example, 3 medals) that were bet in the game in which the replay role was won are automatically bet by the replay role being stopped and displayed, without the operation of the bet button (max bet button) or the insertion of game medals from the medal insertion slot. On the other hand, if there is no reel rotation failure in the game in which the replay role was won, the following action will occur. The reels start spinning → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → an automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 will continue to be lit).

<Action 11> The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the power outage is detected → processing at the time of power outage is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed from the player → the reel corresponds to a replay role as viewed from the player The symbol combination that corresponds to the replay symbol is displayed as stopped, but the judgment process of step 1269 judges that the symbol combination is normal (when it is judged that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally; for example, in a game resulting in a loss, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay symbol is displayed as stopped on the reels as seen by the player, but the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to a loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button) → power is restored → an automatic bet corresponding to the stopped display of the replay symbol is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if a symbol combination corresponding to a re-play role is displayed stopped on the reels as viewed by the player, the internal processing of the gaming machine determines it to be a miss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at a timing when the symbol combination corresponding to a miss can be displayed stopped, and if the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to a miss is executed normally, an automatic bet will not be made even if a symbol combination corresponding to a re-play role is displayed stopped, and the re-play lamp D290 will not be newly lit. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role that will cause the RT state to transition when stopped and displayed in the current RT state is displayed as stopped from the player's perspective, the internal processing of the gaming machine will result in a loss, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) will be accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed, the RT state will not transition (this can also be applied to the case where a symbol combination corresponding to a role that will cause the RT state to transition other than the replay role is stopped and displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming facility. It should be noted that the above action 11 is not limited to only losses, and can be applied, for example, in a game in which the replay role is not won, when a power outage occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is stopped and displayed. That is, when a power outage does not occur, the following action will be taken (when no rotation failure or power outage occurs in other actions, it can also be applied). The reels start to rotate → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the reel displays a symbol combination corresponding to a miss as seen by the player, and the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 → no automatic bet is made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. On the other hand, if no power outage occurs in a game in which a replay role is won, the following action will occur. The reels start spinning -> the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state -> constant speed state maintenance processing is executed -> acceptance of the stop button is enabled -> the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel -> the first reel is displayed as stopped -> the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel -> the second reel is displayed as stopped -> the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) -> the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state -> the third reel moves to the intended stop position as seen by the player -> the reel displays a stopped pattern combination corresponding to a replay role as seen by the player, and the pattern combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 -> an automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 remains lit).

<Effect 12> The reels start rotating as a winning game for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button reception becomes valid → First reel stop operation → Operate the 1st stop button to display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel ( (Accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → From the player's perspective Although the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming role is not stopped and displayed on the reels, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process in step 1269. → An automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-gaming role is made, and The game lamp D290 may be configured to function as described above, in which the game lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, in a game where the winning combination result is a replay, a reel rotation failure will occur immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel will be replayed from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not displayed in a stopped state, each reel (left reel , middle reel, right reel), and if the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the replayed role is successfully executed, the replayed role is supported. An automatic bet is made even if the symbol combination to be played is not stopped and displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and since the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combinations are not displayed in a stopped state, replays cannot be played even if the reels are visually checked. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually confirming whether or not an automatic bet has been made and whether the replay lamp D290 is lit. In addition, in action 12, if a re-gaming combination has been won that would cause the RT state to change if it is displayed in a stopped state in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination will be stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will be shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which problems are unlikely to occur in the progress of the game, and it is possible to configure a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 13> The reels start spinning as a game in which a replay has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → Power outage is detected → Processing during power outage is executed → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → Although the reel does not display a stopped symbol combination corresponding to the replay role as viewed by the player, the judgment processing of step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → Power is restored → An automatic bet corresponding to the stopped symbol of the replay role is made, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit.The game may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a replay, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the replay is won in the internal process of the gaming machine, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, center reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role can be displayed, and when the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is normally executed, an automatic bet is made even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and even if it is not possible to determine whether or not the replay role has been won by visually checking the reels because the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually checking whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the replay lamp D290. In addition, in action 13, if a replay role that would cause the RT state to transition if stopped and displayed in the current RT state is won, the RT state will transition even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is not stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and it is possible to create a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 14> The reels start rotating as a game in which the RT state transition winning role (sometimes referred to as the RT transition role) is won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → stop Button reception is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates reel drive state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → Third reel stops from the player's perspective Unable to move (rotate) to the planned position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed in a stopped state, but the determination process in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal → RT state transitions It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring this way, in a game in which an RT transition combination has been won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and from the player's perspective, the reels will display symbols corresponding to the RT transition combination. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT transition combination has been won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel , right reel), and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is successfully executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is accepted. Even if it is not displayed in a stopped state, the RT state will shift. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to players, and it is also possible to proceed with the game according to the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine inherently has, thereby improving the performance of the gaming parlor. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind. Note that the RT transition combination is a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in a predetermined RT state, thereby transitioning to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state. The difference may be whether or not this happens. That is, in RT state A, predetermined combination A is an RT transition role, but in RT state B, predetermined combination A may not be an RT transition role, and in RT state A, predetermined combination A is an RT transition role. However, in RT state B, there may be cases where the prescribed winning combination A is not won.

<Effect 15> The reels start rotating as a game in which a winning role in which the RT state changes (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → stop Button reception is enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detects power outage → Executes power outage processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is not displayed stopped from the player's perspective However, in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored, or the RT state may shift before the power is restored). It may be configured to function as follows. By configuring this way, in a game in which an RT transition combination has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels correspond to the RT transition combination from the player's perspective. Even if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT transition combination has been won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel) is If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel (reel, right reel) is accepted, and the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is successfully executed,
Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not displayed in a stopped state, the RT state will transition. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to players, and it is also possible to proceed with the game according to the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine inherently has, thereby improving the performance of the gaming parlor. The administrator can also operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 16> The reels start spinning as a game in which the player has not won a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes called an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment process of step 1269 → the RT state does not transition.It may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the RT transition role has not been won, even if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted and a symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed on the reels as seen by the player, the RT state will not be transitioned. By configuring in this way, for example, when a push order navigation is executed to prevent a transition to an RT state that is disadvantageous to the player during an AT state, even if the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation, and a symbol combination that would cause a transition to the RT state (a fall) due to a reel rotation failure is displayed as if it were stopped, the RT state will not be transitioned, and a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player can be created, and the game can proceed according to the transition of the game state that the gaming machine originally has, and the manager of the gaming facility can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 17> The reels start spinning as a game in which the player has not won a role that transitions to the RT state (sometimes called an RT transition role) → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → a power outage occurs and the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → power outage is detected → processing when power is cut off is executed → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is displayed as stopped as viewed by the player, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the judgment processing of step 1269 → the RT state does not transition.It may be configured to act as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the RT transition role has not been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, and even if the reels display a symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role as seen by the player, the RT state will not be transitioned. By configuring in this way, for example, when push order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to the RT state that is disadvantageous to the player during the AT state, even if the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation and a symbol combination that would cause the RT state to transition (fall) due to a reel rotation failure appears to be displayed, the RT state will not be transitioned, and it is possible to make a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to progress the game according to the transition of the game state that the gaming machine originally has, and the manager of the gaming facility can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18> The reels start spinning as a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → A symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role is displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as viewed by the player → The ready sound is not output from the speaker, and The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation failure occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → a ready sound is output from the speaker.The above-mentioned operation may be configured to occur. Furthermore, if no reel rotation failure occurs, the action is as follows: The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button becomes valid → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed as stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a ready sound is output from the speaker. The reels start spinning as a losing game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the ready sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to operate as described above. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops at the first and second stops; in other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, the ready state sound will not be output if the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state. Even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the winning combination is a miss, a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop at the first or second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol does not complete a winning combination, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, a winning combination sound will be output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to complete a winning combination. Even if the reel appears to be in an abnormal position due to a reel spin failure, the output from the speaker will allow the player to quickly detect that a reel spin failure has occurred.

<Effect 19> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the 1st stop button → Display that the 1st reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect a power outage → Power Timing processing is executed → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is on the active line on the first and second reels. Stop display → Power return → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker Also, the reels start rotating as a lost game → Update the reel drive state to constant speed → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Stop button is not accepted Enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → As a stop operation for the second reel, press the second stop button Operate the stop button → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Validity on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the line (if the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will stop on the active line on the first and second reels) It may be configured to operate as described above, in which the display is displayed) → power is restored → tenpai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows: As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is not accepted. Enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel is scheduled to stop from the player's perspective Move (rotate) to the position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped position on the active line on the first and second reels → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. Also, the game ended in a loss. The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first Display that the reels are stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first and second reels as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. Note that the timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off has occurred. By configuring this way, in a game in which the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol is the first one. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the bonus symbol is stopped at the scheduled stopping position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tenpai. Even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player can quickly sense that the reel rotation failure has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game where the winning lottery result was a loss, a reel rotation failure occurred immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations constituting the bonus symbol were changed to the first stop and second stop button. Even if it did not stop as a stop, in other words, the bonus symbol did not reach tenpai, if it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol was scheduled to become tenpai. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to occurrence of defective reel rotation, the player can quickly sense that defective reel rotation has occurred through the output from the speaker. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) The reel rotation failure may occur immediately after the reel rotation occurs.

<Action 20> The reels start spinning when the game is not in a bonus and has ended in a loss → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → A reel rotation failure occurs → From the player's perspective, the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position → From the player's perspective, the first and second reels are displayed as having stopped symbol combinations corresponding to the bonus role on the activated lines → The bonus confirmation ready sound is not output from the speaker, and The reels start spinning while in a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → a reel rotation failure occurs → the second reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels as seen by the player (if the second reel has moved to the intended stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed stopped on the active line on the first and second reels) → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker.It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, if no reel rotation failure occurs, the reels start spinning during a bonus or as a game in which a bonus has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role appears stopped on the activated line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → a bonus confirmation ready sound is output from the speaker. The reel starts spinning as a game that is not in the bonus and has lost → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is not displayed as stopped on the pay line on the first and second reels as seen by the player → the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is a tenpai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are displayed as stopped (tenpai) on the pay line and the predetermined bonus symbol can be displayed as stopped. By configuring in this manner, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a miss and the bonus is not in progress, a reel rotation malfunction occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol stops as the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is in a ready state, if it stops at the intended stop position in this example, but the bonus symbol was not intended to be in a ready state, the bonus confirmation ready state sound will not be output. Even if the apparent stopping position of the reel is not normal due to a reel rotation malfunction, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation malfunction has occurred through the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a bonus role or a game executed during a bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the second stop button is pressed, and the symbol combination that constitutes the bonus symbol does not stop as the first stop or the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol does not reach a ready position, if the bonus symbol stops at the expected stop position in this example, a bonus confirmation ready sound will be output. Even if the reel appears to stop at an abnormal position due to a reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that a reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Note that, although this action illustrates a case in which the reel corresponding to the second stop does not stop at the expected stop position, it may also be a case in which the reel corresponding to the first stop does not stop at the expected stop position (a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the first stop operation is executed).

<Effect 21> As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button becomes valid → as a stop operation for the first reel Operate the 1st stop button → Display that the 1st reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detect a power outage → Power Timing processing is executed → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is on the active line on the first and second reels. Stop display → Power return → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker Also, the reels start rotating as a lost game → Update the reel drive state to constant speed → Execute constant speed state maintenance process → Stop button is not accepted Enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → A power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → As a stop operation for the second reel, press the second stop button Operate the stop button → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Validity on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the line (if the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will stop on the active line on the first and second reels) It may be configured to operate as described above, in which the display is displayed) → power is restored → tenpai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is as follows: As a lost game, the reels start rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is not accepted. Enabled → Operate the first stop button as a stop operation for the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation for the second reel → The second reel is scheduled to stop from the player's perspective Move (rotate) to the position → From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in a stopped position on the active line on the first and second reels → Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. Also, the game ended in a loss. The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first Display that the reels are stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The first and second reels as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. Note that the timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off processing, or after the power is restored after the power-off has occurred. By configuring this way, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination that makes up the bonus symbol is the first one. In other words, even if the bonus symbol is at tenpai, if the bonus symbol is stopped at the scheduled stopping position in this example, the tenpai sound is output if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tenpai. Even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly sense through the output from the speaker that an abnormality has occurred in the reels due to the power outage. Can be done. Similarly, in a game where the lottery result is a loss, the power is cut off immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combinations that make up the bonus symbol are changed to the first stop and second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol did not reach tenpai, if the bonus symbol was scheduled to become tenpai when it stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output. Therefore, even if the apparent stopping position of the reels is not normal due to a power outage, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred in the reels due to the power outage through the output from the speaker. can. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) (The power-off process may be executed immediately after the power-off process is executed.)

<Effect 22> The reels start rotating when the game is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display that the 1st reel is stopped → Power outage occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Detects a power outage → Executes power outage processing → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Bonus appears on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed → The bonus confirmation sound is not output from the speaker. Also, the reels start rotating as the bonus is inside or the game has won the bonus → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → A power outage occurs and the power to the gaming machine is cut off. Supply stops → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Detect power outage → Execute power outage process → Second reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the user (if the second reel moves to the scheduled stop position, the symbol combination on the first reel and the second reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line) -> Bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect when a power outage does not occur is that the reels start rotating when the bonus is in progress or the game has won the bonus → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is performed. Execute → Stop button reception becomes valid → Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation for the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation for the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel Move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the active line on the first and second reels from the player's perspective → Bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker In addition, the reels start rotating as a game that is not inside the bonus and is a losing game → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is executed → The reception of the stop button is enabled → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player ( rotate)
→ From the player's perspective, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the active line on the first and second reels → The bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker Even if it is configured to work as described above good. In addition, the bonus confirmation ten-pai sound is the ten-pai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting a predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed (ten-pai) on the active line, and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It's a sound. With this configuration, in a game where the winning lottery result is a loss and the bonus is not in progress, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is created. Even if the symbol combination stops as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol becomes tenpai, if the symbol combination stops at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbol is not scheduled to become tenpai. will not output the bonus confirmation tenpai sound, and even if the stopping position of the reels does not appear to be normal due to a power outage, the player will be able to hear the output from the speaker indicating that there is an abnormality in the reels due to the power outage. can be detected quickly. Similarly, in a game where the winning combination result is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during a bonus, the power-off process occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbols are not displayed. Even if the constituent symbol combinations do not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, the bonus symbols do not reach tenpai, if they stop at the scheduled stop position in this example, the bonus symbols will become tenpai. If it was scheduled, the bonus confirmation tenpai sound will be output, and even if the apparent stopping position of the reels is not normal due to a power outage, the output from the speaker will alert the player to the possibility that the reels are abnormal due to a power outage. It is possible to quickly detect that something is occurring. In addition, in this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the scheduled stop position (when the first stop operation was executed) (The power-off process may be executed immediately after the power-off process is executed.)

<Action 23> The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which a specified replay role has been won → The reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → A process for maintaining a constant speed state is executed → Acceptance of the stop button is enabled → The first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → The first reel is displayed as stopped → The second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → A reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the specified replay role is not displayed as stopped → The max bet lamp does not light up, and The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels begin spinning as a game in which the re-play role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → a reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (spin) to the intended stop position as viewed by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the specified re-play role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp is lit.It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, the action when the reel rotation failure does not occur is as follows: The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reels start spinning as a game in which a specified replay role has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the specified replay role is displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp does not light up. The number of credits is 1 or more and the reels begin spinning as a game in which the re-play role has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → constant speed state maintenance process is executed → acceptance of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel appears stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel appears stopped → the third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → the reel drive state is updated to a reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (spins) to the intended stop position as seen by the player → the pattern combination corresponding to the specified re-play role is not displayed as stopped → the max bet lamp turns on It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in a game in which a replay has been won, if a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed, the player can quickly realize that the operation of the Max Bet button is invalid because the Max Bet lamp does not light up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed. Also, in a game in which a replay has not been won, if a reel spin failure occurs immediately after the third stop button is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, the player can quickly realize that the operation of the Max Bet button is invalid because the Max Bet lamp lights up, just as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed.

<Effect 24> The reels start rotating as a game in which the number of credits is 1 or more and a predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is accepted becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Power off occurs and power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Turns off the power Detection → Execute power-off processing → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → The max bet lamp does not light up In addition, the reels start rotating in a game where the number of credits is 1 or more and the replay combination has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is valid → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display the 1st reel stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display the 2nd reel to stop → Power outage occurs. Power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (operation of the third stop button is accepted) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Power-off processing is executed → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gaming combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp lights up as described above It may be configured to act on the In addition, the effect when a power outage does not occur is that the number of credits is 1 or more and the reels start rotating as a game in which the predetermined replay combination has been won → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Execute speed state maintenance processing → Stop button reception becomes valid → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Display that the first reel is stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → The third reel is stopped by operating the third stop button (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel is displayed as Move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is stopped and displayed → The max bet lamp does not light up, and the game has a credit number of 1 or more and has not won a replay combination. The reel starts rotating → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated as a stop operation for the first reel → the first The reels are displayed as stopped → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → The second reel is displayed as stopped → Operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (Accept the operation of the third stop button) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → the third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → the max bet lamp lights up It may be configured to function as described above. By configuring this way, in a game in which a replay has been won, the power-off processing is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed. Similarly to the case where the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay are stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp does not light up, so that the player can quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is not valid. In addition, in a game that has not been won for replay, if the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to replay is not displayed in a stopped state, the max bet lamp lights up, allowing the player to quickly sense that the operation of the max bet button is valid.

<Effect 25> This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, and a winning combination has been won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by awarding gaming medals corresponding to the winning combination to the player. The reels start rotating as a game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is stopped. 1st reel is displayed as stopped → operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) →Update the reel drive state to reel deceleration state →Reel rotation failure occurs →The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's perspective →The symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination does not stop and display →Bonus It may be configured so that it operates as described above, in which the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. In addition, the effect in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur is that the game is during the bonus execution, and the winning combination has been won, and game medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination are awarded to the player. As a result, the reels start rotating as a game in which the bonus end conditions are satisfied → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel 1st stop button is operated as a stop operation → 1st reel is displayed as stopped → 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → 3rd stop button is displayed as a 3rd reel stop operation (receives operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the entered prize winning combination It may be configured to work as described above, in which the stop display → the bonus ends and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. With this configuration, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after winning a winning combination in the final bonus game and accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop and display. Even in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, when the bonus ends, the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, so that the player can immediately know that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a game machine that can sense the progress of the game and does not make people feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

<Effect 26> This is a game in which a bonus is being executed, and a winning combination has been won, and the bonus termination conditions are satisfied by awarding gaming medals corresponding to the winning combination to the player. The reels start rotating as a game → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → reception of the stop button is enabled → the first stop button is operated to stop the first reel → the first reel is stopped. The 1st reel is displayed as stopped → the 2nd reel is stopped by operating the 2nd stop button → the 2nd reel is displayed as stopped → the power supply is interrupted and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → as the 3rd reel is stopped Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power outage → Execute power outage processing → The third reel is scheduled to stop from the player's perspective The symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination cannot be moved (rotated) to the position → the symbol combination corresponding to the entered winning combination is not stopped and displayed → the bonus ends, and a freeze is executed at the end of the bonus It may be configured to work as described above. In addition, the effect in the case where a power outage does not occur is that the game is in the execution of a bonus, and a winning combination has been won, and game medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination are awarded to the player. The reels start rotating as a game in which the bonus end conditions are satisfied → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the reception of the stop button is enabled → the first reel Operate the first stop button as a stop operation → Display the first reel stopped → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation on the second reel → Display the second reel stop → Press the third stop button as a stop operation on the third reel Operation (accepts operation of the third stop button) → Updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the entered prize combination stops. It may be configured to work as described above, in which the display → bonus ends and freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. With this configuration, immediately after winning the winning combination in the final bonus game and accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, the power-off process is executed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, allowing the player to know that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be detected quickly and that does not make people feel uncomfortable about the progress of the game.

Furthermore, from the configuration related to the reel acceleration process in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example described above, the execution period of the reel acceleration process when a reel rotation failure does not occur during the execution of the reel acceleration process = A reel acceleration process Execution period of reel acceleration processing until malfunction of reel rotation occurs when malfunction of reel rotation occurs during execution of B reel acceleration processing = reel acceleration processing period when malfunction of reel rotation occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing When the execution period of the reel acceleration process after a rotation failure occurs = C, the configuration is such that A=B+C. In addition, the number of times the reel acceleration processing interrupt processing is executed when a drum rotation failure does not occur during the execution of the reel acceleration process = The drum rotation when a drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the D reel acceleration process. Number of executions of interrupt processing of reel acceleration processing until failure occurs = Number of executions of interrupt processing of reel acceleration processing after the occurrence of defective rotation of the reel rotation when a rotation defect of the reel accelerator occurs during execution of E-reel acceleration processing =F, the configuration is such that D=E+F.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of power-off processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completion flag (for example, updates the power-off processing completion flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPU 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and calculates error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, (or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the drum-type gaming machine according to this example. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and instruction number indicated by the executed push order navigation (information related to the push order; in this example, the main control board M determines it and sends it to the sub control board S) This is a table showing the correspondence. For example, when the pressing order is "middle→right→left", the instruction number is "A5". Next, on the left side of the figure, when the push order is "left → middle → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A1"), the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40 The image shown is shown in the figure. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example has a 7-segment display system and also serves as a payout number display device. Further, when the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the press order display device D270. Here, when executing the push order navigation, if the display on the push order display device D270 is displayed as a 2-digit number, the display on the push order display device D270 may be the number of medals to be paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to determine whether it is a navigation display or not. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 displays "=" in the left digit, such as "=1". By configuring this, when the display on the push order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out, and the display on the push order display device D270 is "=" on the left side and a number on the right side. If there is, it is configured to be able to determine that it is a push order navigation display, so as to prevent the player from misperceiving it. Further, in the advantageous section display YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the "advantageous section" is lit. At the same time, a display of "40 games remaining" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT state") is displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, the right side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3"). There is. In addition, since the current game section is an "advantageous section," the advantageous section display YH lights up, and a display of "25 games remaining" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. is displayed. Furthermore, among the conditional devices in which the winnings that are stopped and displayed differ depending on the reel stop order, there are conditional devices that involve payout of medals, such as a bell, and replayable combinations that have the push order (depending on the reel stop order). Among the conditional devices with different winnings to be stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the conditional device related to the replayed winning combination may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. Instead, for example, an LED display may be used to issue instructions by lighting a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number. Note that an advantageous section display YH may be provided at the lower right portion of the credit number display device D200. In this case, the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably turned on until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player stops playing, he or she visually checks the credit number display device D200 to check whether there are any medals left. If there are medals remaining, the payment button D60 is operated. In other words, by lighting up the payment button D60 before it becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the user from accidentally quitting the game even though it is an "advantageous period" from the next game. be able to.

Furthermore, the notification mode of the game section on the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and a section display similar to the advantageous section display YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two 7 segments (the section display In such a configuration, when the left section indicator lights up, it will notify that the current gaming section is the "normal section", and on the other hand, the right section When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an "advantageous section." In addition, "normal sections" and "advantageous sections" are distinguished by the color and lighting mode of the section indicator (for example, "normal sections" are marked "green" and "advantageous sections" are marked "red"). Alternatively, the light may be turned on during the "normal section" and "flashing" during the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, the display mode of the section display is configured to change depending on "BB internal game during AT", "BB state during AT", "AT precursor state", "state during AT", etc. in the "advantageous section". It's okay. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the fact that the current gaming section is a "standby section" can be recognized separately from the "normal section" and the "advantageous section." However, the distinction between the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" will be made easy to distinguish, such as by using different section indicators, so that the player can recognize whether the current gaming section is the "advantageous section" or not. It is preferable to make it easier.

Furthermore, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 that indicates the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. (In a state where the player has a relatively low profit, the player may not be notified of the disadvantage that the remaining number of games in the "advantageous section" is being subtracted.) However, even with this configuration, it is preferable to turn on the zone indicator to inform the player that the game is in the "advantageous zone." At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator be configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the section indicator be installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

Next, the control processing executed on the sub control board S side will be explained with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57.

<Sub-side program start processing> First, FIG. 38 shows a subroutine that shows the sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start processing is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prohibits interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initializing the CPU and RAM, and calculating the checksum.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the checksum value calculated at power-on matches the checksum value calculated and stored at power-off. If Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination process in step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the 1-command process to be described later. It is determined whether the state has been recovered from the state in which the power supply was interrupted, that is, whether the state has been completely recovered.

If Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that a complete recovery has occurred, then in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S allows interrupts and is executed when the power is turned off. Return processing to 1 command processing.

On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the judgment process in step 2008 that the two checksum values do not match, in step 2014 CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute. Note that after executing the process in step 2014, or in the case of No in step 2010, the process shifts to sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing> Next, FIG. 39 shows a subroutine that shows the sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop processing is called and executed after the sub-side program start processing shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts operating the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S allows an interrupt. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing, which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined period of time, for example 16 ms, has elapsed, and if it is determined that it has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the process.

<Sub-side power-off processing> Next, FIG. 40 shows a subroutine that shows the sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off processing is processing that starts when the sub-control board S detects a power outage.

First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If the answer is Yes in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (such as the checksum calculation result and the address of the program that was being executed) and proceeds to step 2210.

Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether 500 ms have elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is ended. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the power has been restored. If Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S updates the number of instantaneous power outages. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts operating the watchdog timer and returns to the process that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<One command processing> Next, FIG. 41 shows a subroutine that shows one command processing that is called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG. 39.

Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to operate the start lever. If the answer is No in step 2252, in other words, if it is determined that it is the timing to operate the start lever, then in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the start lever operation performance-related decision process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start lever operation process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the timing to operate the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the timing to accept the first reel stop. If No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes the subroutine of the process when the first reel stop is accepted, which will be described later. Then, the process moves to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the first reel stop, then in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to accept the second reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the second reel stop, then in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the second reel stop acceptance processing described below, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the second reel stop, then in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is not the timing to accept the third reel stop. If the answer is No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the timing to accept the third reel stop, then in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the process to determine the performance related to the third drum stop, which will be described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the process to accept the third drum stop, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the timing to accept the stop of the third reel, then in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the timing to stop the stop display pattern. If the answer is Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the timing to stop the stop display pattern, then in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a process at the time of the stop display pattern (not shown) and proceeds to step 7100. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the timing to stop the stop display pattern, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately proceeds to step 7100.

Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a menu screen display control process to be described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a standby screen display control process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the performance-related determination process at the time of operating the start lever, which is called and executed in the process of step 3000 in FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state of the AT of the game is a "high probability state". If the answer is Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the number of high probability games remaining at the present time (how many games are guaranteed to be in the high probability state) based on the high probability counter value command received from the main control board M. Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the battle performance execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it has been determined that a battle performance will be executed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 3006, then in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of high-probability games, executes a stay stage transition lottery (a lottery to determine whether or not to change the stay stage), and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). If the answer is No in step 3006, then proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3002, then in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is a "low probability state". If the answer is Yes in step 3010, then in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game, executes a stay stage transition lottery, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the state of the AT of the game is "AT in progress state". If the answer is Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the AT performance determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the state of the AT of the game is "resurrection possible or not performance state". If the answer is Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the revival possible or not performance determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the preview performance and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state regarding the AT of the game, and the state regarding the AT of the next game, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2300). Note that the stay stage refers to the performance that is mainly the background performance displayed on the performance display device S40, and is configured so that one of the stay stages is always set. Note that if the stay stage is different, the tendency of various performances such as background performance and preview performance will differ.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a process for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect, which is called and executed in the process of step 3050 in FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. If Yes in step 3054, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether to execute a battle performance execution lottery (battle performance (win)) that has a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2) of winning. (lottery) will be held. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the battle performance execution possibility lottery executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be a battle effect (win), and moves to the next process (the process in step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect other than the battle effect, and moves to the next process (the process in step 3006). Here, the battle performance is a continuous performance that is performed over multiple games, and by winning the battle performance, that is, by executing the battle performance (victory), you can win the BB role and enter the AT lottery. It is structured so that it is certain that you have won. The configuration regarding battle performance is not limited to this, but if the player wins the BB role even if he or she does not win the AT lottery (after the BB ends, the player will move to a "low probability state" or "high probability state") ) may be configured to perform a battle performance (victory).

Also, if the answer is No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the condition device related to the game is a rare role. Here, in this example, the rare roles are Winning-C (Cherry), Winning-D (Watermelon A), and Winning-E (Watermelon B), which are roles that can be won together with the BB role. That is, the player has a sense of expectation that the rare role will be won at the same time as the BB role when the rare role is stopped and displayed. If the answer is Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a fake battle performance execution lottery (a lottery to execute a battle performance (lose) or not) that is won with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example, which is a probability lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056). Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether the fake battle performance execution lottery executed in step 3066 has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 3068, then in step 3070 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a battle presentation (loss), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3006). If the answer is No in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, then in step 3072 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation related to the game to be a presentation other than a battle presentation, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3006). Here, the battle presentation (loss) may be configured to be executed even in the "normal section".

In this way, when the number of high probability games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, for example 4 or more, continuous effects such as battle effects can be executed across multiple games, whereas when the number of high probability games is less than a predetermined number, for example less than 4, continuous effects such as battle effects are not executed. This prevents the advantageous zone indicator YH from turning off due to a transition to a "low probability state" (setting of a "normal zone") even in the middle of executing a continuous effect, and by executing a battle effect only when it is possible to ensure that the advantageous zone indicator YH will remain lit until the battle effect ends, the player's expectations of winning the BB are not diminished, making for a user-friendly gaming machine.

In addition, when winning a rare role, the system is configured so that continuous effects such as battle effects (defeat) can be performed, so the frequency of battle effects can be guaranteed and the game can always be played with a sense of anticipation. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. Note that only a portion of the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is extracted. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is a table used when the game is in a "low probability state" and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. There are three types of tables: a table, and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less.

The current stage determination table used when the game is in a "low probability state" prescribes the relationship between the current current stage, the state regarding the AT of the next game, the current current stage of the game, and the corresponding number of places. When in a "low probability state", the current current stage consists of two presentation stages: the desert stage and the town stage, and the stages to transition to consist of four presentation stages: the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "low probability state", "playing inside normal BB", and "high probability state".

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game moves to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", a number from 0 to 979 is assigned as the number if the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, if the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal medium game", the number to be set when transitioning from the desert stage to the town stage in the game is 980 ~ 999 is assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB", 0 to 19 are assigned as the number to be set when transitioning from the town stage to the desert stage in that game. If the current stage is the town stage and the next game will transition to a "low probability state" or "play inside normal BB", 20 to 999 are assigned as the number to be set when the town stage is maintained in that game.

Further, when the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to shift to a "high probability state", a number from 0 to 249 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. If the current stage of stay is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers for transitioning from the desert stage to the town stage in the game. When the current stage of stay is the desert stage and the next game is to shift to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers for shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in that game. When the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", 750 to 999 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a town stage and the next game is to transition to a "high probability state", a number from 0 to 249 is assigned as a number when the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a town stage and the town stage is maintained in the next game when the town stage is maintained. If the current stage of stay is the town stage and the next game is to shift to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 is assigned as the number for shifting from the town stage to the conference room stage in that game. If the current stage of stay is the town stage and the next game is to transition to the "high probability state", a number from 750 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the town stage to the cave stage in the game.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the current skeleton game, and the number of placements is specified. has been done. The current stay stage and transition stage consist of four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

If the current stay stage is a desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 are assigned as numbers. 880 to 929 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. If the current stage of stay is the desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the conference room stage, numbers 930 to 959 are assigned as numbers. 960 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the current stay stage is a desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the cave stage.

When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to transition from the town stage to the desert stage, a number between 0 and 879 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to maintain the town stage, a number between 880 and 929 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to transition from the town stage to the conference room stage, a number between 930 and 959 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the town stage and the game is to transition from the town stage to the cave stage, a number between 960 and 999 is assigned as the number to be entered.

When the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage, a value between 0 and 49 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage, a value between 50 and 99 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is maintaining the conference room stage, a value between 100 and 949 is assigned as the number to be entered. When the current stage is the conference room stage and the game is transitioning from the conference room stage to the cave stage, a value between 950 and 999 is assigned as the number to be entered.

When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the desert stage, a number between 0 and 49 is assigned as the number to be placed. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the town stage, a number between 50 and 99 is assigned as the number to be placed. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to transition from the cave stage to the conference room stage, a number between 100 and 199 is assigned as the number to be placed. When the current stage is the cave stage and the game is to remain in the cave stage, a number between 200 and 999 is assigned as the number to be placed.

The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high guaranteed obstacle games is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the next game, and the stay stage of the current corpse game. , the relationship with the position number is specified. The current stay stage and transition stage consist of four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal medium game", and "low probability state".

If the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "high probability state" or "playing inside an advantageous BB", the numbers 0 to 979 are assigned as the number to be placed if the desert stage is to be maintained in that game. If the current stage is the desert stage and the next game transitions to a "high probability state" or "playing inside an advantageous BB", the numbers 980 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed if the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage.

If the current stay stage is a town stage and the next game is to move to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when moving from the town stage to the desert stage in that game is 0 to 19. Assigned. If the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", a number between 20 and 999 is assigned as the number if the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set is 0 to 0 when transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in that game. 29 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal medium game", the number to be set when transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in that game is 30 ~ 59 has been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game moves to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", the number to be set is 60 to 999 if the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Assigned.

When the current stay stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "game in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 0 to 29 are assigned as the number to be placed when the game will transition from the cave stage to the desert stage. When the current stay stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "game in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 30 to 59 are assigned as the number to be placed when the game will transition from the cave stage to the town stage. When the current stay stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "game in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 60 to 99 are assigned as the number to be placed when the game will transition from the cave stage to the conference room stage. When the current stay stage is the cave stage and the game will transition to a "high probability state" or "game in an advantageous BB" in the next game, 100 to 999 are assigned as the number to be placed when the game will maintain the cave stage.

If the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 0 to 499 if the desert stage is to be maintained in that game. If the current stage is the desert stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 500 to 999 if the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage.

If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 0 to 499 if the game will transition from the town stage to the desert stage. If the current stage is the town stage and there is a transition to a "low probability state" in the next game, the number assigned to the player is 500 to 999 if the game will maintain the town stage.

If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to the "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. If the current stage of stay is the conference room stage and the next game is to transition to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the conference room stage to the town stage in the game.

If the current stage of stay is a cave stage and the next game is to transition to a "low probability state", a number from 0 to 499 is assigned as a number for transitioning from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game is to transition to a low probability state, a number from 500 to 999 is assigned as the number for transitioning from the cave stage to the town stage in the game.

In this way, when the state is in the "low probability state", two stages, the desert stage or the city stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when the state is in the "high probability state", four stages can be selected: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous section," while two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section," and two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section." Stay stage 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". With this configuration, even in the "normal section" where there is no hope of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a stay stage that can be a stay stage in the "advantageous section", the player will not get bored even in the "normal section". You can advance the game machine. In addition, when transitioning from a "high probability state" to a "low probability state", that is, when changing from an "advantageous section" to a "normal section", the "normal section" is selected at the "advantageous section" stage. By selecting the performance stage in advance, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", and it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation and continue playing the game.

In addition, some of the presentation stages selected in the "normal section" may overlap with the presentation stages selected in the "advantageous section" (there may be presentation stages that can be selected in the "normal section" but not in the "advantageous section").

In addition, by differentiating the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-security obstacle games is 4 or more from the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-security obstacle games is 3 or less, and configuring it so that when the number of high-security obstacle games decreases (below 3 games), there is no transition to a stay stage with a higher expectation that is a "favorable zone" than the current stay stage (for example, from desert stage to conference room stage), it is possible to prevent disappointment for the player by transitioning to a stay stage with a higher expectation after a small number of games, despite having transitioned to a stay stage with a higher expectation. The stay stages are arranged in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" from those with the lowest expectation that are "favorable zones" (hard to select in "favorable zones").

The configuration of the stay stage is not limited to that in this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage may be configured to suggest the expectation of being in the "favorable zone", the expectation of winning the AT lottery, and the expectation of winning the BB. As an example, the stay stage may be configured to shift in a game in which the BB role or rare role is won (including the case where the AT lottery is won by the BB role and the case where the AT lottery is not executed due to winning a single rare role), and the expectation of winning the AT lottery may differ depending on the stay stage to which the player has shifted, and the order of the expectation may be "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in descending order of expectation, or the expectation of winning the BB role may differ depending on the stay stage to which the player has shifted, and the order of the expectation may be "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in descending order of expectation (for example, when the player shifts to the conference room stage, it is confirmed that the player is in the BB internal win or has won the AT lottery, etc.).

Next, Figure 45 is a subroutine showing the AT performance determination process that is called and executed in the processing of step 3100 of Figure 42. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of games remaining in the AT is 3 or less. If the answer is Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether this is the final game of the AT. If the answer is Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the continuation lottery has been won. If the answer is Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the presentation for the game to be an AT continuation prompting presentation (success) (the AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60, in other words, a presentation informing the player that the AT status of the next game will be "AT in progress") or an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) (the AT continues and the initial value is not set in the AT counter M60, and the AT status of the next game will be "AT in progress" or "resurrection possibility presentation state"), and proceeds to step 3126. Here, if the continuation lottery is won, the ratio of the AT continuation prompting presentation (success) to the AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4 to 1. That is, in this embodiment, even if the continuation lottery is won, the AT continuation prompting effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, the revival effect (success) will be executed in the next game corresponding to the first game of the next set, so that the player feels as if he or she has won the revival lottery (in reality, the continuation lottery is won, and the control on the main control board M side is the same as when the AT continuation prompting effect (success) is executed). By configuring in this way, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the "revival possible or not performance state" (2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) lotteries are won in one game), but by configuring so that the revival effect (success) can be executed even if the continuation effect is won, the rate at which the revival effect (success) is executed when the revival effect is executed can be increased, and the player can increase his or her expectations for the revival effect.

Also, if the answer is No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decides that the presentation related to the game is an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) and proceeds to step 3126. Also, if the answer is No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decides that the presentation related to the game is an AT end stage presentation and proceeds to step 3126. Also, if the answer is No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the next game is one in which an AT continuation prompting presentation (failure) was executed. If the answer is Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S decides that the presentation related to the game is a revival presentation (success) (a presentation mode similar to the revival presentation (success) executed in the "revival possibility presentation state", and in this process, a presentation related to the fact that the "AT in progress state" has continued), and proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3114, proceed to step 3126.

Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added to the game. If Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an additional effect related to the game (an effect notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, "+50 GET", etc.) ) and moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the performance related to the game to be a performance during AT (a performance executed during AT such as "AT state"), and performs the next process ( The process moves to step 2300 (processing in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine illustrating a process for determining whether or not a revival is possible, which is called and executed in the process of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S restores the performance related to the game (success) (successfully) (the same performance mode as the performance executed in step 3116 described above), This is a performance that notifies you that you have won the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", and in the next game, it will transition to the "AT state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60). It is determined, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the performance related to the game to a revival performance (failed) (in the "resurrection possibility state", the CPUSC did not win the revival lottery) This is an effect that notifies the user that the game will be moved to a "low probability state" in the next game), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2300).

As mentioned above, the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible" is also an advantageous zone; that is, even if the continuation lottery is not won in the final game of the AT (the final game of the "AT in progress" state), which is an "advantageous zone", the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible" is configured to be extended in the next game, the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible". Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the revival effect will be successful just by checking whether or not the advantageous zone indicator YH is lit, and the player will have to pay attention to the result of the revival effect. Also, as mentioned above, the manner in which the lottery for the AT is executed differs between the "state in progress" and the "state for determining whether or not a revival is possible". In other words, the manner in which the lottery for the AT is executed differs between the next game in which the continuation lottery in which a revival effect (success) is won and the game in which the revival lottery in which a revival effect (success) is won.

In the present embodiment, the system is configured such that in the next game after the AT state ends, a transition is made to a "resurrection possibility presentation state" for one game, and a resurrection lottery is executed in the "resurrection possibility presentation state". By doing so, both the execution game of the revival effect (success) and the execution game of the revival effect (failure) are set as "advantageous sections", that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to light up, the effect of the revival effect is Although it has been prevented from being possible to determine whether or not AT ends without checking the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows. (1) The AT-related state is set to "AT in progress" even in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, the revival flag is turned on in one game in which a revival lottery is executed, and the resurrection flag is turned on in the game before the revival lottery is executed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode regarding AT is obtained. (2) It is configured so that the revival lottery is not executed, and the control on the main control board M side is configured so that whether or not the "AT state" ends is determined solely by whether or not the player wins the continuation lottery, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the final AT game (one game before the final AT game, the first game of the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival effect (success) and a revival effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. Examples of productions include "The game before the final AT game: Production to incite AT continuation (successful) → Final game at AT: Production to indicate that the next set of AT will start", "The game before the final AT game: Production to incite AT continuation" Production (continues to next game) → AT final game: AT continuation promotion production (success)", "Previous game of AT final game: AT continuation promotion production (failure) → AT final game: revival production (success)", "AT It may be configured such that the previous game before the final game: AT continuation promotion effect (failure) → AT final game: revival effect (failure), etc. are executed. That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuation lottery is won. It may also be configured to perform an AT continuation promotion effect or a revival effect. (3) In a game where a resurrection effect (success) is executed, the effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and from that predetermined timing, the resurrection effect (success) is announced. In other words, it may be configured to notify the player that AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is (1) the bet button operation timing (gaming medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the player has won the continuous lottery. (2) This is the start lever operation timing for the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect mode is the same as the resurrection effect (defeat). (3) The timing of pressing the stop button that becomes the first stop of the game where the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing when the first stop is turned on), (4) The resurrection effect (success) ) is executed, the timing when the stop button is pressed and the stop button is released after the first stop (timing when the first stop turns from on to off) is executed, and (5) the revival effect (success) is executed. Timing of pressing the stop button that causes the second stop related to the game (timing when the second stop is turned on), (6) Pressing the stop button that causes the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed The timing when the second stop button is released (timing when the second stop turns from on to off), and the timing when the stop button is pressed which is the third stop related to the game in which the (7) resurrection effect (success) is executed (the third stop) (8) Timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button, which is the third stop related to the game where the revival effect (success) is executed (timing when the third stop turns from on to off) ), etc., (9) bet button operation timing (gaming medal insertion timing) for the game following the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and (10) the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed. It may also be the start lever operation timing for the next game, etc. In addition, if the configuration is such that the timing is determined by lottery among the various timings as in (1) to (10) above, after the timing when the stop button that is the first stop is pressed, , even if the player has not won either the continuation lottery or the revival lottery, the advantageous section indicator YH continues to light up, so the player presses the stop button which is the third stop, and then presses the stop button. The player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing when the player releases the key or the start lever operation timing for the next game after the game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Start lever operation process> Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation process that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT status is in the AT state. If the answer is Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the AT status is in the AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads and executes the AT in progress processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later, and transitions to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2302, in other words, if the AT-related state is not the AT-in-progress state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the AT-related state is a specialization precursor state or not. Determine whether If Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the AT-related state is a specialization precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out specialization precursor processing when operating the start lever, which will be described later. The process is executed and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to AT is not the "specialization precursor state", in step 2306, CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state related to AT is "additional specialization state". ”. If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to AT is "additional specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs additional specialization processing when operating the start lever, which will be described later. It is read and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "additional specialization state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal It is determined whether or not it is a game. If Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the subroutine of advantageous BB internal medium processing when the start lever is operated. is called and executed, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not "advantageous BB internal medium game", in step 2308 CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is "RT1" or not. Determine. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board It is determined whether the state is related to an AT that does not occur and is a "low probability state," "normal BB internal medium game," "normal BB state," etc.). If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state regarding the AT is without push order navigation, then in step 2312 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. Note that, as described above, the configuration is not such that the sub-control board S side can execute effects related to push-order navigation when the sub-control board S side receives a reverse-press instruction command, a reverse-press avoidance command, a forward-press instruction command, and a forward-press avoidance command. If you win the AT add-on lottery, the main control board M side sends a command to the sub-control board S to the effect that you have won the AT-add lottery and the number of AT add-on games, and the sub-control board S receives the command. Furthermore, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and presentation mode of the effects related to the push order navigation.

If Yes in step 2312, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the image to be avoided as a press order navigation display to the first number display mode group. is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). In this way, in the present embodiment, the state transitions from the "RT1" and "AT in progress state" to the "RT1" and "low probability state" as the number of games passes and the AT counter value becomes 0. In this case (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if you win the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 match replay, the number of AT games will not be added, so white 7 or black 7 It is configured so that the order of presses that is not in a straight line is navigated. In addition, if the AT counter value becomes 0 after the number of games has passed from the state of "RT1" and "AT in progress" and the state shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", the state is still in the "advantageous section". '', the push order navigation can be generated in a game where the push order bell is won, but the push order navigation may not be generated in a game where the push order replay is won.

In the case of No in step 2308, in the case of No in step 2310, and in the case of No in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the effect image and the background image based on the state related to AT in step 2316, and then displays the next image. (step 2110).

<Processing during AT when the start lever is operated> Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing the process during the AT when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 in FIG. 47.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in step 2352, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game in step 2354, and checks the command related to the instruction number in step 2356. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and when transmitting a performance group number in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as a "low probability state" (which also applies when the play area is the "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M transmits the performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number. For example, this can be applied when the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display when the push order replay is configured to be displayed in the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers, and the display color related to the numbers is the same). Also, when configured in this way, the performance display device S40 may be configured to display a performance image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display when the push order navigation is executed, and different performance images may be displayed when the push order navigation related to the push order bell is executed and when the push order navigation related to the push order replay is executed.

Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device of the game is a push order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the aforementioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

If the answer is Yes in step 2358, in other words if the condition device for the game is a push order bell, then in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six possible push orders for the push order bell in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A1, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum payout number, are displayed in a display mode surrounded by a circle.

Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S indicates that the condition device of the game is the push order re-game. Determine whether or not. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If the answer is Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, step 2364
Then, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the three options for push order replay on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. Here, since there are three options for the push order, the information corresponds to the first stop button to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, if the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device for the game is push-order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. If Yes in step 2366, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment in the first numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above, and then in step 2370, displays the background image during AT on the performance display device S40.

Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less. If the answer is Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games on the performance display device S40 in display mode B (a display mode that is less noticeable than display mode A described below).

Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a push-in-order command. If the answer is Yes in step 2376, in other words if it has received a push-in-order command, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that avoids the occurrence of the push-in-order command in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as the push-in-order navigation display.

If the answer is No in step 2376, or if the processing of step 2378 has been executed, then in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2380, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command has been received, then in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image that avoids the formation of a push order navigation display in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40.

If the result in step 2380 is No, or if the process in step 2382 has been executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the process to proceed to the next process (the process in step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of games remaining in the AT is 4 or more, then in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of games remaining in the AT on the performance display device S40 in display mode A (a display mode that is more noticeable than the display mode B described above). Here, if the number is 4 or more, it is displayed in display mode A, and if the number is 3 or less, it is displayed in display mode B.

Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a forward push instruction command has been received. If the result in step 2386 is Yes, in other words, if the order push instruction command is received, then in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S supports "left → middle → right" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed as an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40.

If the result in step 2386 is No, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. If Yes in step 2390, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, then in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S supports "right → middle → left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be pressed is displayed as an image of an arrow on the effect display device S40.

If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines No in step 2390, or if the process in step 2392 is executed, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2110). In this way, when the number of AT remaining games is small, in other words, when the AT remaining number of games is displayed in display mode B, which is more conspicuous than display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, the effect that displays "Aim for 7!" with an arrow image is not executed, and the white seven and black seven are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line.The middle reel, which is the push order, is moved to the first stop reel. It was configured to execute push-order navigation. With this configuration, in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small, when the number of AT remaining games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player that the number of AT remaining games is small. In this case, the display of the arrow image or the message "Aim for 7!" can be configured so as not to obstruct the visibility of the display of the number of AT remaining games in display mode B. Similarly, continuous effects (for example, , battle effects), the configuration is configured so that the arrow image and "Aim for 7!" are not displayed while the battle effects are being executed, so as not to impede the visibility of the battle effects. be able to. Moreover, by configuring in this way, even if the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and the battle effect is defeated and the "AT in progress state" is displayed to be terminated, the battle effect during the battle effect is displayed. If a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the “AT status” is displayed. Notify the number of AT additional games based on the instruction command (based on the winning of forward press black 7 replay or reverse press white 7 replay), that is, notify that the number of AT games has been added in the game where the AT addition lottery was won. First, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Start lever operation specialization precursor processing> Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation specialization precursor processing that is called and executed in the process of step 2400 in FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2404, confirms winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2406, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the effect group number in the same way as in a state related to an AT where push order navigation is not executed, and uses the effect group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6.

If the answer is Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six options of the push order bell in the second number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A2, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order "left → right → center" that can win the maximum payout number are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display the numbers suggesting the push order in different display mode groups, for example, the first number display mode group may display the numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group may display the numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay Determine whether or not. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, then in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a second number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, this is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, press order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped on the effect display device S40.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not push order replay, then in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a push order command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2416, in other words, if a push order command has been received, then in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right" as an arrow image on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push command has not been received, then in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as the avoidance command. If Yes in step 2424, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, then in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image for avoiding the establishment in the second numerical display mode as a press order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or if the answer is No at step 2424, then at step S2428, it displays the background image during the AT on the performance display device S40, and at step S2430, it displays the number of remaining games in the AT in display mode A on the performance display device S40, and transitions to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

<Start Lever Operation Specialization Process> Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation specialization process that is called and executed in step 2450 of FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information regarding the condition device related to the game, in step 2454, confirms winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2456, the instruction number Check the related commands. In this way, in the AT-related state where the push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M sends commands related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, and When transmitting the production group number in a state related to AT where push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is "normal section"), it is not necessary to send a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, even if the main control board M is in a state related to an AT where push order navigation can be executed, it transmits the effect group number in the same way as in a state related to an AT where push order navigation is not executed, and uses the effect group number and instruction number. Based on such commands, the player may be configured to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order.

Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is the push order bell or the common bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6 and prize-winning-B.

If the answer is Yes in step 2458, in other words if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, then in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the correct push order among the six options for the push order bell in the first number display mode group on the performance display device S40 as a push order navigation display. The push order is information that corresponds the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, respectively. For example, if the push order bell, Winning-A4, is won, the numbers suggesting the push order corresponding to the push order that can obtain the maximum payout number, "right → left → middle," are displayed in a display mode surrounded by stars. The first and second number display mode groups described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the press order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462, CPUSC of the sub control board S is set as the condition device of the game. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the re-game in the push order is one of re-games-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push-order replay, then in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push-order replay as a push-order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is information that makes the first stop button correspond to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the push order is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not a push order replay, then in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a push order command. If the answer is Yes in step 2466, in other words, if it has received a push order command, then in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "left → middle → right" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40. In other words, since the push order is to push in order, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43, and the push order can be suggested by the image of an arrow pointing from left to right.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push command has not been received, then in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a reverse push command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push command has been received, then in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image suggesting the push order corresponding to "right → middle → left" as a push order navigation display in the form of an arrow image on the performance display device S40. In other words, since the push order is reverse push, the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button are, in order, the right stop button D43, middle stop button D42, and left stop button D41, and the push order can be suggested by the image of an arrow pointing from right to left.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. If the answer is Yes in step 2474, in other words, if the avoidance command has been received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image to avoid the formation of the button on the performance display device S40 in the first number display mode group as a push order navigation display. Here, the avoidance command collectively refers to both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the processing of step 2476 is executed whether the forward push avoidance command or the reverse push avoidance command has been received. For example, if the forward push avoidance command has been received, in order to avoid the forward push "left → middle → right", the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the performance display device S40, and information is displayed as if the first stop button is the right stop button D43, as the push order navigation display.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processes in steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476 described above, or in the case of No in 2474, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs an effect display of the background image during AT in step 2480. In step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode A, and the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2110).

<Processing during advantageous BB when the start lever is operated> Next, FIG. 51 shows a subroutine showing processing during advantageous BB when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2700 in FIG. 47.

Next, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game, in step 2704, checks the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and in step 2706, checks the command related to the instruction number. In this way, in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, such as "AT in progress", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and when transmitting a performance group number in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, such as "low probability state" (this also applies when the play area is a "normal area"), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. Furthermore, even in a state related to the AT where push order navigation can be executed, the main control board M may be configured to transmit the performance group number in the same way as in a state related to the AT where push order navigation is not executed, and to be able to know that the push order bell (or push order replay) has been won and the correct push order based on the performance group number and the command related to the instruction number.

Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined number of games (5 games) have elapsed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB. If the answer is Yes in step 2708, in other words, if a predetermined number of games (5 games) have not elapsed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB, then in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for that game is the push order bell or the common bell. Here, the push order bell is any of the aforementioned prize-winning-A1 to prize-winning-A6, or prize-winning-B.

If Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information that makes each of the first stop button, second stop button, and third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43. For example, if you win the push order bell, Winning - A4, the numbers that indicate the push order that corresponds to "Right → Left → Middle", which is the push order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are surrounded by stars. Display in the specified display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group described above may display numbers indicating the pressing order in mutually different display mode groups.For example, the first number display mode group may display numbers indicating the pressing order. may be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

Next, if the answer is No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device for the game is push order replay. Here, push order replay is any of replay-D1 to D3.

If Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push-order replay, then in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays push-order replay as a push-order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three options is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is that the first stop button corresponds to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct pressing order, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In this case, the number "1" is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the number "1" is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the push order is displayed near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a press order replay, in step 2718, CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command regarding 7 replays. Determine whether or not. Here, the forward press instruction command, reverse press instruction command, forward press avoidance command, and reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replay is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to avoid the occurrence of the first number as a push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in display mode groups.

Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or if the answer is No in step 2718, in step 2722, it displays the background image during the AT on the performance display device S40, and in step S2724, it displays the number of games remaining in the AT in display mode A on the performance display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the processing of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2708, in other words if a certain number of games (5 games) have passed since the transition to play inside the advantageous BB, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will notify the player that the BB has been won on the performance display device S40 (the push order navigation is not displayed in this process), and transition to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of receiving the first stop of the drum> Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the process at the time of receiving the stop of the first drum stop, which is called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Determine whether or not.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is a stop button operation based on the correct press order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is set in the press order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2504, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct push order for the first stop, then in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the push order navigation related to the forward push navigation or reverse push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replay is a general term for the forward push black 7 line replay and the reverse push white 7 line replay. If the answer is Yes in step 2508, then in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkens the push order navigation (it remains darkened during the game) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

If the answer is No in step 2508, in other words if the push order navigation for 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all push order navigation displays, executes a push order failure presentation, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing when second drum stop is accepted> Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing a process when second drum stop is accepted, which is called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the conditional device related to the game is a press order bell, then in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a stop button based on the correct press order as a second stop. Determine whether or not there is an operation.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2556, in other words, if the stop button is operated based on the correct push order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the display related to the second stop in the push order navigation display and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2556, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct push order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all push order navigation displays, executes a push order failure presentation, and transitions to the next process (the process of step 2110).

Next, if the answer is No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or if the answer is No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, the process immediately proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<3rd drum stop performance related determination process> Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the 3rd drum stop performance related determination process that is called and executed in step 3200 of FIG. 41.

Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB role has won. If the answer is Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role has won, then in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB role has won during non-AT ("low probability state" or "high probability state"). If the answer is Yes in step 3204, in other words, if the BB role has won during non-AT, then in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start performance determination table, and determines and executes the BB start performance (the performance executed when the BB role wins) based on the AT state of the game and the BB role, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2600).

Next, if the answer is No in step 3204, in other words if the BB role was won during the AT ("AT state", "addition specialization state", "specialization preparation state" or "revival possibility performance state"), in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the AT BB start performance decision table, and determines and executes the BB start performance based on the state of the AT of the game and the BB role, and proceeds to the next process (processing of step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the performance based on the performance executed in the game, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of Figure 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB in a non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for specifying the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to the AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There are two types of AT-related states: "Normal BB internal play" and "Advantageous BB internal play". There are three types of BB start effects: normal effect, high expectation effect, and premium effect. In addition, the expectation of transitioning to the "AT state" after the BB ends is configured to differ depending on the type of BB start effect in the BB won during a non-AT, and the order from the lowest expectation is "normal effect → high expectation effect → premium effect".

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is normal BB internal play, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "normal BB internal play", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "normal BB internal play", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing inside advantageous BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing in normal BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing in normal BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the AT of the game is "playing in normal BB", the probability that the BB start effect will be a premium effect is 0/256.

If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the normal performance. The probability is 67/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state regarding AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation level effect. The probability of this is 157/256. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) and the AT status of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start performance will be the premium performance. The probability is 32/256.

In the "normal section", even if you win BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) or BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium performance will not be affected. is never selected, and the normal performance is set to be more likely to be selected than the high expectation performance.

Even if you are in a favorable zone, if you win a BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B), the premium effect will not be selected, and it is set so that the normal effect is more likely to be selected than the high expectation effect.

If it is an "advantageous section" and you win BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C), there is a possibility that the premium performance will be selected. With this configuration, it is certain that by selecting the premier performance and winning the BB with no setting difference, the transition to the "AT state" will occur after the BB with no setting difference ends. can be shown to the player. In addition, if you win BB with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C), which is an "advantageous section", there is a higher possibility that the high expectation performance will be selected than the normal performance. (The probability that the normal performance will be selected is low). By doing so, the player can guess whether or not the AT will start after the BB ends by checking the BB start effect, and can feel a sense of anticipation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start performance related to the BB with a setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) that won in the "Normal BB internal medium game" and the BB without the setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) that won in the "Normal BB internal medium game" The distribution is the same as the distribution of BB start effects related to Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). However, this is not limited to this, and the distribution of BB start effects related to BBs with different settings (Type 1 BB-B) won in the "regular BB internal medium game" and the "regular BB internal medium game" The distribution of the BB start effects for winning BBs with no setting difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C) may be different, and by configuring this way, the BB start effect for BBs with a setting difference may be distributed differently. The distribution can be configured to be different depending on whether it is a performance or a BB start performance related to a BB with no setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for specifying the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to the AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB roles: BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and BB without setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C). There is one type of state related to AT: "Playing inside advantageous BB". There are two types of BB start effects: an effect that can be added and an effect that cannot be added. The effect that can be added is an effect that suggests that an AT addition lottery can be executed during the execution of BB, and the effect that cannot be added is an effect that suggests that an AT addition lottery will not be executed during the execution of BB. For BBs that are won during AT, there is no element of whether or not they will win the AT lottery, and whether or not an AT addition lottery will be executed may differ depending on the type of BB. In addition, during the AT, even in a BB with a setting difference where the AT addition lottery is not executed, game medals can be acquired, and after the BB ends, the player is in an AT that is advantageous to the player, so the BB that is executed is configured to clearly notify whether or not the AT addition lottery will be executed. Specific examples are described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be an additional performance is 0/ 256, and no additional effects are executed. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (Type 1 BB-B) and the AT-related state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the probability that the BB start performance will be a non-additional performance is 256/ 256, and the no-addition effect is always executed. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is an add-on effect. The probability of this is 256/256, and the add-on effect will definitely be executed. If the BB role is BB with no setting difference (type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a non-addition effect. The probability that this will happen is 0/256, and the effect that cannot be added on will not be executed.

<Processing when the third drum stop is accepted> Next, FIG. 55 shows a subroutine that shows the processing when the third drum stop is accepted, which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 in FIG. 41.

Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If the answer is Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. If the answer is Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, then in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop button based on the correct push order has been operated as the third stop.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2606, in other words, if the stop button is operated based on the correct push order as the third stop, then in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays "GET!" on the effect display device S40 as a successful push order effect. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2606, in other words, if the stop button is not operated based on the correct push order as the third stop, then in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not display "GET!" as a successful push order effect.

If the answer is No in step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, if the answer is No in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device for the game is not the push order bell, or if the processing of step 2608 or 2610 is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of games to be added to the AT (the command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M sends a command indicating the number of games remaining in the AT to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S may be configured to calculate the difference from the command indicating the number of games remaining in the AT received last time to determine whether the number of games has been added to the AT and the number of games to be added to the AT, and to display the number of games to be added to the AT.

Next, if the answer is Yes in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has been received from the main side, then in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of AT added games on the performance display device S40 and transitions to the next process (the processing of step 2110). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, then in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S transitions to the next process (the processing of step 2110) without displaying the number of AT added games on the performance display device S40. In addition, the number of games added to the AT can be notified in the following manner: (1) the entire number of games added is notified in the game; (2) a portion of the number of games added is notified in the game, and the remaining number is notified in a game after the game; or (3) the number of games added is not notified in the game, but is notified in a game after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when a common bell is won (when a role that is not normally added is won), after multiple games (continuous performances) are played, when the number of remaining games on the performance display device S40 becomes "0", or when the bet button D220 or start lever D50 is operated in the next game after the game in which the number of remaining games becomes "0").

In addition, if you win the common bell in the "addition specialized state", the number of AT addition games will not be displayed even if you stop the machine according to the push order navigation (AT addition lottery is not held with the common bell).

By configuring as described above, according to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH lights up in the "advantageous section", a period that is advantageous for the player can be determined. can be configured to be able to appropriately notify. In addition, by providing a "resurrection availability state", when a continuation performance is won and the revival performance (success) is subsequently executed, the state regarding the AT of the game in which the resurrection performance (success) is executed is Since it is in the "AT state", the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, and on the other hand, even if the continuation performance is not won and the revival performance (failure) is executed afterwards, the revival performance (failure) will be executed. By setting the state related to the AT of the game to be a "resurrection possibility state" and the state related to the AT to be an "advantageous section," the advantageous section indicator YH will light up. By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the resurrection effect is successful or unsuccessful by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in a game in which the resurrection effect is executed. In a gaming machine that is configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to ensure a highly entertaining gaming machine.

In this example, the system is configured so that if a BB role is won in the "high probability state", the AT lottery can be won, and after the BB ends, the system can transition to the "AT in progress state", but the AT configuration is not limited to that of this example, and for example, the system can be configured so that a rare role such as a cherry can win the AT lottery (even roles other than the BB role can win), and if the AT lottery is won, the AT state can transition to the "AT precursor state", and the system can transition to the "AT in progress state" by playing a predetermined number of games (e.g., 10 games) in the "AT precursor state".

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of menu screen display control processing according to the subroutine of step 7100 in FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is hidden on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub-input button SB, etc., and allows the player to select from a plurality of items to check various settings and information regarding the gaming machine. There is a screen that allows you to An example of how to select and decide an item is to operate the cross key SB2 (having four buttons: up button, down button, left button, and right button) to move the cursor to the desired item. By operating the sub-input button SB, the currently selected item (the cursor is on it) is determined, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. Furthermore, the menu screen may have multiple display modes; for example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. They are all referred to as menu screens even if there are differences between them.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen> Examples of items that can be selected on the menu screen are listed below. (1) Volume adjustment: The player may be configured to be able to adjust the volume output from the game machine. For example, after displaying a screen corresponding to volume adjustment, operating the right button of cross key SB2 will output the volume. It may be configured such that the volume increases and when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the output volume decreases. (2) Light intensity adjustment: The player may be able to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50). For example, after displaying the screen corresponding to light intensity adjustment, operating the upper button of four-way controller SB2 will increase the light intensity (brightness), and operating the lower button of four-way controller SB2 will decrease the light intensity (brightness). (dark). (3) Character customization: You can now select and change the characters that appear during the game (main character, push order navigation voice, opponent characters, characters that support the game progress that are always displayed on the production display device S40, etc.) After displaying a screen corresponding to character customization, the character customization is determined by placing the cursor on the character to be selected using the cross key SB2 and operating the sub-input button SB. (4) Reel array table: The reel array may be configured to be displayable on a screen corresponding to the reel array table. (5) Payout table: The screen corresponding to the payout table may be configured to display a payout table (a list of symbol combinations that constitute replays or winning combinations when displayed in a stopped state). Note that when the payout table is divided into a plurality of screens and displayed, the screen of the payout table may be switched by using the left and right buttons of the cross key SB2, for example.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if the answer is Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S judges whether or not the menu screen is in a state in which it is possible to display the menu screen. Here, the menu screen displayable state is a state in which the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen, such as the operation of the sub-input button SB (which may be configured to display the menu screen over time) is performed, and as a specific example, it may be configured as follows. (1) The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the timing of the end of the game (the timing of turning the third stop button from ON to OFF, the timing of display judgment, the timing of the completion of the payout based on the winning, the timing of setting or sending a command related to the end of the game to the sub-control board S as the game end processing, the timing of the sub-control board S receiving the command related to the end of the game, etc.) without the game progressing (there is no new betting operation, there is no new automatic betting operation based on the stop display of the replay, there is no new operation of the start lever, there is no new start of the reel rotation, etc.) (until then, the menu screen is not displayed even if the sub-input button SB is operated). The betting operation includes both the betting by operating the bet button D220 and the betting by inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 (an automatic bet based on the stop display of the replay may also be included in the betting operation). (2-1) The menu screen may not be displayed during the execution of the game (when the game medal is bet, during the waiting period until the reel rotation starts, during the reel rotation). (2-2) The menu screen may be displayed during the execution of the game (when the game medal is bet, etc.). (3) The menu screen may not be displayed during the execution of a predetermined performance (when a performance that notifies whether or not a bonus has been won, when a continuous performance that is executed over a plurality of games, when a performance that notifies whether or not an AT game number addition lottery has been won, etc.). (4) The menu screen may not be displayed during the stop display of the replay role. Furthermore, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, when the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-input button SB (the LED provided inside the sub-input button SB) may be configured to flash.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 7104, in step 7106 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. Note that in this example, the operation for displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB, but even if the operation for displaying the menu screen is changed, it may be configured to have multiple operations for displaying the menu screen. . In the case of Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to a standby screen to be described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is counting time). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time to transition from the menu screen to the standby screen, which will be described later). The timer is started by setting a predetermined time B (in this example, 300 seconds, which is longer than a predetermined time A, which will be described later). Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer counting flag (a flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is counting time), and performs the next process (the process of step 7200). to move to.

Further, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen termination condition is satisfied. The menu screen termination condition is a condition for terminating the display of the menu screen, in other words, switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image), and is a specific example that is satisfied. It may be configured as follows. (1) It may be configured such that the condition is satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new start of rotation of the reels. (2) In a situation where the menu screen continues to be displayed, the time limit may be satisfied when a predetermined time (in this example, predetermined time B, 300 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display of the menu screen. (3) It may be configured to be satisfied by selecting and determining a predetermined item on the menu screen and performing a predetermined operation on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item, for example, when the cursor is placed on the volume adjustment item. By adjusting the volume and operating the sub input button SB, a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment will be displayed. After adjusting the desired volume by operating the cross key SB2, select by operating the sub input button SB again. The volume is set to the medium volume, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes referred to as the normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 7114, in step 7116 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed on the effect display device S40. For example, if the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB while the main character is walking in the forest, then once the menu screen has finished displaying, A screen in which the main character is walking through the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 7200).

Further, if No in step 7114, in step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. If Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets the menu standby timer to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example), and moves to the next process (the process in step 7200). do. Note that even in the case of No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 7200). As described above, in this embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set for a predetermined time B (in this example, 300 In other words, the time taken until the standby screen is displayed is reset from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers for displaying the standby screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to use only one timer for displaying the standby screen. may be configured for use. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer for displaying the standby screen, and the system waits for the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the above-mentioned standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer. It may also be configured to be set on a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned on → off, a predetermined time A (180 seconds) is set in the standby timer, and then, when the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the sub input button SB is operated. When the menu screen starts to be displayed, a predetermined time B (300 seconds) may be set in the standby timer.

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process related to the subroutine of step 7200 in FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen is hidden or not. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the performance display device SG when it is determined that no game has been played for a predetermined time (game is not progressing), and may include repeatedly playing moving images related to the story of the performance executed on the gaming machine, displaying a message saying "Power saving", or displaying a logo mark related to the gaming machine manufacturer. Note that in this example, while a player's operation is required as a condition for displaying the aforementioned menu screen, the standby screen is configured to be displayed without requiring a player's operation.

If Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer counting flag (a flag that turns on when the standby timer is counting, which will be described later) is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button changes from on to off is the timing at which the game ends. If Yes in step 7206, in step 7208 CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. A predetermined time A (in this example, 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above) is set to the predetermined time B, and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7212. Note that in this embodiment, the condition for executing the processing of steps 7208 and 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached, but in addition to this, the sub input button SB may be operated on the menu screen. Accordingly, the condition may be that the image that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed has been displayed (the display of the menu screen has ended).

Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the timer value of the standby timer has become zero. In the case of Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7224. Incidentally, if the answer in step 7206 is No, the process also moves to step 7224.

Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu standby timer counting flag is on. If YES in step 7224, in step 7226 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the standby timer counting flag, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). Note that even in the case of No in step 7224 or step 7226, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 2110).

Further, if No in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer counting flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing termination condition is satisfied. do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition that causes the standby timer to stop counting and clear the timer value of the standby timer to zero, and that there is a new bet operation or a new start lever operation. In addition, the condition for ending the standby timer is that the reels start rotating anew. If Yes in step 7238, the process moves to step 7212; on the other hand, if No in step 7238, the process moves to step 7216.

Further, if No in step 7202, in step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen, and in this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new reel rotation. Started, etc. are the conditions for ending the standby screen. Note that it may be configured to be able to transition from the standby screen to the menu screen (displaying the menu screen); for example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB while the standby screen is being displayed. It may be configured as follows. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image that was displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and moves to the next process (the process of step 2110). For example, if a screen in which the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, and the standby screen is displayed because the main character has not progressed in game A for a predetermined period of time, the main character can restart the main character by executing a bet operation. A screen showing him walking through the forest will be displayed.

Next, FIG. 58 is an image diagram of the standby screen transition according to this embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated while the menu screen is displayable. After that, while the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, 300 seconds) pass without any operation of the sub-input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and all the reels stop when the third stop button is operated to stop them. 3 minutes (predetermined time A, 180 seconds) pass from the timing when the player releases the third stop button, and during that time, the sub-input button SB or the bet button D220 is not operated, so the standby screen is displayed. In this way, in this example, the standby screen is configured to be displayed when a predetermined time B has passed since the menu screen was displayed and when a predetermined time A has passed since the game ended (when the third stop button is turned from on to off), and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<<Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example>> Here, the configuration of the menu screen and standby screen applicable to the slot machine according to this example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of this embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all of the above-mentioned embodiments, and that there is no problem in combining one or more of them as appropriate.

<Timing when the wait timer starts timing> The timing for setting an initial value in the wait timer that measures the time until the wait screen is displayed and starting timing may be configured as follows: (1) timing starts when the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) is turned on and then off as the final stop operation; (2) timing starts when a display determination is performed; (3) timing starts when a payout based on a winning combination is completed; (4) timing starts when a command related to ending the game is set or sent to the sub-control board S as a game ending process; or (5) timing starts when the sub-control board S receives the command related to ending the game. Also, a predetermined time A (a timer value to be set in the wait timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as the initial value.

<Timing to start measuring the menu standby timer> As the timing to set the initial value to the menu standby timer that measures the time until the menu screen is displayed and start timing, operate the sub input button SB to display the menu screen. The configuration may be such that the time measurement starts from the specified timing. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in a menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. Note that the predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) set in the standby timer described above.

<Configuration related to sub-input button> The menu standby timer may be configured to be reset to its initial value when the menu standby timer is timing. For example, the menu standby timer may be configured to be set to its initial value, a predetermined time B (a timer value to be set in the menu standby timer, e.g., 300 seconds), by operating the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. As one example, the menu standby timer may be set to 300 seconds and timing may begin when the menu screen starts to be displayed, and 100 seconds later, when the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds, the menu standby timer may be reset to 300 seconds by operating the cross key SB2. Also, the menu screen may be started to be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB, and the menu standby timer may be reset to its initial value by operating the cross key SB while the menu screen is being displayed (the screen to which the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 is operated after the menu screen is started to be displayed may also be the menu screen), or the menu standby timer may be reset to its initial value by operating the sub-input button SB or cross key SB while the menu screen is being displayed (the screen to which the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 is operated after the menu screen is started to be displayed may also be the menu screen).

<Configuration regarding the stop button> When the standby timer is counting, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation, and then place the bet. The standby timer may be configured not to reset the initial value even if the stop buttons (left stop button, middle stop button, and right stop button) are operated in a situation where no operation is being performed. As an example, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, the standby timer is set to 180 seconds, and the timer starts counting. After that, in a situation where no bet operation is performed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, even if you press the stop button, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured so that it remains as it is.

<Configuration for betting operation> When the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been spun to the end) is turned on and then off as the final stop operation while the waiting timer is timing, and then a betting operation is performed (when the bet button D220 is operated to place a bet, or when a gaming medal is inserted into the medal slot D170 to place a bet), the timing of the waiting timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. In other words, when the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been spun to the end) is turned on and then off as the final stop operation while the waiting timer is timing, and then a betting operation is performed without performing any other operation, the waiting screen may be configured not to be displayed as time passes. Note that, in such a configuration, the waiting screen is not displayed as time passes from the betting operation, but the volume of the sound being output may be set to 0 or reduced when a specific time (e.g., 100 seconds) has passed since the betting operation. By configuring in this way, even if the number of remaining game medals falls below the specified number (e.g., 3) (e.g., 1 medal) and the game ends with the remaining 1 game medal bet (e.g., by operating the bet button), or if the game ends with the player having less than the specified number of game medals remaining in the credit (no bet has been made) and the game parlor staff operates the bet button while cleaning the game machine and places a bet, the sound will not be output at an unintended volume. Also, even if the third stop button is turned on and then off as the final stop operation and no bet operation is performed thereafter, the volume of the sound being output may be set to 0 or reduced when the specific time (100 seconds) or the predetermined time A (180 seconds) has elapsed since the timing of turning off the third stop button (which may be the timing when the reels stop).

<Display conditions for the standby screen> The standby screen is configured to be displayed on the condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer, menu standby timer) related to the display of the standby screen changes from "1 to 0". You may. With this configuration, when a bet operation is executed or when some abnormality occurs in timer measurement, the timer value reaches ``0'' without passing through ``1'', such as ``20 → 0''. Even if the standby screen is cleared (zero cleared), the standby screen will not be displayed, and it is possible to prevent the unintended standby screen from being displayed (after that, the timer value will be reset and change from 1 to 0. (It may be configured to display a standby screen if the A flag for displaying a standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Configuration related to the settlement button> When the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) is turned on and then off as the final stop operation while the waiting timer is timing, and then when one or more credits remain, the settlement button is operated to settle the credits, the waiting screen may be configured to be displayed after a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed since the settlement button was operated or when the credit settlement is completed (when the last game medal is returned to the release port D240).

<Configuration related to the setting key switch> The third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) may be turned on and then off as the final stop operation, and then when a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed since the setting key switch was turned off and then on while the power is on, the standby screen may be displayed. Also, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) may be turned on and then off as the final stop operation, and then when the power is on, the front door may be opened and the setting key switch turned off and then on, and then when a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed since the front door was closed.

Also, as a final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (the stop button that corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end), turn it off, and then turn the setting key switch off → on while the power is on. In this case, the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the setting key switch was turned on and then turned off. Also, as a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (the stop button that corresponds to the reel that is spinning to the end), then open the front door while the power is on. When the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON, the standby screen is displayed after a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the front door was closed after turning the setting key switch from ON to OFF. It may be configured as follows. Note that "turning on the stop button" in this example means accepting an operation of the stop button in a situation where the operation of the stop button is valid.

<Configuration for when a specified error occurs> As a final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) is turned on and then off, and then a specified error on the main control board M (for example, an error that occurs when a gaming medal is stuck in the medal selector DS) occurs, and when a specified time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the specified error was released, the standby screen may be displayed.

<Configuration related to the front door> As a final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) and then turn it off, the standby timer starts counting, and then the front door The standby timer may be configured to continue counting even when the switch is opened and the open state is maintained. Also, as a final stop operation, by turning on and then turning off the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), the standby timer starts counting, and then the front door is opened, Thereafter, the standby timer may be configured to continue counting even when the front door is closed.

<Configuration 1 for during AT> In a situation not during AT (for example, when the AT-related state is "normal game state"), if a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) was turned on and then off as the final stop operation, the standby screen may be displayed. On the other hand, in a situation during AT (for example, when the AT-related state is "AT in progress state"), if a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) was turned on and then off as the final stop operation, the standby screen may not be displayed. Similarly, during the execution of continuous performances, during the execution of a bonus, and during ART, the standby screen may not be displayed even if a predetermined time A has elapsed since the end of the final stop operation. In addition, when the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to the AT is "AT in progress"), if a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) was turned on and then off as the final stop operation in a game in which push order navigation was executed, the standby screen may not be displayed, whereas when the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to the AT is "AT in progress"), if a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has spun to the end) was turned on and then off as the final stop operation in a game in which push order navigation was not executed, the standby screen may be displayed.

<Configuration 2 related to during AT> When the menu screen is displayed by operating a sub-input button or the like during AT (for example, when the AT-related state is "AT in progress"), (1) the standby screen can be displayed after a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed, and (2) the normal screen during AT (the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed) can be returned to after the predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed.

<Configuration 3 regarding during AT> In a situation where the AT is not in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "normal gaming state"), the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is used as the final stop operation. ) is configured so that a standby screen can be displayed if a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when it was turned on and then turned off. ), the menu screen is displayed, and if a predetermined time B (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display of the menu screen, the standby screen can be displayed. If the menu screen is displayed and a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the menu screen started displaying, the normal screen during AT (menu screen display) is displayed. The screen may be configured to return to the previously displayed screen. That is, when comparing the time values, it may be configured such that "predetermined time A=predetermined time B<predetermined time C". Note that the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same time value, and it is sufficient that the predetermined time C is the longest time.

<Other configuration 1> A menu screen may be displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed may be configured as follows: (1) a screen identical to the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button; (2) a screen displayed by performing a predetermined operation (selecting and deciding on a predetermined item) from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button; or (3) a screen different from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button. Also, the menu screen may continue to be displayed even if a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed, while the screen displayed before the menu screen was displayed may be restored when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button is displayed. Also, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and a bet is made, a menu screen is displayed, and when a bet button is operated while the standby screen is displayed, the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed (when the standby screen is displayed immediately after power-on, the normal screen displayed during play) is displayed. Also, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed and a bet is made, the menu screen is displayed, and when the standby screen is displayed and the number of game medals stored in the credit is the specified number of three or more, a bet button (for example, a max bet button that allows three medals to be bet with one operation) is operated to make a bet, the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed (when the standby screen is displayed immediately after power-on, the normal screen displayed during play) is displayed, and when the standby screen is displayed and the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of three, a bet button (for example, a max bet button that allows three medals to bet with one operation) is operated to make a bet, the menu screen is displayed.

<Other configuration 2> There may be multiple display modes for the standby screen, and if a predetermined condition is not met (for example, a predetermined condition may be that a password is entered on the menu screen, and the game is continued from the previous game history), a video introducing a story is displayed as the standby screen, but if the predetermined condition is met, a video introducing a character is displayed as the standby screen. In addition, in both cases where the predetermined condition is not met and where the predetermined condition is met, a story introduction and a character introduction may be displayed as the standby screen, but the frequency of displaying either the story introduction or the character introduction may be different depending on whether the predetermined condition is met.

<Other Modification Examples> In addition, in this example, there is a 1st BB combination in which the 1st BB is executed by winning a prize, and a 2nd BB combination in which the 2nd BB, which is lower in profit for the player than the 1st BB by winning the prize, is executed. The winning combination may be configured so that the first BB winning combination and the second BB winning combination can be won repeatedly (a combination of "first BB+second BB" is provided). With such a configuration, if "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the high-profit 1st BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB is finished, the The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be displayed in a stopped state (the fact that the second BB has been won is carried forward even during the execution of the first BB). In addition, if you win "1st BB + 2nd BB", by executing the high-profit 1st BB first, for example, you can win "1st BB + 2nd BB" in a situation where the closing time of the game hall is approaching. In this case, the low-profit 2nd BB is executed first, and the gaming hall closes during the execution of the 2nd BB, and the game has to end without being able to execute the high-profit 1st BB. can be prevented.

After the operation of the 1st BB is completed, the winning of the 2nd BB may be announced immediately, or it may be announced after a delay (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notification), and a configuration is adopted in which this is hidden. In this case, the winning probability of the replay may be increased during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Furthermore, when the item is hidden, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive winning chance time!!") . In such a configuration, if there is no provision for the case where the 2nd BB does not win after the end of the 1st BB, it becomes certain that the effect occurs = the 2nd BB wins, so only the 1st BB wins. However, even after the operation of the first BB is completed, it is preferable to perform a performance that suggests the possibility of winning the second BB (the performance mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above). (For example, the effect display device S40 displays "BB consecutive winnings chance time!!"). Furthermore, even if you win only the 1st BB and after the operation of the 1st BB is finished, you win the 1st BB again, the system is configured so that the execution of the performance indicating the possibility of winning the 2nd BB is not stopped. It's okay. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the winning of the 2nd BB is falsely announced, and then the winning of the 1st BB is announced (for example, display of "BB success chance time!!"→display of "Unfortunate"→display of "1st BB"). 1BB winning!!” etc.) Furthermore, if you win twice during AT and the second BB is hidden after the first BB has finished operating, the effect display device S40 returns to AT after AT preparation etc. However, the internal reduction of the number of remaining games may be continued and suspended. Incidentally, if the first BB and the second BB are won twice, the number of coins paid out from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example, (1) if the first BB and the small win A are both won, the first BB is given priority when it is stopped. (2) If the first BB and the small win B are both won, the small win B is given priority when it is stopped. That is, a small win may be provided that is stopped with priority over the BB win, and a small win may be stopped with priority over the BB win. (3) If the first BB and the small win A are both won, when the small win A wins, or when some of the patterns (for example, at the first stop, the second stop) of the pattern combination corresponding to the small win A are stopped, an announcement corresponding to the small win A (an announcement that the small win A can win) is made. That is, the first BB role, which is normally given priority over the small role A, is notified, but if the first BB role cannot win (small role A can win) regardless of where the third stop is stopped, depending on the results of the first and second stops (the stopping state after the execution of the first and second stops), a notification corresponding to the small role A is made. Also, if the small role A wins as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small role A is made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player according to various game situations that change during the game, and it is possible to prevent the content notified by the performance display device S40 or the like from being inconsistent with the role that actually wins. (4) If the first BB and small role B are both won, a notification corresponding to the small role B is made during the rotation of all reels.

The device may also be configured to have a display (such as a 7-segment display) that displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and is controlled by the main control board M. When configured in this way, the effect display device S40 will perform a contradictory effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. For example, when a replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on a winning line, an effect that is likely to be output when a watermelon is won (for example, a lamp will be lit green) will be executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that allows output (but not input) from the sub-control board S may be provided, and the configuration may have the following features: (1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from multiple levels using the sub-input button on the gaming machine. (2) Even when playing using the earphone jack, if an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided on the gaming machine). (3) When playing using the earphone jack, even if maximum volume is selected, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume that is not maximum.

In addition, during AT or BB execution, the game machine may be configured to output a performance sound even when the earphone jack is used to play. Also, the volume when the earphone jack is not in use and the volume when the earphone jack is not in use may be configured to be stored separately. Even when the earphone is unplugged, the volume when the earphone jack is in use may not be cleared (returned to the initial value) immediately. For example, when no operation is performed for 10 minutes, both volumes may be cleared (returned to the initial value). However, when the earphone is still plugged in, the volume when the earphone jack is in use may not be cleared (returned to the initial value). It is preferable that the earphone jack is provided in a location that does not interfere with play (for example, a location where the earphone cord does not get tangled around the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever when the earphone is inserted in the earphone jack).

In addition, in this example, (1) the re-gaming combination will be re-played after the BB ends if more than a certain number of coins are acquired during BB execution, and after the BB ends if less than a certain number of coins are acquired during the BB execution. The winning probability may be changed. (2) There may be a plurality of RT states to which the system transitions when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the probability of winning a re-gaming combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after "RT1" ends, or may be configured to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state). (3) When a predetermined winning combination is won, the RT state is transferred. That is, the transition of the RT state is not made in a one-to-one correspondence with winnings, but is transitioned at a constant probability regardless of the condition device or winning (for example, an RT transition lottery is executed with a constant probability every game). (4) Equipped with a 0-card RT transition, making it possible to win a 0-card winning combination multiple times, and to make it possible to win a 0-card winning combination twice. In other words, a 0-card winning combination is created, which is a winning combination in which one or more cards do not win, no matter what order the button is pressed or at what position the stop operation is performed. It may also be possible to make it possible to win a 0-card hand and a 7-card hand, or a 0-card hand A and a 0-card hand B. In addition, when a 0-card combination is won repeatedly, it may be configured such that either a 0-card combination that is transferred to RT or a 0-card combination that is not transferred to RT is won depending on the order of pressing. It is also possible to win the 0-card role and the BB role multiple times, and give priority to the 0-card role to win the prize.

In addition, as in this example, there are 6 choices for the pressing order of the bell ("Left → Middle → Right", "Left → Right → Middle", "Middle → Left → Right", "Middle → Right → Left", There are 6 choices: "Right → Left → Middle" and "Right → Middle → Left"), and the push order for replay is 3 choices (first stop is left, middle, right, 3 choices). In this case, as the push order display on the push order display device D270, the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay are different, in other words, the push order navigation display with 6 options is displayed. The display and the three-choice push order navigation display may be configured to be different. As an example, the press order display for the 6 options is "=1" for "left → middle → right", "=2" for "left → right → middle", "=2" for "center → left → "=3" for "right", "=4" for "center → right → left", "=5" for "right → left → center", "=5" for "right → center → left" In the case of , it is displayed as "=6", and the press order display for the three options is "=7" if the first stop is on the left, and "=8" if the first stop is in the middle. , if the first stop is on the right, "=9" may be displayed.

In addition, this example may be configured as follows. (1) The number of AT consumed games, which is the number of games consumed consecutively in the "AT state", "specialized precursor state" or "addition specialized state", is configured to be displayable on the performance display device, and if the "AT state" transitions from the "AT state" to the "normal gaming state" due to the number of remaining AT games being 0, and then the AT lottery is won again within a specific game and the state transitions to the "AT state", the previous number of AT consumed games is carried over and added, whereas if the "advantageous zone" continues for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 1500 games), and then the "AT state" transitions from the "AT state" to the "normal gaming state" due to the state being in the "favorable zone" for a certain number of games (e.g., 1500 games), and then the AT lottery is won again within a specific game and the state transitions to the "AT state", the previous number of AT consumed games is not carried over and the number of AT consumed games is counted again from 0 games. (2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the reels start to spin, the performance display device S40 is configured to display a message urging the player to stop the reels (e.g., displaying "Please stop the reels"), and if the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time after the reels start to spin in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, (2-1) the display areas of the push order navigation display and the message urging the player to stop the reels in the performance display device S40 do not overlap, and (2-2) the message urging the player to stop the reels is not displayed. (3) If the power is turned "on → off → on" in a game in which push order navigation is occurring, the push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and/or display on the performance display device S40) is redisplayed at a timing before the reels reach a constant speed and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. (4) The frequency with which push order navigation occurs in a game in which a common bell is won differs between a state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT, or the frequency with which push order navigation occurs in a game in which a common bell is won differs between a state related to a certain AT in which push order navigation can occur and a state related to another AT in which push order navigation can occur. (5) In the RT state (in this example, "RT1") in which the probability of winning a replay is the highest, the percentage of games in which push order navigation occurs is higher than the percentage of games in which push order navigation does not occur. For example, the combined winning rate of the bell role and the replay role is 1/2 or more. By configuring in this way, the player can progress through the game without getting bored during the AT. The above-mentioned configuration may be adopted.

Here, we will explain in detail the characteristics of the above-mentioned game sections.

≪Normal Zone≫ (1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the performance display device S40. (3) Commands (signals) related to the condition device in which the push order causes differences in the player's profit margin are not sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. (4) A lottery for transition to the "favorable zone" can be executed except during the internal win of BB and when BB is being executed.

≪Waiting area≫ (1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the performance display device S40. (3) The command (signal) related to the condition device that causes a difference in the player's profit rate depending on the push order is not sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. (4) The lottery for transition to the "advantageous area" is not executed. (5) After BB wins in the "waiting state", it becomes the "advantageous area" from the next game.

<<Advantageous section>> (1) A push order navigation may be displayed on the push order display device D270. (2) A push order navigation may be displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) Conditions where a player's profit rate differs depending on the order in which they are pressed A command (signal) related to the device can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. (4) A lottery that changes the performance of the "advantageous section" (for example, a transition from a "high probability state" to an "AT middle state" as a state related to AT), a lottery for increasing the number of AT games, etc. may be performed. (5) During the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit. (6) When the counter value of the number of games remaining in an advantageous section counter YKc-1 becomes 0, if the BB or push order navigation is not executed at least once in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is basically However, as an exception, if the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500), the BB and push order navigation will be played once in the "advantageous section". The configuration is such that the "advantageous section" can end even if the "advantageous section" is not executed. (7) Measurement of the advantageous section remaining games counter YKc-1 is performed in all games in the "advantageous section" (for example, the counter value is added every game even during BB execution).

Here, the characteristics of the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" are described in detail below. (1) The presence or absence of the setting of the "favorable zone" is determined based on the result of the role lottery, and the presence or absence of the setting of the "favorable zone" is not determined by the number of games played, etc. (2) When a condition device with a different lottery probability depending on the setting value is established, the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" is not executed when the condition device is established. (3) When a certain condition device is established and the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the setting value is different. (4) The performance of the "favorable zone" does not differ depending on the setting value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 transitions to a "high probability state", and the setting 6 transitions to an "AT state", and there is no difference depending on the setting value). (5) If the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" is won, it basically becomes the "favorable zone" from the next game (if the lottery for setting the "favorable zone" is won with a BB role established in the "normal zone", the next game can be set to the "standby zone").

Here, the characteristics of the change in the performance of the "favorable zone" are described in detail below. (1) A lottery to change the performance of the "favorable zone" by referring to the setting value is not executed (the condition common to all setting values may be that a predetermined number of games has passed and a predetermined condition device has been established). (2) When a condition device with a different lottery probability depending on the setting value is established, a lottery to change the performance of the "favorable zone" is not executed when the condition device is established. A lottery to add the number of AT games is not executed, etc. (3) When a BB is internally won, a lottery to change the performance of the "favorable zone" is not executed. A lottery to add the number of AT games is not executed, etc. (4) When the lottery probability of the BB role that triggered the BB being executed during the execution of the BB differs depending on the setting value, a lottery to change the performance of the "favorable zone" is not executed during the execution of the BB. A lottery to add the number of AT games is not executed, etc. (5) When a BB is in progress, if the probability of winning the BB role that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, a lottery may be executed to change the performance of the "advantageous zone" during the execution of the BB. A lottery to add to the number of AT games may also be executed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the reel type gaming machine according to this example. Furthermore, the following configurations may be applied alone, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<<Point 1>> (1) The system is configured to have a "false high probability state" as a state related to the AT that is less likely to win the AT lottery than the "high probability state" even though it is an "advantageous zone". (2) The consecutive performance is configured with at least a predetermined number of consecutive games. (3) The system has a normal role that does not win the AT lottery with 100% probability and a special role that wins the AT lottery with 100% probability, and when the consecutive performance is executed with the normal role as a trigger and the AT lottery is not won, if the special role is won during the consecutive performance, a performance is executed to inform the player that the AT lottery has been won even in the middle of the consecutive performance (the consecutive performance is replaced). (4) The more games remaining in the number of high-security obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a consecutive performance with a high expectation (expectation of winning a bonus, expectation of winning the AT lottery), and the fewer games remaining in the number of high-security obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a consecutive performance with a low expectation. (5) The smaller the number of remaining games in the high-security obstacle game number, the higher the probability of selecting a one-game-completed effect with a high expectation level (expectation level of winning a bonus, expectation level of winning an AT lottery). (6) When the number of remaining games in the high-security obstacle game number is a predetermined value (e.g., 4 games) or less, a consecutive effect that results in a loss is not executed, but a consecutive effect that results in a win (a bonus win, an AT lottery win) can be executed. In other words, when the number of remaining games in the high-security obstacle game number is a predetermined value (e.g., 4 games) or less, a one-game-completed effect can be executed in both the case of a loss and a win, but a consecutive effect can be executed only in the case of a win. (7) When the ceiling G number (1500 games) of the advantageous zone is a predetermined value or less, a consecutive effect is not executed. (8) The tendency to select an effect differs between the case where the ceiling G number of the advantageous zone is a predetermined value or less and the case where it is more than the predetermined value (frequency of occurrence of consecutive effects, expectation level of a big win of a predetermined effect, etc.). (9) In the case of a new transition to the "favorable zone" during a losing consecutive performance (for example, a performance resulting in a loss) in the "normal zone", (9-1) the consecutive performance is rewritten (stage change performance in a game transitioning to the "favorable zone" such as "Turn around and you'll see a character and hear a line suggesting a stage change"). The rate at which the performance is rewritten during a consecutive performance (loss) is higher than the rate at which the performance is rewritten during a consecutive performance (win). (9-2) The current stage is changed after the consecutive performance is executed to the end. When a transition to the "favorable zone" occurs during the execution of a consecutive performance, the rate at which the sub-control board S notifies the player of the transition in the game differs from the rate at which the sub-control board S notifies the player of the transition in the game when no consecutive performance is being executed.

<<Point 2>> (1) The player is allowed to select the stay stage (stage group A) that can be set in the "normal zone". For example, the selection can be made by operating the sub-input button. (2) The result of the lottery as to whether or not stay stage 1 of group A will be an "advantageous zone" is notified in advance when the start lever is turned on for the game, and the result of the lottery as to whether or not stay stage 2 of group A will be an "advantageous zone" is notified later at the end of the game (or when the next game is bet (when the start lever is operated if the re-play stop display is displayed)). (3) When the player moves from a state in which the player is in the "advantageous zone" and a stay stage other than group A stay stage to a "normal zone", a stay stage is selected from group A stay stage. When the player moves from a state in which the player is in the "advantageous zone" and a stay stage other than group A performance to a "normal zone", the stay stage is maintained. (4) The AT expectation degree when the advantageous zone indicator is off and the stay stage is group A differs from the AT expectation degree when the advantageous zone indicator is off and the stay stage is other than group A stay stage. For example, starting from those with low AT expectation, "the advantageous zone indicator goes off and the current stage is in group A → the advantageous zone indicator lights up and the current stage is in group A → the advantageous zone indicator lights up and the current stage is not in group A" (5). The rate at which a transition in the current stage occurs (from current stage in group A to current stage in group B) triggered by a performance in a game that has changed from a "normal zone" to an "advantageous zone" (including a performance that is completed in 1G and a continuous performance) differs from the rate at which a transition in the current stage occurs triggered by a performance in a game that has changed from an "advantageous zone" to a "normal zone".

<<Point 3>> (1) The greater the number of guaranteed games in the "favorable zone" (the number of remaining games in the number of high guaranteed games), the higher the probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus), and the smaller the number of guaranteed games in the "favorable zone" (the number of remaining games in the number of high guaranteed games), the higher the probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus). (2) When the remaining guaranteed games in the "favorable zone" are below a specified value (four games or less), the smaller the remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting a performance that transitions to a new stay stage. (3) If a performance with a high expectation is selected when not staying in a stay stage with a high expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus), the expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus) is higher than when a performance with a high expectation is selected when staying in a stay stage with a high expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning a bonus).

<<Point 4>> (1) If you win a BB in the "resurrection possibility state", (1-1) you may or may not perform an AT additional lottery during the BB. Good too. (1-2) After the BB ends, the state may be shifted to the "AT state" or may not be shifted. (1-3) AT additional lottery may be executed during BB, or may not be executed. (1-4) When transitioning to the "AT in progress state" after the end of BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be subtracted by one game in the "resurrection possibility state". (2) The AT additional lottery may or may not be executed in the "resurrection availability state". If you execute the AT additional lottery, if you win the reverse push white 7 set replay or the forward push black 7 match replay in (3) "Resurrection possibility state", an avoidance navigation will occur and the revival performance (success) The number of additional games will be announced at a timing after executing. (4) If you win a winning combination that can move to the "advantageous section" in the "resurrection possibility state", the advantageous section indicator will turn off at the start of the next game, while the "resurrection possibility state" If you win a combination that can move to an "advantageous section" in the next game when you do not win the revival lottery in , the advantageous section indicator can light up at the start timing of the next game. (5) In the case of a specification in which the AT additional lottery is not performed even though it is an advantageous section in the "resurrection possibility state", (5-1) A hand that can perform the AT additional lottery in the "resurrection possibility state" ( For example, even if you win Watermelon A), the number of AT games will not be added, but if you win a hand (for example, Watermelon A) that can be added with 1G ("AT state") that executes a revival effect (success), AT The number of games can be increased. (6) If you plan to execute "Battle Effect 3G + Revival Effect (Failure) 1G" as the final stage of AT, the bonus will be given if you win the bonus in the revival effect execution game and the resurrection effect (success) is executed. The number of AT games will not be added during the bonus, but the number of AT games will be added during the bonus if you win the bonus in the battle performance execution game (any 3G) and the resurrection performance (success) is executed. It is possible. Furthermore, the performance trends during the bonus may be different.

<<Point 5>> (1) If there are gaming state A and gaming state B as states related to AT which is an "advantageous section", (1-1) the winning expectation of the AT add-on lottery is "gaming state A>advantageous". State B" (the number of AT games is relatively easier to add or the number of AT addition games is larger in gaming state A than in gaming state B). (1-2) The number of additions that can be added when winning combination X in gaming state A is different from the number of additions that can be added when winning combination Y in gaming state A. (1-3) The number of additions that can be added when winning combination X in gaming state B is the same as the number of additions that can be added when winning combination Y in gaming state B.

<<Point 6>> (1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display can be changed to when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to the third stop. (C) and before (C). (1-1) The display modes of the fall avoidance suggestion display are arranged in the order of "A<B<C" from least noticeable to the player. (2) When the state changes from "AT in progress" and "RT1" to "low probability state" and "RT1" where AT has ended, if you win the push order combination, press on the push order display device. The order navigation is displayed, but the push order navigation is not displayed on the production display device (it is displayed as "???"). (3) In a game in which a falling avoidance suggestion display is displayed, if a prize of 18 (falling combination) is won at the third stop, the display is maintained in the same display mode as after the second stop. . (4) If the start lever is operated when the start lever is recovered from a power outage and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device has not been completed, the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is completed. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed with the sound from the speaker (for example, "Left!"). (5) Even if the player is in a state related to an AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as an "additional special state", if a falling winning combination is won, a falling avoidance suggestion performance is displayed with priority. (6) Even if a falling winning combination wins in the "advantageous section", the "advantageous section" is maintained. (7) In the case where the falling combination is configured to be a push order combination (the order in which it is pressed determines whether or not to display it in a stopped manner), if a push order combination that is not a fall combination (such as a push order bell, etc.) is won and the push order If the navigation is executed and it is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation, the display on the effect display device may go dark, but if the winning combination is won, it is stopped in a different push order from the push order navigation. In this case, the display of the effect display device does not darken (or the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect does not darken).

<<Point 7>> (1) When configured to shift to "RT3" and "AT preparation state" after completion of BB related to BB with setting difference (same as Modification Example 1 from this embodiment). (1-1) Win the AT additional lottery by winning a winning combination with a high probability in "RT3" (you may win 100% or you may win with a predetermined probability). (1-2) The RT state to which the BB transitions after the end of the BB is different depending on the type of BB combination, and the execution mode of the AT add-on lottery (the role that performs the add-on lottery, the The lottery winning probability and the number of AT add-on games) are made different. (1-3) Bonus A → RT1 → Promotion Replay A → RT3 (high replay probability), Bonus B → RT2 → Promotion Replay B → RT3, and the additional The winning rate or average number of additional games is different. (1-4) If bonus A → RT1, bonus B → RT2, and there are promotion replay A and promotion replay B, the winning probability of promotion replay A and promotion replay B is differ. (1-5) Bonus A → RT1, bonus B → RT2, and are configured so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probabilities of promotion replay and fall replay are different between RT1 and RT2. (1-6) After the completion of BB with setting difference, it moves to a dedicated RT state ("RT3" and "AT preparation state"), and then, triggered by a promotion replay, it moves to an "additional specialization state".

<<Point 8>> (1) It has type 1 BB-B1 and type 1 BB-B2, and after the completion of type 1 BB-B1, it shifts to "RT3", and after the completion of type 1 BB-B2, When configured to migrate to "RT4". (1-1) "RT3" and "RT4" are different in the execution mode of the AT add-on lottery (the role for executing the add-on lottery, the winning probability of the add-on lottery, the number of AT add-on games). (1-2) The BB start performance related to type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start performance related to type 1 BB-B2 have different performance trends (the selection rates of BB start performances with high expectations are different). (2) When the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed before the re-game 06 in the "AT preparation state" and "RT3", the state shifts to "RT4" and the treasure box loss effect is not executed. In "RT4", a re-gaming combination promoted to "RT3" is won. Further, when the game changes from "RT4" to "RT3", the treasure box opening additional effect will not be performed even if subsequent replays - E1 to E3 are won. (3) There are multiple types of BB roles, and even if a BB role is won, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually distinguish which BB role has won, and after the BB ends depending on the type of BB. The RT state of the game system is made different, and the execution mode of the AT add-on lottery when winning the promoted re-gaming combination is different depending on the RT state. In such a configuration, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during BB will be different depending on the type of BB (such as acquiring a gold treasure chest, acquiring a silver treasure chest, acquiring a bronze treasure chest, etc.). The number distribution is different).

<<Point 9>> (1) The ratio of the same performance mode between the BB start performance related to BB with setting difference won during AT and the start performance related to BB without setting difference won during AT, and the ratio during non-AT. The proportion of the same performance mode is different between the BB start performance related to a BB with a setting difference that was won during non-AT and the start performance related to a BB without a setting difference that was won during non-AT.

<<Point 10>> (1) When winning a BB with a setting difference in the "advantageous section", the probability that a production that suggests the setting value will be selected is higher than when winning a BB with no setting difference in the "normal section" The probability that a production that suggests a set value will be selected is higher. (2) For BBs that are won during non-AT, different BB start performances are selected depending on the setting difference, but for BBs that are won during AT, the same BB start performance is selected regardless of the setting difference. (3) Proportion that the BB start effect is the same between BB with setting difference won during AT and BB without setting difference winning during AT, and BB with setting difference won during non-AT and non-AT The rate at which the BB start performance has the same performance mode is different between the won BB with no setting difference and the BB with no setting difference.

<<Point 11>> (1) When "No Setting Difference Role (role with no difference in winning rate depending on the setting value) + BB" is won, the probability of selecting "Advantageous Zone Indicator Lighting + Performance B", which can be executed when "No Setting Difference Role" is won, is higher than the probability of selecting "Advantageous Zone Indicator Lighting + Performance B", which can be executed when "No Setting Difference Role" is won {"When "Rare Role + BB", a performance encouraging the winning of BB (for example, a battle performance) is more likely to be executed than a performance encouraging the transition to a high probability state (for example, a performance that transitions to a stay stage where the player can stay in a high probability state)}. (2) When a predetermined role (for example, cherry) is won, the transition to a high probability state is made with 100%, and the distribution of the number of games with high securing obstacles is distributed as "50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10% → 50G", and if 3G is selected, the battle is lost, and in other cases, the battle is won. Also, the expected length of the high probability game count (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who wins the battle. Also, in the above example, at the 20th high probability game, a performance is performed to tease whether or not it is possible to continue (a performance to tease whether it is 20 games or 50 games, and if successful, it is confirmed that it will be 50 games).

<<Point 12>> (1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal section," and the probability of occurrence of the freeze effect differs depending on the setting value. (1-1) In the "advantageous section", the predetermined freeze effect is not executed. (1-2) A predetermined freeze effect is more easily executed in the "normal section" than in the "advantageous section." (1-3) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with different settings. (1-4) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with different settings. (1-5) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the event of a loss.

<<<Configuration applicable to this example>>> The configuration applicable to the drum-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that any of the configurations detailed below can be applied to all the embodiments described above, and one configuration described in detail below may be applied, or multiple configurations detailed below may be applied. Let me add some things you can do.

<<Memory map configuration>> First, referring to Figure 59, we will describe in detail the configuration of a portion of the memory map in the RAM (sometimes referred to as the first RAM) of the main control board M that is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example. The areas shown in the figure are used in the following order, from the highest address: (1) "setting value data": an area for data related to a number that manages the setting stage; (2) "external signal system data": an area for storing information related to external signal output; (3) "RAM checksum data": an area for storing data used in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, which stores data calculated from data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off, and stores information for calculating a specific value (for example, "0") in the checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on; (4) "control command buffer": an area for storing command information to be sent to the sub-control board; (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer": an area for storing information used when the power is turned off and which stores data currently stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off, and stores information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is turned off; (6) "unused area": an area for storing areas not used for playing; and (7) "saved data 1 to saved data 8": a RAM into which the data to be saved is likely to be written to the maximum extent possible by design using a CALL command, a PUSH command, etc. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but if an unexpected malfunction (such as an unexpected power outage) occurs, the stack pointer may point to an address higher than "7FF8H". In that case, the saved data may be stored beyond the area of "Saved Data 1 to Saved Data 8" that was reserved as the area for data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, it is preferable to configure the address (address close to "7FF8H") that the stack pointer may point to when the unexpected malfunction occurs so that data that does not affect the progress of the game (data with little effect) is stored. Specifically, by providing an address for storing "setting value data" at an address at least one address away from "Saved Data 1 to Saved Data 8" that was reserved as the area for data to be saved in advance, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage not only to players but also to gaming facilities. In addition, in the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that is not used when the game is in progress after the power is restored, (4) "control command buffer" is data that is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if it becomes impossible to send commands to the sub-control board S, (3) "RAM checksum data" is data that is not used when the game is in progress after the power is restored, and (2) "external signal system data" is data to be sent to the hall computer, so it is data that has little effect on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "setting value data" is data related to setting values that affect the results of the game, so for example, if the setting value is changed to a low value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will be caused to the player. Furthermore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a high value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will be caused to the game center. As described above, (1) "setting value data" is important data for the normal progress of the game. For this reason, (1) "setting value data" is the most significant data (data stored in a high address) in (1) to (7) in the figure. In other words, the addresses between (1) "setting value data" and (7) "Saved Data 1 to Saved Data 8" store (2) "external signal system data," (3) "RAM checksum data," (4) "control command buffer," (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer," and (6) "unused area." By configuring in this manner, even if a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine and the amount of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design limit, the gaming machine can be configured to be less susceptible to abnormal conditions by including a RAM that is not used for play. In addition, the order of addresses in which the five data items (2) "External signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "Control command buffer", (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer", and (6) "Unused area" are stored can be changed without any problem. For example, the data can be stored in the order of "(3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)" from the higher address, or in the order of "(6) → (5) → (3) → (2) → (4)" from the higher address. In addition, the (6) "Unused area" may not be provided. In addition, the data stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) above is data that will not prevent the insertion of game medals (no errors will occur that would prevent the insertion of game medals) even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed.

Note that the area for storing "setting value data" shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59, may be configured to store the following data. (A) Total score data: An area for storing data regarding the number of game values, which plays the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed type reel-type game machine that does not use actual game medals. When storing score data in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes.) (B) Minimum playing time: Minimum one game. Data for counting time (subtracting the counter value for each interrupt process) (minimum playing time for one game is 4.1 seconds) (C) Counter for number of coins earned when BB is activated: When BB ends A counter for determining whether the condition (number of coins paid out) has been satisfied (the counter value is subtracted according to the value that gives the player a gaming value) (D) Counter for the number of coins acquired when MB is activated : A counter for determining whether the conditions for the end of MB (number of paid out coins) have been fulfilled (counter value is subtracted in accordance with the value given to the player with gaming value).In addition, the above It may be configured so that a plurality of (A) to (D) and "setting value data" can be stored (stored at different addresses), or it may be configured so that only one of them can be stored. In addition, if the configuration is such that multiple pieces of data can be stored, each of the multiple pieces of data is stored at a higher address than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (an area for storing is provided). It is preferable to configure it so that. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players or gaming parlors. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power outage) occurred. Although there is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates an address higher than "7FF8H" in some cases, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any disadvantage to players or gaming parlors.

<<Actions when the replay stop is displayed>> Next, referring to FIG. 60, the actions in a game in which a replay has been won that can be applied to the slot machine of this example will be described in detail. Note that the configuration illustrated below is an example of a configuration in which a gaming medal can be inserted even while the replay stop is displayed.

First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this state, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Then, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit as an automatic bet operation related to the stopped replay (when the replay is stopped and displayed, a bet is made without inserting a game medal or operating the bet button). Then, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and as an automatic bet operation related to the stopped replay, the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up, and at approximately the same time as the lighting of the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 light up (the insert possible lamp D300 may be configured to flash).

Here, the feature points of the action in the figure will be explained in detail below.

<Configuration 1> The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game for which the replay is displayed as being stopped are configured to light up at substantially the same timing. When the input ready lamp D300 is lit after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert game medals, the player recognizes that the player cannot insert game medals by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is lit first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the input ready lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by lighting the input ready lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 at almost the same time as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's judgment regarding the insertion of game medals and the operation of the start lever D50, and to avoid the possibility of incorrect game medals being turned on. It is possible to prevent the input and the operation of the start lever D50.

<Configuration 2> From the timing of betting operations related to the game in which the replay is stopped,
The 1 bet lamp D211 is always on until the end of the game following the replay stop display. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and since it is possible to notify the player that a replay win has been made as soon as possible, it is possible to make the game progress smoothly.

<Configuration 3> The replay lamp D290 lights up when the replay has stopped, before the start lamp D180 lights up. In this way, the replay lamp D290 lights up first to notify the player that a replay has been selected, and then the start lamp D180 lights up to notify the player that the replay has been selected and the start lever D50 can now be operated, allowing the player to easily grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 4> The replay lamp D290 lights up when the replay has stopped, before the insert possible lamp D300 lights up. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been selected, and then by lighting the insert possible lamp D300 to notify the player that a game medal can be inserted, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 5> The replay lamp D290 is lit at a timing earlier than the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit based on the display that the replay has been stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, thereby making it possible to smoothly proceed with the game.

<Configuration 6> The replay lamp D290 lights up when the replay is stopped, before the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won first, making it easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won early on, which makes it possible to facilitate smooth game progress.

<Configuration 7> The 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 for the next game in which the replay has been stopped are lit up so that the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit first, followed by the 3 bet lamp D213 (the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 do not light up at approximately the same time). By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<Configuration 8> The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same timing after the replay is displayed as being stopped. If multiple lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming status, so by turning off the 2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213 almost simultaneously, the player can You will be able to quickly grasp the game status.

<Configuration 9> The lighting timing of the re-gaming lamp D290 based on the indication that the re-gaming has stopped is earlier than the extinguishing timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-gaming is displayed as being stopped. In this way, by lighting up the replay lamp D290 first, it is announced that the replay win has been won, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to the replay win. , it is possible to quickly announce that the player has won a replay, thereby making it possible to smoothly proceed with the game.

<Configuration 10> The timing of lighting the replay lamp D290 based on the replay being stopped is set to precede the timing of turning off the 3 bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won first, making it easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is possible to notify the player that a replay has been won early on, which makes it possible to smooth the progress of the game.

<Configuration 11> The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 for the next game in which the replay is displayed as being stopped are lit at substantially the same timing. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is valid, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<<Other Action 1>> Here, an action that differs from the configuration in FIG. 60 in a game in which a replay has been won that is applicable to the slot machine of this example will be described in detail below as Other Action 1.

<Configuration 12> The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are configured to be always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which replaying is displayed as stopped until the end of the next game in which replaying is displayed as stopped. Good too. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic bet operation has been performed due to a replay win, and it is possible to notify the player that the replay win has been won as soon as possible, so that the progress of the game can be easily recognized. can be facilitated.

<Configuration 13> The timing of lighting the replay lamp D290 based on the replay being stopped and the timing of turning off the 2 bet lamp D212 after the replay is stopped may be configured to be approximately the same. It is desired to inform the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2 bet lamp D212) continues to be lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the game status. Therefore, by temporarily turning off the 2 bet lamp D212, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game status. Furthermore, by lighting the replay lamp D290 before the timing of turning on the 2 bet lamp D212 for the next game for which the replay is stopped (which may be the timing of turning on the insert possible lamp D300), it is possible to notify the player in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal.

<Configuration 14> The timing of lighting the replay lamp D290 based on the replay being stopped and the timing of turning off the 3 bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped may be configured to be approximately the same. It is desired to inform the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3 bet lamp D213) continues to be lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the game status. Therefore, by temporarily turning off the 2 bet lamp D212, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game status. Furthermore, by lighting the replay lamp D290 before the timing of turning on the 3 bet lamp D213 for the next game for which the replay is stopped (which may be the timing of turning on the insert possible lamp D300), it is possible to notify the player in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal.

<Configuration 15> If you win a replay in a certain game and also win a replay in the next game of the certain game, the replay lamp D290 is turned on based on the fact that the replay related to the certain game is displayed as stopped. It may be configured such that the replay lamp D290 continues to be lit after it is lit until the completion of successive games of the particular game. In this way, by continuously lighting the replay lamp D290, the player can be promptly notified of the winning of the replay, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<Configuration 16> The third stop operation (or the display of a stopped symbol combination related to replay) may be used as a trigger to control various lamps such as the replay lamp D290, 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, 1 bet lamp D211, start lamp D180, and insert possible lamp D300. By configuring in this way, notifications can be made using the lamps according to the timing of the game progress, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game.

<Configuration 17> The replay lamp D290, start lamp D180, and insert possible lamp D300 may be configured to light up at approximately the same time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamps are lighting up based on the replay stop indication.

<Configuration 18> Based on the display indicating that the replay has stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, 2-bet lamp D212, and 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost simultaneously, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp are turned off. It may be configured so that the lamp D211 and the lamp D211 are turned on substantially at the same time. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals that will be automatically bet when winning the replay is three.

<Configuration 19> The 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, and 1 bet lamp D211 may be configured to turn off approximately simultaneously based on the replay being displayed as stopped, and then the 3 bet lamp D213, 2 bet lamp D212, 1 bet lamp D211, replay lamp D290, start lamp D180, and insert possible lamp D300 may be configured to light up approximately simultaneously. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals that will be automatically bet in the event of winning a replay is 3, and it is also possible to clearly notify that the lighting of the lamps is based on the replay being displayed as stopped.

<<Other Action 2>> Here, further, an action that differs from the configuration in FIG. 60 in a game in which a replay has been won that can be applied to the slot machine of this example will be described in detail below as Other Action 2 using FIG. 61 to FIG. 63.

<Operation diagram 2 regarding display of replay stop> Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the operation applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

First, in the game in which the replay was won (the previous game was a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, When the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and at the timing (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for the replay is activated. At approximately the same time as the stop display, the replay lamp D290 lights up, and at approximately the same timing, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 go out. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled, and the start lamp D180 and the start lamp are turned on. The possible lamps D300 are lit at approximately the same time. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Diagram 3 of the action when the replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this situation, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed as stopped at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled, and the start lamp D180 and the insertion possible lamp D300 are lit almost simultaneously. Note that the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Diagram 4 of the action when the replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which the replay is won (the previous game is considered to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the last reel) is rotating, and the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this state, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit and the start lamp D180 and the insertion possible lamp D300 are lit at approximately the same time. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective. Incidentally, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, and the 3 bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Function diagram 5 regarding display of replay stoppage> First, in a game in which the replay is won (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating. , 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, and 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the right timing, the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet ramp D211, the 2-bet ramp D212, and the 3-bet ramp D213 are activated. The lights go out almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the replay lamp D290 are turned on almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the ready-to-enter lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously.

<Diagram 6 of action when replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this state, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit and, at approximately the same time, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Then, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit. Then, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously. The 1 bed lamp D211 remains lit.

<Function diagram 7 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay is won (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating. , 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, and 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the right timing, the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290 is activated. The start lamp D180 and the ready-to-load lamp D300 light up at approximately the same time. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Function diagram 8 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay is won (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also called the final reel) is rotating. , 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, and 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the right timing, the symbol combinations related to replaying are stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet ramp D211, the 2-bet ramp D212, and the 3-bet ramp D213 are activated. The lights go out almost simultaneously. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the input ready lamp D300. and lights up almost at the same time.

<Diagram 9 of action when replay stop is displayed> First, in a game in which a replay has been won (the previous game is considered a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, and the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, and 3 bet lamp D213 are lit. In this situation, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed at the timing of (1) in the figure. Then, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on → off), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is lit. Then, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 and the 3 bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Then, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Then, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit. After that, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 light up almost simultaneously. The 1 bed lamp D211 remains lit.

<Function diagram 10 regarding display of replay stop> First, in a game in which the replay is won (the previous game is a loss), two reels are stopped and one reel (also referred to as the final reel) is rotating. , 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, and 3-bet lamp D213 are lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and (1) in the figure is activated. At the appropriate timing, the symbol combinations related to the replay are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then, at timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-load lamp D300 light up substantially simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

Note that among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, those having the same configurations as configurations 1 to 19 described above can produce effects similar to those of configurations 1 to 19 described above.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the stop display timing of symbol combinations related to re-gaming, the operation timing of the stop button, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the re-gaming lamp D290, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, and the lighting/extinguishing of the 2-bet lamp D212. It should be noted that there is no problem in combining any of the configurations (timings) regarding the timing, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the 1-bet lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the ready-to-enter lamp D300.

Note that, although the above describes an example of a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even when the replay is stopped, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that game medals cannot be inserted while the replay is stopped (this is applicable to all of the configurations described above). In such a configuration, the insertion permission lamp D300 will remain off while the replay is stopped.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "approximately simultaneous" means that it is sufficient for the player to recognize that the process is visually simultaneous. For example, if the process (light on/off timing) is executed within a period in which the interrupt process is executed 10 times, it is acceptable for the process to be approximately simultaneous.

<<Configuration Regarding Bet Button Lamp>> The configuration regarding the bet button lamp S50 in the drum-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

The main control board M executes processing to enable the bet button D220 from disabled, and then the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to light up the bet button lamp S50 (main control (The board M may be configured to send a command to the sub-control board S side indicating that the bet button D220 has been activated.) After that, the sub-control board S transmits the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control board M. It may be configured to execute processing for lighting the bet button lamp S50 upon receiving a command for lighting the bet button lamp S50. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 is managed to turn on and off on the sub control board S side, but the bet button D220 is enabled depending on the gaming situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on by using It can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the gaming situation.

<<Configuration of the stop button lamp>> The configuration of the stop button lamp S60 in the reel-type gaming machine of this example may be configured as follows.

The main control board M processes the stop button D40 (either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43) to change it from disabled to enabled, and then the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to turn on the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button for which the enabling process has been executed) {the main control board M may be configured to send a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the stop button D40 (either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43) has been enabled}, and then the sub-control board S, having received the command to turn on the stop button lamp S60 sent from the main control board M, may be configured to execute a process to turn on the stop button lamp S60. By configuring it in this way, the stop button lamp S60 is managed to be turned on and off by the sub-control board S, but the stop button lamp S60 can be reliably turned on when the stop button lamp S60 is enabled according to the game status on the main control board M, and even if the player visually checks the illumination of the stop button lamp S60 to determine whether the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, or right stop button D43) is enabled, it is possible to configure it so that there is no discrepancy with the game status on the main control board M.

<<Configuration regarding reel unit RU applicable to this example>> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel type gaming machine according to this example has a reel M50 (M51, M52, and M53). It is rotatably provided via unit RU. Note that FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the reel type gaming machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably accommodates all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape and is formed with an opening RU10. The three reels M51, M52, and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols on the three reels M51, M52, and M53 are visible through the opening RU10. Although details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to a reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top part RU20 and a bottom part RU30 with an opening part RU10 in between. By placing the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the pedestal portion BU, which will be described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal portion BU.

<Through holes RU40> As shown in Figures 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU. The three through holes RU40 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<<Base unit BU>> The base unit BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a generally plate-like shape. The ends of the base unit BU are attached to the left side, right side, back, etc. of the rear box with screws or the like (not shown), and the base unit BU is fixed to the rear box. The base unit BU is attached to the rear box so that it extends horizontally. As mentioned above, the reel unit RU is placed on the base unit BU.

<Screw holes BU10> A plurality of, for example, three, screw holes BU10 are formed in the front end of the pedestal part BU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the pedestal portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

Note that the numbers and positions of the through holes RU40 and screw holes BU10 only need to correspond to each other and be arranged along the horizontal direction, and it is sufficient that the reel unit RU can be stably placed on the base portion BU. Further, the configuration may be such that only the reel unit RU is attached to the pedestal part BU using the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal part BU, or the reel unit RU can be attached to the pedestal part BU by using the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal part BU. It may be configured such that both the RU and one reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53) are attached to the base part BU.

<<Method of fixing the reel unit RU>> As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the base part BU, and the reel unit RU is positioned so that each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the corresponding screw hole BU10 of the base part BU. The screws BS are then screwed into the screw holes BU10 through the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU, thereby attaching and holding the reel unit RU at a fixed position on the base part BU. In this way, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base part BU.

In addition to the case where the reel unit RU is attached using a threading member such as a screw or bolt in addition to the screw BS, the reel unit RU may be detachably attached using a member such as a detachable rivet, for example, a push rivet. It is only necessary that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal part BU using an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

In this example, the reel unit RU is placed on the base BU, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reel unit RU may be configured to have through holes RU40 at the top and be fixed to the inside of the housing with screws BS (fixed so as to hang), or through holes RU40 may be provided on both side portions of the reel unit RU and be fixed to the inside of the housing with screws BS. It should be noted that even in such a configuration, the configuration regarding the position of the screws BS and the drop position of the screws BS described in detail below (for example, the configuration regarding the screws BS placed in the position closest to where the front door DU opens and closes) can be applied.

<<Hopper H40 and Medal Auxiliary Tank HS>> FIG. 66(a) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear right side, and FIG. 66(b) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the rear left side. Note that FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b) also include arrows indicating movement of the screw BS, which will be described later. Arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66(a) and (b) for both positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 (sometimes referred to as the main tank member) is a funnel-shaped tank made of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged in a circumferential manner, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. Ru. The opening H30 is formed to open upward. The medals inserted from the aforementioned medal input port D170 are introduced into the inside of the hopper H40 via the opening H30. Note that the hopper H40 may be composed of a plurality of members, and the plurality of members may be collectively referred to as the hopper H40, a main tank member, a main tank unit, etc.

Furthermore, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom H52, a right inclined portion H54, and a left inclined portion H56. The right inclined portion H54 is disposed on the right side of the hopper H40, and game medals introduced to the right side of the hopper H40 are guided toward the hopper bottom H52, which will be described later, by their own weight. The left inclined portion H56 is disposed on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides medals introduced to the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by their own weight. Furthermore, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is disposed so as to cover the upper portion of approximately the left half of the disk H50, which will be described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a situation in which multiple game medals are strung together at the hopper bottom H52 and cannot fall, and it is possible to smoothly guide the game medals toward the hopper bottom H52.

By providing the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, any game medals introduced into the inside of the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom H52. The medals guided by the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are stored in the hopper bottom H52. In this way, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as storage inclined portions that store game medals inside the hopper H40.

A disk H50 as a rotating body is arranged at the hopper bottom H52. The disk H50 is rotationally driven by the above-mentioned hopper motor H80, and the rotation of the disk H50 causes the game medals to be ejected from the game medal outlet H60. In this way, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide portion H62> A discharge guide portion H62 is formed along the inside of the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and has an inclined surface H64. When the hopper H40 is placed in the rear box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located lower than the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be approximately constant, but is formed to slightly widen as it moves downward (from the left side to the right side).

As the game medals are stored in the hopper H40, the discharge guide section H62 guides the game medals at the top of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS and stores them in the hopper H40 before the game medals overflow from the hopper H40. This is a member to reduce the number of medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the slope H64, and the game medals guided by the slope H64 are discharged into the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge slope portion that discharges game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As mentioned above, the right side slope part H54, the left side slope part H56, and the covering part H57 function as a storage slope part for storing game medals inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide part H62 functions as a storage slope part for storing game medals inside the hopper H40. It functions as a discharging inclined part for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined part H54 and the left inclined part H56.

Furthermore, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medals from the left side to the right side. That is, the left side inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have a downward rightward inclination. The final target of the left side inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS, but by making the inclination the same, the overall movement of the game medals in the hopper H40 can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

A protruding wall H58 protruding upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 is provided near the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. The protruding wall H58 prevents medals placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling onto the hopper bottom H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS> The medal auxiliary tank HS has a roughly rectangular prism shape with a bottom and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the top, and medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored inside the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<<Screw BS of reel unit RU falls off>> In the reel-type gaming machine, the front door DU is attached to the back box so that it can be opened and closed (the front door DU and the back box are combined to form a housing). ). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (the left side seen from the player) as the center of rotation. Therefore, the right side of the front door DU (the right side as seen from the player) has the largest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, a shock is generated due to contact or collision with the back box and is propagated to the back box. Since the impact occurs on the right side of the reel-type game machine, the impact on the right side of the reel-type game machine is the largest, and the impact tends to gradually weaken on the left side of the reel-type game machine.

As mentioned above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the base part BU by the screws BS. The screws BS are screwed into the screw holes BU10 of the base part BU at three places, the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is subjected to the greatest impact. For this reason, the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most likely to loosen due to impact, and when it is unscrewed, the right screw BS will fall off. The center screw BS screwed into the center screw hole BU10 is also subjected to impact, and there is a possibility that it will loosen and fall off due to the impact. It is assumed that the left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 will be less susceptible to impact to some extent, but there is a natural possibility that it will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of impact propagation and the duration of use.

<<Position of Screw BS and Hopper H40 (1)>> As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged at the lower part of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below at least the right side screw BS among the three screws BS described above.

When the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The fallen right screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and due to its own weight, it rolls along the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C), and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right side screw BS falls off due to impact, it can be ejected from the hopper H40, the fallen screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is It is possible to prevent the rotation of the disk H50 from being disturbed or damage the disk H50, and to stably operate the hopper H40.

In the above example, only the right screw BS was targeted, but the hopper H40 and reel unit RU may be positioned so that the three left screws BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS are all located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. If any screw BS falls off, the fallen screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. In addition, in this example, the screws BS for placing the reel unit RU on the base part BU are exemplified, but this is not limited to this, and components such as screws attached to the right side of the front door DU (the right side as seen by the player), which is prone to impacts due to contact or collision with the back box, may also be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when they fall off.

<<Position of the screws BS and the hopper H40 (2)>> Figure 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in Figure 67, of the three screws BS mentioned above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right screw BS. Note that in Figure 67, the same components as in Figure 64 are denoted with the same reference numerals.

If the right screw BS falls off due to impact, it will fall freely downward (arrow 2A) and be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS (without coming into contact with the inclined surface H64).

When the central screw BS falls off due to impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The fallen central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and due to its own weight, it rolls along the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C), and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

This prevents the fallen right side screw BS and the center screw BS from entering the hopper H40, prevents the fallen screw BS from interfering with the rotational movement of the disk H50, or damaging the disk H50, and prevents the hopper H40 from entering the hopper H40. It can operate stably.

In the above example, the right screw BS and the center screw BS were the focus, but the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU may be positioned so that the left screw BS is also located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. If any screw BS falls out, the fallen screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As described above, it is preferable to form a protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has fallen off and rested on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is greater than or equal to the height at which the screw BS bounces when it falls onto the inclined surface H64. The screw BS can be prevented from falling to the hopper bottom H52, and the screw BS can be prevented from interfering with the operation of the disk H50 or causing it to malfunction.

In this way, even if the screws BS for attaching the reel unit RU become detached due to vibrations caused by opening and closing the front door DU, the detached screws BS are configured to fall into the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40, allowing the amusement facility manager to easily collect the detached screws BS.

<<Hopper H400>> In the example shown in Figure 67, when the right screw BS falls, it passes outside the hopper H40 (to the right of the right side wall H48 as seen by the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. By configuring the fallen right screw BS to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing inside the hopper H40, it can be used in common with the hopper H40 shown in Figure 64.

On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right (right side wall H480) may be used. The hopper H400 has a bottom opening H410 formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480, and when the right side screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400 and is further passed through the bottom opening H410 into the medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this manner, by passing through the bottom opening H410, the fallen right side screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without intruding into the hopper H40.

<<Extension part RU50>> In the example described above, if the screw BS fell off, it would just fall freely towards the medal auxiliary tank HS below. In contrast to this, an extension part EN may be provided on the bottom of the reel unit RU or base part BU, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 65. By providing an extension part EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it will not fall immediately, but will be guided by the extension part EN before falling into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this way, the extension part EN makes it possible to align the position where the screw BS is attached with the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, thereby increasing the freedom of positioning of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Configuration of the medal auxiliary tank HS>> <Through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes> As shown in FIG. 68, the medal auxiliary tank HS has at least two through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes formed on the rear surface. In addition, two full detection electrodes DE and a conductivity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided at the bottom of the rear surface of the rear box. The two full detection electrodes DE have an elongated shape, extend horizontally and parallel to each other, and are arranged to protrude forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed to correspond to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is placed at the bottom of the rear box, the two full detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding through holes HS20 for full detection electrodes and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the top portion UL (see FIG. 69(c)) of the stored medals gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. FIG. 69(c) is a cross-sectional view showing the state in which medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the top portion UL shown in FIG. 69(c) is a line (e.g., an envelope) that connects the contours of the medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS that are located in the top portion UL (for simplicity, the top portion UL is illustrated as a smooth curve). When the medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE are conductive through the multiple medals, an electrical circuit is formed between the two full detection electrodes DE. When the electrical circuit is formed, the conductivity detection board CC outputs a signal indicating that the two full detection electrodes DE are conductive. In this way, it is possible to detect a medal full error when game medals are stored up to the position of the two full detection electrodes DE.

The number of full detection electrodes DE may be three or more, not just two. For example, if three are provided, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, a new full detection electrode is provided below the two full detection electrodes, and the newly provided full detection electrode is configured to be conductive to either one of the two full detection electrodes described above, thereby enabling a medal full error to be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to detect a medal full error even if game medals are not stored evenly in the medal auxiliary tank HS (for example, when game medals are stored unevenly on the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS).

<<Material of the screw BS and material of the medal>> The material of the screw BS is magnetic and conductive. For example, it is made of steel. The material of the medal is not magnetic and conductive. For example, it is made of plated brass or stainless steel. By configuring it in this way, even if the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, it can be easily removed from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<<Relationship between the total length BL of the screw BS and the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE>> The left screw BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS described above are used to attach the reel unit RU to the base part BU. Figure 69 (b) is a front view showing the entire screw BS. This screw BS is used with a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see Figure 69 (b)) shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see Figure 69 (a)) (total length BL of the screw BS < distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE). By doing this, even if the screw BS (for example, the right screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than the distance between the full detection electrodes DE, so the screw BS alone will not be conductive with the two full detection electrodes DE (the screw BS will not get caught by the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. Also, FIG. 69(a) is a plan view of the rear portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS, showing the fullness detection electrode DE protruding into the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Relationship between the length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS and the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE>> The radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69(b)) is the same as the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE. (radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS<diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE). By doing this, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS will not be caught on one of the fullness detection electrodes DE, and the screw Even if the BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be removed immediately, and the screw BS alone will not become electrically conductive by chance.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69(c), when one of the two full detection electrodes DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the right side of FIG. 69(c)) is in contact with medals already stored (top portion UL), even if the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the left side of FIG. 69(c)) temporarily comes into contact with the screw BS, the screw BS will not be hooked onto the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can immediately detach from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69(c)), so that a conductive circuit is not formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS will not be misjudged.

In this example, the reel unit RU has been described as an integrated unit that houses all three reels, but even if it is a separate unit that houses each of the three reels separately, it is still removably attached to the base part BU by the screws BS, and there is still the possibility that the screws BS may come off. For this reason, the same configuration as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screws BS can be adopted.

<<Configuration of Reel Band>> FIG. 70(a) is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70(b) is a perspective view showing the reel band MO in a curved state. FIG. 70(c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the cut M59 of the reel band MO. FIG. 70(d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the "white seven" symbol. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and the BB starts when "white seven, white seven, white seven" is stopped and displayed on the active line. The reel band MO has a thin plate-like elongated shape (band-like shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO has flexibility and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and the pattern can be illuminated from the back with the light emitted from the rotating drum backlight.

The reel band MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end M55 and the second end M57 are curved so that they face each other, and are attached to the reel frame MW to form a ring-shaped (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two ring-shaped frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of resin such as plastic to reduce weight. The two frames are arranged parallel to each other and with both centers located on the same rotation axis. The distance between the two frames is also arranged to be approximately the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames.

<Overlapping portion M58 and cut M59> The length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps (overlapping part M58) near the first end M55 and the second end M57. By doing so, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55.

As shown in FIG. 70(c), the reel band MO is pasted above the second end M57, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55. In addition, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when starting to attach the reel band MO, start attaching it to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then attach the reel frame MW to the reel frame MW. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel band MO is pasted along the entire circumference of the reel frame MW from the second end M57 toward the first end M55, and finally, The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the second end M57, and the pasting is completed up to the first end M55. If the reel strip MO is pasted in this order, the first end M55 will be pasted in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the reel M50, and the first end M55 will be pasted on top of the reel strip MO. The portions M55 are in an overlapping state.

On the other hand, the reel band MO is first attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then, while gradually rotating the reel frame MW in the opposite direction to the rotational direction of the reel M50, the reel band MO is attached around the circumference of the reel frame MW from the first end M55 to the second end M57, and finally, the reel band MO is attached above the first end M55, finishing up to the second end M57. When the reel band MO is attached in this order, the second end M57 ends up being attached in the same direction as the rotational direction of the reel M50, overlapping the reel band MO.

Here, if the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW starting from the first end M55, and then the second end M57 is attached in the same direction as the rotational direction of the reel M50, resulting in a state in which the second end M57 overlaps the reel band MO, when a game is played and the reel M50 rotates, air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (causing high air resistance), making it easier for air to get in between the second end M57 and the reel band MO below it, and the reel band MO near the second end M57 becomes more likely to peel off gradually.

On the other hand, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is finished being attached in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the reel M50, and the reel strip MO is attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57. In the case where the first end M55 overlaps the top, when the reel M50 rotates when playing the game, the second end M57 overlaps the reel strip MO described above. Compared to this, air is less likely to come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is small), and air is less likely to enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below it. The reel band MO near the first end M55 becomes difficult to peel off.

In view of the above, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW, it is preferable to start attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then finish attaching the first end M55 in the opposite direction to the rotational direction of the reel M50, so that the first end M55 overlaps the reel band MO.

<Various Errors> In this way, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, an overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end M55 and the second end M57, and a gap M59 is formed by either the first end M55 or the second end M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is made of resin such as plastic, errors may occur during molding. Also, errors may occur due to deformation when assembling the reel frame MW. Furthermore, since the reel band MO is flexible, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, it may be attached with distortion or the like remaining in the reel band MO, or the size (outer circumference) of the reel frame MW may be slightly different from the design value. If a large symbol (for example, a "white seven") is configured to be positioned on the reel band MO below the overlapping portion M58, and the attachment position of the reel band MO shifts from the desired position due to these various errors, it is conceivable that the large symbol will be overlapped by the reel band MO above the overlapping portion M58, causing the large symbol to be covered by the upper reel band MO.

Also, depending on the gaming state, the player may hit the bonus symbol, and if the bonus symbol is placed near the cut M59, the player may hit the bonus symbol. , when the bonus symbols are stopped, the cut M59 may also be visible when viewing the bonus symbols. If the various errors described above occur, it is assumed that the player will be able to visually recognize not only the symbols but also the deviation of the cut M59 and the positional deviation of the symbols. When the bonus symbols are stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, the player will be happy to pay attention to the bonus symbol because it is a symbol combination that will bring a high profit to the player. If you visually recognize a shift in the position of the symbol, there is a possibility that the joy of seeing the symbol combination that becomes the bonus symbol stopped and displayed may decrease.

<In the case of bonus symbols> To prevent this from happening, symbols smaller than the largest symbol, such as bonus symbols, are placed in the position closest to the gap M59. Specifically, if the longitudinal length of the symbol (longitudinal direction of the reel strip MO) of the longest symbol (such as a bonus symbol) is LL, a symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL (longitudinal length SL) is placed in the position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the design with a short length in the longitudinal direction at the position closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57, even if various errors occur, these The symbols can be placed at a position apart from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Furthermore, even if the various errors described above occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the cut M59 or the positional deviation of the symbols. In addition, in the same figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell pattern (a pattern that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a bell) and the length in the longitudinal direction of a cherry symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry) are shown. Although shown as the same SL, if it is shorter than LL, which is the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven), the longitudinal length of the bell symbol and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol may be different. There is no problem. In addition, the symbols placed near the cut M59 are not limited to only the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may not be bonus symbols, such as replay symbols (symbols that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to replay). Alternatively, a watermelon pattern (a pattern that can form a pattern combination corresponding to a watermelon) may be arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59. In addition, in this example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol located near the cut M59 (for example, the bell symbol) are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the lateral direction may be longer than the length of the symbol located near the cut M59 (for example, the bell symbol) in the lateral direction.

In the example described above, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol with the longest length in the longitudinal direction (such as a bonus symbol) is LL, and the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL is SL. The arrangement of the symbols was determined by comparing the length of the symbol in the transversal direction (perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) as LT, and the short dimension of the symbol whose length in the transversal direction is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction mentioned above are the lengths of the differences between the part of the symbol that protrudes most upwardly and the part of the symbol that protrudes most downwardly along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the transverse direction are the lengths of the differences between the part of the symbol that protrudes most upwardly and the part of the symbol that protrudes most downwardly along the transverse direction.

<In the case of small winning symbols> Furthermore, in addition to bonus symbols, symbols such as watermelon symbols and cherry symbols may not be stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if they have been won, in other words, symbols that exceed the maximum number of sliding symbols Symbols that have at least one spot placed apart from each other (sometimes referred to as symbols that correspond to rare roles, symbols that can be missed, etc.) are also symbols that are targeted for attention, and the game It is a pattern that people are trying to visually recognize. In addition, in games where a player wins a rare role, the winning of the rare role may not be announced before operating the stop button, and even in such cases, the player wants to win the rare role, so The stop button is often operated at the timing (operation mode) of the stop button when it is easy to obtain a winning combination (highest profit for the player). Furthermore, there are gaming machines that have a large number of winning combinations that pay out one less coin when a prize is won, and in such cases, the operation timing of the stop button (operation The stop button is often operated in the mode). Note that operating the stop button at the timing (manipulation mode) of the stop button that provides the highest profit for the player is sometimes referred to as an optimal gaming method.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when playing a game using the optimal gaming method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the active lines are the upper row of the left reel, the upper row of the middle reel, and the upper row of the right reel (straight line in the upper row), the middle row of the left reel, the middle row of the middle reel, and the middle row of the right reel (straight line in the middle row). Left reel lower row, middle reel lower row, right reel lower row (lower straight line), left reel upper row, middle reel middle row, right reel lower row (lower right row), left reel lower row, middle reel middle row, right reel upper row (right reel upper row) ) and 5 lines, and the prescribed number is 3. In addition, there are watermelon and cherry roles as rare roles, and if the watermelon role wins, "Watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" will stop and display in a straight line on the active line, and if the cherry role wins, the characters will stop and display in a straight line. is configured such that "cherry-any-any" (any indicates that any symbol can be used) is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the active line. Furthermore, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are rare combinations, the symbols have at least one location where they are placed apart by more than the maximum number of sliding pieces.

Figure 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO. Note that only the left reel is illustrated in this figure. In the example shown in Figure 71, the reel band MO is arranged in the order of watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry, and these symbols are arranged at a position away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. When a rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the win of the rare role and easy to win the rare role, and when the rare role of watermelon or cherry is won, the rare role can be won by playing in the above-mentioned optimal playing method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare role, by operating the stop button during the three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower row, it is possible to win the rare role regardless of whether the watermelon role or the cherry role is won. When the stop button is operated with this operation timing (optimum gameplay method), the range of nine frames from the cherry symbol on the top row to the watermelon symbol on the bottom row is the range that can be stopped and displayed, and as shown in the figure, no matter which of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (no matter which of the nine stopped display modes is used), it is positioned away from the first end M55 and the second end M57 (there is no gap M59 near the symbol positioned two frames above the watermelon, and there is no gap M59 near the symbol positioned two frames below the cherry), preventing the player from visually noticing the gap M59 or the position of the symbols being shifted.

As shown in the figure, by configuring the symbols that can be displayed when the stop button is operated to target a position on the reel that is likely to result in the rare combination not to be located near the first end M55 or the second end M57, it is possible to configure the first end M55 or the second end M57 not to be located in a position on the reel that is frequently displayed as a stopped symbol, and even if there is a shift in the gap M59 or the position of the symbol, it is possible to configure the shift in the gap M59 or the position of the symbol to be less noticeable to the player.

In this example, the number of steps for one rotation of the reels is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336 ÷ 20 = 16 with a remainder of 16, the 20 pieces (symbols) are divided into 16 pieces (symbols) with 17 steps and 4 pieces (symbols) with 16 steps. The reels are made up of. In addition, it is better to configure the cut M59 so that it is not visible to the player as much as possible for better appearance, so the pieces (symbols) adjacent to the cut M59 should have 16 steps, which has a relatively small number of steps. is suitable.

In addition, the configuration of the reel type gaming machine in this example may be configured so that it is not necessary to insert and pay out actual gaming medals used in general reel type gaming machines, and the game can be progressed using a digitized pseudo gaming medium. In addition, in such a configuration, since there is no need to insert and pay out actual gaming medals, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the reel type gaming machine can be improved (for example, by not having an insertion opening or a payout opening for gaming medals, and by sealing the gap into which a foreign object is inserted by integrating the front door and the back box, etc.), and the risk of using illegal gaming medals can be reduced, and security against fraudulent acts (so-called cheating acts) can be improved (sometimes referred to as an enclosed reel type gaming machine). It should be noted that the configuration of the enclosed reel type gaming machine can be applied to any of the above-mentioned embodiments (or configurations). Furthermore, the configuration may not include the credit and credit number display device D200. For example, the credit and total score (total score) may be combined into one total score, and the total score increase/decrease processing and display processing may be performed on the main control board M, the payout control board H (sometimes called the game value control board or game value control means), or other boards.

In addition, it corresponds to the physical game medals used in general drum-type game machines, and has "scores" as a pseudo game medium used for playing games in enclosed drum-type game machines. may be configured. Note that "scores" may also be referred to as "score information," "points," "points information," "gaming value," or "gaming value information." Physically real game medals can be directly held and handled by the player. On the other hand, in an enclosed drum type game machine, the player can play the game without directly handling physical game medals. The points are not actual game medals, but pseudo game media converted into data so that the CPU of the main control board or the like can perform arithmetic processing. Further, "credit" is a score that is temporarily stored in a bettable state or a settleable state among scores, and is data mainly managed by the main control board M. Further, the "total score" refers to all the scores that can be input into the enclosed drum type game machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general drum-type game machine that uses physical game medals. In addition, when applying the configuration of the enclosed drum type gaming machine to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as "gaming medals" in this specification may be replaced with "scores", "score information", " There is no problem in treating it as "points held", "points information", "gaming value", "playing value information", etc., and as appropriate, "scores", "score information", "points held", "points information", etc. , "gaming value", and "gaming value information". Note that it is not necessary to have "credits". Further, there is no problem in replacing the credit number display device with a total score display device.

(Second embodiment) In this embodiment, the AT-related state that is advantageous to the player is configured to have an AT-in-progress state, and push order navigation is executed in the AT-in-progress state (so-called AT), providing an advantageous state to the player and improving the entertainment value of the game. However, the configuration of a gaming machine capable of executing an AT is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of a reel-type gaming machine capable of executing an AT that is different from the configuration of this embodiment is defined as the second embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) relating to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The differences from this embodiment in the figure are step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second); that is, after executing the condition device number management process described above in step 1450, in step 4100 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the freeze execution determination process at the start of rotation, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

Further, after executing the above-described AT state start control process in step 1750, in step 4200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a freeze execution determination process at the time of stop, which will be described later, and then proceeds to step 3500. Transition. The details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, freezing occurs when the reels start rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reels stop (when the last reel stops, when the third reel stops). (The reels do not start rotating for a predetermined period of time, or a bet operation related to the next game cannot be executed for a predetermined period of time) may occur.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the freeze execution judgment process at the start of rotation, which is related to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPU MC of the main control board M judges whether the state related to the AT has newly become "AT in progress" from the game. Here, "newly becoming AT in progress" refers to the case where the state related to the AT has become "AT in progress" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as the first AT win), and examples include (1) winning BB in "high probability state" → transition to "advantageous BB inside state" → BB pattern (bonus pattern) is displayed stationary and transition to "advantageous BB state" → BB ends and transition to a new "AT in progress state", (2) if a cherry is won in the "high probability state", there is a 1/2 chance of winning the AT lottery, and after winning the AT lottery, a premonition state {expectations regarding whether or not the AT lottery has been won} is entered. In the case where the state is configured to transition to a "premonition state" (which is a state related to the AT to be held by the player, and which may be configured to have a "false premonition state" which is a presentation style (background presentation, etc.) similar to that of the "premonition state" even if the AT lottery related to a cherry winning is not won), a game state transition such as when a cherry is won in the "high probability state", and the AT lottery based on the cherry winning is won, transitioning to the "premonition state" → a predetermined number of games which is the end condition of the "premonition state" has been played, and therefore a new "AT in-state" transition occurs, corresponds to "newly entering the AT in-state." On the other hand, examples of game state transitions that do not fall under "newly entering the AT state" include (1) remaining in the "AT state" → transitioning to the "AT continuation battle state" {state where there is a possibility of transitioning again to the "AT state" (winning consecutive games)} because the AT counter value becomes 0 → transitioning again to the "AT state"; (2) winning BB in the "AT state" → transitioning to the "advantageous BB inside state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is displayed stationary and transitioning to the "advantageous BB state" → BB ends and transitioning again to the "AT state"; and so on, which do not fall under "newly entering the AT state".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that, when turned on, causes freeze to be executed at the start of reel rotation) in step 4104. ) on. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives this command, the CPUMC of the main control board M , the AT start effect will be executed), and the process moves to the next process (the process of step 1550). Note that even in the case of No in step 4102, the process moves to the next process (processing in step 1550). Note that the freeze illustrated in the figure is just an example, and there is no problem in configuring the system to have various types of freeze (execution conditions and execution times).

Next, Fig. 74 is a flow chart of the reel spin start preparation process related to the subroutine of step 1550 in Fig. 72 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is steps 1568 (2) to 1574 (2). That is, in step 1568 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the AT start freeze execution flag is on. If the answer is Yes in step 1568 (2), in step 1570 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572 (2), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the freeze execution timer (a decrement timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze executed when a new "AT in progress state" is entered and the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT in progress state" ends) to the start freeze execution time (5 seconds in this example, the execution time of the freeze executed when a new "AT in progress state" is entered), starts the timer, and proceeds to step 1574 (2). Next, in step 1574 (2), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1574 (2), proceeds to step 1552. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1574 (2), step 1574 (
If the answer is No in step 1568 (second), the process also proceeds to step 1552.

In this way, the second embodiment is configured to execute a freeze (sometimes referred to as a freeze at the start of AT) when the "AT state" is newly started, and the details will be described later. However, while the freeze is being executed, the AT start effect will be executed on the sub control board S side. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the start of AT is set to 5 seconds, but there is no problem in changing the execution time, and it is preferable to set it in accordance with the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the configuration is such that the freeze execution time at the start of AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT. has been done. In this way, by making the freeze execution time at the start of AT relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be an advantageous situation for players in the future, we will be able to increase the interest of players by increasing their desire to play. It can be made into an expensive gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the freeze-at-stop execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) in FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The AT counter value has newly become 0" refers to the case where the AT counter value changes from "1 to 0" in a situation where the AT counter value is decrementing, such as "AT in progress". Cases where the AT counter value is always 0, such as a situation where the AT-related state is "normal gaming state", are not included.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if YES in step 4202, the process moves to step 4206. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the advantageous section remaining games counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The counter value for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section has newly become 0" means that in a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous section counter value is decreasing, such as in the "AT state", the value of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section counter value has become 0. This is a case where the number of games changes from "1 to 0", and does not include a case where the advantageous section remaining game counter value is always 0, such as a situation where the AT-related state is "normal gaming state". If YES in step 4204, the process moves to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses a freeze execution timer (which is a decrement timer, and the execution time of the freeze to be executed when the new "AT state" is entered) and the "AT state". The freeze execution time at the end (in this example, it is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time that is executed when the "AT state" ends) is set to (execution time) and starts the timer. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends an AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives this command, the CPUMC of the main control board M , the AT end effect will be executed), and the process moves to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the freeze execution timer is 0 or not. If Yes in step 4210, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500). On the other hand, if No in step 4210, the process in step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the "AT state" has elapsed. Note that in the case of No in step 4204, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 76 is an image diagram of the AT start performance execution in the second embodiment. In this figure, we will explain in detail an example of a case where a power outage does not occur during the execution of the AT start performance and an example of a case where a power outage occurs.

First, with reference to (a) in the figure, a case will be described in detail in which the power is not cut off during the execution of the AT start effect. First, when the start lever D50 for a game in which the AT-related state is newly changed to "AT in progress state" is operated (game start conditions are met), the AT start effect is started and a freeze is executed. be done. In addition, as a performance mode of the AT start performance, "Warp execution!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for one second (during execution of the AT start performance, a background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is always executed). . In this example, the AT start effect and freeze execution time is 5 seconds. After that, one second has passed since the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp execution!" is erased on the effect display device S40. Incidentally, the state in which only the background effect exclusive to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of freeze execution, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for 1 second as a performance mode of the AT start performance. Thereafter, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of freeze execution, the freeze execution ends, the AT start performance ends, and the reels start rotating. In addition, when the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of "AT50G START!!" on the effect display device S40 is erased, and the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed in the AT state. The scene will switch to a possible background effect. In addition, when the above-mentioned push order navigation is executed in the first game in the AT state, (1) Freeze starts → freeze ends after 5 seconds → reels start rotating and the effect is displayed. The press order navigation is displayed on the display device S40, (2) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reels start rotating → Reel drive state changes to reel constant speed state, and effect display device S40 It is also possible to display the navigation in the order of pressing. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation start timing is later than before due to freeze execution, the player will not be able to accidentally operate the stop button that corresponds to a different press order from the correct press order. It is possible to prevent a situation where this occurs.

Next, with reference to (b) in the figure, a case in which a power failure occurs during execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 for a game in which the AT-related state is newly changed to "AT in progress state" is operated (game start conditions are met), the AT start effect is started and a freeze is executed. be done. In addition, as a performance mode of the AT start performance, "Warp execution!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 for one second (during execution of the AT start performance, a background performance dedicated to the execution of the AT start performance is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and freeze is 5 seconds (excluding the time during power-off). After that, one second has passed since the start of the freeze, and the display of "Warp execution!" is erased on the effect display device S40. Incidentally, the state in which only the background effect exclusive to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, two seconds after the start of freeze execution, a power outage occurs (for example, a power outage occurs at the gaming parlor). After that, when the power is restored, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze continues to be executed. After that, when the total time from the start of Freeze execution, excluding the time when the power is turned off, reaches 5 seconds, the execution of Freeze ends, the AT start effect ends, and the reels start rotating. It happens. In this way, in this example, if a power outage occurs while the freeze is being executed (while the AT start effect is being executed) and then the power is restored from the power outage, the freeze execution time will be the same as the state before the power outage. This will continue to be carried out. As an example, if the freeze execution time is 5 seconds, and a power outage occurs 1 second after the freeze execution starts, the freeze will be executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the freeze execution time will be 5 seconds. If the power is cut off 3 seconds after the start, freezing will be executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

In addition, the execution time of the AT start effect is the same as the execution time of freeze, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start effect and then the power is restored from the power outage, the execution time of the AT start effect will be the same as the execution time of the freeze. The execution will continue from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the presentation mode of the AT start effect will be different depending on whether a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or when a power outage does not occur. If a power outage has not occurred, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the performance display device S40 at the timing when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the execution of the AT start performance, while the AT start performance is being executed. If a power outage occurs, regardless of the timing of the power outage, "AT50G START!!" will be displayed on the effect display device S40 after recovery from the power outage. Note that the display "AT50G START!!" may be referred to as the AT start game number display. In addition, in the figure, the number of games at the start of AT is shown to notify that the number of remaining AT games at the start of AT (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games, but the display format is The present invention is not limited to this, but for example, in a case where a lottery for increasing the number of AT games can be executed in an "advantageous BB state" executed immediately before transitioning to the AT state, AT in the "advantageous BB state" The number of AT remaining games obtained by adding the number of AT remaining games obtained by winning the number of games addition lottery to the initial number of AT games of 50 games is configured to be displayed on the effect display device S40 as the number of games at the start of AT. Good too. For example, if 30 remaining AT games are obtained through the AT game number addition lottery in the "advantageous BB state", "AT80G START!!" is displayed as the number of games at the start of AT. It's okay. In addition, in the figure, only the AT start performance is illustrated, but similarly, the AT end performance is different in the case where a power outage occurs while the AT end performance is being executed, and when a power outage occurs. (For example, if a power failure does not occur during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET〇〇" will be displayed two seconds after the start of the AT end effect.) On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET" will be displayed after the power outage returns, regardless of the timing of the power outage.) In addition, this is a performance that is displayed while the AT start performance or AT end performance is being executed, and if a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start performance or AT end performance, the performance is immediately displayed after the power is restored. If so, the present invention is not limited to displaying the number of games at the start of AT, but there is no problem as long as the display is visible to the player and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

By configuring as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is configured to be able to execute freezing when newly transitioning to the AT state and when the AT state ends. The AT start performance is executed during freeze execution when the AT status is newly transitioned, and the AT end performance is executed during freeze execution when the AT status ends. In a case configured in this way, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or AT end effect, after the power is restored, the content that is scheduled to be displayed from the predetermined timing in the AT start effect or AT end effect will be displayed. By configuring the display so that it is displayed immediately after the power is restored, even if an unintentional power outage (for example, a power outage at a gaming facility) occurs during a freeze, game information such as the number of remaining AT games will be displayed. By configuring the system to immediately display information necessary for the player to grasp the game situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot grasp the game situation.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the AT state is newly entered and when the AT state ends, but the execution mode of the freeze is not limited to this. , may be configured to be executed at the start of BB, at the end of BB, etc., or may be configured to be executed based on the winning condition device or the gaming state in which the player is staying.

Furthermore, from the above-mentioned configuration related to freezing in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the execution period of freezing when a power outage does not occur during execution of freezing = A case where a power interruption occurs during execution of freezing If the freeze execution period until a power outage occurs = B If the power outage occurs during the freeze execution, the freeze execution period after the power outage occurs = C, then A = B + C. It is configured like this.

When the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the reel acceleration process described above will be executed.

<<<<<Configuration 2 applicable to this example>>>> The configurations applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example are described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations described in detail below are applicable to all of the embodiments described above, and it should be noted that one of the configurations described in detail below may be applied, or multiple of the configurations described in detail below may be applied.

<<<Configuration of Lamp Unit>>> First, using FIGS. 77 and 78, the lighting of the lamp unit (collective name of decorative lamp unit D150 and LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be explained. Detail the configuration.

Note that the LED of the lamp unit in this example is a full-color LED (can be lit in a plurality of lighting colors), and is configured such that the lighting color can be set for each LED by lighting control by the sub-control board S. In addition, the lamp unit is configured to light up based on a lighting pattern (details will be described later) possessed by the gaming machine, and the lighting pattern may be set for each LED or multiple LEDs may be set in one. It may be set for one group as two groups.

In addition, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication may be used to control the lighting of the lamp unit (LED). I2C communication is a method in which a master IC transmits a lighting pattern corresponding to each slave IC to multiple slave ICs, and each slave IC returns an ACK signal (acknowledge signal) when it receives the data. Since each slave IC is connected to each other, data (lighting pattern) is transmitted in sequence starting from the master IC, and each slave IC obtains the data corresponding to each slave IC and returns an ACK signal. This configuration makes it possible to perform high-speed communication.

Figure 77 is an image of the lamp unit lighting configuration. In this figure, the configuration related to the lighting of the lamp unit that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example is described in detail. Note that the items shown in this figure are merely a partial excerpt, and for example, the items shown in the element 1 column are not limited to only the eight items from "red" to "no color." First, as shown in Figure 77, there are six types of elements related to the lighting of the lamp unit, element 1 to element 6.

<Element 1> Element 1 is the lighting color, and has eight lighting colors as element 1: "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red + green", "blue + green", "blue + white", and "no color". In addition, the lamp unit in this example is composed of multiple LEDs, and when the lighting color is "red", it indicates that all LEDs are lit in red, and when the lighting color is "red + blue", it indicates that, of the total number of LEDs, N, M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue (N = M + L). In addition, the combination of the order of the LEDs lit in red and the LEDs lit in blue may be only one way, or there may be multiple ways (if there are multiple ways, multiple lighting colors such as "red + blue 1" and "red + blue 2" may be provided as lighting colors). In addition, "no color" indicates that the light is off (not lit), and is the lighting color selected when the light is always off. As mentioned above, the number of items that make up elements 1 to 6 in the figure is merely a partial excerpt, and element 1 can be configured to have lighting colors that combine three or more colors, such as "red + blue + green."

<Element 2> Element 2 is the lighting time, which includes "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 seconds", "3 seconds", "Always", " Element 2 includes seven types of lighting times, including "no lighting". Note that "Always" is a lighting time selected when the light is always on, and "No lighting" is a lighting time that is selected when the light is always off.

<Element 3> Element 3 is the off time, and there are seven types of off time: "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", and "never off". Note that "always" is the on time selected when the light is always off, and "never off" is the off time selected when the light is always on.

<Element 4> Element 4 is a lighting time pattern, which is composed of a combination of a lighting time, which is element 2, and a lighting time, which is element 3, and has seven types of lighting time patterns as element 4, namely, "0.1 sec on → 0.1 sec off", "0.1 sec on → 0.3 sec off", "0.2 sec on → 0.3 sec off", "1 sec on → 0.1 sec off", "3 sec on → 0.3 sec off", "always on", and "always off". As an example of a lighting time pattern, in the case of "0.1 sec on → 0.1 sec off", it is composed of a lighting time of "0.1 sec" which is element 2 and a lighting time of "0.1 sec" which is element 3. Incidentally, "always on" is a lighting time pattern selected when the light is always on, and is composed of a lighting time of "always" which is element 2 and a lighting time of "never off" which is element 3. In addition, "always off" is the lighting time pattern that is selected when the light is always off, and is composed of the lighting time of "not lit" which is element 2, and the off time of "always" which is element 3.

<Element 5> Element 5 is a lighting element, which is composed of a combination of a lighting color which is element 1 and a lighting time pattern which is element 4. In other words, a lighting element is composed of a combination of a lighting color which is element 1, a lighting time which is element 2, and an off time which is element 3. Note that in the figure, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting element is referred to as the lighting element content, and the identification elements assigned to each lighting element content are illustrated as the lighting element type. The lighting elements are as follows: lighting element type a: "0.1 sec red on → 0.1 sec off" lighting element type b: "0.1 sec blue on → 0.1 sec off" lighting element type c: "0.1 sec red on → 0.3 sec off" lighting element type d: "0.1 sec red + blue on → 0.3 sec off" lighting element type e: "0.2 sec red + blue on → 0.3 sec off" lighting element type f: "0.2 sec blue + green on → 0.3 sec off" lighting element type g: "1 sec white on → 0.1 sec off" lighting element type h: "1 sec blue + white on → 0.1 sec off" "Lighting element type i: "Green on for 3 seconds → off for 0.3 seconds" Lighting element type j: "Blue + Green on for 3 seconds → off for 0.3 seconds" Lighting element type k: "Red on at all times" Lighting element type l: "Blue on at all times" Lighting element type m: "Green on at all times" Lighting element type n: "White on at all times" Lighting element type o: "Red + Green on at all times" Lighting element type p: "Blue + Green on at all times" Lighting element type q: "Blue + White on at all times" Lighting element type r: "Off at all times (no color)" There are 18 types of lighting elements as element 5. As an example of a lighting element, "Red on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds" is configured by combining the lighting time pattern of element 1 "Red" and element 4 "On for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds" (as described above, the lighting time pattern is a combination of the lighting time and the off time). "Red + Green on at all times" is configured by combining element 1 "Red + Green" and element 4 "Off at all times". In addition, "Always off (no color)" is composed of element 1, "no color," and element 4, "always off."

<Element 6> Element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by combining one or more lighting elements that are element 5. In addition, in the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting pattern are shown as lighting pattern contents, and the identification elements distributed for each lighting pattern content are shown as lighting pattern types. The lighting patterns are: Pattern 1: "a→a→a→a" Pattern 2: "b→b→b→b" Pattern 3: "a→b→a→b" Pattern 4: "a→a→g →g” Pattern 5: “g→f→j” Pattern 6: “i→h→b” Pattern 7: “g→f→b” Pattern 8: “i→j→g” Pattern 9: “g→g →g'' Pattern 10: ``k'' Pattern 11: ``l'' Pattern 12: ``m'' Pattern 13: ``n'' Pattern 14: ``o'' Pattern 15: ``p'' Pattern 16: ``q'' Pattern 17: ``r " Element 6 includes 17 types of lighting patterns. As an example of a lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: "a→a→a→a", element 5 "red lighting for 0.1 seconds→light off for 0.1 seconds" is repeated four times. In addition, in the case of pattern 8 "i → j → g", after executing lighting element type i: "green lighting for 3 seconds → lights off for 0.3 seconds", lighting element type j: "blue lighting + green lighting for 3 seconds → 0 .3 seconds off" and lighting element type g: "1 second white lighting→0.1 second off". Incidentally, the lighting patterns may be further combined to light the lamp unit as in pattern 1 → pattern 4, or as in pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 →... Pattern 1→Pattern 4" may be repeatedly turned on until the lighting termination condition is satisfied. Note that the lighting termination condition may be configured to be satisfied when the gaming situation changes such as cancellation of a predetermined error, or may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to this example is configured to be lit by a combination of lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of element 6 is configured by a combination of the lighting elements of element 5, and the lighting pattern of element 6 is configured by a combination of lighting elements of element 5. The lighting element is configured by a combination of the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4, and the lighting time pattern of element 4 is configured by the combination of the lighting time of element 2 and the lighting time of element 3. has been done.

Note that while the configuration related to the lighting of the lamp unit has been described in detail as being composed of elements 1 to 6, this is not limited to this, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased, and the contents of elements 1 to 6 may be changed (for example, element 1 may be set to lighting brightness).

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode. In the figure, an example of a configuration for each game situation related to the lighting pattern of the lamp unit (sometimes referred to as the lamp unit lighting pattern), the lighting mode of the reel back lamp S30 (sometimes referred to as the back lamp lighting mode), and the sound output from the speaker S20 (sometimes referred to as the speaker sound) that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example is described in detail. Note that each item shown in the figure is merely a partial excerpt, and for example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, and the lighting pattern may be made different depending on the type of BB (type of condition device related to BB) or the game state in which BB is won, or a lighting mode (lighting cycle) that combines multiple lighting patterns in one BB may be repeatedly executed until the BB ends. Also, as an example of an error, a medal empty error is illustrated, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be made different depending on the type of error. In all of the configurations 1 to 6, the lighting patterns of the lamp units that can be selected during normal play (when an error is not occurring, when the power is not turned on, when the standby screen is not being displayed, when the setting confirmation mode is not being used, when the setting change mode is not being used, and when the bonus is not being executed) are configured to be one or more combinations of patterns 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 15, 16, and 17. Since the normal play is configured to have various game states such as a low probability state and an AT state, the lighting patterns of the lamp units that can be selected depending on the game state may be different. In other words, the lighting patterns may be configured to have lighting patterns that are not selected in a specific game state or lighting patterns that can be selected only in a specific game state. The time when the power is turned on refers to the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed (immediately after the power is turned on).

<<Configuration 1>> <Medal empty error occurring> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with relatively low light intensity (light intensity smaller than normal light intensity) Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) the special sound during the medal empty error until the error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for when power is turned on is output for a predetermined period of time <While the standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always lit in green) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <during setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 ("White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds") (Repeat 3 times) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Sound exclusively used during setting change mode <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“1 second white on → 0.1 second off” → “0. 2 seconds blue + green lights on → 0.3 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue light on → 0.1 seconds off”) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during BB execution Loop (repeated playback) is configured as described above. Note that the performance executed when the power is turned on may be configured to be different depending on the performance that was being executed before the power outage occurred or the gaming state before the power outage occurred.

As in configuration 1, only different lighting patterns of the lamp unit are selected during an error such as when an empty medal error occurs and during normal gaming, and the lighting color constituting the lighting pattern is By configuring the system so that red is used when an empty medal error occurs, but not during normal play (configuring so that a predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs), players and administrators can , it is possible to easily distinguish between cases where an error has occurred and cases where no error has occurred, and the business of the game parlor and the progress of games can be made smoother. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit immediately after turning on the power and during normal gaming, players and administrators can easily distinguish between immediately after turning on the power and during normal gaming. This makes it possible to smoothen the operation of the game hall and the progress of the games. In addition, the player can play the game stress-free without being mistaken for thinking that an error has occurred even during normal gaming, and the administrator can clearly identify the gaming machine in which the error has occurred. becomes. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit when displaying the standby screen and during normal gaming, players and administrators can easily distinguish between displaying the standby screen and during normal gaming. This allows for smooth operation of the game parlor and the progress of the games. Further, while the standby screen is displayed, power consumption due to the use of flashy lighting patterns can be suppressed even though the player is not playing the game. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the setting confirmation mode and normal gaming, players and administrators can easily switch between the setting confirmation mode and normal gaming. This allows for smooth operation of the game parlor and the progress of the games. In addition, the administrator can immediately identify unintended setting confirmation modes, and can also detect unintended setting confirmation modes even if the administrator forgets to turn off the setting key switch. can do. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns between the settings change mode and normal games, players and administrators can easily switch between settings change mode and normal games. This allows for smooth operation of the game parlor and the progress of the games. Further, it is possible to immediately determine a setting change mode that is not intended by the administrator, and it is possible to quickly determine a setting change mode that is not intended by the administrator. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit during BB execution and during normal gaming (in a state where BB is not executed), players and administrators can It is possible to easily determine whether the game is in progress (a state in which BB is not being executed), and the player or administrator can clearly determine the gaming situation.

As described above, the differences between when an error occurs in the lamp unit and during normal play, the differences between immediately after power is turned on and during normal play, the differences between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal play, the differences between the setting confirmation mode and during normal play, the differences between the setting change mode and during normal play, and the differences between when BB is being executed and during normal play may be configured to have a lighting color (element 1) that is not used during normal play, may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during normal play, may be configured to have a lighting off time (element 3) that is not used during normal play, may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during normal play, may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during normal play, or may be configured to have a lighting pattern (element 6) that is not used during normal play.

<<Configuration 2>> <During a medal empty error> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for when a medal empty error occurs until the error is cleared Loop (repeat playback) <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (Always off (no color)) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <While displaying standby screen> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always lit in blue) Back lamp lighting mode: Lit in a special pattern while displaying the standby screen (flashing) Speaker sound: No output <during setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lit Mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always lit in red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB execution Middle > Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("1 second white on → 0.1 second off" → "0.2 second blue + green light on → 0.3 second off" → "0.1 second blue light on → 0. (1 second off) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights on with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a dedicated sound during BB execution The configuration is as described above.

<<Configuration 3>> <When medal empty error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeated four times of "red light on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: loops (repeatedly plays) special sound when medal empty error occurs until error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white light) Back lamp lighting mode: lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: no output <When standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("white light on for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "blue + green light on for 0.2 seconds → off for 0.3 seconds" → "green light on for 3 seconds → off for 0.3 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: loops (repeatedly plays) Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always on red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always on red) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("Green on for 3 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds" → "Blue + white on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Blue on for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light level Speaker sound: Loop (repeatedly played) a sound dedicated to BB in progress. Configured as above.

<<Configuration 4>> <When an empty medal error has occurred> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lit) Back lamp lighting mode: lit with normal light Speaker sound: loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound when an empty medal error has occurred until the error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lit) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: no output <When standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lit) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: no output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("Red lit for 0.1 sec → off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue lit for 0.1 sec → off for 0.1 sec" → "Red lit for 0.1 sec → off for 0.1 sec" <In setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("Red on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Red on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec") Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 ("Red on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Red on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec") Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 ("Green on for 3 sec → Off for 0.3 sec" → "Blue + white on for 1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec" → "Blue on for 0.1 sec → Off for 0.1 sec") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light Speaker sound: Loop (repeatedly played) a sound dedicated to when BB is in progress. Configured as above. The warning sound output from the speaker during an empty medal error and during the setting confirmation mode and setting change mode may be the same warning sound, and in addition to the warning sound, a voice message stating "empty medal error has occurred" may be output from the speaker during an empty medal error, "setting confirmation mode in progress" may be output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode, and "setting change mode in progress" may be output from the speaker during the setting change mode. Similarly, for errors other than the empty medal error, a warning sound and a voice message stating "XX error has occurred" may be output from the speaker.

<<Configuration 5>><While a medal empty error is occurring> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always lit in white) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights at normal light intensity Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for when a medal empty error occurs until the error is cleared Loop (repeat playback) <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting)) Back lamp lighting mode: On → Off (lights up when playing normally) Speaker sound: Output None <While the standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (Always off (no lighting)) Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (Always white) Lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white) Back lamp lighting mode: At normal light intensity Lighting speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Blue + green lighting for 0.2 seconds" → 0. 3 seconds off” → “3 seconds blue + green on → 0.3 seconds off”) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up at normal light intensity Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a dedicated sound while BB is running As shown above It is configured.

<<Configuration 6>> <When medal empty error occurs> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (repeated four times of "red light on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: lit with normal light Speaker sound: loops (repeatedly plays) special sound when medal empty error occurs until error is cleared <When power is turned on> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (not lit)) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: no output <When standby screen is displayed> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always on blue) Back lamp lighting mode: off Speaker sound: no output <In setting confirmation mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("red light on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds" → "red light on for 0.1 seconds → off for 0.1 seconds" → "white light on for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "white light on for 1 second" On for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for use during setting confirmation mode <In setting change mode> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 ("Red on for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Red on for 0.1 seconds → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for use during setting change mode <BB in progress> Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("White on for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds" → "Blue + green on for 0.2 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds" → "Blue + green on for 3 seconds → Off for 0.3 seconds") Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light output Speaker sound: Sound exclusively for use during BB in progress is looped (played repeatedly) as configured above.

In addition, in the same figure, six types of configurations, configurations 1 to 6, are illustrated, but these configurations are just examples, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, back lamp lighting mode, and sound output from the speakers for each gaming situation are shown as examples. may be combined from each configuration or may be changed in any way. In addition, regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, we will discuss the differences between the lamp unit when an error occurs and during normal gaming, the differences between immediately after the power is turned on and during normal gaming, and the differences between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal gaming. Differences, differences between setting confirmation mode and normal gaming, differences between setting change mode and normal gaming, differences between BB execution and normal gaming, are the elements 1 to 6 mentioned above. (See FIG. 77) It is preferable to configure such that one that is not selected during the normal game is selected.

In addition, in the figure, only an empty medal error is shown as an example of an error, but this is not limited to this. For display determination errors and door open errors, the differences between when an error occurs and during normal play, between immediately after power-on and during normal play, between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal play, between during setting confirmation mode and during normal play, between during setting change mode and during normal play, and between when BB is being executed and during normal play may be configured so that any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) that are not selected during normal play are selected as the differences related to the lamp unit, or any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of error that has occurred, for example, any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit may be different between an empty medal error and a display determination error.

Furthermore, when the replay combination is stopped and displayed, the lighting mode of the lamp unit may be configured to inform the player that the symbol combination related to the replay combination has been stopped and displayed. In the game executed in the gaming state, the lamp unit is configured to light up when a replay combination is won and the symbol combination related to the replay combination is stopped and displayed, and any one of elements 1 to 6 is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the regaming role is stopped and displayed without winning the regaming role. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can clearly recognize that he has won the replay combination.

<<<Configuration related to front door opening and payout>>> Next, the configuration related to payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail using FIG. 79. In addition, "normal" shown in the same figure means, for example, when Winning-B (common bell) is won in a "low probability state" and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, Winning 04) is stopped and displayed. This shows a case where 11 game medals are paid out. Also, for "Payout occurs before the door is opened" and "Payout occurs after the door is opened", if the prize-B (common bell) is won and the symbol combination (for example, prize 04) corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed. is exemplified. In addition, in the same figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example) is explained in detail.

<<Configuration 1>> <Normal Payout> A detailed description will be given of a case where a normal payout is performed in configuration 1. First, with two of the three reels stopped and the remaining reel spinning, the third stop button is pressed (pressing the third stop button is sometimes referred to as the third stop button turning on), and winning 04 is displayed as stopped. After that, the third stop button becomes unpressed (the third stop button goes from pressed to unpressed when the player releases his finger from the third stop button, etc. Note that the third stop button going from pressed to unpressed is sometimes referred to as the third stop button going from on to off), and a game medal corresponding to winning 04 is paid out, and a payout sound (sound B in the figure) corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output from speaker S20 for a predetermined period of time.

<When payout is performed before the door is opened> Next, a detailed description will be given of a case where payout is performed before the door is opened in configuration 1. First, when two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is spinning, the third stop button is turned on and the winning 04 is displayed as stopped. After that, the third stop button is turned off from on, and the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the speaker S20 starts to output a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal. After that, while the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is being output, the front door DU is opened, and the speaker S20 outputs a front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) that notifies the user that the front door DU is open. That is, the payout sound and the front door open notification sound are output simultaneously. After that, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the output of the payout sound, and the output of the payout sound ends, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. In addition, the front door DU is left open, that is, the front door open notification sound is configured to start being output when the front door DU is opened, and to end the output when a specific time has passed since the output opening even if the front door DU remains open thereafter. By configuring in this way, when the manager opens the front door DU to check or change the settings, the front door open notification sound is not prevented from continuing to be output until the setting check or setting change is completed, and the settings can be checked and changed without stress. In addition, in the same figure, the output of the front door open sound is shown to end at the same time as the output of the dispensing sound ends, but this is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if the output end timing of the dispensing sound and the output end timing of the front door open sound are different.

<The case where the payout is executed after the door is opened> Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, while the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is open. Ru. That is, the front door opening notification sound is configured to be output when the front door DU is opened, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off. Thereafter, while the front door DU is open and the front door open notification sound is being output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medals corresponding to winning number 04 are paid out, and the speaker S20 A payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals starts to be output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. Thereafter, a specific time has elapsed since the front door DU was opened, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. Thereafter, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of outputting the dispensing sound, and the outputting of the dispensing sound ends.

As in configuration 1, by configuring the system so that game medals can be paid out regardless of whether the front door DU is opened, it is possible for the game hall manager to forget to close the front door DU when replenishing the game machine with game medals. Even in the case where the game medal is closed (not tightly closed), the game medals can be paid out normally and the player can be configured to avoid any disadvantage. In addition, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound to be able to be output simultaneously, the situation of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. In the case of the above-described configuration 1, it is preferable to use an output mode (timbre, pitch, tempo, etc.) that makes it easy to distinguish between the front door opening notification sound and the dispensing sound.

<<Configuration 2>> <Normal Payout> The case where normal payout in Configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button indicates that the third stop button is pressed). (sometimes referred to as turning on), the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed (when the player releases their finger from the third stop button, etc., the third stop button changes from being pressed to not being pressed. The state in which the third stop button is not pressed is sometimes referred to as the third stop button turning from on to off), game medals corresponding to winning prize 04 are paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is emitted from the speaker S20. Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined period of time.

<The case where the payout is executed before the door is opened> Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is turned off from ON, and the game medals corresponding to the win 04 are paid out, and the speaker S20 starts outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals. After that, the front door DU is opened while the payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is being output, and the front door open notification sound (in the figure At the same time as the sound A) is output, the output of the payout sound ends. Thereafter, a specific time has elapsed since the front door DU was opened, and the output of the front door open notification sound ends. Note that the predetermined period of time during which the dispensing sound is output ends while the front door opening notification sound is being output.

<The case where the payout is executed after the door is opened> Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, while the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is open. Ru. That is, the front door opening notification sound is configured to be output when the front door DU is opened, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off. After that, while the front door DU is open and the front door open notification sound is being output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medals corresponding to winning prize 04 are paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. Thereafter, in a situation where game medals are being paid out, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound is finished, and the payout sound corresponding to the winning prize 04 is outputted. Thereafter, a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the payout of the game medals corresponding to the winning prize 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

As in configuration 2, by configuring the payout of game medals to be executable regardless of whether the front door DU is opened, it is possible for the game hall manager to forget to close the front door DU when replenishing the game machine with game medals. Even in the case where the game medal is closed (not tightly closed), the game medals can be paid out normally and the player can be configured to avoid any disadvantage. In addition, by configuring the system so that the front door open notification sound and the payout sound are not output at the same time, it is possible to prevent situations where it becomes difficult to judge the status of the gaming machine due to the mixing of the tones of the front door open notification sound and the payout sound. can do. In configuration 2, the output sound is output even while the front door open notification sound is being output, and the volume of the output sound is relatively small compared to the volume of the front door open notification sound (even if the volume is 0). (including).

<<Other configurations>> When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even when the front door DU is open, it is possible to insert game medals, operate the max bet button (in this example, bet button D220), and operate the bet button. The lamp S50 (also referred to as a max bet lamp), the input ready lamp, and the bet lamp (1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp) may be turned on effectively. That is, when a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of the game medal can be detected (the blocker is on), and the insertion is valid (credits increase or the game medal is It may also be configured such that the bet is placed. In such a configuration, the speaker S20 may be configured to output a bet sound (or medal insertion sound) corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) (the front door DU Even if the button is not open, the bet sound corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output, and the sound corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output. It may be configured such that the bet sound made by the player is not outputted.

<<<Configuration regarding power cutoff and payout>>> The following is an example of the effect when the power is cut off while the third stop is pressed when winning a small winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below are applicable to all embodiments according to this example. Note that the configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a case where game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Further, the effect by blinking the rotating drum backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Configuration 1> In a game in which a small prize (for example, the common bell for prize 04) has been won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small prize → a power outage occurs while the third stop button is still pressed (e.g., a power outage occurs in the game arcade) → power is restored while the third stop button is still pressed → when power is restored, the game medal corresponding to the small prize is paid out. The above action may be configured to occur.

In addition, if the game progresses without a power outage and a payout of game medals is executed based on the winning of a small prize, a backlight effect based on the winning of a small prize can be executed and a payout sound based on the winning of a small prize can be output. On the other hand, as in configuration 1 described above, if the power is restored while the third stop button is pressed and a payout of game medals is executed based on the winning of a small prize, the backlight effect based on the winning of a small prize is not executed and the payout sound based on the winning of a small prize is not output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure it so that the player is not surprised by the sudden execution of the backlight effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

By configuring in this manner, even if a power outage occurs while the player is pressing the third stop and the power is immediately restored, it is possible to execute the payout of game medals based on the winning of a minor prize, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage. Furthermore, even if any of the specified operating members controlled by the main control board M (e.g., the start lever, all stop buttons, bet button (max bet button), settlement button, etc.) is operated, the payout of game medals based on the winning may be executed as long as other specified operating members are not operated. For example, when recovering from a power outage, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the payout of game medals based on the winning may not be executed. Furthermore, in such a configuration, (1) the payout of game medals based on the winning may be executed by subsequently releasing the third stop button or the start lever (by subsequently releasing only one of the operating members controlled by the main control board M) or (2) the payout of game medals based on the winning may be executed by subsequently releasing the third stop button and the start lever (by subsequently turning off all the operating members controlled by the main control board M).

Examples of situations in which the power supply may be interrupted include the power switch turning from on to off, the cable supplying the power being disconnected, a power outage occurring at the game center, and the cable supplying the power being pulled out of the socket. etc., and in any case, it is applicable to the above-mentioned configuration.

<Configuration 2> In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win a small prize → Hold down the third stop button and press the previous button. Open the door DU (opening the front door DU will cause a door open error), and the power will be cut off (turn off the power switch, etc.) → Press and hold the third stop button and restore the power (power (turn on the switch, etc.) → Close the front door DU while holding down the third stop button to cancel the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in the specified direction) → If the door opening error occurs It may be configured such that the above-described effect is such that the payout of game medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed when the small winning combination is released.

In addition, if the game is progressing in a situation where no power outage has occurred and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the small role, it is possible to perform a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, as in configuration 2 described above, the door opening error is canceled while the third stop button is pressed, and the payout of game medals based on the winning of the small role is released. When executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the small winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by suddenly performing the back lamp effect and outputting the payout sound after the door opening error is cleared.

<Configuration 3> In a game in which a small prize (for example, the common bell for prize 04) has been won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small prize → the power is cut off while the third stop button is still pressed (e.g., a power outage occurs in the game arcade) → the finger is released from the third stop button (the third stop button is changed from on to off) → power is restored → When power is restored, the game medal corresponding to the small prize is paid out. The above configuration may also be performed.

In addition, if the game progresses in a situation where no power outage occurs and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the small role, it is possible to perform a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role, In addition, while it is possible to output the payout sound based on the winning of the small role, as in configuration 3 above, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after releasing the third stop button. In this case, when the payout of game medals based on the winning of the small role is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role is not output. good. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is turned off and restored.

In addition, when configured as in the above configuration 1, configuration 2, or configuration 3, as a process after power-off recovery, it is determined whether the third stop button is pressed (whether it is on or not). Before executing the process (the process executed in the game progress control process), it may be configured to execute the game medal payout process (the process executed in the game progress control process) based on winnings. Also, as mentioned above, in a situation where the symbol combination that results in a small winning combination is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off while the third stop button is held down, and then the power is turned off while the third stop button is held down. , The payout of game medals based on winnings may be executed by releasing the third stop button after that, and in such a case, the output of a payout sound and a back lamp effect corresponding to the payout may be performed. may be configured so that it is not executed (if the payout of game medals based on winning is executed without power interruption, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed).

<<<<Configuration related to setting confirmation mode and payout>>> The following is an example of the action when the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop is pressed when a small win is won, which is applicable to the gaming machine of this example. It should be noted that any of the configurations exemplified below are applicable to all embodiments of this example. The configuration described in detail below illustrates a case where the credit is at the upper limit (e.g., 50), in other words, a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 when a small win is won. The configuration described in detail below also illustrates a case where the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from off when the reels are stopped, the power is turned on, and various operating members controlled by the main control board side, such as the start lever, all stop buttons, the bet button (max bet button), and the settlement button, are not operated (not on), and the setting confirmation mode can be entered. In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, the performance display device S40 may be configured to notify the fact that the setting confirmation mode is in progress, or may not be configured to notify the same.

<Configuration 1> In a game where you win a small prize (for example, the common bell of prize 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win a small prize → Hold down the third stop button and press the previous button. Open the door DU (opening the front door DU will cause a door open error) and turn on the setting key switch (does not shift to setting confirmation mode) → Hold down the third stop button and open the front door DU Close the door to cancel the door open error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in a predetermined direction) -> The setting confirmation mode does not change even when the third stop button is released.The above configuration may also be used. .

In addition, if configured in this way, it is possible to place a bet while the setting key switch remains on, and the reels can start rotating by operating the start lever while a bet is placed, and the reels can start rotating by operating the start lever while the setting key switch is turned on. It may be configured such that the reels can be stopped (the game can proceed) by operating the reels. Also, if the setting key switch is left on after that, it may be configured such that bets cannot be placed (input of game medals is also not possible), or bets can be placed but the reels do not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. You may. In other words, the configuration may be such that the game cannot be played while the setting key switch remains on. It should be noted that in such a configuration, a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect is not displayed on the effect display device S40. In addition, if the front door DU is opened while the setting key switch is still on (after the effect as in configuration 1 above) and the symbol combination related to replay is not stopped and displayed, the setting confirmation mode will be activated. It may be configured so that the mode can be shifted to, or it may be configured so that the mode does not shift to the setting confirmation mode when the front door DU is opened in a situation where symbol combinations related to re-gaming are stopped and displayed. Further, when the front door DU is opened and the setting confirmation mode is entered, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display that the mode is the setting confirmation mode.

<<<<Configuration for lighting the max bet lamp>>> Next, referring to Figures 80 to 83, the action for lighting the max bet lamp (sometimes referred to as the bet button lamp S50) applicable to the reel-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail. The configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which gaming medals can be inserted even when the replay stop display is on. The max bet lamp is a lamp that is located inside or near the max bet button, and is controlled by the sub-control board S or the main control board M, and indicates that operation of the max bet button is valid. In addition, in the same figure, the following is shown: ON when the MAX BET lamp is lit (or flashing), OFF when the MAX BET lamp is off, ON when the 1 BET lamp D211 is lit, OFF when the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, ON when the 2 BET lamp D212 is lit, OFF when the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, ON when the 3 BET lamp D213 is lit, OFF when the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, ON when the start lamp D180 is lit (or flashing), and OFF when the start lamp D180 is off. Also, the figure shows an example in which game medals are inserted one by one through the medal insertion port D170 (a sensor that detects game medals inserted into the medal insertion port D170, such as the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, etc., detects the game medals one by one), but the bet button may be a 1 bet button that allows one game medal to bet with one operation (off → on) different from the max bet button, or a 2 bet button that allows two game medals to bet with one operation (off → on). In such a configuration, there is no problem in applying the same effect as inserting one game medal into the medal insertion port D170 (detection of one game medal by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, or the second insertion sensor D30s) to a single press of the 1 bet button.

<<Configuration 1>> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

As in configuration 1, by configuring the max bet lamp to turn off and turn on every time one game medal is inserted, the maximum bet lamp can be set to Since the operation of the bet button is disabled, by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the max bet button is valid. In addition, by accurately reporting the period during which the max bet button is valid, the player can understand the period during which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the insertion of game medals is invalid. It is possible to prevent a situation where the game medals are not properly inserted due to the game medals being inserted during the invalid period, and it is possible to realize a game progressing at a good tempo.

Furthermore, as in configuration 1, by configuring the 3 bet lamp D213 to turn on after the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out, when the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, Since the max bet lamp is off, the player can clearly recognize that the prescribed number of three game medals has been bet.

<<Configuration 2>> Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. When no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the MAX BET lamp is on, the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, and the START lamp D180 is off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 1 BET lamp D211 turns on. After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 2 BET lamp D212 turns on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, the 3 BET lamp D213 turns on, and the START lamp D180 turns on. After that, the MAX BET lamp turns off.

As in configuration 2, the MAX BET lamp is turned off after the third gaming medal is inserted and the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, by configuring the 3 BET lamp D213 to turn on as soon as possible after the player operates the MAX BET button, the 3 BET lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, which allows the game to proceed smoothly and prevents the player from inserting extra gaming medals or becoming distrustful of the gaming machine's performance or behavior due to slow operation.

<<Configuration 3>> Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bet lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp goes out, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up.

As in configuration 3, when the third gaming medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out before the 3 bet lamp D213 lights up, the start lamp D180 lights up at approximately the same time. This allows the player to be notified quickly that the next game can start, making the game progress smoothly and preventing the player from inserting extra gaming medals or becoming distrustful of the gaming machine's performance or behavior due to slow operation.

<<Configuration 4>> Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is off. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp goes out. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

<<Configuration 5>> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no game medals have been bet on the drum-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is blinking, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is on and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 lights up. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and the start lamp D180 is lit. After that, the max bet lamp turns off before the timing when the max bet lamp turns on and off (in the middle of lighting) when the max bet lamp blinks. In addition, this figure shows the case where the third game medal is inserted while the max bet lamp is lit and the max bet lamp is blinking, repeatedly turning on and off. The max bet lamp turns on and then turns off at the timing when the second gaming medal is inserted, but if the third gaming medal is inserted while the max bet lamp is blinking and is off. In this case, the max bet lamp remains off after the third game medal is inserted.

Even in the case where the 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, and 3-bet lamp D213 are all turned on when no bet is made, as in configuration 5, the number of game medals inserted (the first, By changing the lighting/extinguishing combinations of the start lamp D180, 2-bet lamp D212, and 3-bet lamp D213 depending on the second and third medals, the player can check the current gaming situation (how many game medals are there). This means that it is possible to understand whether the bet has been made or not.

<<Configuration 6>> Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the MAX BET lamp is on, the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, and the START lamp D180 is off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 1 BET lamp D211 is turned on. After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 2 BET lamp D212 is turned on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, and at the timing when the insertion of the gaming medal is detected (earlier than the timing when the START lamp D180 and the 3 BET lamp D213 are turned on in configuration 2), the START lamp D180 is turned on, and the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on. After that, the MAX BET lamp is turned off.

As in configuration 6, the MAX BET lamp is turned off after the third gaming medal is inserted and the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on. In other words, by configuring the 3 BET lamp D213 to turn on as soon as possible after the player operates the MAX BET button, the 3 BET lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, making the progress of the game smoother and preventing the player from inserting extra gaming medals or becoming distrustful of the performance or behavior of the gaming machine due to slow operation.

<<Configuration 7>> Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bets are valid, the MAX BET lamp is on, the 1 BET lamp D211 is off, the 2 BET lamp D212 is off, the 3 BET lamp D213 is off, and the START lamp D180 is off. After that, the first gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 1 BET lamp D211 turns on. After that, the START lamp D180 turns on (starts blinking). After that, the second gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp remains on, and the 2 BET lamp D212 turns on. After that, the third gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp turns off, and the 3 BET lamp D213 turns on.

As in configuration 6, after the third gaming medal is inserted, the MAX BET lamp is turned off and the 3 BET lamp D213 is turned on at approximately the same time. In other words, by configuring the 3 BET lamp D213 to turn on as soon as possible after the player operates the MAX BET button, the 3 BET lamp D213 can be turned on seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, which allows the game to proceed smoothly and prevents the player from inserting extra gaming medals or becoming distrustful of the gaming machine's performance or behavior due to slow operation.

In the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 4, 6, and 7, the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit, but as long as the player can recognize that the max bet button is valid, the max bet lamp may be configured to flash as in configuration 5. Also, in configuration 5, the max bet lamp may be configured to flash as in configuration 7. Similarly, in configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is lit, but as long as the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is valid, the start lamp D180 may be on = the start lamp D180 is flashing. Also, in configuration 7, the start lamp D180 is on = the start lamp D180 is lit. Also, the max bet lamp may be configured to be controlled by the sub-control board S side or the main control board M side.

<<<Configuration when operating the settlement button>>> Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the operation when operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The following configuration exemplifies a case where three game medals are bet on the gaming machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the same figure, the max bet lamp is lit (or flashing) as ON, the max bet lamp is off as OFF, the settlement button is newly detected as an ON operation, and the settlement button as ON. OFF when no operation is detected or no new operation of the settlement button is detected, ON when the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, OFF when the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, Turn ON when the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit, turn OFF when the 2-bet lamp D212 is off, turn ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and turn ON when the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. OFF, ON when the start lamp D180 is lit (or blinking), OFF when the start lamp D180 is off, ON when the ready-to-load lamp D300 is lit (or blinking), ready-to-load lamp The figure shows that the D300 is turned off as OFF, and that the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 as OFF→ON→OFF. In addition, although the figure illustrates the case where game medals are inserted one by one from the medal slot D170, the bet button is different from the max bet button, and one operation (off → on) allows one coin to be inserted. A 1-bet button that allows you to bet a game medal or a 2-bet button that allows you to bet 2 game medals with a single operation (off → on) may be provided. There is no problem in applying the same effect as when inserting one game medal into D170 to pressing the 1 bet button once. In addition, the configuration illustrated below may be configured such that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even when the replay stop display is displayed, or the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled while the replay stop display is displayed. It may be configured such that the game medals that are held cannot be settled. In addition, as a condition for operating the settlement button D60 and paying out the betted game medals from the discharge port D240 (as a condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated), the settlement button has changed from "on to off". It may also be expressed as "on" or "on for 0.5 seconds or more".

<<Configuration 1>> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turns from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, 3-bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and ready-to-enter lamp D300 are activated. When the light goes out, the three bet game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout starts), and then the credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are used. Certain four game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, at the timing when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. In addition, in the figure, a case is illustrated in which the payment process can be executed by turning the payment button D60 from off to on in a situation where the operation of the payment button D60 is valid (during the validity period). The execution mode is not limited to this, for example, in a situation where the operation of the payment button D60 is valid (during the validity period), the payment button D60 turns from off to on, and continues to be on for a predetermined time or more (the payment button D60 The configuration may be such that the payment process can be executed when the button is pressed for a long time (the same applies to FIGS. 85 to 87).

As in configuration 1, by configuring the game medals that have been bet on to be paid out (paid out) before the credits, the player can confirm that the credits have become 0 when finishing the game. Even if the player leaves his/her seat immediately, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to settle the game medals that have been bet. In particular, when ending a game when the number of credits is small, such as 1 or 2, there is a relatively high possibility that the player will end the game without acquiring enough game medals. It is also possible that people's attention is becoming distracted. Even in such cases, in order to prevent unintended disadvantages to players, the game medals that have been bet are settled (paid out) before the credits are paid out. Therefore, in configuration 1, before the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted, the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are , and the input ready lamp D300 are configured to turn off.

<<Configuration 2>> Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals are bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turns from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the max bet lamp lights up and the three betted game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240 ( (The payout will start). Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned off, and the enable lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 goes out, and the input ready lamp D300 turns on. In configuration 2, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the payment button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the bet game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and when the settlement button D60 is operated, By configuring the max bet lamp to be turned on before the 1 bet lamp D211, 2 bet lamp D212, 3 bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and input ready lamp D300 are turned off, the player may accidentally press the checkout button. If the player accidentally operates the MAX BET button, only the game medals that have been bet will be paid out, and the player will want to operate the MAX BET button again to bet credits. By configuring the system to notify the player, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<<Configuration 3>> Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the reel type gaming machine and the bet is invalid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, the 2 bet lamp D212 is on, the 3 bet lamp D213 is on, the start lamp D180 is on, and the insert possible lamp D300 is on. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (OFF → ON), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the start lamp D180 and the insert possible lamp D300 are turned off. The three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started), and then, the four game medals that are credits stored in the gaming machine and displayed on the credit number display device D200 are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, after the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the 3 bet lamp D213 → 2 bet lamp D212 → 1 bet lamp D211 are turned off in this order. In addition, when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal that changes the display of the credit number display device D200 from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertion possible lamp D300 is turned on.

<<Configuration 4>> Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals are bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turns from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the start lamp D180 and the input ready lamp D300 go out, and the three bet game medals are placed in the ejection slot. It is paid out from D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3-bed lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 goes out and the throwable lamp D300 turns on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 4, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the payment button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in configuration 4, by configuring the machine to pay out the bet medals but not pay out credits, and by configuring the max bet lamp to light up after the insert possible lamp D300 lights up, if a player bets three medals and then wishes to change to a one medal bet, the player will operate the settlement button D60 once to settle the three bet medals, and then insert one medal or operate the one bet button. In such a case, by lighting the insert possible lamp D300 before the max bet lamp, the game can proceed smoothly.

<<Configuration 5>> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turns from off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, 3-bet lamp D213, start lamp D180, and ready-to-enter lamp D300 are activated. At the same time as the light goes out, the three bet game medals are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started). After that, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In addition, in configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<Configuration 6>> Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals are bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, at the timing when the payment button D60 is pressed and the payment process is started, the input ready lamp D300 is turned off. After that, the start lamp D180 goes out. The three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (the payout is started), and then the four game medals that are the credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are Game medals will be paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing when the settlement button D60 is operated, the lights are turned off in the order of 3-bet lamp D213→2-bet lamp D212→1-bet lamp D211. In addition, after the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. Note that the max bet lamp remains off.

<<Configuration 7>> Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where 3 game medals have been bet on the drum type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the input ready lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process is started, the max bet lamp starts blinking and the start lamp D180 turns off. Thereafter, the insertable lamp D300 is turned off, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3-bed lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off. After that, the input ready lamp D300 lights up. Note that the max bet lamp remains off. In configuration 7, if it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<<Differences in operation depending on timing of power cut>>>> Figure 88 is a timing chart that explains the operation of the main control board M and the sub-control board S depending on the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power cut. Figure 88(a) is a timing chart that shows a first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power cut, and Figure 88(b) is a timing chart that shows a second aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power cut.

The first mode is a mode in which a power outage occurs after the main program of the main control board M or the sub-program of the sub-control board S has started to execute. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which a power outage occurs before the main program of the main control board or the sub-program of the sub-control board starts to execute.

In this example, a power outage is a state where the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, such as when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the power cable is disconnected, the power cable is disconnected, or a power outage occurs. But that's fine. This also includes cases where the power supply is unintentionally cut off at a gaming facility. The timing at which a power outage occurs is the timing when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the timing when the power cable is disconnected. This is the timing when the power outage occurred. In addition, in this example, "occurrence of power outage" means that the power supply (power supply) to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detecting a power outage" means that the gaming machine detects the occurrence of a power outage. It is to detect.

In Figures 88(a) and 88(b), ΔT1 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (sometimes called the off level) after a power outage occurs, ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, ΔT3 is the time from the time when the power outage occurs until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level, ΔT4 is the time from the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the subprogram of the sub-control board S is started, and ΔT5 is the time from the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started. Here, the following relationships are established: ΔT5<ΔT1, ΔT2<ΔT3, ΔT5>ΔT3, ΔT4<ΔT5.

<<<First Aspect>>><<Change in Power Supply Status>> At time t1, power supply to the gaming machine is started, and at time t3, power is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

<<Operation of the main control board>> <Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board> As described above, power supply to the gaming machine starts at time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board at time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. Note that in the same figure, a case is illustrated in which the time from when power supply to the main control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, but this is not limited thereto, and the time from when power supply to the main control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to vary (to be random). Also, a case is illustrated in which the time from when power supply to the sub-control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, but this is not limited thereto, and the time from when power supply to the sub-control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may be configured to vary (to be random). Even in such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the minimum time (minimum time) from when power supply to the main control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level to be longer than the maximum time (maximum time) from when power supply to the sub-control board starts until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level.

Then, a power outage occurs at time t3. Due to this power outage, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually drops from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and becomes approximately constant at the maintenance level from time t4. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, and even if a power outage occurs, the power supply unit E can output an approximately constant power supply voltage (maintenance level) for a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5) (the power outage processing is executed in a situation where the voltage at the maintenance level is being supplied). In this example, the time (the time from time t4 to time t5) from the start of execution of the power outage processing (detection of the power outage) to maintain the maintenance level is configured to ensure at least the time for which the timer interrupt processing can be executed 20 times (the time for which the timer interrupt processing (Figure 32) can be called and executed 20 times). In the figure, the time from time t4 to time t5 is set to a time that allows the timer interrupt process to be executed at least 20 times, but the time from time t3 to time t5, in other words, the time from when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (a power outage occurs) until the power outage process can no longer be executed, may be set to a time that allows the timer interrupt process to be executed at least 20 times.

Then, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5, and becomes the off level at time t6.

<Starting of main program> The main program executed by the main control board starts at time ta, which is ΔT5 after time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. Execution of this main program executes the main control board START (power-on) process shown in FIG. 13 described above.

As described above, if the setting key switch is off in the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1016 to 1022, 1036 to 1046, and 1300 are executed, and a timer interrupt is started by the process of step 1040.

Further, in the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, if the setting key switch is on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt> If the setting key switch is off, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and if the setting key switch is on, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1104 in FIG. A timer interrupt is activated. After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined period T. The period T in which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of Occurrence of Power Outage> When a power outage occurs and the voltage continues to drop to a certain level, the power supply unit E outputs a power outage detection signal. The main control board M has an input port into which a power-off detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when no power-off has occurred, and is a low-level signal when a power-off has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether or not a power-off has occurred, depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high-level signal or a low-level signal.

In this example, the main control board M detects power outage in the determination process of step 1604 in FIG. 32. Specifically, in two consecutive timer interrupt processes, the main control board M determines that a power-off has occurred if the data read from the input port is a low-level signal both times.

In this way, in this example, a power outage is detected by two successive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, if a power outage occurs after a timer interrupt is started by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. 14, the power outage can be detected. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs before the timer interrupt is started, it may not be possible to detect the power outage.

In this way, if a power outage occurs after execution of the main program has started, and a timer interrupt is started by the processing of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or step 1104 in FIG. 14, the power outage can be detected by the interrupt processing. When a power outage is detected, the power outage processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<<Operation of sub-control board>><Start-up of sub-program> The sub-program executed by the sub-control board S starts at time tb when ΔT4 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage became constant. By executing this subprogram, the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 described above is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 mentioned above, and by starting the sub-control board S before the main control board M, the sub-control board S can avoid missing commands sent from the main control board M. can be received. In addition, in the figure, the timing when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting power supply to the main control board M, and the timing when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting power supply to the sub control board S, are shown as the same time tb, but the time from when power supply starts to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and the time from when power supply starts to the sub control board S until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level are different. It may be configured such that the time required to reach the supply level is different, and even in such a configuration, the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the main program of the main control board M is started. It is preferable to configure the time to be longer than the time from the start of power supply to the sub-control board S until the sub-program of the sub-control board S starts, so that the power supply voltage on the main control board M side is The time from when the supply voltage reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started is the time from when the power supply voltage on the sub-control board S side reaches the supply level until the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started. It is preferable to configure the time period to be longer than the time period.

<<<<Second Mode>>> Figure 88 (b) is a timing chart showing a second mode of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power cut-off. The second mode is a mode in which power cut-off occurs before execution of the main program executed by the main control board M begins. In other words, this is a mode in which power cut-off occurs before ΔT5 has elapsed since time t2, when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level.

Thus, in the second mode, the power outage occurs before the main program starts to execute (before the timer interrupt is activated), so the main program cannot detect that the power outage has occurred, and the power outage processing shown in FIG. 36 is not executed, causing the gaming machine to stop due to the power outage (the supply voltage reaches a low level).

<<Operation of main control board>><Power supply voltage supplied from power supply unit E to main control board> Power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from an off level (time t1) to a supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

Then, a power outage occurs at time t13. Due to this power outage, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually drops from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and becomes approximately constant at the maintenance level from time t14. After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually drops from time t15 and becomes the off level at time t16. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed to be approximately constant at the maintenance level, but in reality, the voltage level continues to gradually drop from the occurrence of the power outage, falls below the voltage level at which operation can be guaranteed (operational guarantee voltage level), and then the voltage level becomes 0. In other words, in reality, it is designed so that it takes 20 or more interrupts from the detection of the power outage until it falls below the operational guarantee voltage level. It may also be designed so that it takes 20 or more interrupts from the occurrence of the power outage until it falls below the operational guarantee voltage level.

In this way, in the second aspect, execution of the main program is started after a power-off occurs, but the timer interrupt is not activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is configured to be at an off level before the main control board M is turned off. Note that if a power outage occurs immediately before the main program starts (for example, when the main program starts up after one timer interrupt processing time has elapsed), the timer interrupt processing can be started, and the power is turned off. The process can be executed without any problems.

Although the first aspect and the second aspect are illustrated in the figure, configurations applicable to the gaming machine according to this example include (1) Immediately after starting power supply to the main control board M ( For example, a power outage occurs after the timer interrupt processing is executed once after starting power supply to the main control board M. → Before the execution of the main program starts, the power supply unit E is sent to the main control board M. (2) Start supplying power to the main control board M → Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M Immediately after the power supply voltage reaches the supply level (for example, after the timer interrupt processing is executed once after the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M reaches the supply level), a power failure occurs → Main program execution It may be configured as described above, in which the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes an off level before the main program is started (execution of the main program is not started).

<<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state>>> FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first aspect. 89(b) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the second embodiment.

<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the first mode>> <State 1> First, in state 1 of FIG. 89(a), the gaming machine is in the normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being played or a state in which a game can be played, the setting key switch is "off," and the "power supply state" is "on."

<State 2> In state 2, a power outage occurs with the setting key switch remaining "off," and the "power supply state" becomes "off." At this time, the power-off process in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in normal mode is saved in the memory area as the return address.

<State 3> In state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4> Next, in state 4, when power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "on" state, the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. As mentioned above, in the first mode, the power is cut off after the main program starts running, and the main program shown in FIG. A control board START (power-on) process can be executed.

In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is on, and the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. , transition from normal state to setting change mode. Note that in this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. In this way, if the setting key switch is set to ``on'' and the ``power supply status'' is set to ``on'', the system will move to setting change mode, and then the setting change switch or start lever will not be operated. This allows the setting values to be changed. Further, by transmitting a setting change start command to the sub control board S through the process of step 1622 in FIG. 32, it is possible for the sub control board S to notify that it is in the setting change mode.

<State 5> Next, if the power is cut off while the setting change mode is in effect and the setting change device control processing is being executed, the "power supply state" changes to "off". When a power outage occurs, the power outage process in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process (setting change mode) is changed to the return address by the process in step 1902. It is saved in the storage area as .

<State 6> In state 6, the "power supply state" remains "off" and the setting key switch is operated to switch the setting key switch to "off."

<State 7> In state 7, with the setting key switch in the "off" position, power is supplied and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" is switched to "on", the main control board START (power on) process of Figure 13 is executed. In the judgment process of step 1014 in Figure 13, the setting key switch is judged to be "off", and the process of step 1022 is executed. This process of step 1022 returns to the return address saved in the memory area in state 5, and execution begins with the processing of the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the memory area in state 5 is the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process, and by returning, the processing of the setting change device control process is immediately executed. Thus, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and the basic action when transitioning to the setting change mode is to turn on the power supply by turning on the setting key switch while the power supply is off, but even if the power supply is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting change mode is stored as the return address and the setting change mode is entered. By configuring in this way, even if a power outage occurs during the setting change mode (for example, if the game arcade experiences a power outage), it is possible to return to the state before the power outage, making it difficult for abnormal operation of the gaming machine to occur.

<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the second mode>><State 1> In state 1 of FIG. 89(b), similarly to the first mode, the gaming machine is in the normal state, That is, the game is in a state where a game is being played or a game can be played, the setting key switch is "off", and the "power supply state" is "on".

<State 2> Similarly to the first aspect, in state 2, power is cut off while the setting key switch remains in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" becomes "off". At this time, the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state is saved in the storage area as a return address.

<State 3> In state 3, the "power supply state" remains "off" and the setting key switch is operated to switch it to "on."

<State 4> In state 4, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "on" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "on".

<State 5> In state 5, when the setting key switch is "on", a power outage occurs and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second mode, a power outage occurs before the execution of the main program executed by the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second mode, the "power supply state" is once "on" (state 4), but immediately after the "power supply state" related to state 4 becomes "on" (for example, after the time for executing one timer interrupt process has elapsed), the "power supply state" is switched to "off". In other words, before the main control board START (power on) process in FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is started), the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes the off level (state 5). For this reason, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the memory area is not changed, and the return address saved in state 2 is saved in the memory area as it is.

<State 6> Next, in state 6, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to "off" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7> In state 7, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" is switched to "on". When the "power supply state" becomes "on", the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. Through the process of step 1022, the process returns to the return address saved in the storage area in state 2, and execution starts from the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in state 2 is the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state, and the next process to be executed in the normal state is executed. In this way, in the second aspect, even if the setting key switch is turned on and the power supply status is turned on, the main program of the main control board M is not executed. If the power supply is turned ``off'', the system is configured so that it will not enter setting change mode even if the setting key switch is turned ``off'' and then the power supply is turned ``on''. . By configuring as in the second aspect, if the power is cut off immediately after the gaming machine is powered on, if the gaming machine is shifted to the setting change mode, an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine. It is possible to configure the game machine so that it does not shift to the setting change mode even if the setting key switch is on, and it is possible to configure a gaming machine that is less likely to cause problems.

<<<<Control of medal award and payout sound output control>> As mentioned above, when a small win is won (when a symbol combination corresponding to a small win is stopped and displayed), the player is awarded the number of medals to be paid out that corresponds to the small win.

<<Medal Awarding Process>> The process of awarding medals includes a process of adding up the number of credits and awarding them, and a process of actually paying out gaming medals to the outside of the gaming machine.

<Addition process of the number of credits> When the current number of credits is less than the maximum stored number (for example, less than 50), the CPU 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the payout number until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. Add. This process of adding the number of credits is executed by the calculation process of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M.

<Game medal payout process> When the current number of credits exceeds the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out medals from the medal payout device H to award medals. . The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<<Medal awarding modes>> Depending on the current number of credits and the number of medals to be awarded, there are three types of modes: a mode in which only the credit number addition process is performed, a mode in which only the game medal payout process is performed, and a mode in which the credit number addition process is followed by the game medal payout process (both the credit number addition process and the medal payout process are performed).

<A mode of adding only the number of credits> When the current number of credits is less than or equal to the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits according to the number of paid out cards until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. to add. If the maximum stored number is not reached even after adding up the number of paid-out medals, the process of awarding medals ends with only the process of adding the number of credits.

<Mode of transition from credit number addition process to game medal payout process> When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum number of credits stored, the CPUC100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of credits stored. When the number of credits reaches the maximum number of credits stored, the CPUC100 of the main control board M switches from credit number addition process to game medal payout process. The CPUC100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals, which is obtained by subtracting the added amount of credits from the payout number, from the medal payout device H. The sum of the added amount of credits and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the payout number corresponding to the small winning combination.

In this way, when shifting from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspect of only the game medal payout process> If the current number of credits has already reached the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 to payout the medals from the medal payout device H. Payout the number of game medals.

<<Specific Example>> For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current number of credits is 47 and a payout number of 5 medals is to be given to a player, first, the CPU 100 of the main control board M is adds the number of credits one by one. Specifically, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device is 47 → 48 (first credit (time t1)) → 49 (second credit (time t2)) → 50 (third credit (time t2)) t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of stored credits (50 pieces) is reached, and the number of credits cannot be increased any further.

Next, the CPU 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts 3 coins for the added credit from the 5 coins to be paid out. The two medals are paid out from the medal payout device H.

In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been dispensed at time t7, and ends the dispensing process. .

<<Various Times>> <Unit Processing Time for Credit Addition Process and Game Medal Payout Process> In the credit addition process by the CPU C100 of the main control board M, it takes a unit processing time a to increase the number of credits from m to m+1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2 - time t1 = a to increase the number of credits from 48 (first credit) to 49 (second credit), and it takes time t3 - time t2 = a to increase the number of credits from 49 (second credit) to 50 (third credit). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is approximately constant.

Furthermore, in the process of paying out game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the n+1th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6-time t4=c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is approximately constant.

One unit processing time a can be defined as the difference in timing between two successive addition processes. For example, unit processing time a is the difference between the timing (time t1) of the addition process (first image) from 47 to 48 and the timing (time t2) of the addition process (second image) from 48 to 49, or the difference between the timing (time t2) of the addition process (second image) from 48 to 49 and the timing (time t3) of the addition process (third image) from 49 to 50.

Moreover, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference in the timing of the start of two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the timing of starting processing for the fifth image (time t6) and the timing of starting the addition processing for the fourth image (time t4). In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be defined to have a constant cycle. Note that the following regulations and the configuration shown in FIG. 90 are all based on the situation that the game medals are sufficiently stored in the medal payout device H and the game medals are placed in all the grooves of the disk D50. The case where game medals are paid out is illustrated.

Note that the timing of starting the payout process such as t4 and t6 is as follows: (1) t4 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 turns from on to off due to the payout of the fourth game medal, and t6 is the timing when the first payout sensor H1 is turned from on to off due to the payout of the fourth game medal; (2) t4 is the timing at which the first payout sensor H1 changes from on to off due to the payout of game medals; (2) t6 is the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 changes from off to on due to the payout of the fourth game medal; Let t4 be the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 turns from off to on due to the payout of the fifth game medal, and (3) t4 is the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 changes from on to off due to the payout of the fourth game medal. (4) Set t6 as the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 turns from on to off with the payout of the fifth game medal. The timing at which H1 changes from OFF to ON, t6 is the timing at which the first payout sensor H1 changes from OFF to ON due to the payout of the 5th game medal, (5) t4 is the timing at which the 4th game medal is paid out. (6) t4 is the timing when a part of the game medals is paid out to the outside of the disk H50, and t5 is the timing when a part of the fifth game medal is paid out to the outside of the disk H50. Let t5 be the timing when all of the game medals that are to be paid out are paid out to the outside of the disk H50, and t5 is the timing when all of the game medals that are to be paid out as the 5th coin are paid out to the outside of the disk H50. (7 ) In the case where the payout process is configured to be executed every time one game medal is paid out, t4 is the start timing of the payout process for the fourth medal, and t6 is the start timing of the payout process for the fifth medal, as described above. may be configured. Note that details of the first dispensing sensor H1 and the second dispensing sensor H2 will be described later. In addition, since the various time values and timings mentioned above are just design values, there may be slight deviations when the gaming machine is actually in operation. It should be noted that the comparison of time values, timing, etc. detailed in 2.1 is a comparison of design values. Additionally, it should be noted that no matter which of the above-mentioned configurations is adopted, the configuration can be made such that the comparison of time values described later is established.

<Switching time e from credit addition process to game medal payout process> As mentioned above, if the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number, and not all of the number of payouts has been given, , switches to the game medal payout process. It takes a switching time e for the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to switch from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing.

<<Time comparison>>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c> The unit processing time a described above is different from unit processing time c. Unit processing time a is a time determined by the calculation processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M, and unit processing time c is made up of both the time required for the calculation processing of the CPU C100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. It is possible to make unit processing time c longer than unit processing time a. In this way, payout can be accurately controlled, including the drive time of the medal payout device H.

As mentioned above, the time required to drive the medal payout device H can be adjusted to make the unit processing time c equal to the unit processing time a. This makes it possible to speed up the payout process.

<Switching Time e> The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By increasing the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, and it is possible to smoothly switch from the calculation process of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to the drive of the hopper H40. .

The switching time e can also be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and by ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be started immediately, increasing the consumption of game medals, increasing the profits of the gaming facility, and improving the operating efficiency of the gaming machines.

In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from the fixed cycle, and the feeling of exhilaration when the game medals start being paid out to the medal tray can be improved. A sense of anticipation can be given to the game.

The switching time e can also be made to coincide with the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is made to coincide with the unit processing time a, medals can be awarded to the player at regular intervals, and the player can be assured that the process of adding credits and the process of paying out game medals result in the same amount of medals.

<<Output of game media imparting sound>> The CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub control board S when starting credit addition processing (time t1). Upon receiving this payout start command, the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20.

Further, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub control board S when the payout of game medals ends (time t7). Upon receiving this payout end command, the sub control board S ends the output of the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20. As mentioned above, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and sends all of the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small role to the player. Determine whether it has been granted or not. When the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that all of the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small winning combination have been awarded, it finishes outputting the payout end command to the sub control board S, and outputs the payout end command from the speaker S20. End the output of the game media imparting sound. In addition, if the game media added sound is configured to repeatedly reproduce (output) a sound with a certain period, the game media added sound will be immediately outputted at the timing when the sub-control board S side receives the payout end command. The output may be configured to be terminated, or the output of the game medium imparting sound may be terminated at the timing when the cycle of the gaming medium imparting sound that is being outputted is completed at the timing when the sub control board S side receives the payout end command. It may be configured to do so.

The game medium granting sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by playing the unit granting sound data at least once. The unit granting sound data is pre-stored in the RAM of the sub-control board S. As shown in FIG. 90, the playback time for one unit granting sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the unit granting sound data from the RAM and outputs the game medium granting sound from the speaker S20 by repeatedly playing the unit granting sound data multiple times from when the payout start command is received until when the payout end command is received.

<First aspect> The first aspect of the game media imparting sound shown in FIG. 90 is an aspect in which the unit imparting sound data is repeatedly reproduced every playback time d from the time when the payout start command is received. By playing in this manner, the game medium imparting sound is output at a constant cycle. As mentioned above, even when switching from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals, the sound for giving game media is output at a constant cycle, so the player does not feel strange about the payout, and the credit By showing the player that both the number addition process and the game medal payout process are of equal value, a sense of security can be given to the player.

<Second Aspect> Furthermore, the second aspect of the game media imparting sound shown in FIG. After the end, the unit-applied sound data is played back for a time f, and then, at time t4, when the game medal payout process starts, the unit-added sound data is again started to be played. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game media imparting sound is output at a timing different from the fixed cycle, so it is possible to give the game a sense of excitement and anticipation as the game medals begin to be paid out to the medal tray. .

Note that while the game medals are being paid out from the medal payout device H, if the game medals in the hopper H40 run out and a hopper error occurs (for example, if it is determined Yes in the process of step 1279), the secondary The control board S stops outputting the game medium imparting sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and the payout becomes possible, the main control board M sends a payout start command to the sub-control board S again, and the sub-control board S starts outputting the game media imparting sound. . Note that this is not limited to this, and even if a hopper error occurs, the game medium imparting sound will continue to be output, but the volume of the game medium imparting sound will be changed to the level of the sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the hopper error is canceled by outputting at a volume lower than the volume (volume may be set to 0), the output of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated, and the sound provided with the game medium is output. It may be configured to restore the volume to the original level.

<<<Arrangement of Integrated Circuits on Board>> FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M.

The main control board M has a printed circuit board MP that is roughly plate-like and rectangular. The front side of the printed circuit board MP is mainly equipped with the CPUC100, ICs, resistors, connectors, etc., while the back side of the printed circuit board MP is mainly formed with a circuit pattern made of conductors. The main control board M (printed circuit board MP) has a rectangular shape consisting of two long ends ML1 and ML2 that are parallel to each other and run along the longitudinal direction, and two short ends MS1 and MS2 that are parallel to each other and run along the lateral direction.

In this example, the main control board M is mounted so as to stand upright within the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is mounted in an upright position, the long ends ML1 and ML2 are arranged horizontally, and the short ends MS1 and MS2 are arranged vertically. The long end ML1 is located on the upper side, and the long end ML2 is located on the lower side. Furthermore, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end MS1 is located to the left of the short end MS2, and the short end MS2 is located to the right of the short end MS1.

Hereinafter, the long end ML1 side will be referred to as the upper side, the long end ML2 side will be referred to as the lower side, the short end MS1 side will be referred to as the left side, and the short end MS2 side will be referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100> The CPUC100 has an elongated shape, and the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the transverse direction is CSL. The CPUC 100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connections are formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, in the work of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC 100 in an appropriate orientation in order to make the CPUC 100 perform the desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC 100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC 100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the CPUC 100 are formed on the main body of the CPUC 100.

In this example, the CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC100 coincides with (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by positioning the CPUC100 so that the first pin of the CPUC100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC100 is aligned with the orientation of the IC, which will be described later, and this reduces the chance of the CPUC100 being installed in the wrong orientation when it is attached to the printed circuit board MP.

Further, generally, various text information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer's name are printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be spaced apart from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100. It is preferable that text information such as a model number and a manufacturer's name be easily visible when the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPU 100 so that the first pin of the CPU 100 is located on the lower left side, the CPU 100 can be arranged in an orientation where the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily recognized.

When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC 100 increase counterclockwise starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP.

<IC> Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has an elongated shape, with a length in the longitudinal direction of ILL and a length in the transverse direction of ISL. Like the CPUC 100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connections are formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, even in the work of attaching an IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in an appropriate orientation in order to make the IC perform the desired operation. Therefore, the first pin of the IC (1P shown in FIG. 91) is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the IC are formed on the main body of the IC.

In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the IC coincides (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Furthermore, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this way, by arranging the ICs so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, the orientation of all ICs is aligned, and mistakes such as installing the IC in the wrong orientation can be reduced when installing the ICs on the printed circuit board MP.

Furthermore, various types of character information (not shown), such as a model number and a manufacturer's name, are generally printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be spaced apart along the longitudinal direction of the IC from the first pin side. It is preferable that text information such as the model number and manufacturer's name of the IC be easily visible while the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As mentioned above, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC can be arranged in such a way that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily seen. You can also do it.

When an IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the IC increase counterclockwise starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP.

<Resistance> Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connections with other electronic components are formed. The IC has an elongated shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the transversal direction is RSL.

<Connector> A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connections with other electronic components are formed. The main control board M is connected to the sub-control board S etc. via a connector, and is capable of transmitting and receiving various signals.

<Spacing between CPUC100 and IC> As shown by the dashed line in FIG. 91, only resistors are placed inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, and no IC is placed. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the short-side length CSL of the CPUC100. Various currents (currents that change over time, for example, high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC can be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC100. In this way, by not placing the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC can be placed at a position separated by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL) from the CPUC100, and the noise emitted from the IC can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC100.

Also, the specified length from the outer periphery COR of CPUC100 may be at least the longitudinal length RLL of the resistor. Because a current flows through the resistor, the resistor can become a heat source, which may affect the operation of CPUC100. For this reason, by not placing the resistor inside the specified range CSR1 around CPUC100, the resistor can be placed at a position a certain distance away from CPUC100 (for example, the length RLL), and the heat generated by the resistor can be prevented from affecting the operation of CPUC100.

<Relationship between CPUC100 height, IC height, and other component height> Figure 92 is a side view showing the heights of the various electronic components shown in Figure 91. As shown in Figure 92, CPUC100 height CHT is the highest, followed by IC height IHT, and resistor height RHT, the lowest. As shown in Figure 91, only components with heights less than CPUC100 height CHT are placed inside a predetermined range CSR2 around CPUC100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of CPUC100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the longitudinal length RLL of the resistor.

An attachment tool (not shown) is used to attach the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP. The mounting tool is a tool that clamps the CPUC 100 at the tip of the mounting tool and mounts it close to the printed circuit board MP. Since the structure is such that the CPUC 100 is held between the tips of the attachment tools, the tips of the attachment tools are arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is being held. For this reason, when installing the CPUC 100, the tip of the mounting tool must also be brought close to the printed circuit board MP, and space for the tip of the mounting tool must be created to prevent the tip of the mounting tool from interfering with other electronic components. It is necessary to secure it.

Therefore, only components whose height is less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 are arranged in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. By doing so, even when the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool will not interfere with other components. The region CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

Note that only components with heights less than the CHT of CPUC100 are placed in the area surrounding the position where CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, and components with heights equal to or greater than the CHT of CPUC100 may be attached outside the area on the printed circuit board MP surrounding the position where CPUC100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, or all components attached to the printed circuit board MP may be components with heights less than the CHT of CPUC100.

In this way, by arranging only the electronic components that are lower than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC 100, it is possible to secure a space where the tip of the mounting tool can be brought close. Even with the use of attachment tools, the CPUC 100 can be attached to the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

In the above example, the main control board M was explained as an example, but all the boards on which electronic components such as CPUs and ICs are mounted, such as the sub-control board S, the door board D, the drum board K, and the power supply board E, etc. It can be applied to

<<<Configuration Regarding AT Lottery>>> Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that the configuration illustrated in the figure is applicable to all of the configurations described above when configured to include an AT.

First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process related to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT-related state is a state in which the AT lottery can be held. Note that in this figure, there are not multiple game states with different probabilities of winning the AT lottery, such as a low probability state or a high probability state, and it is configured so that the AT lottery can be held only in one game state, such as the high probability state in this embodiment. Also, as a difference from this embodiment, it is configured so that the AT lottery is not held based on the winning of the BB.

If Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets "2" as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type for identifying the probability of winning when executing the AT lottery, which is provided in order to reduce the amount of data required to execute the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device with no setting difference in lottery probability). In the modified example shown in the same figure, the condition devices for which there is no setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (may be all replay combinations or some replay combinations), The bell is pressed in order of pressing, and in this process, it is determined whether or not the condition device with no setting difference has been won. Although there is a setting difference between the lottery probabilities of losing and common bells (there is a setting difference), in this process, it is configured so that it is not determined whether or not the lottery probability of losing or winning the common bell is different. ing. Note that it is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type and the RAM area for storing the winning numbers and performance group numbers described above are different areas. With such a configuration, the area for storing winning numbers and the presentation group, which are areas in which information regarding conditional devices with setting differences in winning probabilities and information regarding conditional devices with no setting differences in winning probabilities are stored separately. An area for storing numbers, an area for storing AT lottery types, which is an area where information regarding conditional devices with a setting difference in winning probability and information regarding a conditional device with no setting difference in winning probability are stored without distinction. can be configured to avoid confusion.

If the answer is Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, temporarily stores (overwrites) it in the specified RAM area (the same RAM area as the specified RAM area related to step 1401-2), and proceeds to step 1401-5. Note that if the answer is No in step 1401-3, the process also proceeds to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right of the figure will be described in detail. In this modified example, when a condition device with no setting difference is won in a situation where an AT lottery can be executed, if watermelon B is won, the AT lottery type is set to "0", if cherry is won, the AT lottery type is set to "0", if watermelon A is won, the AT lottery type is set to "1", if replay is won, the AT lottery type is set to "2", and if push order bell is won, the AT lottery type is set to "2".

Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0", and 18/256 when the AT lottery type is "1". 256, and when the AT lottery type is "2", it is 1/256, and the order is "0 → 1 → 2" in descending order of the probability of winning the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. If Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT counter to a predetermined value (for example, 50) as the initial number of AT games. In this modified example, unlike the present embodiment, the AT state initial number of games is set in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and the AT initial number of games is not set in the AT state start control process. (If you win an additional AT game number, the AT game number may be added.) Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onwards to the "AT in progress state", and moves to the next process (the process of step 1430). Note that even in the case of No in step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, the process moves to the next process (processing in step 1430).

In conventional gaming machines, the AT lottery includes a common lottery process that does not refer to winning combinations, and a lottery process that is executed when a condition device with no setting difference is won (a lottery process that refers to winning combinations). However, by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, The process of step 1401-2 corresponds to this), and the lottery process that is executed when a device with no setting difference is won (corresponds to the process of step 1401-4 in the figure). can be executed in one lottery process (corresponding to the process of step 1401-6 in the figure).

The above shows an example of a slot machine as an example of a gaming machine, but the above configuration can be applied to various gaming models such as pachinko machines, jan-ball machines, arrange ball machines, game machines, casino machines, etc.

In addition, among the above-mentioned configurations, the configurations related to settings such as the setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, setting key switch, and setting/reset button (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines that have setting values.

<<<<Configuration related to push order navigation applicable to the gaming machine according to this example>>> The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. Here, the manner in which push order navigation applicable to this example is executed is described in detail below. It should be noted that the configuration described in detail below is applicable to all embodiments.

Furthermore, with regard to the push order navigation in this example, the following configuration is called push order navigation. (1) Push order navigation refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop buttons advantageous to the player on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M. As a specific example, it is possible to instruct the push order of "middle → left → right" by displaying "=3". In addition, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction or instruction display, and a game in which the push order navigation is executed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game. (2) Push order navigation refers to the display of (an image suggesting) the operation mode of the stop buttons advantageous to the player on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S. As a specific example, it is possible to instruct (suggest) the push order of "left → middle → right" by displaying "123". (3) Push order navigation refers to the output of a sound suggesting the operation mode of the stop buttons advantageous to the player from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the message "left" is output, which indicates (suggests) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. (4) The reel window frame lamp D310 controlled by the sub-control board S lights up (blinks) to indicate the operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player, which is called push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and the left stop button lights up, which is called push order navigation. (5) The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub-control board S lights up (blinks) to indicate the operation mode of the stop button advantageous to the player, which is called push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel lights up, which can indicate (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.

The following describes the timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed and the timing at which the push order navigation ends in a game in which a push order role (a role in which the number of coins paid out and the transition mode to the RT state can differ depending on the push order, such as a push order bell or a push order replay role) has been determined as the winning role. When a push order role is determined as the winning role during the AT state, it is configured to be able to execute a push order navigation that notifies the player of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop buttons (the reel stop order and the operation timing of the stop buttons).

<<Configuration related to the start of displaying the push order navigation>> <Execution mode of the push order navigation when there is no wait> First, the following describes the execution mode of the push order navigation when there is no wait, in other words, when the start lever is operated to start a game when the minimum play time has elapsed (the timer value of the minimum play interval timer M70 is 0).

<Configuration 1> First, the configuration in FIG. 94 will be described. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed if the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start rotating (executed in step 1260 in FIG. 18). In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Thereafter, immediately after executing the drum rotation process, "=3" is displayed as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the push order display device D270, "=1": Instructs the push order of "Left → Middle → Right" "=2": Instructs the push order of "Left → Right → Middle" "=3": Specifies the pressing order of "Middle → Left → Right" "=4": Specifies the pressing order of "Middle → Right → Left" "=5": Specifies the pressing order of "Right → Left → Middle" Instruction "=6": The order of pressing is "Right → Middle → Left" is configured as an instruction.

The display mode when executing push order navigation with the push order display device D270 is not limited to the display mode described above. For example, numbers may be displayed only in the right digits (lower digits) without displaying "=", or a display mode other than numbers corresponding to the stop buttons (or reels) may be displayed only in the right digits (lower digits). Also, the right digits (lower digits) may be configured to display corresponding to the stop button (or reel) to be stopped next, and the left digits (higher digits) may be configured to display the push order for the entire game. When configured in this way, the display mode of the right digits (lower digits) may change with each stop operation of the stop button, while the left digits (higher digits) will have the same display mode regardless of the stop operation of the stop button.

After "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40, "123": Instructs the push order of "Left → Middle → Right" "132": Instructs the push order of "Left → Right → Middle" "213" : Specifies the pressing order of "Middle → Left → Right" "312": Specifies the pressing order of "Middle → Right → Left" "231": Specifies the pressing order of "Right → Left → Middle" "321": " It is structured as if the order of pressing is "right → middle → left".

Note that the display mode when executing the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to the above-mentioned display mode, and may be a display mode other than arithmetic numerals, such as Chinese numerals. , images of characters other than numbers, images of symbols, etc. may be used. In addition to the display mode that corresponds to all stop buttons, for example, "1--" that instructs only the first stop (press order navigation that informs that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop). You may also perform a push-order navigation like this.

Note that "display" may mean that all elements to be displayed have been completed, or that the elements to be displayed have started to be displayed. For example, displaying "123" on the performance display device S40 may mean that all elements to be displayed have been completed, or that the display of "123" has started on the performance display device S40 (e.g., an effect at the start of display has occurred). Similarly, "display end" may mean that all elements to be ended are no longer displayed, or that a display transition has started to prevent the elements to be ended from being displayed. For example, ending the display of "123" on the performance display device S40 may mean that all "123" is no longer displayed on the performance display device S40, or that a part of the display of "123" has started to be erased on the performance display device S40 (e.g., an effect at the end of display has occurred). Similarly, "display erase" may mean that all elements to be erased are no longer displayed, or that a display transition has started to prevent the elements to be erased from being displayed. For example, erasing the display of "123" on the performance display device S40 may mean that all of "123" is no longer displayed on the performance display device S40, or that part of the display of "123" has begun to be erased on the performance display device S40 (such as an effect occurring when the display is erased). Similarly, erasing the display of "1" on the performance display device S40 may mean that after the left stop button is operated when all of "123" is displayed on the performance display device S40, "1" is no longer displayed on the performance display device S40, or that part of the display of "1" has begun to be erased on the performance display device S40 (such as an effect occurring when the display is erased).

After the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, the operation of the stop button becomes valid. Note that after the reel starts rotating, the reel drive state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state, and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. In the instruction game, the player operates the stop button after confirming the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 or the effect display device S40, so as shown in the figure, the stop button is not activated. By displaying the push order navigation in front of the player, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the stop button before confirming the push order (mistaking the push order).

Further, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is displayed (display starts) earlier than the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 will be explained. When "Win-A3" is determined as the winning combination, the CPU 100 of the main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information as a control command to the sub-control board as a timer interrupt process in step 1622. Send to S side. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the command process of step 2250 based on the command related to the winning/replay winning information received from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M (as the command process, the CPUSC performs the push order navigation such as step 2360). (Executes push order navigation display processing for display).

Here, the process of displaying the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S will be described in detail. First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, and then stores the command data, analyzes the command, and transmits a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the performance control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes about 16 ms from receiving the command related to the winning/replay winning information to transmitting the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation. In addition, the performance control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, it executes a drawing process, which takes about 32 ms. Note that, as an example, the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S side is a command related to the winning/replay winning information, but this is merely an example, and other commands such as a command related to the performance group number may be used, and it may be designed appropriately according to the execution timing of the desired performance.

In addition, when displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side, the push order display device D270 is configured to light up dynamically, so the timer interrupt processing If the period is 2 ms, the five 7-segment LED units are sequentially lit for each timer interrupt process, so it takes a maximum of about 10 ms to complete the lighting. With this configuration, the push order navigation is not displayed after the trigger for displaying the push order navigation (for example, operation of the start lever) occurs on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side. The timing to display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side is greater than the time until completion (for example, the reception of commands related to winning/replay winning information from the main control board M side) ) occurs until the display of the push order navigation is completed takes a longer time.

Here, a detailed explanation will be given using the process executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M as a period during which the display of the push order navigation in this example can be started. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPU 100 of the main control board M controls peripheral devices and the like to advance the game. Note that for the processing executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M in this example, only specific steps will be explained to simplify the explanation, but it should be noted that this is not limited to this. For example, if the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines that the start lever D50 has been operated in the determination process in step 1251, it executes a reel rotation start preparation process in step 1550. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing in step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether the reel acceleration state start timing in step 6106 has been reached. Then, in steps 6108 and 6110, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state, and the reel starts rotating. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 corresponds to a wait period until the start of reel rotation, and for example, from the game start timing (reel rotation start timing) according to the minimum game interval timer M70 as a predetermined condition. This is a period that occurs because the time (in this example, 4.1 seconds) that should be guaranteed until the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing) is not fulfilled, and is also sometimes referred to as the minimum gaming time. Next, in step 6114, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the end timing of the reel acceleration state in step 6114 has been reached. Then, the CPU 100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state in steps 6116 and 6118, performs processing to maintain the constant speed state of the reel, and then enables the operation of the stop button. The process to In this example, any timing within the period in which the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the above processing, in other words, any timing from when the start lever operation is executed until the stop button operation becomes effective. The configuration may be such that the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) at the timing of .

In this way, the period from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated until the operation of the stop button becomes effective has been explained according to the process executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M. According to the process executed by the CPU 100, start lever operation → minimum gaming time elapse → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is valid (also referred to as reel stop button operation is valid). We will stipulate the period separately. For example, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is performed at the timing immediately after the reel rotation start process, and the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is performed during the reel acceleration state. There is.

94 shows an example of a case where the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 is executed in the reel acceleration state, but the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S, which then executes the drawing process to display the push order navigation during the reel acceleration state. The configuration for displaying the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side may be configured as follows: (1) Start lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → main control board M executes the reel rotation start process to start the reel rotation → updates the reel drive state to an acceleration state → main control board M displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 → main control board M sends a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives a command related to the winning/replay winning information → the sub-control board S uses the command as a trigger to execute the drawing process and display the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 → updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state (2) Start lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → main control board M executes the reel rotation start process and starts reel rotation → Updates the reel drive state to an accelerated state → The main control board M displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 with dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends a command related to the winning information of the prize and replay to the sub-control board S → The sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning information of the prize and replay → The main control board M sends a predetermined command to the sub-control board S → The sub-control board S receives the predetermined command → The sub-control board S executes the drawing process in response to the predetermined command and displays the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state (3) Start Lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → main control board M executes the reel rotation start process and starts reel rotation → updates the reel drive state to an accelerated state → main control board M displays the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 → main control board M sends a command related to the winning information of the prize and replay to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning information of the prize and replay → updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → the sub-control board S executes the drawing process in response to the command and displays the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 (4) Start lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → main control board M starts the reel rotation The initial process is executed to start the reel rotation → the reel drive state is updated to an accelerated state → the main control board M displays the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 with dynamic lighting → the main control board M sends a command related to the winning information for winning prizes and replay to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning information for winning prizes and replay → the main control board M sends a specified command to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the specified command → the reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → the sub-control board S executes the drawing process in response to the specified command and displays the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. The above configuration may be used. In other words, the time value from when the sub-control board S receives a specified command from the main control board M to when it executes the drawing process may be designed to determine the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S, or the timing when the main control board M sends a specified command to the sub-control board S may be designed to determine the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S.

<Configuration 2> Next, the configuration of Figure 95 will be described. When the AT state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated, the reel rotation start process is executed, and the reels start spinning. Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and the case where stopping operations are performed in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) is illustrated (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

After that, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, a command is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. After "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40, "=3" is dynamically lit up as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 95, the push order navigation of the performance display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 is executed after the reel rotation start process is executed, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is executed just before the operation of the reel stop button becomes effective.

<Effect 1> By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or FIG. 95, the start timing of the push sequence navigation displayed on the push sequence display device D270 and the performance display device S40 can be determined to be a predetermined period (the period from start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation becomes effective), which reliably prevents a situation in which the timing to start the push sequence navigation is delayed on both the push sequence display device D270 and the performance display device S40 and the player is unable to recognize the push sequence navigation no matter which display device he looks at, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that does not cause any disadvantage to the player.

<Effect 2> Furthermore, by configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 can be changed. By making the timings different, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, and the player can view the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the burden of playing games.

<Configuration 3> In the AT state, when a push order role (push order bell, push order replay role, etc.) is determined as a winning role, as a performance means for notifying the push order, not only the performance display device S40, but also a configuration in which the push order is notified by a lamp (hereinafter referred to as a reel window frame lamp D310) provided on the middle panel (middle decorative panel) as shown in Figures 97 and 98, or a sound output from the speaker S20, etc. are possible. In configuration 3, when an instruction game is executed, the reel window frame lamp D310 is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. The reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position corresponding to each of the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 (near the reels), and is composed of an LED, for example, like the start lamp D180. The lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 and the sound output from the speaker S20 are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S, like the performance display device S40. In other words, when performing push order navigation using these presentation means, just as with the presentation display device S40, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes command processing (referred to here as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and audio output processing) in steps 2108 and 2250 based on the command received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, making it possible to perform push order navigation. Note that it is preferable that the reel window frame lamps D310 are provided in a position that is as easy for the player to see as possible, so it is preferable to provide them in correspondence with each reel, for example, above or below the reel window D160 (the space above or below the reel window D160 where the reels can be seen by the player).

Configuration 3 will be explained using FIG. 97. When the state related to AT is in the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed if the push order combination is won) and the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the drum starts. The process is executed and the reels start spinning. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Then, immediately after the reel rotation start process is executed, the push sequence display device D270 dynamically lights up and displays (starts to display) "=3" as the push sequence navigation. After "=3" is displayed as the push sequence navigation on the push sequence display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) lights up (starts to light up) as the push sequence navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. Then, the performance display device S40 displays (starts to display) "213" as the push sequence navigation. In FIG. 97, the order in which the push sequence navigation is displayed is "push sequence display device → reel window frame lamp → performance display device", and the timing at which the push sequence navigation starts to be displayed by the reel window frame lamp D310 lighting up is later than that of the push sequence display device D270 and earlier than that of the performance display device S40.

Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, saving the command data and performing command analysis processing sequentially, press the navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the lamp control board (board in the sub-control board S). It takes about 16 ms from receiving a command related to winning/replay winning information to sending a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and sending a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation. In addition, the production control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, and the drawing process requires about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives the command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, immediately executes the lighting process (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process) Therefore, the main control board M sends a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub-control board S, and upon receiving the command, the sub-control board S side controls the performance display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310. When executing the push order navigation, the reel window frame lamp D310 is configured to display the push order navigation (lit display) before the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation. Note that the commands transmitted from the main control board M are not limited to commands related to winning/replay winning information, but may also be commands related to performance group numbers, etc.

In this way, by configuring the reel window frame lamp D310 to display (light up) the push order navigation before the performance display device S40 displays the push order navigation, it is possible to provide a simple notification to the player more quickly, and prevent the player from operating the stop button before checking the push order (leading to the player pressing the wrong button).

Note that the order in which the push order navigation is displayed may be configured to be "press order display device→effect display device→reel window frame lamp". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may be configured to send a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board after the sub main board sends a command related to the push order navigation to the production control board. A command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and a command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310. and may be different commands.

As described above, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) is "push order display device → reel window frame lamp → performance display device", but the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed), it may be configured to be "reel window frame lamp → push order display device → performance display device", "performance display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp", "reel window frame lamp → performance display device → push order display device", or "performance display device → reel window frame lamp → push order display device". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board and the performance control board, the main control board M may be configured to display (start to display) the push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270, or the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 and the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310 may be different commands. In this way, depending on the timing of sending commands from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting, it is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starting display), such as (1) executing the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 first, (2) executing the push order navigation with the reel window frame lamp D310 first, or (3) executing the push order navigation with the performance display device S40 first.

<Effect> In this way, in a situation where the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel By determining the period from constant speed state to stop button operation becoming valid), for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be displayed using the lamp. (in this example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is lit), etc., and it is a user-friendly method in which it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation (an advantageous operation mode of the stop button). We can provide gaming machines.

<Configuration 4> Next, as configuration 4, a configuration will be described in which notification of the push order navigation is performed by audio output from the speaker S20. Configuration 4 is configured to notify the pressing order by voice in the instruction game, for example, the lines such as "It's on the left", "It's in the middle", "It's on the right" are output as voice from the speaker, and the corresponding stop is announced. Executes push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be operated (stop button to be operated).

Configuration 4 will be explained using Figure 98. When the AT state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated, the reel rotation start process is executed, and the reels start spinning. Note that in this game, a specific push order bell has been won, and the case where stopping operations are performed in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is the greatest) is illustrated (for example, when "Prize-A3" is won).

Then, immediately after the reel rotation start process is executed, the push sequence display device D270 displays (starts displaying) "=3" as the push sequence navigation with dynamic lighting. After "=3" is displayed as the push sequence navigation on the push sequence display device D270, the speaker S20 outputs the voice "In" (a voice suggesting that the middle stop button is operated as the first stop operation) as the push sequence navigation. Then, the performance display device S40 displays (starts displaying) "213" as the push sequence navigation. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push sequence navigation is displayed is "push sequence display device → voice → performance display device", and the timing at which the push sequence navigation notification by voice output starts is later than that of the push sequence display device D270 and earlier than that of the performance display device S40, similar to the reel window frame lamp D310.

Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the performance display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command related to the winning/replay winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, then stores the command data and performs command analysis processing in sequence, and then performs processing to transmit a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the performance control board (board in the sub-control board S) and processing to transmit a command related to the output mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the voice control board (board in the sub-control board S), and it takes about 16 ms from receiving the command related to the winning/replay winning information to transmitting the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and transmitting the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation. Also, the performance control board receives the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes a drawing process, which takes about 32 ms. On the other hand, the audio control board receives a command related to the output mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, it immediately executes the audio output process (audio output process can be executed in a shorter time than drawing process). Therefore, the main control board M sends a command related to the winning information of the prize/replay win to the sub-control board S, and when the sub-control board S executes the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 and the speaker S20 in response to receiving the command, the output (audio output) of the push order navigation by the speaker S20 is executed before the display of the push order navigation by the performance display device S40. Note that the command sent from the main control board M is not limited to a command related to the winning information of the prize/replay win, and may be a command related to the performance group number, etc.

In this way, by configuring the speaker S20 to output the push order navigation (audio output) before the effect display device S40 displays the push order navigation, a simple notification to the player can be executed more quickly. In addition, the player can recognize the pressing order by voice without looking at the effect display device S40, and can avoid situations where the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (pressing the button in the wrong order). situation) can be prevented.

As mentioned above, we explained the case where the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) is "Push order display device → audio → effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) The order in which they are performed is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts), it may be configured such that it is "push order display device→effect display device→audio". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board sends a command related to push-order navigation to the production control board, the sub-main board may be configured to send a command related to push-order navigation to the voice control board. Yes, the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the audio from the speaker S20. The command may be a different command.

Furthermore, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts displaying) can be configured as "audio → push order display device → performance display device", "audio → performance display device → push order display device", "performance display device → audio → push order display device", "performance display device → push order display device → audio", etc. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the audio control board and the performance control board, the main control board M can be configured to display (starts displaying) the push order navigation by dynamically lighting on the push order display device D270, or the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 and the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the audio from the speaker S20 can be different commands. In this way, depending on the timing of sending commands from the sub-main board and the timing of the main control board M displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting, it is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starting display), such as (1) executing the push order navigation with dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 first, (2) executing the push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 first, or (3) executing the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 first.

<Effect> In this way, in a situation where the minimum playing time has elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice can be changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → By setting the period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid, for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be performed by voice (in this example, It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is unlikely that a player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation.

<<Execution mode of push order navigation when there is a wait>> First, when there is a wait, in other words, the minimum game time has not elapsed (the timer value of the minimum game interval timer M70 is a value greater than 0). ) The start lever is operated in the following situation, and then the execution mode of the push order navigation when the game is played will be explained.

<Configuration 1> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 99 will be described. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

First, in a situation where the minimum gaming time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 in the timer interrupt process, and the push order display device D270 displays "=". Execute the process of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation of "3" with dynamic lighting. Thereafter, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, "213" is displayed (display starts) as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 99, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

<Configuration 2> Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 100 will be described. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in a predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process to display (start display) "213" as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 (executes the drawing process described above). After that, the minimum play time has elapsed, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the reels spinning, and the main control board M executes a process to display (start display) "=3" as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 with dynamic lighting before the reel drive state becomes a constant speed state and the operation of the stop button becomes effective (just before the operation of the stop button becomes effective). In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the performance display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. In this case, the sub-control board S executes a process to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 based on receiving a command related to the performance group number, but the command that triggers the process to display (start displaying) the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 is not limited to this, and the command that triggers the process to display (start displaying) the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 can be determined according to the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (start displaying) on the performance display device S40.

<Configuration 3> Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 101 will be described. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

In a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying (starting displaying) "213" as a press order navigation on the production display device S40 (the above-mentioned drawing process). After that, the main control board M dynamically displays "=3" as a push order navigation on the push order display device D270 at the timing when the minimum gaming time has elapsed and the reels start rotating by executing the reel rotation start process. Executes the process of displaying (starting display) when lit. In FIG. 101, if the start lever is operated in a situation where it takes more than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is the time value for 5 timer interrupt processing) until the minimum gaming time elapses, the effect display device The push order navigation in S40 is displayed before the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In addition, if the start lever is operated in a situation where less than a predetermined time (for example, 10ms, which is the time value for 5 timer interrupt processing) remains until the minimum gaming time elapses, or if the minimum gaming time If the start lever is operated in a situation where the The trigger for displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side (for example, the main control board M Since the configuration is such that the time from when the command related to winning/replay winning information (received from the side) occurs until the display of the push order navigation is completed is longer, the push order display device D270 The push order navigation is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

As mentioned above, an example of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 has been explained, but when the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) This is not the only timing. For example, as a modification of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) in FIG. 99, during the period before the minimum game time has elapsed, the effect display device S40 is The push order navigation is displayed (display starts) at the same time on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 during the period before the minimum game time elapses during which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts). Alternatively, the push order navigation is displayed (displayed) on the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum playing time has elapsed, and after the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order navigation is displayed (displayed) on the production display device S40. Furthermore, the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) on the effect display device S40 during the period before the minimum playing time has elapsed, and after the minimum play time has passed, the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270. The display (start of display) of the push order navigation may be configured to be displayed (start of display) at different timings, such as before and after the minimum gaming time has elapsed.

<Effect> In this way, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is determined to be a predetermined period (the period from start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until operation of the stop button becomes effective). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the timing of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation different between the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40. The effects of differentiating the timing of displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation between the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 are as follows: (1) When the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation in the performance display device S40. The push order navigation can be displayed (started displaying) in the push order display device D270 by a timer interrupt process (for example, about 2 ms) immediately after the start lever is operated and the main control board M determines the performance group number based on the determination of the winning role (here, the push order bell role), so that a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly notifies the player of information related to the push order navigation can be provided. (2) When the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the push order display device D270. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, information related to the current game state or winning role is often configured to be suggested on the performance display device S40, so the player will proceed with the game while visually checking the performance display device S40. By configuring the performance display device S40, which has a larger size (display area) than the push order display device D270 and is easy for the player to see, to promptly notify the player of information related to the push order navigation, the player can check the push order navigation while still viewing the performance display device S40, even if the push order navigation is newly executed while viewing the performance display device S40, so that a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that reduces the burden on the player by not forcing the player to look at other displays every time the push order navigation is displayed. In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, resulting in the player being unable to recognize the push order navigation no matter which display device he or she looks at, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that does not cause any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, by making the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, it is possible to avoid viewing the two display devices at the same time. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the playing burden on the player, in which the player can visually check the push order navigation on an individual display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. .

<Configuration 4> Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 102 will be described. Note that configuration 4 includes a reel window frame lamp D310. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum gaming time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S lights up (starts lighting) the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) as a push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310. Execute the processing to be performed. Thereafter, a process is executed to display (start displaying) "213" as a push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310 is a timing earlier than that of the effect display device S40. This is because, as described above, when the sub control board S receives a command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting process in the reel window frame lamp D310 is faster than the push order navigation. This is because it can be executed faster than the process of drawing on the effect display device S40. After that, the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the reels start rotating by executing the reel rotation start process, and then, before the stop button operation becomes effective, the press order display device D270 displays the press order navigation as " =3" by dynamic lighting (display start). In FIG. 102, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "reel window frame lamp → production display device → push order display device", and the display of the push order navigation starts when the reel window frame lamp D310 is lit. The timing is earlier than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Furthermore, even when configured as illustrated in Figure 102, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S) just before the end of the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (for example, when there are approximately 10 ms remaining until the minimum play time has elapsed), the order in which the push sequence navigation is displayed may be "push sequence display device → reel window frame lamp → performance display device" or "reel window frame lamp → push sequence display device → performance display device." Here, when the push order navigation is displayed on the performance display device S40, as mentioned above, it takes approximately 32 ms from the time the sub-control board S receives the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M until "213" is displayed (starts to be displayed) as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 (until the drawing process is executed), so if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S) just before the end of the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (for example, when there are approximately 10 ms remaining until the minimum play time has elapsed), the push order navigation by the performance display device S40 may be displayed (starts to be displayed) after the push order navigation is displayed by the push order display device D270 or the reel window frame lamp D310.

Also, in the case of the reel window frame lamp D310, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S) just before the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (for example, when there are about 10 ms left until the minimum play time has elapsed), it takes time for the sub-control board S to receive the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, so the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp may be displayed (starts to be displayed) after the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is displayed. As described above, the timing at which the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 starts can be set appropriately as long as it is within the period from start lever operation → minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → until the operation of the stop button is effective.

<Effect> In this way, by configuring the display of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 (lit display) before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, it is easy for the player. It is possible to execute the notification more quickly, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the player presses the button in the wrong order).

Furthermore, even in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be performed by lighting a lamp (in this example, lighting the reel window frame lamp D310). It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine in which it is unlikely that a player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation.

<Configuration 5> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 103 will be described. In addition, in configuration 5, the push order navigation is executed by the voice output from the speaker S20 in the instruction game. The start lever is operated in a situation where the state related to AT is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won) and the minimum game time has not elapsed. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, The following is an example of the case where "Win-A3" is won.

When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing during the period when the minimum play time has not elapsed. After receiving the command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of outputting the voice "It's in!" (a voice suggesting that the middle stop button is operated as the first stop operation) as the push order navigation by outputting the voice from the speaker S20. Then, it executes a process of displaying (starting displaying) "213" as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. The timing at which the push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 starts to be displayed is earlier than the timing of the performance display device S40. This is because when the sub-control board S receives a command related to the performance group number from the main control board M, the voice output process from the speaker S20 is executed earlier than the process of drawing the push order navigation on the performance display device S40. After that, the minimum play time elapses, the reels start to spin, the operation of the stop button becomes valid, and the main control board M executes a process to display (start displaying) "=3" in dynamic lighting as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 before the reel rotation speed becomes constant and the operation of the stop button becomes valid. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "audio → performance display device → push order display device," and the timing at which the announcement of the push order navigation by audio output begins is earlier than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the performance display device S40.

Note that even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 103, if the start lever is operated just before the end of the period before the minimum gaming time has elapsed (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum gaming time has elapsed) If the main control board M has sent a command related to the production group number to the sub-control board S side, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "Push order display device → audio → production display device" or "audio → production display device". "Push order display device → effect display device" may occur. Here, when displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so it takes about 32 ms to display "213" as the push order navigation (before the drawing process is executed). For example, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M sends a command related to the performance group number to the sub-control board S side) when the minimum gaming time is about 10ms remaining, the push order display The push order navigation may be displayed (started to be displayed) by the effect display device S40 after the push order navigation is displayed by D270 or the push order navigation is notified by voice.

Also, in the speaker S20, the start lever is operated just before the end of the period before the minimum gaming time has elapsed (for example, about 10ms remaining until the minimum gaming time elapses) (the main control board M is connected to the sub-control board (a command related to the effect group number is sent to the S side), it takes time for the sub control board S side to receive the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side, so the push order display device The push order navigation may be announced by voice from the speaker S20 after the push order navigation is displayed by D270.

As described above, the timing at which the push sequence navigation starts to be displayed on the push sequence display device D270 can be set appropriately within the period from start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → operation of the stop button is valid.

<Effect> In this way, when the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum playing time has not elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum gaming time has elapsed → reel By determining the period from start of rotation → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → operation of the stop button becomes valid), for example, in a gaming machine that is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the production display device S40, Even if the player is not looking at the effect display device S40 while focusing on the reels or the stop button, the push order navigation can be executed in a simple notification mode of audio (in this example, the audio output from the speaker S20). Even if the push order navigation is executed in certain situations, the player can recognize the push order navigation by voice while keeping their eyes on the reels or the stop button. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that is unlikely to be unrecognized.

The timing for displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the timing for displaying the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 have been described with and without a wait, but the timing for displaying the push order navigation on each display device is not limited to these. The timing for displaying the push order navigation can be appropriately determined as long as it is within the period from the start of the operation of the start lever D50 described above to the start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is effective. In addition, it is preferable to set the display timing of the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 to be narrower than the above-mentioned period. This is because it takes a certain amount of time (e.g., 32 ms or more) from when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a certain command from the CPUC100 of the main control board M until the push order navigation is displayed on the performance display device S40. Furthermore, the more frames of the drawing displayed on the performance display device S40, the more additional time will be required. The winning role is determined after the start lever D50 is operated, but considering the time required from when the winning role is determined until the push order navigation is displayed on the performance display device S40 as described above, it is preferable to determine the timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the performance display device S40 as follows, for example: the period before the minimum play time has elapsed (if there is a wait) → the start of reel rotation (if there is no wait) → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → the period until the operation of the stop button is effective. By determining it in this way, the period until the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the push order display device D270 can be made different from the period until the push order navigation starts to be displayed on the performance display device S40. It is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the push order navigation starts to be displayed on each display device within these periods.

For example, during the period from start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → until the operation of the stop button is effective, an example of the order in which the push sequence navigation is notified by the push sequence display device D270, the performance display device S40, the sound, and the reel window frame lamp D310 is described as follows: (1) Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (2) Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (3) Push sequence display device → Sound → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push sequence display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Sound (6) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Performance display device (7) Performance display device → Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (8) Performance display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (9) Performance display device → Sound → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (10) Performance display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (11) Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Sound (12) Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Push order Display device (13) Audio → Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp (14) Audio → Push sequence display device → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (15) Audio → Performance display device → Push sequence display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Audio → Performance display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push sequence display device (17) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Push sequence display device → Performance display device (18) Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Push sequence display device (19) Reel window frame lamp → Push sequence display device → Performance display device → Audio (20) Reel window frame lamp → Push sequence display device → Audio → Performance It is possible to configure the timing at which the push sequence navigation is displayed (starts displaying) appropriately during the period from start lever operation → minimum play time elapses → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → until the operation of the stop button is effective, such as output display device (21) Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Sound (22) Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device → Sound → Push sequence display device (23) Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Push sequence display device → Performance display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → Sound → Performance display device → Push sequence display device.

In addition, as one of the presentation means controlled by the sub-control board S, it is also possible to add a push order navigation in which the stop button lamps S60 controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) light up (blink) to suggest the operation mode of the stop buttons that is advantageous to the player. When the start lever D50 is operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the presentation group number to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing. After receiving the command related to the presentation group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process to light up (or blink) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button that is to perform the first stop operation. An example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts display) when the push order navigation using the stop button D40 is added is as follows: (25) Push order display device → Audio → Reel frame lamp → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (blinking)) → Performance display device (26) Push order display device → Audio → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (blinking)) → Reel frame lamp → Performance display device (27) Push order display device → Audio → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (blinking)) and the reel frame lamp are approximately simultaneously → Performance display device, but the order here is only an example and is not limited to this. For example, in the above (27), the timing of the reel frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 lighting (blinking) is simultaneous, but it is also possible to configure the speaker S20 to output audio simultaneously. The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in any way, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt process (push order display device D270) related to the display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M (push order display device D270), or the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S (performance display device S40, reel window frame lamp D310, voice from speaker S20, stop button D40).In addition, when executing push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60, it is preferable to control it so that only the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel for which the stop operation is to be performed is turned on (blinked), rather than turning on (blinking) the stop button lamps corresponding to all reels. For example, when executing the push order navigation "213": "center → left → right" using the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel is configured to light (blink) or go out based on the progress of the game, as follows: stop button lamp (on) corresponding to the center stop button D42 → operate the center stop button D42 → stop button lamp (off) corresponding to the center stop button D42 → stop button lamp (on) corresponding to the left stop button D41 → operate the left stop button D41 → stop button lamp (off) corresponding to the left stop button D41 → stop button lamp (on) corresponding to the right stop button D43 → operate the right stop button D43 → stop button lamp (off) corresponding to the right stop button D43.

In addition, while the above description concerns a case where the control of the stop button lamps S60 provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is performed by the sub-control board S, the control of the stop button lamps S60 provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) may be configured to be performed by the main control board M. Below, the start timing of the push order navigation by controlling the stop button lamps S60 provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) by the main control board M will be explained.

When the main control board M controls the stop button lamp S60, the start lever is operated, and the performance group number is determined based on the determination of the winning role (here, the push order bell role), and then the timer interrupt process (for example, if it is the first cycle after the determination of the performance group number, it takes about 2 ms for the stop button lamp S60 to be turned on) makes it possible to execute the process of turning on (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60. By configuring in this way, an example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) in a configuration in which the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is added is as follows: (28) Push order display device → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is turned on (blinking)) → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (29) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is turned on (blinking)) → Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device (30) The stop button lamp (only the first stop button is turned on (blinking)) and the push order display device are approximately simultaneous → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Performance display device, etc., but the order here is an example and is not limited to this. For example, in the above (28) to (30), the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 controlled on the main control board M side is started before the push order navigation using the performance display device S40, audio from the speaker S20, and reel window frame lamp D310 controlled on the sub-control board S side. However, the timing of executing the timer interrupt process for turning on (flashing) the stop button lamp S60 on the main control board M side may be changed so that the push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 is started after the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side (e.g., the performance display device S40, audio from the speaker, and reel window frame lamp D310) has started. The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) can be determined in any way, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt process related to the display (display start) of the push order navigation on the main control board M (push order display device D270, stop button lamp S60), or the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S (performance display device S40, reel window frame lamp D310, audio from speaker S20).

<<Configuration related to the end of the push order navigation display>> Next, the timing at which the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 ends will be described. The timing at which the push order navigation ends, like the timing at which the push order navigation starts, can be designed to a certain degree of freedom depending on the period at which the player ends the game. One example of the period at which the player ends the game is the timing at which the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated, all the reels come to a complete stop, and a win is made, the game ends when the payout of game medals based on the win is completed.

The period for ending the display of the push order navigation is the period of "3rd stop button operation (pressed) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → payout based on winning completed" starting from the operation timing of the 3rd stop button. It is possible to specify any timing. In this example, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is different for each push order combination (push order bell, push order replay combination). For example, the timing at which the push order display device D270 finishes displaying the push order navigation differs depending on whether the determined winning combination is a push order bell or a push order replaying combination.

In addition, in configurations 1 to 5 described below, in order to explain the timing of the end of the push order navigation, it should be noted that the first stop button and the second stop button have already been pressed, and the push order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button of the performance display device S40 has also ended.

<Configuration 1> First, configuration 1 in FIG. 104 will be described. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, the display of the press order navigation on the press order display device D270 ends, and a press order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display starts). be done. In addition, in this game, if the player has won the bell in the predetermined push order and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" will be most advantageous to the player (the number of coins paid out is large) (for example, An example is shown for the case where "Win-A3" is won.

Here, the push order navigation disappearance effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display related to the end when the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device ends. In the same figure, when "3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40, the right stop button is operated, and the sensor that detects the operation of the right stop button changes from off to on, which is detected by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, and a command related to this detection is sent from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command related to this detection and executes processing to erase the display of "3", resulting in the display of "3" becoming transparent and then disappearing, displaying the push order navigation disappearance effect.

Thereafter, in a situation where the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 has ended, the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). Here, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 are both terminated by "pressing the third stop button" (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off). However, in FIG. 104, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is earlier than the push order navigation of the effect display device S40. The display will be erased completely. This is the same as the start of the push order navigation, and even if the end timing of the push order navigation is set to "when the third stop button is pressed", the CPUSC of the sub control board S is unable to draw multiple frames. This can be said to be because the end of the press order navigation of the effect display device S40 is delayed due to the process of displaying the .

To explain in detail how the push order navigation ends, in the push order display device D270, the push order display device D270 turns on → lights out → lights out completes, and the push order navigation ends, and in the effect display device S40, The press order navigation ends by displaying the order navigation → starting displaying the press order navigation disappearing effect → ending displaying the press order navigation disappearing effect (deletion completion). In this example, the timing when the push order display device D270 starts turning off is referred to as the push order display device turning off, and the start of displaying the push order navigation disappearing effect is referred to as the display (display start) of the push order navigation disappearing effect. Note that the turning off of the push order display device may be replaced with the timing when the push order display device D270 completes turning off, and the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect may be replaced with the timing when the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends. The timing between turning off the push order display device and displaying (starting displaying) the push order navigation disappearing effect may be as follows: the push order display device turns off → the press order navigation disappearing effect is displayed (display starts), or the press order disappearing effect is displayed. (Display start)→The push order display device may be turned off, or the push order display device may be turned off and the push order navigation disappearing effect displayed (display start) at the same time.

In addition, although the configuration in which the display of the push order navigation ends when the third stop button is operated has been described above, the timing when the third stop button is pressed refers to the timing when the third stop button is pressed (the operation of the third stop button is detected). This is the timing at which the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for the 3rd stop button is pressed from OFF to ON. The state in which the third stop button is released after the button is pressed (after detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side) , the timing at which the switch from on to off is detected (hereinafter also referred to as "when the third stop button is not pressed"), and the push order navigation ends for each of these states. It is also possible to configure the timing to be specified. For example, in the order of the timing when the push order navigation ends in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, in more detail, (if the push order navigation ends not at the same time) (1) Interruption on the main control board M side Through the process, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on.→Press order display turns off.→The third stop button is detected from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Send a command related to → Sub control board S side receives the command → Display (start display) of press order navigation disappearing effect (2) To detect operation of the third stop button by interrupt processing on main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → Push order display device turns off → Interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on Detection → Send a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → Display the push order navigation disappearing effect (display start) (3) The interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → the push order display device turns off → from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side Sends a command related to detection of the third stop button to → Sub-control board S side receives the command → Displays push order navigation disappearing effect (display starts) (4) The third stop button is activated by interrupt processing on main control board M side. Detects that the sensor for detecting button operation has changed from off to on → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side Receive command → display of press order disappearing effect (display start) → press order display device turns off (5) By interrupt processing on the main control board M side, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off. → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → Displays the press order disappearance effect (starts display) →The interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off.→The push order display device turns off (6) Interrupt processing on the main control board M side. Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The control board S side receives the command → Display of the push order disappearance effect (display start) → Turn off the push order display device (if the push order navigation ends at the same time) (7) The interrupt processing on the main control board M side causes the Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the 3rd stop button has changed from off to on → Sends a command related to the detection of the 3rd stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → Sub control board S side receives the command → the push order display device turns off at the same time as the push order disappearing effect is displayed (display starts) (8) The sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side. Detects that the main control board M side is turned off → Sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → Displays the press order extinction effect ( It is possible to specify that the press order display device is turned off at the same time as the display starts).

In addition, the display mode of the push order navigation when, for example, the first stop button or the second stop button is pressed, rather than when the third stop button is pressed, will be explained as a supplement. First, in the push order display device D270, the light continues to be on from the time the light starts to turn on until the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on (or from on to off) and the light is turned off. On the other hand, in the performance display device S40, for example, when the first stop button is pressed (the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on (or from on to off)), the main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the first stop button to the sub-control board S side → the sub-control board S receives the command → the display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button and the display mode of the push order navigation (for example, the display of "2") corresponding to the reel to be stopped next are changed (hereinafter also referred to as "change start of the display mode of the second reel push order navigation"). The order in which these are executed may be configured as follows: (9) display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button → start changing the display mode of the second reel push order navigation (10) start changing the display mode of the second reel push order navigation → display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button. Similarly, when the second stop button is operated, it can be configured as follows: (11) display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the second stop button (display mode has been changed) → start changing the display mode of the third reel push order navigation (12) start changing the display mode of the third reel push order navigation → display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the second stop button (display mode has been changed).

<Configuration 2> Next, configuration 2 of FIG. 105 will be described. When the AT state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won), an instruction game is executed, the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, in a situation in which the right stop button is operated (pressed) as the third stop. By pressing the stop button, the push order navigation disappearance effect for the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (starts to be displayed) on the performance display device S40. Note that in this game, a predetermined push order bell has been won, and an example is shown of a case in which stopping operations in the order of "middle → left → right" are most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, when "prize-A3" is won).

Then, while the right stop button is still pressed, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation ends in the performance display device S40). Then, when the right stop button is released, the display of the push order navigation ends in the push order display device D270.

<Configuration 3> Next, configuration 3 of Figure 106 will be described. In Figure 106, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is "3" instead of "=3". In other words, a number is displayed as the push order navigation in the digit on the right side of the push order display device D270, and the digit on the left side is not displayed. In addition, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display the push order navigation and the number of coins won.

When the AT state is in the AT state (a game state in which push order navigation is executed when a push order role is won), an instruction game is executed, the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated (pressed) as the third stop. By pressing the stop button, the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → the main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command → the push order disappearance effect for the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display starts) on the performance display device S40. Note that in this game, a predetermined push order bell is won, and an example is shown of a case in which stopping in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous for the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, when "Winning-A3" is won).

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the symbol combinations related to the push order bell (symbol combinations that result in a payout of 11 pieces) are stopped and displayed, and "0" is displayed on the push order display device D270. After that, when you release the right stop button, the payout for the symbol combination that is being stopped and displayed starts, and the press order display device D270 shows "1" → "2" → "3" → ... "10" → "11" ” The number of acquired coins will be displayed. After "11" is displayed on the press order display device D270 (after displaying the number of acquired coins), the display on the press order display device D270 is ended (hidden). In this way, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display both the push order navigation and the acquired number display, and the display mode of the push order navigation display is changed to numerical values only in the lower digits of the push order display device D270. If the symbol combination for which game medals are paid out in the instructed game is displayed in a stopped state, the push order display device D270 displays both the push order navigation and the number of acquired medals. There is a risk that a person may misunderstand the push order navigation or the number of acquired tickets. Therefore, by configuring the system so that "0" is displayed between the end of the display of the push order navigation and the start of display of the number of acquired coins, regardless of the number of coins paid out for the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed (for example, 1 (or 11 pieces), the player can recognize that the display of the number of won pieces has started. Note that the numerical value of the above "0" may be changed, and it is preferable that the display mode is different from the display mode that can be displayed as a push order navigation.

The timing for the end of the push sequence navigation display on the push sequence display device D270 is set to "when the third stop button is not pressed (after separation)," that is, when the display switches from "3" (function of the push sequence display device) to "0" (function of the payout number display device), but it may also be set to, for example, the timing when "payout based on winning is completed" when the display on the push sequence display device D270 disappears completely. By setting the timing for the end of the push sequence navigation on the performance display device S40 to "when the third stop button is pressed," it can be seen that the push sequence navigation on the performance display device S40 ends before the push sequence navigation on the push sequence display device D270.

As another example, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is configured as "13", "23", and "33" instead of "=3". The displayed push order navigation will be explained in detail. The left digits "1", "2", and "3" correspond to the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, respectively, and indicate the position of the reel on which the stop operation should be performed (for example, "1" indicates that the reel on which the stop operation should be performed is the left reel M51, and "2" indicates that the reel on which the stop operation should be performed is the middle reel M52). The right digit "3" corresponds to the push order "middle → left → right" (corresponding instruction number is "A3") displayed on the performance display device S40, as in the previous configuration. By configuring in this way, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "23" → "13" → "33", and when the stop button is operated according to the push order, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next reel should be stopped is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the push order navigation corresponding to the final stop operation (in this example, "33") disappears, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 ends.

<Effects> In this way, the end timing of the press order navigation displayed on the press order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press) → third stop button not pressed → winning prize) For example, by determining the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40, By making them different, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, and the player can visually confirm the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the burden of playing games.

In addition, the trigger for ending the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 (the push order navigation display on the effect display device S40) is determined by interrupt processing on the main control board M side when a sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on. If it is specified that the game will turn off (release the stop button), the game will stop even if the player holds down the final stop button (third stop button) with high expectations for the outcome of the game. It can be configured so that the push order navigation does not end until the button is turned from on to off. Here, if the configuration is such that the push order navigation is deleted immediately after the stop button is turned from off to on, the expectation that the result of the game will not be advantageous to the player will be reduced. Since there is a possibility that the game will be lost, the push order navigation will not end until the stop button is turned from on to off, so that the result of the game will not be advantageous to the player. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of events that reduce expectations.

<Configuration 4> Next, configuration 4 of FIG. 107 will be described. In a state related to the AT, in which the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order role is won) is in progress, the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated (pressed) as the third stop. By pressing the stop button, the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from off to on → the main control board M sends a command related to the detection of the third stop button to the sub-control board S → the sub-control board S receives the command → the push order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display start) on the performance display device S40, and the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 ends. In this game, the example shows a case where the player has won a replay with a specific push order, and stopping the buttons in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the RT state with a high probability of winning the replay can be maintained) (for example, when the player has won "Replay-D2", a replay with three push orders in which the first stop in the middle is the most profitable).

Thereafter, while the right stop button is held down, the display of the press order navigation disappearing effect ends (the press order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). After that, release the right stop button (by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off) and the symbol combination related to replaying. is displayed in a stopped state, an automatic bet is executed, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up. ).

<Configuration 5> Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 108 will be described. The instructed game is executed in the AT state (a game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order combination is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the In a situation where the push order navigation related to the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (pressed). When the stop button is pressed, the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from off → the main control board M side controls the sub-control A command related to the detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command → The push order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display starts ) to be done. In addition, in this game, the player has won the replay in the predetermined push order, and it is most advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" (RT state with high replay winning probability) is possible to maintain) (for example, a case where a player wins "Regame-D2", which is a 3-option press-order regame where the first stop is the highest profit).

Then, while the right stop button is still pressed, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the performance display device S40 ends). Then, when the right stop button is released (the interrupt process on the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off), an automatic bet is executed, the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up, and after the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 ends.

In this way, for example, when the machine has configuration 1 in FIG. 104 and configuration 5 in FIG. 108, even if a player cannot distinguish between the push order bell role and the push order replay role in the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to determine which minor role has been won based on the difference in the end timing of the push order navigation.

As described above, the timing of the end of the push order navigation in the case of the push order bell or the push order replay role as the push order role has been described. In the performance display device S40, the timing of the end of the push order navigation has been described only as an example of the case of "when the third stop button is pressed", but this is not limited to this. As the period in which the game ends, it is possible to arbitrarily set the timing of the end of the push order navigation if the third stop button is operated (pressed) → the third stop button is not pressed → winning judgment → payout completion based on winning. In addition, in the push order display device D270, the period in which the push order navigation ends is different depending on whether the winning role is the push order bell or the push order replay role. As an example of the case in which the winning role is the push order replay role, the timing of the end of the push order navigation is set to "when the 1 bet lamp is turned on", and the timing of the end of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 can be greatly changed by arbitrarily setting the timing of the lighting of the 1 bet lamp D211. As an example, if the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up at the start of the next game, it will be later than the end period of the push order navigation when the winning combination is the push order bell, which is "operate (press) the third stop button → do not press the third stop button → win determination → payout based on the win completed," and it will be "operate (press) the third stop button → do not press the third stop button → win determination → payout based on the win completed → when the 1 bet lamp is lit." Also, if the 1 bet lamp D211 lights up when the third stop button is not pressed, it will be "operate (press) the third stop button → do not press the third stop button → when the 1 bet lamp is lit → win determination → payout based on the win completed," and the winning combination will be included in the end period of the push order navigation when the push order bell is the push order.

Similar to the timing when the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the order of the timing at which the push order navigation ends is based on 3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → winning. An example of the order in which the push order navigation ends in the push order display device D270, effect display device S40, audio, and reel window frame lamp D310 during the payout completion period is as follows: (1) Push order display device → effect display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (2) Press order display device → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (3) Press order display device → Audio → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (5) Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Audio (6) Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Production display device (7) Production display device → Press order display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp (8) Production display device → Press order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio (9) Production display device → Audio → Press order display device → Reel window frame Lamp (10) Production display device → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device (11) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Audio (12) Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Audio →Press order display device (13) Audio →Press order display device→Effect display device→Reel window frame lamp (14) Audio→Press order display device→Reel window frame lamp→Effect display device (15) Audio→Effect display device→ Press order display device → reel window frame lamp (16) audio → production display device → reel window frame lamp → press order display device (17) audio → reel window frame lamp → press order display device → production display device (18) audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Press order display device (19) Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Production display device → Audio (20) Reel window frame lamp → Press order display device → Audio → Production display device ( 21) Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Press order display device → Audio (22) Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Audio → Press order display device (23) Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Press order display device → Performance display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → Audio → Performance display device → Press order display device In this way, 3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning determination → payout completion based on winning During the period, it is possible to configure the timing at which the push order navigation ends as appropriate.

Furthermore, as one of the presentation means controlled by the sub-control board S, an example of the order in which the push order navigation ends is described, which includes push order navigation using the stop button lamps S60 controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop buttons D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). Note that the process leading up to the end of the push order navigation using the stop button lamps S60 is as follows: the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off → the main control board M sends a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button is turned off (starts to be turned off). In addition, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button has changed from on to off → the main control board M transmits a command related to the operation of the first stop button to the sub-control board S side by timer interrupt processing → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button is turned off (starts to be turned off) and the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the second stop button is turned on (starts to be turned on). (25) Push sequence display device → performance display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → stop button (third stop button lamp is turned off) (26) Push sequence display device → performance display device → reel window frame lamp → sound → stop button (third stop button lamp is turned off) and the like can be configured. The timing of the end of the push sequence navigation by the stop button D40 may be before or after the push sequence display device D270, the performance display device S40, sound, and the reel window frame lamp D310, as in the case of the reel window frame lamp D310 which executes the push sequence navigation by turning on and off the lamp. Also, when the third stop button is operated, the light may be turned off by pressing the third stop button, or may be turned off by not pressing the third stop button.

As described above, in this example, one game will proceed based on <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> and <<Configuration related to display end of press order navigation>>. . A specific example of the flow of one game from when the push order navigation is displayed (display starts) until the push order navigation ends is as follows: 1. Display of push order navigation (start of display) Start lever operation → Display of push order navigation (start of display) (push order display device D270) → Display of push order navigation (start of display) (effect display device S40) 2. From the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation 2-1. Effect display device S40 Display (start of display) of the press order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button → End of display of the press order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation of the first stop button → Display of the second reel press order navigation Change of mode → Display (start of display) of the press order disappearing effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to the operation of the second stop button → End of display of the press order disappear effect corresponding to the operation of the second stop button →Changing the display mode of the 3rd reel push order navigation 2-2. Push order display device D270 The push order display device D270 is in a lit state. 3. 3rd stop button operation - end of display of push order navigation 3rd stop button operation → push order display device lights out → display of push order navigation disappearing effect corresponding to operation of 3rd stop button (display start) → 3rd stop button End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation In this way, the flow of one game progresses. Incidentally, the example described above is just one example, and for example, 1. The display of the push order navigation (display start) may be configured to include audio output from the reel window frame lamp D310 and the speaker S20, and the timing of the display (display start) of the push order navigation and the push order The order in which the navigation is displayed (display starts) is not limited to this. Also, 2. During the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation, the effect display device S40 displays (starts displaying) the press order extinction effect corresponding to each stop button, and changes the display mode of the press order navigation corresponding to the next reel. The order in which they are performed is not limited to this. Also, 3. From the third stop button operation to the end of the display of the push order navigation, the display end order of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and the timing at which the push order navigation ends is detailed. It is also possible to specify (further classification can be made by pressing the third stop button, not pressing the third stop button, etc.).

By configuring as in this example, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 can be made different, thereby avoiding the situation where the player has to look at two display devices at the same time, and the player can view the push order navigation on each display device when the push order navigation occurs, thereby reducing the burden on the player. By determining the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 to a predetermined period (the period from operation (press) of the third stop button → non-pressing of the third stop button → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning), for example, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 can be made different, thereby avoiding the situation where the player has to look at two display devices at the same time, and the player can view the end of the push order navigation on each display device when the push order navigation occurs, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

<Display when push order is incorrect> Here, we will describe in detail an example of the configuration of the push order navigation display when a game in which push order navigation is executed is played with a push order (or different operation timing) different from the push order navigation. Here, we will show an example of a case in which the push order bell is won and a game is executed in which the correct push order is "left → middle → right."

In a situation where "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the performance display device S40 and "=1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the middle stop button (the correct push order corresponds to the left stop button) is operated as the first stop operation, and as an interrupt process on the main control board M side, the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is detected to have changed from off to on → the main control board M side transmits a command related to the detection of the first stop button to the sub-control board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the command → the sub-control board S side executes a process to erase all the displays of "123" on the performance display device S40. It may be configured as above. As described above, in a game in which push order navigation is executed, when a stop button that is not in the correct push order is operated, the sub-control board S side erases the push order navigation corresponding to all reels (or stop buttons), while the main control board M side is configured to maintain the display of the push order navigation. In addition, the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order navigation by the push order display device D270) is configured to be erased when the third stop operation is performed (when it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has changed from on to off as an interrupt process on the main control board M side).

<<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> Next, the configuration related to reel stop control and push order navigation display control (performance display device S40) will be described. Note that in this game, an example is given of a case where a specific push order bell has been won, and stopping the reels in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous for the player (the largest number of coins will be paid out) (for example, when "Prize Winner-A3" has been won).

<Configuration 1> First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, an instruction game related to the push order bell is executed during the AT state, and "213" is displayed on the performance display device S40 as the push order navigation. The center stop button is pressed at the timing when the replay pattern number 11 is located in the middle of the center reel, and the display corresponding to the push order navigation "1" on the center reel changes to the push order navigation disappearance effect. The center reel stop button remains pressed. In addition, the center reel is controlled to stop the patterns that make up the pattern combination that will pay out 11 coins, which is the maximum number of coins won, by performing the stop operation of the center reel, which is the correct push order. In this example, the center reel is configured to stop the bell number 15 in the middle row (effective line). In other words, when the center stop button is operated at this timing, a slip of the maximum number of frames (four frames in this example) from the replay A number 11 is generated, and the bell number 15 is controlled to stop and display on the winning line.

Here, the operation control of the stepping motor until the reel stops after the stop operation is performed will be explained based on FIG. 35. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. 35 <reel rotation speed image> transitions to the reel deceleration standby state (5). In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position where the stop operation was performed and the position of the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning condition device in the game is calculated, and the distance is calculated for a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms). By determining that it is possible to stop and display the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning condition device in the game concerned on the winning line, the symbol combination related to the condition device winning in the game concerned is formed. Rotation is continued so that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing when the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning condition device in the game approach the winning line, the reels are controlled to transition to the reel deceleration state (6) and to the reel stop state (7). do.

After that, as shown in the upper right corner of FIG. 109, on the effect display device S40, the press order navigation disappearing effect of the middle reel is erased (the display is finished), and the middle reel stops displaying the 15th bell on the winning line. Slip control is continued to prevent this. Note that the middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 109, the effect display device S40 changes the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed. The display mode that changes at this time may be any mode as long as the player can recognize the stop button to be operated (such as changing the numbers significantly, adding movement to the numbers, making the numbers shine, etc.) ). On the other hand, the middle reel continues to perform sliding control in order to stop and display the 15th bell on the winning line. Note that the middle reel stop button is being pressed. The timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel where the next stop operation is to be performed may be before the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (display ends), or before the push order navigation disappears (display ends). This may be done after the navigation disappearing effect is erased (display ends), or at the same time as the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (display ends).

Thereafter, after the middle stop button continues to be pressed for a predetermined period of time, the bell number 15 on the middle reel is stopped and displayed on the winning line. The predetermined time here is the time (for example, 190 ms) during which the maximum slip control of the middle reel is performed. In this example, when a stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation, the stop operation will be displayed before the reel on which the stop operation was performed is displayed as stopped (before the next stop button operation becomes effective). It is configured such that it is possible to delete the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the reel has been stopped and to change the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next.

Here, as an example that can be implemented in this example, we have explained the case where the stop operation is performed at the position where the maximum number of pieces slips. In the case where a stop operation is performed at a position, the timing for changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation is to be performed is after the reel is displayed as stopped. In addition, even if it is 0 frames, the display mode will be changed to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop button operation should be performed, before the next stop button operation becomes effective. It is designed to change. By configuring this way, even if there is a zero frame, the player must operate the stop button after recognizing the reel to be stopped next, which prevents the player from pressing the stop button in the wrong order. can be prevented. Also, it is better to change the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel where the next stop operation is to be performed as early as possible, and even in the case of 0 frames, the timing should be as early as possible. is suitable.

In addition, in this example, the push order bell has been described as an example, but it can be applied to all condition devices that generate push order navigation, not just push order bells. Also, as a means of announcing the push order, lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 or sound output from the speaker S20 may be used. For example, when push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310 or sound output from the speaker S20 is included, it is possible to configure the performance display device S40 to execute the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel before changing the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel (in the case of the reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel is lit, and in the case of sound, the lines corresponding to the next reel are output as sound).

In addition, in this example, as a configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>>, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 was explained as an example of the effect means for executing the press order navigation. For example, the configuration may include a reel window frame lamp D310, audio, and push order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). good. The push order navigation using the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed by turning on (flashing) and turning off the reel window frame lamp, and the push order navigation using voice is "Left", "Right", "Middle" from the speaker S20. The press order navigation using the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is executed by outputting the left stop button corresponding to the reel. This is executed by turning on (flashing) and turning off D41.

For example, in the present embodiment, when the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> includes the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound, and the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43), (1) the reel window frame lamp D310
(1-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (1-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next (2) Sound (2-1) Outputting the sound corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next (3) Stop button D40 (3-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (3-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next (4) Performance display device S40 (4-1) Displaying the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (end of display) (4-2) Changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next. The configuration related to the push order navigation for each performance means as described above can be specified. The order of executing these configurations (1-1) to (4-2) may be determined in any way. For example, the order of execution may be determined for each presentation means (as one example, processing is performed in the order of reel window frame lamp → audio → stop button → presentation display device), or the order of execution may be determined for each reel (as one example, processing is performed in the order of processing related to the reel on which the stop operation has been performed → processing related to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next), or a combination of these may be used.

Furthermore, the <<Configuration relating to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example is explained using Figure 109, and in Figure 109, the case where the first stop operation is performed is explained as an example, but the configuration to which this example can be applied is not limited to only the first stop operation. For example, it is also applicable when the second stop operation is performed or the third stop operation is performed. Furthermore, when the third stop operation is performed, processing corresponding to the reel for which the next stop operation is to be performed (for example, a change to the "display mode that highlights the push order navigation" in the performance display device S40, and "lighting up the lamp corresponding to the reel for which the next stop operation is to be performed" in the reel window frame lamp D310) is not executed.

<Effect> By configuring in this manner, even if the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation and the reel corresponding to that stop button executes stop control involving slipping the maximum number of frames, the end of the push order navigation display corresponding to that stop button in the performance display device S40 (from the start to the end of the disappearance effect display) and the change in the display mode of the push order navigation display corresponding to the next stop button to be operated (start of highlighting) can be executed before the next stop button operation becomes effective, preventing the player from accidentally operating the stop button before recognizing which stop button to operate next.

<<<<<Third embodiment Medal addition process by insertion sensor>>>>> Next, as a third embodiment, the timing of the process of adding up the game medals inserted into the medal insertion port D170 as credits will be described (see FIG. 113). The game medals inserted from the medal insertion port D170 pass through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medals, and if a predetermined passing condition (the passing game medal meets the standard, is not determined to be an error, etc.) is met, the game medal flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without an error occurring. Then, a first insertion sensor D20s and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided further back from the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and when a game medal that meets the dimensional standard and is accepted passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, if it is determined that the game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and credits can be added. When a gaming medal passes through, the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s detect the insertion of the gaming medal, and the signals (information on the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s turns on, information on the time from when the first insertion sensor D20s turns on to when it turns off, information on the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s turns on, information on the time from when the second insertion sensor D30s turns on to when it turns off, etc.) are supplied to the main control board M. Here, the timing at which credits can be added can be determined by the on/off status of each of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<<<Third embodiment Timing chart of medal detection by insertion sensor>>> Figure 110 is a timing chart when a medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. For example, assume that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage of the medal (off → on) at timing 1 in the figure. Then, assume that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage of the medal (off → on) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings is supplied to the main control board M as the above-mentioned signal. Then, assume that the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting the medal (on → off) at timing 3 in the figure. Here, the time A from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the medal to when it finishes detecting the medal is calculated by the main control board M, and if A is within a predetermined range (4 ms ≦ A < 183 ms in the third embodiment), it is determined that the passage of the medal is detected normally. Furthermore, the time B from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal until the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and if B is within a predetermined range (2 ms≦B<115 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal has been detected normally. Then, assume that the second insertion sensor D30s finishes detecting the game medal (ON→OFF) at timing 4 in the figure. The time C from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal until the second insertion sensor D30s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and if C is within a predetermined range (4 ms≦C<183 ms), it is determined that the passage of the game medal has been detected normally. In this way, it is determined whether the game medal is passing through the medal selector DS normally at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off, and further, the game medal inserted at either the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off is detected as a bet medal, and credits are added.

<<<<Third embodiment: an example of medal addition processing by an insertion sensor>>><<Configuration 1>> Next, in the third embodiment, an example of the timing at which the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and credit addition is performed will be described in detail. Figures 111 to 112 are flowcharts reflecting the processing at the credit addition timing in the game progress control processing related to the subroutine of step 1200 in the third embodiment. Figure 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credit addition is performed when the insertion processing is normally performed on the inserted game medal. Note that in the flowchart of Figure 111, the explanation of the same contents as in Figure 17 will be omitted (steps 1220 to 1225, and step 1232 and after). First, in Figure 111, in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on or not. If the answer is Yes in step 1226-1 (4th), in step 1226-2 (4th), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is off (illustration in the upper middle part of FIG. 113: the first insertion sensor D20s turns from off to on when the game medal approaches the first insertion sensor D20s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-2 (4th), in step 1226-3 (4th), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on (illustration in the upper right part of FIG. 113: the second insertion sensor D30s turns from off to on when the game medal approaches the second insertion sensor D30s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-3 (fourth), then in step 1226-6 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on (illustration in the lower left part of FIG. 113: the first insertion sensor D20s turns from on to off when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first insertion sensor D20s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-6 (fourth), then in step 1226-8 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that one normal game medal has been inserted, and credit addition processing is performed. In step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is off (illustration in the middle and lower parts of FIG. 113: the second insertion sensor D30s turns from on to off when the gaming medal exceeds the detection range of the second insertion sensor D30s). If the answer is Yes in step 1226-9 (fourth), it is determined that one gaming medal has been properly inserted, and if the number of bets meets the specified number, a process such as enabling the operation of the start lever D50 is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1232.

<Effect 1> In the third embodiment, an example of executing the credit addition process when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on has been described. Conventionally, the credit addition process was executed when "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is off". However, by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been executed. However, if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to pay back the medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time, and it is possible to prevent the medal from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine even though the credit addition process has not been executed.

<Effect 2> Also, since the credit addition process is not executed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s remains off and only the first input sensor D20s is turned on, the medal input slot is smaller than the second input sensor D30s. To provide a game machine that is resistant to fraud by preventing the first input sensor D20s provided at a position close to the first input sensor D20s from being carried out (for example, clementing), and is furthermore user-friendly. Can be done.

<<<Third Embodiment Subroutine due to input sensor error>>> Also, if No in step 1226-3 (fourth), step 1226-6 (fourth), or step 1226-9 (fourth), step 1226 -4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth), and step 1226-10 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined medal insertion error occurrence condition is satisfied. judge. Note that the medal insertion errors here include, for example, an input medal backflow error, an error in the number of input medals, an error in input medal retention, etc., and the on/off status (including time) of sensors such as the first input sensor and the second input sensor. Based on this, it is determined whether any error has occurred (occurrence conditions vary depending on the type of error). These errors are detected, for example, based on detection of on/off of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s in FIG. 110. If Yes in step 1226-4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth), or step 1226-10 (fourth), medal insertion error processing is executed in step 1226-5 (fourth). be done. FIG. 112 is a flowchart related to a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, in step 1226-12 (fourth), the CPU 100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is on, and in step 1226-13 (fourth), an error detection command is sent to the sub side. , and a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process moves to step 1226-14 (fourth). Note that in 1226-13 (fourth), information regarding the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-control board side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the error state (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), or when the error is not detected, the There is no need to perform information setting processing. Error processing will be executed depending on the type of error that occurs, but the error detection command may execute set processing only when any error occurs from a state where no error has occurred. , even if the set process is executed when the type of error changes from the state where the first error (for example, input medal retention error) has occurred to the second error (for example, payout medal retention error). good. In step 1226-14 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the currently occurring error has been resolved. If it is determined that the error has been cleared, the currently occurring error flag is turned off in step 1226-15, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of error detection based on the detection of game medals by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s has been described. It is also possible to detect errors based on the detection of game medals by the input reception sensor D10s provided nearby, and an example of error detection based on the detection of game medals by the input reception sensor D10s will be described below. .

<<<Third Embodiment Error Detection Based on Insertion Monitoring Counter>>><<Configuration 2>> Insertion reception sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which game medals inserted from medal insertion slot D170 pass. It is being The input reception sensor D10s has a function of sorting the game medals input from the medal slot D170 mainly based on the dimensions and only accepting game medals that conform to the standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals do not conform based on this function. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been removed are configured to be returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that a suitable game medal has passed, the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned from off to on, and the signal thereof is supplied to the main control board M. When the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the input reception sensor D10s is turned on, the main control board M performs an addition process from 0 to 1 in a counter that counts the passage of game medals (hereinafter referred to as an input monitoring counter). Then, the main control board M monitors the input at the timing when the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS and the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off (corresponding to timing 4 in FIG. 110). The counter performs subtraction processing from 1 to 0. At this time, for example, if any problem occurs with the insertion of game medals during the period 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, the game medal counting process of the insertion monitoring counter will not be performed normally. . For example, if the second input sensor D30s does not turn off from on, the input monitoring counter does not subtract, and the input monitoring counter continues to increase, an input medal retention error can be detected. Furthermore, if a situation occurs in which the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off before the input reception sensor D10s, and the input monitoring counter becomes negative because the subtraction process of the input monitoring counter is performed first, It is possible to detect the backflow error of inserted medals.

<Effects> In this way, by configuring the system so that an error determination can be made based on the detection of game medals by the three sensors: the first input sensor D20s, the second input sensor D30s, and the input acceptance sensor D10s, it is possible to It becomes possible to reliably detect various errors related to input, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud, and furthermore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<<Third Embodiment Output of Medal Insertion Sound>>> In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound that is output after the inserted game medals are detected as bet medals will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, an example has been described in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, but when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is turned on, An error may occur while the sensor D30s is on (for example, an error in inserted medal retention due to an abnormally long time when the second input sensor D30s is on). In the third embodiment, since the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, it is assumed that, for example, an error may occur after the credit addition process is executed. Ru. In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound output after the credit addition process and the error sound output from the speaker S20 when an error is detected by the second insertion sensor D30s will be explained in particular.

<<Structure 3>> First, at timing A, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. To explain in detail, according to the timing chart of FIG. 110, subtracting 115 ms, which is the upper limit of period B, from 183 ms, which is the upper limit of period C, gives 68 ms. In other words, during this period, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs the following steps: "Medal insertion reception → Set command related to medal insertion reception → Send command to sub control board side → Set error detection command (if there is an error)" By executing the process as described above, it becomes possible to output the medal insertion sound before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<Configuration 4>> As a variation of Timing A, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU C100 of the main control board M may perform the process of "setting a command related to medal insertion reception → executing the credit addition process → sending a command to the sub-control board → setting an error detection command (if an error exists)."

<Effect> With this configuration, a process related to medal insertion acceptance is executed when the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, and a command related to medal insertion acceptance is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S by the subsequent timer interrupt process, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub-control board S. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned situation of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal accumulation error occurs, it is determined that an inserted medal accumulation error has occurred after the medal insertion sound has already been output (because the situation in which the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for more than a predetermined time), so the player can hear the medal insertion sound before the error sound related to the inserted medal accumulation error is output, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player becomes anxious that the game medal was not inserted properly due to the inserted medal accumulation error and that a loss has been incurred.

<<Configuration 5>> Next, as timing B, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more from the time of performing the credit addition process until the error is detected by the second insertion sensor D30s, and during this period, the CPU C100 of the main control board M is configured not to intentionally send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side. After that, an error detection command due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s is set, and then a command related to medal insertion reception is sent to the sub-control board side. In other words, by configuring the CPU 100 of the main control board M to execute the process as follows: "Execute credit addition process → Detect error flag → Set error detection command → Send error detection command to the sub-control board side → Set command related to medal insertion reception → Send command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side", it becomes possible to output the medal insertion sound after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. At this time, it is preferable to configure the timing for sending the command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub side to be a timer interrupt process that is different from the time when the error detection command is sent.

<<Configuration 6>> As a modification of timing B, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M detects an error flag → sets an error detection command → sends an error detection command to the sub-control board → sets a command related to medal input reception → executes credit addition processing → sub-control The process may be performed by "sending a command related to accepting medal insertion to the board side."

<Effect> By configuring in this manner, when the timing changes from "first insertion sensor D20s on and second insertion sensor D30s on → first insertion sensor D20s off and second insertion sensor D30s on", it is first determined that an inserted medal retention error has occurred (because the situation where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for more than a predetermined time), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. After that, after the process related to medal insertion acceptance is executed, a command related to medal insertion acceptance is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub-control board S. If the "first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" state continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, it is determined that the inserted medal retention error has occurred before the medal insertion sound is output (because the state in which the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for more than a predetermined period of time), so the player can hear the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error before the medal insertion sound is output, and the player can quickly realize that the game medal has not been inserted properly.

<<Configuration 7>> Next, as timing C, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, and after the error is cleared. Configure to output. It is determined that there is a time of at least 67 ms after the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected in the second input sensor D30s, but during this period, the CPU 100 of the main control board M is intentionally , the command related to medal input reception is not sent to the sub control board side, which is the same as the second timing, but furthermore, after the CPU 100 of the main control board M turns off the input error flag in step 1226-15. The system is configured to send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board side. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the credit addition process → detects the error flag → sets the error detection command → sends the error detection command to the sub control board → (during this period, the error cancellation process is performed). ...→Set error not detected command→Send error not detected command to sub control board side→Set command related to medal input reception →Send command related to medal input reception to sub control board side" By configuring this to be executed, it becomes possible to output the medal insertion sound after the error is cleared.

<<Configuration 8>> As a modification of timing C, the timing of the credit addition process may be changed. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M detects an error flag→sets an error detection command→sends an error detection command to the sub-control board→...(error cancellation processing during this period)...→no error detected Set the command → Send the error-undetected command to the sub-control board side → Set the command related to medal input reception → Execute credit addition process → Send the command related to medal input reception to the sub-control board side. Good too.

<Effect> By configuring it in this manner, when the timing changes from "first insertion sensor D20s on and second insertion sensor D30s on → first insertion sensor D20s off and second insertion sensor D30s on", it is first determined that an inserted medal accumulation error has occurred (because the situation where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for more than a predetermined time), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and an error sound related to the inserted medal accumulation error is output. After the error is resolved, an error non-detection command is sent to the sub-side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal accumulation error ends. Then, after the process related to medal insertion acceptance has been executed, a command related to medal insertion acceptance is sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, and the medal insertion sound is output on the sub-control board S. If the state of "the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal accumulation error occurs, it is determined that an inserted medal accumulation error has occurred before the medal insertion sound is output (because the state of the first insertion sensor D20s being off and the second insertion sensor D30s being on continues for more than a predetermined time), and the error is then resolved and output of the error sound is terminated. This allows the player to hear the error sound relating to the inserted medal accumulation error before the medal insertion sound is output, and to hear the medal insertion sound after the error has been resolved, so the player can recognize that the game medals have been inserted normally after the error has been resolved.

<<<Third embodiment: Medal error detection by chute sensor>>> Next, as a third embodiment, detection of an error using the chute sensor D40s will be described in detail. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the flow path member of the medal after passing through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in the path of the game medal in the medal selector DS (referred to as the chute body in the third embodiment). In FIG. 114, the chute sensor D40s is provided below the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the chute sensor D40s detects whether the medal has been inserted normally, similar to the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, but in particular, in the third embodiment, it is configured to detect errors that occur after the credit addition process has already been performed (for example, an inserted medal retention error, an inserted medal backflow error, etc.).

Error detection by the chute sensor D40s will now be described in detail. For example, consider the case where a game medal becomes stuck further downstream of the chute sensor D40s in the chute main body that is connected to the hopper H40. The width of the path for the game medals in the chute main body is roughly the width of one game medal, and when one game medal becomes stuck in the path for the game medals in the chute main body, game medals that pass through the path thereafter become stuck one after another, resulting in an inserted medal stuck error. In the third embodiment, the position detected by the chute sensor D40s is three game medals away from the position where the game medals become stuck, but the position at which the chute sensor D40s can be provided is not limited to this.

The detection of game medals by the shoot sensor D40s is similar to the detection of game medals by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. When a game medal passes, it is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, and its signal (shoot sensor D40s information on the timing when the chute sensor D40s is turned on, information on the time from when the chute sensor D40s is turned on until it is turned off) are supplied to the main control board M. The main control board M determines whether game medals are normally inserted based on information related to the signal detected by the chute sensor D40s and further information related to the signal detected by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. It is determined that Specifically, the main control board M determines in advance the period from the timing when the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s starts detecting game medals to the timing when the shoot sensor D40s starts detecting game medals. A comparison is made with a predetermined period (the time that the shoot sensor D40s should detect, hereinafter also referred to as a theoretical period). For example, in the case of detecting the fourth game medal in FIG. 114, the fourth game medal is detected from the timing when the fourth game medal is detected by the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor D30s. The period until it is detected by the shot sensor D40s is compared with the theoretical period, and if the difference between the periods exceeds the range where it is not detected as an error, an error (in the third embodiment, the shot sensor medal is detected) is detected. (retention error) will be detected. Note that the timing at which the first input sensor D20s detects game medals, the timing at which the second input sensor D30s starts detecting game medals, or the timing at which the first input sensor D20s finishes detecting game medals, and the second input sensor Any timing when the D30s finishes detecting game medals may be set as the start timing of the theoretical period.

<<Third embodiment: Timing chart of game medal detection by chute sensor>> Figure 115 is a timing chart when a game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the chute sensor D40s. For example, assume that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage of a game medal (off → on) at timing 1 in the figure. Next, assume that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage of a game medal (off → on) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings, etc. are supplied to the main control board M as the aforementioned signal. Then, assume that the chute sensor D40s detects the passage of a game medal (off → on) at timing 3 in the figure. The period D from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the game medal until the chute sensor D40s starts detecting it, and the period E from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects the game medal until the chute sensor D40s starts detecting it are calculated by the main control board M, and these periods are taken as theoretical periods to determine whether the game medal has passed through the chute body normally based on the detection by the chute sensor D40s. In addition, by providing the chute sensor D40s, it is possible to detect errors that may occur after it is determined that the game medal has passed normally through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s.

<Effects> With this configuration, it is possible to detect, for example, any error (chute sensor medal retention error) related to the passage of a game medal near the chute sensor D40s, and to notify the player that an error has occurred. Furthermore, the normal passage of a game medal by the chute sensor D40s is determined based on information related to the timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s start detecting the game medal, so that if the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s do not detect the passage of a game medal, but the chute sensor D40s detects the passage of a game medal, that is, an error related to the backflow of inserted medals, can be reliably detected, making it possible to provide a game machine that is resistant to fraud, and ultimately a user-friendly game machine.

<<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> Next, as a fourth embodiment, when the game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230 or returned to the medal tray D230, the game medals pass through. An example of the mechanism of the medal return member D340 will be explained.

First, Figs. 116 to 119 will be described to explain in detail the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment. Fig. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340. Fig. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 as seen from the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 (explained later) is provided. Fig. 118 is a trajectory diagram of the game medals that are paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, pass through the medal receiving opening D341 (explained later), and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. Fig. 119 depicts the trajectory of the game medals inside the side view of Fig. 117.

<<<<Front view of medal return member of fourth embodiment>>> Figure 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340 in the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, when a medal selector DS, which detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and performs simple authenticity checks, returns game medals that have not been added to the bet or credit (game medals that reach the blocker while the blocker is off) to the medal receiving tray D230, the game medals pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the first flow path), and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the second flow path), and are finally paid out to the medal receiving tray D230.

The medal return member D340 is configured to have at least a first flow path through which inappropriate game medals detected by the medal selector DS pass when returning them to the medal receiving tray D230, and a second flow path through which game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass. The game medals passing through the two flow paths are configured to merge as they pass through the medal return member D340 and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230.

The second flow path in the medal return member D340 is configured to have at least a medal receiving port D341 that receives game medals dispensed from the hopper H40, and a medal drop surface D342 on which game medals dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. It is further configured to have a space surrounded by a medal non-drop surface D343 located opposite the medal drop surface D342, a wall surface on which the medal receiving port is provided, and the medal drop surface D342 on which game medals dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall, and is configured so that the game medals dispensed from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass through this space.

The medal receiving opening D341 is configured to communicate with the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. In addition, since the medal receiving opening D341 is open, game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 can reliably pass through the medal receiving opening D341. In particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 is referred to as the edge (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer periphery of the shape of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341 is referred to as the edge). In defining the length and distance related to the medal receiving opening D341, the starting point is any position that corresponds to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the shape of the medal drop surface D342 is formed in an approximately rectangular shape, and the medal non-drop surface D343 located opposite the medal drop surface D342 is also formed in an approximately rectangular shape, but the shapes of the medal drop surface D342 and the medal non-drop surface D343 are not limited to this.

In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving opening D341 is provided in an inclined shape downward to the right, and FIG.
It is configured to be inclined substantially parallel to a medal falling surface D342 on which game medals that collide with a collision part (not shown) provided in the front view direction of No. 6 fall. With this configuration, game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 and dropped onto the medal falling surface D342 slide down from the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and the game medals are reliably guided to the medal receiving tray D230. It becomes possible to do so. Note that the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal falling surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and may be configured such that both the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal falling surface D342 are not inclined. It should be noted that the inappropriate medals detected by the medal selector DS are configured to fall toward the medal receiving tray D230 from above when viewed from the player in a direction perpendicular to the above-mentioned inclination direction of the medal receiving opening D341. .

<<<Fourth Embodiment Side view of medal return member Locus diagram of game medal flow (perspective view)>>> Next, using FIGS. 117 and 118, the configuration of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment will be explained. This section explains the dimensional regulations. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 is provided. First, the thickness and diameter of the game medal are defined as a and b, respectively (see FIG. 116). In addition, it is preferable that a, which is the thickness of the game medal, is approximately 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and b, which is the diameter of the game medal, is preferably approximately 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm. be.

Next, the distance from the medal falling surface D342 where the game medals fall after being dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341 is determined by c, which is perpendicular to the medal non-falling surface D343. The longest distance from the medal non-falling surface D342 to the edge of the medal receiving port in the direction d is the longest distance from the medal receiving port D341 to the edge of the opening of the medal receiving port D341. In the fourth embodiment, the length (in the height direction of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341, which has a substantially rectangular shape) is e, and the maximum length of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving opening D341 is The length is defined as f. In the fourth embodiment, predetermined conditions are provided for the dimensions defined in this way. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions: c≧a...Equation (1) b>d...Equation (2) f≧2b...Equation (3) b >e...Formula (4) In the fourth embodiment, game medals can be applied to either 25Φ size or 30Φ size.

First, by satisfying formulas (1) and (3), it is possible to prevent the first and second game medals from colliding. The distance from the medal drop surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving opening 341 is configured to be greater than the thickness a of the game medal, and there is a sufficient distance between the medal receiving opening D341 and the collision point of the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H. Therefore, when the game medal that falls freely under its own weight and collides with the collision point falls onto the medal drop surface D342 (when the game medal is lying down), it is outside the area through which the next game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 will pass, and therefore collision can be prevented.

Next, by satisfying formula (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 (regardless of whether the game medal is lying down or standing) and the subsequent It is possible to configure the system so that the second game medal that is paid out does not collide with the second game medal, and the game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 does not block the medal receiving opening D341. It is.

Next, by satisfying formula (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and one medal that collided with the collision part It is possible to configure the system to prevent the situation in which the eye game medals bounce back to the medal receiving opening D341.

By specifying the dimensions in the configuration of the medal return member D340 as shown in formulas (1) to (4), the game medals can be smoothly paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, and the game medals can be smoothly delivered. It becomes possible to guide the user to the receiving tray D230. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving opening D341, and flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, as an effect of specifying the dimensions of formulas (1) to (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game medal paid out thereafter. It is possible to configure the game medals so that they do not collide with medals, and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 do not block the medal receiving opening D341.

As shown in FIG. 117, in this example, the entire outer circumference of the medal receiving opening D341 on the outer side of the medal return member D340 is configured to have a protruding edge, but it may also be configured to have a protruding edge on the entire outer circumference of the medal receiving opening D341 on the inner side of the medal return member D340. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it less likely that a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H will flow back into the medal receiving opening D341 after colliding with the collision portion.

<<<<Fourth embodiment: Diagram of trajectory of game medal flow (side view)>>> In FIG. 118, the trajectory of the game medal that is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passes through the medal receiving port D341, and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230 will be explained in more detail using FIG. 119. FIG. 119 illustrates the trajectory of the game medal inside the side view of FIG. 117. First, as shown in the upper left diagram, the first game medal is released from the medal receiving port D341. Next, as shown in the upper right diagram, the second game medal is released from the medal receiving port D341 in the same manner as the first game medal, and the first game medal collides with a collision portion (not shown) provided in the front view direction of FIG. 116. The interval between the release of the first game medal from the medal receiving port D341 and the release of the second game medal can be determined by the rotational speed of the disk H50 of the medal payout device H, and the rotational speed can be determined arbitrarily. However, as shown in the upper right diagram of the fourth embodiment, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H. The timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H may be (1) approximately simultaneously with the timing at which the first game medal collides with the collision portion, (2) before (just before) the first game medal collides with the collision portion, or (3) after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. The distance f (see FIG. 117) may be adjusted to match the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H. As for the above (2), it is preferable that the timing is set to the timing after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H and passes through the medal receiving port D341, and then advances (is launched) in the horizontal direction by at least the diameter (above b) of the game medal. In addition, the more time has passed since the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H when the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the lower the possibility that the first game medal and the second game medal will collide. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is set too long, the interval between the payout times of the game medals becomes too long, and the tempo at which the game medals are paid out becomes poor. In addition, since the size (depth) of the inside of the housing of the gaming machine is limited, it is difficult to ensure that the above f (the maximum length of the medal drop surface D342 in the vertical direction to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341) is at least a predetermined distance. For the above reasons, it is most preferable that the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. This configuration can prevent the first game medal from colliding with the collision portion and then colliding with the second game medal. It is preferable that the third and subsequent game medals paid out do not collide with each other, and it is preferable that at least the game medals paid out up to the maximum number of medals paid out in the design of the gaming machine (for example, 15 medals) do not collide with each other. It is possible to create an effect that the game medals to be paid out are less likely to get clogged in the return member D340, even if the medals do not collide with each other when the first and second medals are paid out, but collide with each other when the second and third medals are paid out. This means that in a gaming machine, two medals are paid out more frequently than three medals are paid out. In addition, the collision portion may be protected by, for example, metal, in order to increase the durability of the medal return member D340 against the collision of the game medals.

Next, as shown in the lower left row, the first game medal collides with the collision part and then falls onto the medal falling surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal and heads toward the collision part in the same way as the first game medal. At this time, by being configured as shown in equation (1), it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding. Next, as shown in the lower right row, the first game medal that has fallen onto the medal falling surface D342 is tilted in the direction of inclination of the medal falling surface D342 due to gravity, and falls from the medal falling surface D342 to the medal receiving tray D230. is induced. After colliding with the collision part, the second game medal falls onto the medal falling surface D342 in the same way as the first game medal. At this time, since the first game medal is configured to be inclined by gravity in the direction of inclination of the medal falling surface D342, the first game medal and the second game medal may collide with each other. It is possible to prevent backflow of medals that collided with the collision part and bounced back into the opening of the medal receiving port D341.

<<Effect 1>> The second game medal is released from the medal receiving opening D341 toward the collision section, and the first game medal collides with the collision section and then falls onto the medal drop surface D342. At this time, it is configured to satisfy formulas (1) and (3). In other words, the distance from the medal drop surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving opening 341 is configured to be greater than the thickness a of the game medal, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H has a sufficient distance from the medal receiving opening D341 to collide with the collision section, so that the game medal falls freely under its own weight, and when the game medal that collides with the collision section falls onto the medal drop surface D342 (when the game medal is lying down), it is outside the area through which the next game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 passes, so collision can be prevented.

<<Effect 2>> For example, by configuring as in formula (2) and formula (4), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a medal that collides with the collision section and bounces off from entering the opening of the medal receiving port D341.

<<Effect 3>> For example, by configuring as in formula (3), it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a sufficient distance relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, and it is possible to prevent the first gaming medal that hits the collision section from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341.

<<Effect 4>> The first game medal that fell onto the medal falling surface D342 will fall from the medal falling surface D342 and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230, and the second game medal will be As shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 119, the medal falls onto the medal falling surface D342 at approximately the same position as the position where the first game medal fell. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are not paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 due to accumulation in the vicinity of the medal receiving opening D341. We can provide gaming machines.

<<Effect 5>> A gaming machine can be provided that can prevent damage and deterioration of the medal return member D340 because it has a cushioning material that cushions the impact of the impact part where the gaming medals that are paid out at high speed from the medal payout device H collide.

<<Effect 6>> When a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 collides with the collision section once and loses its initial momentum when paid out, it causes a collision between game medals (such as a collision between a game medal returned from the medal selector DS and a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, or a collision between game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40) and prevents the game medals from flowing down into the medal tray D230 in an unrhythmic manner, thereby providing a user-friendly gaming machine.

The collision portion against which the game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H collide may be part of the front door DU or part of the medal return member D340, or the collision portion alone may be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a separate member.

In addition, in this example, the collision portion where the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H collide has a plane shape that is approximately perpendicular to the medal falling surface D342. It is sufficient that the game medals collide with each other and the collided game medals flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, the medal falling surface D342 has a curved shape and plays the same role as the collision part. Alternatively, any surface or portion of the medal return member D340 may be curved to play the same role as the collision part. Further, as described above, only the collision portion may be configured to be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a separate member, and the collision portion may be configured to have a curved shape.

<<<<<Fifth embodiment: Driving control of medal payout device>>>><<<<Fifth embodiment: Timing chart of driving control of medal payout device>>> Next, as the fifth embodiment, the driving control of the medal payout device H will be described. First, the operation control of the medal payout device H will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a timing chart relating to the detection of the hopper motor H80, which is driven when the game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, and the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2. Details of the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be described later, but for the sake of explanation, the first payout sensor H10s in FIG. 4 is set to the second payout sensor H2, and the second payout sensor H20s in FIG. 4 is set to the first payout sensor H1. In the initial position where the game medal is not paid out (the initial position when the disk is not rotating), the first payout sensor H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is off. First, in the hopper motor H80, the hopper drive flag is in an ON state when the hopper motor H80 is driven. When the medal payout device H pays out game medals, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a, and the game medals in the medal payout device H are displaced by the discharge urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 to the discharge port D240, thereby paying out the game medals. In the fifth embodiment, the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 are detected to be ON or OFF based on, for example, the displacement of the discharge urging means H70. Specifically, at the timing 1 in the figure, a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in an ON state is transmitted to the main control board M when the discharge urging means H70 has not yet been displaced to a position where the game medals are paid out (referred to as the initial position in the fifth embodiment). Then, the discharge biasing means H70 starts to move to a position where the game medal is paid out, and the discharge biasing means H70 starts to move from the initial position, thereby transmitting a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the OFF state to the main control board M (the first payout sensor H1 changes from ON to OFF). At the timing of 2 in the figure, the discharge biasing means H70 moves to a position where the game medal is paid out (referred to as the payout position in the fifth embodiment), thereby transmitting a signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the ON state to the main control board M (the second payout sensor H2 changes from OFF to ON). Then, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the payout of the game medal is completed, and the discharge biasing means H70 starts to move to the initial position again, thereby transmitting a signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the OFF state to the main control board M (the second payout sensor H2 changes from ON to OFF). Then, at timing 4 in the figure, the release biasing means H70 is displaced back to the initial position, and a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the ON state is sent to the main control board M (the first payout sensor H1 changes from OFF to ON). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, for example, by detecting that the period from timing 1 to timing 2 is within the predetermined range A (A<26 ms), the period from timing 2 to timing 3 is within the predetermined range B (9 ms≦B<60 ms), and the period from timing 3 to timing 4 is within the predetermined range C (9 ms≦C<60), it is determined that the medal payout device H is functioning normally and that normal payout of game medals is being performed.

<<<Fifth embodiment: Medal payout by medal payout device - stopping of medal payout device>>><<Configuration>> Next, using Figure 121, a series of flows from the start of medal payout by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment to the stopping of the medal payout device H will be explained. First, in Figure 121, in the fifth embodiment, in order to concisely explain the series of flows from the payout of game medals to the stopping of the medal payout device H, the configuration related to the medal payout device H that is unnecessary for the configuration of the fifth embodiment has been eliminated as much as possible. Figure 121 is a front view of the disk H50 that rotates when paying out game medals.

In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disk H50 has a plurality of circular cavities larger in size than the game medals, and the disk H50 is configured to cover and overlap the game medals, and the game medals are moved under the disk H50 by the rotation of the disk H50. By moving, game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240. First, in the upper left diagram, the hopper motor H80 is not driven, and the first dispensing sensor H1 is in an on state. In the fifth embodiment, this state is defined as the initial position of the discharge biasing means H70, and for clarity of explanation, an initial position (disc H50) before rotation of the disc H50 is provided on the outer periphery of the disc H50. do. This initial position (disc H50) is displaced in the rotational direction of the disc H50 every time a game medal is paid out. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, and further explanation will be given from the timing of paying out the fourth game medal.

In the upper diagram of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate at a constant speed, and the release biasing means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, it can be seen that the initial position (disc H50) has been rotated by an angle A from the position where the third game medal was paid out. That is, when the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, the disk H50 rotates by the angle A before the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the dispensing position. Furthermore, the disk H50 does not rotate until the ejection biasing means H70 is displaced from the dispensing position to the initial position.

Next, in the lower left part of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate at a constant speed, and the release biasing means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, after dispensing the fourth game medal, the discharge biasing means H70 is displaced from the dispensing position to the initial position, but since the disk H50 is not rotating during this time, the fourth game medal It can be seen that the fourth game medal is rotated by an angle A from the position where it was paid out, in the same way as when it was paid out.

Then, as shown in the lower right row, after the fifth game medal is paid out, the drive of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, and the payout of the game medals is completed. After turning off the drive of the hopper motor H80, the rotation of the disk H50 stops, but the initial position (disk H50) is a position shifted by an angle B in the rotational direction from the position where the fifth game medal was paid out. Stop. The reason for this configuration is that, especially when dispensing the first game medal, the hopper motor H80 does not reach a constant speed state immediately from the start of driving, but takes a predetermined time to reach a constant speed state. It takes. In other words, if the release biasing means H70 is in the initial position when dispensing the first game medal (hopper motor H80 is in an accelerated state to constant speed state), then the second and subsequent game medals (hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state) Compared to the case where game medals are paid out, there is a delay due to the fact that the hopper motor H80 is in an accelerated state.

Here, the process from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out will be described in detail. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the hopper motor H80 changes from a stopped state to an accelerated state and then to a constant speed state. Here, the rotational speed in a constant speed state is assumed to be A (m/t). The acceleration state is a state in which acceleration processing is performed from speed 0 to constant speed A, and the average rotational speed in the period from speed 0 to constant speed state (period of acceleration state) is B (m/t ), then B<A. Therefore, the average rotational speed C (m/t) from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out satisfies B<C<A.

Next, we will explain in detail the process from when the first game medal is dispensed to when the second game medal is dispensed. Since the hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state when the first game medal is dispensed, it remains in a constant speed state from when the first game medal is dispensed to when the second game medal is dispensed. Therefore, the average rotational speed from when the first game medal is dispensed to when the second game medal is dispensed is A.

As mentioned above, the average rotational speed C from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is higher than the average rotation speed C from when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. Since the average rotational speed A until the medals are paid out is faster, the distance that the disk H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out, and the first game medal are If the distance that the disk H50 rotates from the time a medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out is the same distance, the distance from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped to when the first game medal is played is the same. The time required until the medals are paid out is longer than the time required from the time the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out.

As shown in Figure 121, in this example, after the last game medal (the fifth game medal in the figure) has been paid out as part of the game medal payout process, the disk H50 is shifted in the rotational direction by a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) and stopped (the rotating distance becomes longer). By configuring in this manner, the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out can be made shorter than the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out (the same distance is also the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the second game medal is paid out until the third game medal is paid out, etc.).The time required from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out can be made closer to (approximate) the time required from when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out, and the game medals can be paid out at a good tempo, allowing the player to progress in the game without feeling uncomfortable.

The width of the deviation in the rotational direction (angle B) when the disk H50 stops after the hopper motor H80 is driven depends on the period from the acceleration state to the constant speed state due to the drive of the hopper motor H80. During this period, by considering the difference between the rotation width of the hopper motor H80 in the accelerated state and the rotation width of the hopper motor H80 in the constant speed state, the disc H50 is ejected by the urging means H70 after the hopper motor H80 is driven. It is determined how far the rotational direction should be shifted from the initial position before stopping. The difference between the width of the rotation of the hopper motor H80 in the accelerated state and the width of the rotation of the hopper motor H80 in the constant speed state corresponds from a position corresponding to the initial position of the discharge urging means H70 of the hopper motor H80 to a dispensing position of the discharge urging means H70. It is preferable that the angle B is sufficiently smaller than the angle A because it is sufficiently smaller than the width to the position. It should be noted that even if there is a deviation in the rotational direction by angle B, the system is configured so that the detection of game medals by the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 is not affected, and the timing chart in FIG. Based on this, game medals are detected.

<<Effects>> With this configuration, when the player receiving the payout of game medals receives a predetermined number of game medals, the player receives the payout of the game medals at approximately constant intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. For example, by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, (1) game medals do not collide with each other, and (2) game medals do not collide with each other. It can be constructed so that no jams occur, and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, after the last game medal is dispensed, the disk H50 is configured to stop at a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) in the rotational direction, thereby preventing a situation in which a fraudulent device is inserted through the ejection port D240 to fraudulently obtain game medals.

<<<<<Sixth embodiment Control when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is not possible>>>> Next, as the sixth embodiment, a process when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is not possible will be described. Here, as a case in which communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is not possible, it is assumed that various commands set from the main control board M to the sub-control board S cannot be transmitted. The main control board M is configured to transmit various commands related to the game to the sub-control board based on the progress of the game, for example, in the game progress control process of FIG. 16, and also to transmit various commands from the main control board to the sub-control board periodically at a predetermined time (T in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example) as a process related to a subroutine, as in step 1622 of FIG. 32. The sub-control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and execute a performance based on the commands. In addition, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and the sub-control board S is configured to be able to receive commands from the main control board M but unable to transmit commands to the main control board side. In the gaming machine, the main control board M and the sub-control board S each have a program related to execution processing (the program possessed by the main control board M is called the main side program, and the program possessed by the sub-control board S is called the sub-side program), and for example, the sub-control board S is configured to execute a performance by receiving a predetermined command from the main control board M as a trigger. In other words, under a situation where it is unable to receive commands from the main control board M, the sub-control board S is unable to execute the processing configured in the sub-side program. A situation where the sub-control board S is unable to receive commands from the main control board M may occur, for example, due to a malfunction of a member caused by poor contact of a harness electrically connecting the main control board M and the sub-control board S. However, even if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible, the main side program of the main control board M that controls the progress of the game can be executed, and the game itself related to the main side program can be executed even if communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible. In addition, when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored from a situation in which communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is impossible, a command related to the process after communication is restored is transmitted from the main control board to the sub-control board based on the progress of the main side program, and the sub-control board S executes processing based on the command related to the process after communication is restored received from the main control board M. Below, using Figures 122 to 126, an example of the processing performed by the main control board M and the sub-control board S when communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible while various commands are being executed by the main control board M will be described as the sixth embodiment.

<<<<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during processing related to settlement When the command and the channel are one to one>>> Figure 122 shows a chronological flow of processing as an example of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is not possible during processing related to settlement. First, the number of games is set to be the Nth game as a predetermined number of games, and processing is performed across the N+1th game. In the sixth embodiment, the processing performed by the main control board M, in particular, is to send commands based on the progress of the game to the sub-control board S, and the processing performed by the sub-control board S is to execute a performance based on the command received from the main control board M, which is one set of processing (one sequence in the sixth embodiment). Note that the sub-control board S does not execute a performance based on all commands received from the main control board M, and may or may not execute a performance based on the received command. For example, in Fig. 122 to Fig. 126, the sub-control board S executes a performance for each command transmitted by the main control board M as an example, but it is to be noted that the sub-control board S may execute a performance or may not execute a performance based on the reception of each command. When the settlement button is operated to settle the credits in a situation where one or more credits exist, the sound during settlement corresponding to the settlement of the game medals is output from the speaker S20, but the sound channel that outputs the sound during settlement is a channel that corresponds only to the sound during settlement. For example, the sub-control board S executes a performance based on a command received from the main control board M, but in particular, when executing a process of outputting sound from the speaker S20, the command received from the main control board M is associated with the sound channel of the speaker S20. In other words, sound is output from the speaker S20 from the sound channel corresponding to the received command. Note that the command and the sound channel do not have to have a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, multiple commands (such as a command to start settlement or multiple commands related to detecting certain errors) may be associated with one audio channel. By configuring in this way, even if the number of commands related to audio output increases, it is possible to configure the device to output audio without increasing the number of channels.

<<Configuration 1>> FIG. 122 will be described in detail. First, as processing order 1, the main control board M sends a command based on the start of payment to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that payment is being made from the speaker S20. In <<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of processing related to payment, when the command and channel are one-to-one>>, the sound that outputs the sound during payment is It is assumed that the channel supports only the command related to the start of payment, and does not support other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound that the payment is being made, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. At this time, for example, communication may be disconnected due to poor connection of the harness etc. that electrically connects the main control board M and sub-control board S, etc. The cases where communication is disconnected are not limited to this. Any situation may be applicable as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound during payment, the main control board M executes payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed. By making this determination, a command related to the completion of payment is sent to the sub-control board, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during payment. Execute the process to end.

In sequence 2, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S regarding the completion of settlement, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command to the sub-control board S regarding the completion of settlement. At this time, because the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to end settlement from the main control board M, it does not stop outputting the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. Note that while the main control board M is executing the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determining that the payout of the number of game medals equal to the number of credits has been completed, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, but the process performed by the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, is continuing.

The main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and after the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub-control board S has not been able to receive the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to payment has been completed, and plays the Nth game. Sets commands related to next processing.

As order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S by determining that the Nth game has started and game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. Based on receiving the command related to acceptance of medal insertion from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to medal insertion, and also outputs a command related to completion of payment from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting medal insertion has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the sound during settlement and continues to output the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start lever operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

As step 5, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and receives the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In sequence 6, the process related to starting the reels to spin has ended, and the player is now able to perform the reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation for the first reel (the first reel being the first of the multiple reels that the player performs the stop operation on) has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As order 7, by determining that the second reel stop operation (the second reel is the reel on which the player performs the second reel stop operation among the plurality of reels), the main control board M transmits a command related to accepting the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to accepting the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the second reel stop operation, and at the same time outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In sequence 8, upon determining that the operation to stop the third reel (the third reel being the reel among multiple reels on which the player performs the third stop operation) has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game. The command set at this time is, as an example, a command related to stopping the displayed symbols, which is sent immediately after the stop button is operated to stop all reels and stop the displayed symbols, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, as a command for the sub-control board S to output a sound based on a command from the main control board M, a command related to the case where a winning combination (such as a push order bell role) that pays out game medals is determined to be won in the Nth game and a symbol combination related to the winning condition device is stopped and displayed based on the reel stop operation (referred to as a "command related to winning" in the sixth embodiment) is sent (as a command for the next process in the Nth game).

In order 9, by determining that all the reels have been stopped, the main control board M transmits a command related to stopping the stop display symbols to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while receiving the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to stopping the stop display symbols has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive data from the main control board M because the communication between the two parties is temporarily cut off. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command related to the completion of payment, and during the period from the game medal insertion in the Nth game until the stop operation of all reels is performed, The system is configured to continue outputting the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment.

Next, for the N+1th game, processing proceeds to orders 10 and 11. For order 10, similar to order 1 for the Nth game, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to start settlement. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that settlement is in progress from the speaker S20. At this time, the sound indicating that settlement is in progress output from the speaker S20 will be output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the sound indicating that settlement was output in the Nth game, as described above. In other words, by sending a command based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button for the N+1th game from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S starts outputting the sound during settlement based on the command related to the start of settlement for the N+1th game received from the main control board M, while ending the output of the sound during the settlement for the Nth game (the processing of the sub-control board S is as follows: output of sound during settlement for the Nth game → receive command related to the start of settlement for the N+1th game → end output of sound during settlement for the Nth game → start output of sound during settlement for the N+1th game).

In order 11, the main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed, and issues a command related to the completion of payment. Send to the sub control board side. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S executes a process of terminating the output of the sound during payment for the N+1 game.

<Effect 1> With this configuration, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while executing a process that involves outputting audio, for example, the game It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which a player can recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the system is configured to allow the game to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game due to an error, it is possible to temporarily shut off the power to the game machine in response to an error. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which the output of audio can be terminated while the game is progressing by restoring communication between the two parties.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payment-related processing When the command and channel are not one-to-one>>><<Configuration 2>> Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, as processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of payment to the sub control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound indicating that payment is being made from the speaker S20. In <<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of processing related to payment, when the command and channel are not one-to-one>>, the sound that outputs the sound during payment The channel is assumed to support not only commands based on the detection of operation of the checkout button, but also other commands (here, it is referred to as "error detection command based on detection of door open error flag"). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the sound that the payment is being made, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound during payment, the main control board M executes payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed. By making this determination, a command related to the completion of payment is sent to the sub-control board, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the completion of payment from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during payment. Execute the process to end.

As order 2, the main control board M sends a command related to the completion of payment to the sub-control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M does not complete the payment. It is not possible to send a command related to the termination to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment. Note that while the main control board M executes the payment process based on the detection of the operation of the payment button and determines that the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Although communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is progressing.

The main control board M executes the payment processing based on the detection of the operation of the payment button, and after the payout of game medals equivalent to the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub-control board S has not been able to receive the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to payment has been completed, and plays the Nth game. Sets commands related to next processing.

As order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S by determining that the Nth game has started and game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. Based on receiving the command related to acceptance of medal insertion from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to medal insertion, and also outputs a command related to completion of payment from the main control board M. Since the message cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting medal insertion has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the completion of settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start lever operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

As step 5, the main control board M sends a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving the command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and receives the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since this is not possible, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In order 6, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now able to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to termination cannot be received, the output of the sound during checkout is not ended and the output of the sound during inspection continues. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In order 7, by determining that the second reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub control board S is the second control board from the main control board M.
Based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the reel stop operation, the sound effect related to the second reel stop operation reception is output, but since the command related to the end of payment cannot be received from the main control board M, the sound effect during payment is output. Continue outputting the sound during checkout without ending the output. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 8, by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel, but because it cannot receive a command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, it continues to output the sound during settlement without ending the output of the sound during settlement. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the acceptance of the stop operation of the third reel has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing of the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, a command related to the stopping of the stopped display pattern, which is sent immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the displayed pattern, is used as an example, but it is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to send a command related to winning or the like (as a command for the next processing of the Nth game) as a command for outputting sound based on a command from the main control board M.

In order 9, by determining that all the reels have been stopped, the main control board M sends a command related to stopping the stop display symbols to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to the stop of the stop display symbol, while receiving the command related to the end of payment from the main control board M. Since the message cannot be received, the output of the sound during payment continues without ending the output of the sound during payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to stopping the stop display symbols has been completed, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive data from the main control board M because the communication between the two parties is temporarily cut off. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the main control board M from the sub-control board S is a command related to the completion of payment, and during the period from the game medal insertion in the Nth game until the stop operation of all reels is performed, The system is configured to continue outputting the sound during payment without ending the output of the sound during payment.

Next, the process proceeds to sequence 10 for the N+1 game. Assume that a specific error occurs in sequence 10. A door open error is described as an example of the error at this time, but the error is not limited to this and may be any error such as an abnormal insertion error, an abnormal withdrawal error, or an insertion reception sensor retention error. When the main control board M determines that a door open error has occurred, particularly because the front door DU is open, it transmits an error detection command based on the detection of a door open error flag to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the error detection command based on the detection of a door open error flag, the sub-control board S performs processing to output a door open error notification sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the command based on the detection of the settlement button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door open error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. In other words, the sub-control board S is configured to end the output of the sound during settlement in the Nth game and start outputting the door open error notification sound in the N+1th game by receiving an error detection command due to detection of the door open error flag in the N+1th game while the sound during settlement is being continued from the Nth game.

<Effect 1> By configuring it in this way, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred with the gaming machine because the audio output does not end, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Effect 2> In addition, when an error occurs, by associating the audio channel output from the speaker S20 with multiple commands such as commands related to error detection, the error notification sound is reliably output and the game A user-friendly gaming machine that can reliably notify the user that an error has occurred, and that can terminate audio output while the game is progressing once communication between both parties is restored. can be provided.

<<<<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off while the minimum play time has not elapsed When the command and the channel are one to one>>><<Configuration 3>> Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. In particular, the flow of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is not possible while the minimum play time from when the start lever D50 is operated to when the reels start spinning has not elapsed will be described. First, in processing sequence 1, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation (here referred to as a wait sound) from the speaker S20. In the sixth embodiment, when the communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during the period when the minimum play time has not yet elapsed, the voice channel that outputs the wait sound only corresponds to the command related to the start lever operation, and does not correspond to other commands. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the wait sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. At this time, for example, the case where the communication is cut off may be a case where the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, such as a poor connection of the harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub-control board S. Any case may be possible as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the wait sound, the main control board M determines that a state in which preparations for starting the reel spinning has begun based on the operation of the start lever (here referred to as the start of the reel spinning start waiting state), and sends a command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning waiting state. The sub-control board S is configured to execute a process to end the output of the wait sound by receiving the command to start the reel spinning start waiting state.

In sequence 2, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state. At this time, because the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to start the reel spinning standby state from the main control board M, it does not end the output of the wait sound and continues to output the wait sound. Note that while the main control board M is executing the process to start the reel spinning standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, but the process performed by the main control board M, which is responsible for the progress of the game, is ongoing.

After the main control board M completes the processing related to starting the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received the command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, but the main control board M has finished the process related to starting the reel rotation start standby state. Then, a command related to the next process of the Nth game is set.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of reel rotation to the sub-control board S by determining that the reel rotation has started due to the start lever operation. Based on receiving a command related to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of reel rotation, and also outputs a sound effect related to the start of a standby state for starting reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing for the Nth game.

In order 4, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player is now able to perform an operation to stop the reels. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to starting the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

As order 5, by determining that the second reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, and at the same time outputs a sound effect related to receiving the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to starting the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game.

In step 6, by determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the start of the reel spin start waiting state from the main control board M, it continues to output the wait sound without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, a command related to the stopping of the stopped display pattern, which is transmitted immediately after the stop operation of all reels is performed and the stop button is operated to stop the displayed pattern, is used as an example, but it is also possible to configure the sub-control board S to transmit a command related to winning or the like (as a command for the next process of the Nth game) as a command for outputting a sound based on a command from the main control board M.

In step 7, by determining that all reels have been stopped, the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S to stop the stop display symbols. Based on receiving the command to stop the stop display symbols, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the stop of the stop display symbols, but because it cannot receive a command to start the reel spin start waiting state from the main control board M, it continues to output the wait sound without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display symbols has been completed, and terminates the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, the communication between the two boards is temporarily cut off, resulting in a situation in which the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M. At this time, the command that the sub-control board S has not been able to receive from the main control board M is a command to start the reel spin start waiting state, and is configured to continue to output the wait sound without terminating the output of the wait sound during the period from the insertion of the game medal in the Nth game to the stop operation of all reels.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds to order 8 and order 9. In order 8, by determining that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of medal insertion from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, and also causes the main control board M to start rotating the reels for the Nth game. Since the command related to starting the standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound continues without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting medal insertion has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In step 9, the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on receiving the command to start the reel spinning standby state. At this time, the wait sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the wait sound output in the Nth game, as described above. In other words, by transmitting a command to start the reel spinning standby state in the N+1th game from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S starts outputting the wait sound based on the command to start the reel spinning standby state in the N+1th game received from the main control board M, while the output of the wait sound for the Nth game ends (the processing of the sub-control board S is as follows: output of the wait sound for the Nth game → reception of a command to start the reel spinning standby state for the N+1th game → end of output of the wait sound for the Nth game → start of output of the wait sound for the N+1th game).

<Effect 1> By configuring it in this way, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player will not notice that the audio output has ended, and so a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that allows the player to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred with the gaming machine.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the system is configured to allow the game to proceed on the main control board M instead of stopping the game due to an error, it is possible to temporarily shut off the power to the game machine in response to an error. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which the output of audio can be terminated while the game is progressing by restoring communication between the two parties.

<<<<Sixth embodiment Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of payout processing When the command and the channel are not one-to-one >>> <<Configuration 4>> Next, FIG. 125 will be described in detail. In particular, the flow of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible while game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40 will be described. First, as processing sequence 1, when a winning role (e.g., a push order bell role, etc.) in which game medals are paid out is won in the Nth game and game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M transmits a command to the sub-control board S to start paying out medals from the hopper H40. Based on receiving the command to start paying out medals from the hopper H40, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect (here referred to as a medal payout sound) related to the payout of game medals from the speaker S20. In the sixth embodiment, when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during the execution of the payout process, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is assumed to correspond to not only the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40, but also other commands (here, the command is assumed to be related to the operation of the start lever). Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S ends the output of the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the winning, and by determining that the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning have been paid out from the hopper H40, sends a command related to the end of the payout of game medals from the hopper H40 to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the end of the payout of medals from the hopper H40, and executes the process of ending the output of the medal payout sound.

In step 2, a command to end medal payout from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command to end medal payout from the hopper H40 to the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to end medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, so it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. Note that while the main control board M is counting the number of game medals paid out related to the winning and has finished determining which game medals should be paid out from the hopper H40 as a result of the winning, the processing performed by the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, is continuing.

The main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out related to the winning, and after it has determined that the number of game medals to be paid out from the hopper H40 for that winning has been paid out, it restores communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S has not received a command from the main control board M for completing the medal payout, but the main control board M has determined that the number of game medals to be paid out from the hopper H40 for that winning has been paid out, so processing of the Nth game is complete and a command for the N+1th game is set.

Next, as the N+1 game, the processing proceeds to order 3 and order 4. In order 3, by determining that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of medal insertion to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, and at the same time, the main control board M finishes dispensing medals for the Nth game. Since the command related to this cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting medal insertion has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1 game.

In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on receiving a command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation. Here, as described above, the command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. In other words, while the output of the medal payout sound continues from the Nth game, the sub-control board S receives a command related to starting the standby state for starting reel rotation in the N+1 game, thereby issuing medals in the Nth game. It is configured to end the output of the sound and start outputting the wait sound in the N+1 game.

<Effect 1> By configuring it in this way, for example, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player will not notice that the audio output has ended, and so a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that allows the player to recognize that some kind of problem has occurred with the gaming machine.

<Effect 2> Also, by associating the command with multiple commands such as commands related to the progress of the game, communication between both parties can be restored, making it possible to end the audio output while the game is progressing. It is possible to provide user-friendly gaming machines.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payout process When the command and channel are one-to-one>>><<Configuration 5>> Next, regarding FIG. 126 Explain in detail. In particular, the main control board M and the sub-control board S during a predetermined period (here, until the reels start rotating (acceleration processing is performed)) from when game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40. The flow of processing when communication becomes impossible will be explained. First, as processing order 1, when a winning combination for which game medals are paid out in the Nth game (for example, a push order bell combination, etc.) is won and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the hopper H40. A command related to the start of medal payout is sent to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. In <<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during the execution of the payout process When the command and channel are one-to-one>>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is Only the command related to the start of medal payout is supported, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out related to the winning, and the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning is paid out from the hopper H40. By determining that the game medals have been paid out from the hopper H40, a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40. The system is configured to execute processing for terminating the output of the medal payout sound.

As order 2, a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is sent to the sub-control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M A command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 cannot be sent to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. It should be noted that while the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out in connection with the winning, and while the determination of whether the game medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning are to be paid out from the hopper H40 is completed, the main control board M, which controls the progress of the game, The processing performed by the control board M is progressing.

Next, for the N+1th game, the process proceeds from sequence 3 to sequence 10. In sequence 3, by determining that a game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot transmit the command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to medal insertion reception from the main control board M, it cannot output the medal insertion sound corresponding to the insertion of the medal, but it continues to output the medal dispensing sound without terminating the output of the medal dispensing sound. In other words, since communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 and the command related to medal insertion reception, so it continues to output only the medal dispensing sound.

In order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M sends a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S, but the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is Since the main control board M is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot send a command related to start lever operation to the sub control board S. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, so it cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation, and the medal payout sound is not finished. Continue outputting the payout sound. In other words, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S is unable to send commands related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, commands related to medal input reception, and commands related to the start lever operation. Since such a command cannot be received, the state in which only the medal payout sound is output continues.

In sequence 5, the main control board M sends a command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state, but because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the main control board M cannot send the command to the sub-control board S to start the reel spinning standby state. At this time, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to start the reel spinning standby state from the main control board M, so it cannot output the wait sound, but it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. In other words, because communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off, the sub-control board S cannot receive the command to end medal payout from the hopper H40, the command to accept medal insertion, the command to operate the start lever, or the command to start the reel spinning standby state, so it continues to output only the medal payout sound.

After the main control board M determines that the reel rotation start standby state has started, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to medal input reception, a command related to the start lever operation, and a command related to the start of the standby state for starting reel rotation. However, the main control board M determines that the reels are ready to start rotating based on the start lever operation, and sets a command for the next process of the N+1 game.

In step 6, upon determining that the reels have started spinning due to the start lever operation, the main control board M sends a command to start the reels spinning to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command to start the reels spinning from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start of the reels spinning, but because it cannot receive a command to end the medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process to start the reels spinning has ended, and sets a command for the next process for the N+1th game.

In sequence 7, the process related to starting the reels to spin has ended, and the player is now able to perform the reel stop operation. By determining that the operation to stop the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel, but because it cannot receive a command related to ending the payout of medals from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the operation to stop the first reel has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1th game.

In step 8, by determining that the operation to stop the second reel has been accepted, the main control board M sends a command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. Based on receiving the command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation, but because it cannot receive a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next process for the N+1th game.

In order 9, by determining that the third reel stop operation has been accepted, the main control board M transmits a command related to accepting the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation based on receiving the command related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, and also outputs a sound effect related to receiving the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received from , the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process for the Nth game. Note that the next process for the N+1 game is a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in order to provide a concise explanation, but during this time the main control board M sends the command to the sub control board S as follows: For example, it is also possible to configure the system to transmit a command related to stopping the stop display symbol or a command related to winning a prize.

As order 10, when it is determined that a winning combination (for example, a push order bell combination, etc.) in which game medals are paid out in the N+1 game is won, and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the system from the hopper H40. A command related to the start of paying out game medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on receiving a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40. At this time, the medal payout sound output from the speaker S20 will be output from the speaker S20 on the same channel as the medal payout sound output in the Nth game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the start of medal payout from the hopper H40 in the N+1st game from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, the sub-control board S transmits the command to the hopper H40 in the N+1st game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start of medal payout from H40, the output of the medal payout sound is started, while the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game is finished (as a process of the sub control board S, the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game is Output of medal payout sound → Receive command to start medal payout from hopper H40 for N+1 game → End output of medal payout sound for N+game → Start output of medal payout sound for N+1 game Become).

<Effect 1> With this configuration, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while executing a process that involves outputting audio, for example, the game It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which a player can recognize that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Effect 2> In addition, since the game is not stopped as an error but the game can continue to progress on the main control board M, communication between the two sides is restored without temporarily cutting off power to the game machine to deal with an error, providing a user-friendly game machine in which sound output can be terminated while the game is progressing.

<<Configuration related to the number of entries applicable to this example>> Here, the configuration regarding the number of entries for internal lottery applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the following configuration is applicable to all embodiments in this example.

First, we will use Figure 127 to explain in detail the configuration related to the numbers that can be applied to this example.

<When BB is not activated> The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has 1 type BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and 2 type BB (sometimes referred to as MB), and as roles related to 1 type BB (a role in which a symbol combination in which 1 type BB is activated after winning can be displayed as a stop symbol, sometimes referred to as a 1 type BB role), it has "1 type BB alone" (a condition device in which the 1 type BB role is won alone) and "1 type BB + cherry" (a condition device in which the 1 type BB role and cherry are won in combination). In addition, as roles related to 2 type BB (a role in which a symbol combination in which 2 type BB is activated after winning can be displayed as a stop symbol, sometimes referred to as a 2 type BB role), it has "2 type BB alone" (a condition device in which the 2 type BB role is won alone) and "2 type BB + cherry" (a condition device in which the 2 type BB role and cherry are won in combination).

In addition, there are four types of winning combinations (combinations with symbol combinations that pay out game medals when stopped and displayed): Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, and Cherry. (10400/65536 won) is sometimes called the main minor prize.

``When BB is not in operation'' shown at the top of the figure is a table regarding the numbers set in a state in which type 1 BB and type 2 BB are not in operation (sometimes referred to as a normal gaming state, etc.). The "number of coins inserted" is the number of coins inserted when it is assumed that the game is executed with 3 coins bet in order to calculate various expected values described later, and is the number of coins inserted when the 1st type BB is in operation and the 2nd type BB is in operation. Although the number is 2, the "number of inputs" is 3. In addition, the "number of payouts" is the number of game medals that will be paid out when the "number of inputs" is 3. For example, in a game when type 1 BB is activated, a bet of 2 medals will result in a payout of 15 medals. However, since the "number of inputs" is assumed to be 3, the "number of payouts" is also "15 x 3 ÷ 2 = 22.5".

The "number of pieces" is the number of pieces that is determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and the denominator is 65536. Also, the "probability" is the probability that the condition device is determined by an internal lottery.

The "number of games" is the number of games required to calculate the various expected values described later. For "1 type BB alone", "1 type BB + Cherry", "2 types BB alone", and "2 types BB + Cherry", the "number of games" is 1 because they are examples of the case where a symbol combination related to 1 type BB or 2 types BB is stopped and displayed in a game where 1 type BB or 2 types BB is won. In addition, "1 type combined" is an example of the case where 1 type BB is executed (consumed) after a symbol combination that activates 1 type BB is stopped and displayed after winning "1 type BB alone" or "1 type BB + Cherry", so the "number of games" is 24. In addition, "2 types combined" is an example of the case where 2 type BB is executed (consumed) after a symbol combination that activates 2 type BB is stopped and displayed after winning "2 types BB alone" or "2 types BB + Cherry", so the "number of games" is 8.

The "expected number of coins inserted" is the expected value of the number of coins inserted per game in consideration of the probability determined by internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "number of coins inserted x probability x number of games." In addition, the "expected number of payouts" is the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game, taking into account the probability determined by internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "number of payouts x probability x number of games". There is.

Note that the configuration in the same figure may be applied to the case where the game is played as follows.

<Game Method 1> This is a game method in which the game is executed in a game method that is most profitable for the player. In a game in which a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry is won, and not a push order role such as a push order bell, the game is executed in a stop operation mode (the operation mode of the stop button, including the order in which the stop button is pressed, the timing of the stop button operation, etc.) that stops and displays (wins) a symbol combination that will result in the payout of game medals. In a game in which a push order role such as a push order bell is won (not shown in the figure, but it may be configured to have a push order role), the game is executed in a stop operation mode that will result in the greatest number of medals being paid out.

<Game method 2> In a game in which a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry that is not a push order combination such as a push order bell is won, a stop operation mode (to cause a prize win) to stop display (make a prize win) a symbol combination for which a game medal is paid out is used. The game is executed according to the operation mode of the stop button, such as the order in which the stop button is pressed, the timing of the stop button operation, etc. In addition, push order roles such as push order bells (
Although not shown in the figure, in a game in which a winning game is won (which may be configured to have a push order combination), a random stop operation mode (stop button push order, Run the game with random stop button operation timing. Note that "random" means, for example, when it comes to the order in which the stop button is pressed, all 6 kinds of press orders are selected at an equal rate, and when it comes to the stop timing, all 20 frames of stop operation timing are selected at an equal rate. It is to be.

"Inside" refers to a game after winning either "1st type BB alone", "1st type BB + cherry", "2nd type BB alone", or "2nd type BB + cherry", and in which the symbol combinations that activate 1st type BB or 2nd type BB, as well as the symbol combinations related to bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays are not displayed (games in which the small prize or replay was not won while the winning of 1st type BB or 2nd type BB was carried over). In the figure, a game in which the small prize or replay was not won while the winning of 1st type BB or 2nd type BB was carried over was played at 290/65536, the "input number expectation value" was approximately 0.013275146, and the "payout number expectation value" was 0.

<When BB 1 is in operation> The second row from the top of the figure shows "When BB 1 is in operation" which is a table regarding the number of bets when BB 1 is in operation. When BB 1 is in operation, the specified number is two, and it is configured to win either bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry without winning a miss. In addition, the "payout number" for all of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry is 15, making bell the most likely to win (the most likely to be determined). In addition, one or more (or all) of the "placed numbers" that will win watermelon, symbol, and cherry may be configured to be the same as when BB is not in operation. As mentioned above, in games when BB 1 is in operation, 15 coins are paid out for a bet of two coins in all games, so the expected payout number when the specified number is three coins (the "payout number" for "total of 1 type" when BB is not in operation) is 22.5.

<2-kind BB in operation> "2-kind BB in operation" shown at the bottom of the figure is a table regarding the number of coins placed when 2-kind BB is in operation. When 2-kind BB is in operation, the specified number is 2 coins, and when the game is executed in a specified stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in the push order of "left → center → right"), only the symbol combination related to bells is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, the "number of coins paid out" when the symbol combination related to bells is displayed in a stopped state is 15. As mentioned above, in games when 2-kind BB is in operation, 15 coins are paid out for a bet of 2 coins in all games, so the expected number of coins paid out when the specified number is 3 coins (the "number of coins paid out" of "2-kind combined" when "BB is not in operation") is 22.5.

<While the BB is not operating> The “BB not operating” will be explained in detail again. "No replay" means four types of winning combinations: Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, and Cherry. "Replay included" means five types of winning combinations: Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, Cherry, and Replay. It shows. The "win OUT" in "no replay" is the sum of the expected number of payouts of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, and is approximately 1.237258911. In addition, the "winning and winning ball rate" in "no replay" is the "value that sums up the expected value of the number of payouts (wins OUT)" and "the value that adds up the expected value of the number of inserted bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries." It is the value obtained by multiplying the divided value by 100, that is, the ball payout rate that is the sum of the winning combinations, and is approximately 222.8%.

The "winning OUT" when "replay is included" is the sum of the expected payout values of bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays, and is approximately 1.649246216. Note that even if a symbol combination related to replay is displayed as a stop, game medals are not actually paid out, but if a game is played with a bet of three medals and a symbol combination related to replay is displayed as a stop, an automatic bet of three medals is executed, so the "payout number" related to replay is 3. Also, the "winning ball payout rate" when "replay is included" is the value obtained by dividing the "sum of the expected payout values (winning OUT)" by the "sum of the expected number of inserts of bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays" and multiplying the result by 100, i.e., the payout rate of winning roles and replays, which is approximately 170.5%.

The "1 type total ball rate" is the value obtained by dividing the expected value of the number of payouts for the "1 type total" by the expected value of the number of balls put in, multiplied by 100, and is 750.0%. Further, the "total ball rate of 2 types" is the value obtained by dividing the expected value of the number of payouts of the ``total of 2 types'' by the expected value of the number of inputs, multiplied by 100, and is 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values> Here, when the above-mentioned values are compared, the following relationships are obtained. (1) "Expected number of payouts" for "2 types combined" < "Expected number of payouts" for "No replay" (Win OUT) (2) "Expected number of payouts" for "2 types combined" < "Expected number of payouts" for "Re-play included" (Win OUT) (3) Expected number of payouts for "2 types combined" < "Expected number of payouts" for main minor role (4) "Internal medium" "Expected number of inputs" < "Expected number of inputs" of the main minor role (5) "Expected number of inputs" of "Internal Medium" < "Expected number of inputs" of "Replay"

In addition, when the Type 2 BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can win is smaller than when the Type 1 BB is activated, and the Type 1 BB is configured not to be won while the Type 2 BB is activated, which raises concerns that the player's expectations for the game will be diminished. Therefore, by designing the "expected number of payouts" of the "2 types combined" to be less than the "expected number of payouts" of the combined "no replay" as in (1) above, the "expected number of payouts" of minor roles can be made higher than when the Type 2 BB is activated, and even when the Type 2 BB is activated, the player is more likely to feel that the BB is not activated (bonus is not activated) rather than that the BB is activated (bonus is activated), allowing the player to play without being aware that they are in a special state.

In addition, when Type 2 BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can win is fewer than when Type 1 BB is activated, and Type 1 BB is configured not to be won while Type 2 BB is activated, which raises concerns that the player's expectations for the game will be diminished. Therefore, by designing it so that the "expected number of payouts" of "Type 2 combined" is less than the "expected number of payouts" of the combined "including replays" as in (2) above, it is possible to make the "expected number of payouts" of minor roles higher than when Type 2 BB is activated, and it becomes easier for the player to feel that the BB is not activated (bonus is not activated) even when Type 2 BB is activated, rather than that the BB is activated (bonus is activated), allowing the player to play without being aware that they are in a special state.

In addition, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can earn is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the system is configured so that the 1st type BB cannot be won while the 2nd type BB is activated. As a result, there is a concern that players' expectations for the game will fade. Therefore, as mentioned in (3) above, by designing the "expected number of payouts" of "2 types total" < "expected number of payouts" of the main small role, the main small role The "expected number of payouts" of the winning combination can be increased, and even when the 2nd type BB is in operation, it is possible to make it possible to make the BB inactive (bonus inactive) instead of BB in action (bonus in action). It becomes easier for the player to feel the situation, and the player can play the game without being conscious of the special state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine having one or more of the above configurations (1) to (3), when the 2nd type BB is in operation, the prescribed number is 2 coins, the average number of coins paid out per game is 2 coins, etc. It may be configured to lower the ball output rate (total ball rate of the two types) during the two type BB operation. With such a configuration, the effects of having the configurations (1) to (3) described above are further enhanced.

In addition, if a player with low skill, such as a player who is unable to hit the numbers, plays in "Inside Medium", the symbol combinations related to the winning 1st type BB or 2nd type BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill is lowered. There is a concern that low-level players will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, as in (4) above, by designing the "expected number of inputs" of "internal medium" < "expected number of inputs of the main minor role", even in "internal medium", the main minor role It is possible to increase the ratio of games in which a bell is won, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which disadvantages are unlikely to occur even when a player with low skill plays the game.

In addition, if a player with low skill, such as a player who is unable to hit the target, plays in "Inside Medium", the symbol combinations related to the winning 1st type BB or 2nd type BB cannot be stopped and displayed, and the skill is lowered. There is a concern that low-level players will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, as in (5) above, by designing so that the "expected number of inputs" of "internal medium" < the "expected value of the number of inputs" of "replay", even in "internal medium" It is possible to increase the ratio of games in which a player wins, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which disadvantages are unlikely to occur even when a player with low skill plays the game.

<<<<Seventh embodiment: Gate technology>>> Next, as the seventh embodiment, we will explain the gate mechanism of the main board case M40 that stores the main control board M installed inside the gaming machine (cabinet). Note that in the seventh embodiment, the entrance part where the resin material (plastic) flows in when molding the main board case M40 is called the gate.

<<Molding of the main board case>> As described above, the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment is made of a resin material (plastic). The main board case M40 is generally molded by an injection molding method in which the resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate into a metal mold (hereinafter referred to as a mold) for forming a specific, determined shape, and a molded product is obtained through a cooling and solidifying process. The molding method of the main board case M40 is not limited to the injection molding method, but may be any molding method that pours the resin material (plastic) from the gate and molds it, such as a blow molding method in which a cylindrical plastic hollow body is sandwiched between molds, air is blown into it, and the molded product is obtained through a cooling and solidifying process. After the resin material (plastic) is injected, the gate is cut, and the cut portion has a slight recess compared to a flat surface without a gate.

<<Gate Method>> When a resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate in the injection molding method, various restrictions are placed on the gate. Here, examples of constraints include the inflow speed of the resin material (plastic), the temperature of the resin material (plastic), and the size and shape of the gate portion M80. In other words, by determining the optimal conditions (inflow speed, temperature, gate size and shape) according to the size of the main board case M40 to be molded, and going through the molding process according to those conditions, high-quality molding can be achieved. This means that you can obtain goods.

Methods for injection injection of resin materials (plastic) can be roughly divided into restriction gates, which limit the inflow of resin materials (plastic) by minimizing the size of the gate, and methods that restrict the inflow of resin materials (plastic) directly without going through a gate. There is an unrestricted gate for pouring plastic). In the various case members used in gaming machines, it is possible to reduce the size of the gate to some extent from the perspective of size, etc., and limiting gates are sometimes used in consideration of the aesthetic appearance of the finished product. However, in the seventh embodiment, as long as the main board case M40 has a gate, there is no problem in any method for injecting the resin material (plastic).

<<Gate Type>> In the case where the resin material (plastic) is injected from the gate by the restriction gate, there are various types of gates with various characteristics. Examples include a side gate type in which the resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate arranged on the side of the molded product, a pin gate type in which multiple molded products are molded from one mold, and a submarine gate type in which the resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate arranged in a tunnel shape in the mold. The main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment may be molded using any of these gate types.

The main board case M40 described as the seventh embodiment is molded as described above, and the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

<<Configuration of the main board case M40>> First, the configuration of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a front view of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment. As described above, the main board case M40 is molded from a resin material (plastic) as a raw material. The surface of the main board case M40 (for example, the front surface that can be seen by players and game center managers when the front door DU is opened) is pasted with, for example, a model seal, which is a seal member that lists the model information of the game machine, and other seal members (not shown) that contain information related to the game machine, such as a crimping record sheet that records the anti-theft measures taken at the production factory. In addition, it has a gate portion M80 that includes a gate mark (state after the gate is cut) where the resin material (plastic) was injected. Note that the shape of the surface of the main board case M40 in FIG. 128 is one example and is not limited to this. For example, it may be a square, rectangular, or trapezoidal shape.

<<Diagram of accommodating main control board M>> Next, Figure 129 is a front view of the main control board M accommodated in the main board case M40. When accommodating the main control board M in the main board case M40, it is common to accommodate the main control board M by sandwiching it between the main board case M40 and other case members (not shown), and furthermore, the main board case M40 and the other case members are integrated by engaging screws (screws) so that the main control board M is fixed inside the main board case M40.

The main control board M is equipped with a microprocessor CPUMC as an IC element with CPU functions, other IC elements IC01-IC05 that do not have CPU functions, resistors R1-R6, capacitors C01-C02, and connectors CN01-CN04. The main control board M is also equipped with a setting display LEDM90 that can display setting values, and a performance display device SH, described below, in which four-digit segments are arranged in a horizontal row. Note that the main control board M may also be equipped with other electronic components such as diodes and LEDs, but these are not shown in the figure.

<<Gate arrangement of main board case M40>> The main board case M40 is arranged to cover the main control board M (the dotted line area in Figure 129 corresponds to the main board case M40), and since the main board case M40 is made from plastic, it is configured so that the components mounted on the main control board M can be seen through the main board case M40.

As described above, the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment is configured to have a gate portion M80 on its surface. These gate portions M80 are preferably arranged in positions that do not impede the visibility of the components arranged on the main control board M. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, one example is a pattern in which the gate portions M80 are arranged in positions that do not impede the visibility of the model seal, performance display device SH, setting display LEDM90, etc., which can be seen by the amusement facility manager or the National Police Agency through the main board case M40. More specifically, the gate portions M80 are not arranged at positions where the model seal, performance display device SH, and setting display LEDM90 are projected onto the main board case M40 in a direction perpendicular to the main control board M.

<Effect> By positioning the gate portion M80 in this manner, it is possible to ensure that the gate portion M80 does not impede visibility when the player's manager checks information related to the gaming machine from the performance display device SH or the setting display LEDM90. In addition, by configuring the gate portion M80 so that it is not positioned in a position that overlaps with various sealing members such as model seals, it is possible to make it difficult for the sealing members to peel off.

Further, it is preferable that the gate part M80 is not arranged at a position where the CPUMC is projected onto the main board case M40 in a direction perpendicular to the main control board M (the gate part M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). be. Although the details will be described later, in the main board case M40, the gate part M80 is a fragile part, so there is a possibility that a so-called tampering action may be performed on the main control board M inside the main board case M40 through the gate part M80. There is a possibility that it will be damaged. Therefore, the CPUMC should be configured so that the gate part M80 is not arranged at the position projected onto the main board case M40 in the vertical direction with respect to the main control board M (the gate part M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). As a result, it has a main control chip C that controls the operation of the game machine, and a built-in ROMC 110 that stores programs related to the operation control of the game machine, and it is possible to keep the gate part M80 away from the CPUMC that affects the result of the game. This makes it possible to prevent so-called fraudulent activities such as program tampering through the gate section M80.

In addition, when current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) arranged on the main control board M, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such IC elements are installed near the CPUMC, there is a risk that the noise generated from the IC elements may adversely affect the operation of the CPUMC to some extent, so it is preferable not to place IC elements (IC01 to IC15) etc. near the CPUMC.

In the seventh embodiment, no IC element is arranged near the CPUMC on the main control board M. Specifically, in any IC element, within the vicinity of the CPUMC (in this case, from the outer periphery of the CPUMC package body to W1, which is the length of the short side of the upper surface of the rectangular package body) (dotted line in FIG. Note that W1 has a length equal to or longer than the length of one resistor (R1 to R6) (the length when mounted).

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, all of the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board M are arranged at a distance of W1 or more from the CPUMC. With this configuration, even if noise is generated from the IC element, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise will have an adverse effect on the operation of the CPUMC.

<<Structure of Gate Section M80>> Next, the structure of the gate section M80 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment and a side view of the main board case M40 viewed from the direction of the side surface A. As explained in FIG. 128, the main board case M40 has a gate part M80 on the surface (for example, the surface that can be seen by players, game hall managers, etc. when the front door DU is opened). , the gate portion M80 has a slight depression compared to a portion of the surface other than the gate portion M80.

In the side view of the main board case M40 in FIG. 130, the main board case A side (the above-mentioned surface) has a gate part M80, and the main board case B side does not have a gate part. Here, the A side of the main board case will be explained in detail. The main board case A surface is, for example, the surface close to the front door DU direction from the center of the short axis in the side view of the main board case M40 in FIG. 130, and the main board case B surface is based on the center of the short axis. This refers to the surface close to the main control board M direction. In other words, the main board case surface A is the surface closer to the front door DU, and similarly, the main board case B surface is the surface closer to the main control board M. In other words, the main control board M is provided on the side of the main board case B from the center of the short axis.

FIG. 131 shows details of the structure of the gate portion M80. Note that the detailed structure of the gate portion M80 included in the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment may be configured as described in detail below.

<<Structural Pattern 1 of Gate Portion M80>> First, as a structural pattern of the first gate portion M80, the main board case B surface is configured to be flat. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 131, the gate portion M80 is composed of one convex portion and two concave portions, and is a surface extending horizontally from the main board case A surface (portion other than the gate portion M80). On the other hand, it is a distance A from the tip of the convex portion and a distance B from the tip of the concave portion. At this time, it is preferable that the relationship between A and B is A<B. It should be noted that the one convex portion constituting the gate portion M80 is a gate mark after the gate has been cut. Alternatively, it may be designed so that A=0.

<Effect 1> Since the convex part of the gate part M80 is separated by the distance A from the main board case A side, for example, when removing the main board case M40 from the gaming machine, the person checking the part related to the gate part M80 can This makes it possible to prevent accidents such as the main board case M40 falling due to slipping when holding the main board case M40.

<Effect 2> In addition, because the recess of the gate portion M80 is a distance B away from the main board case A surface, it is possible for the resin (plastic) to flow smoothly when molding the main board case M40.

<Effect 3> In addition, because the main board case B surface directly below the gate portion M80 on the main board case A surface is flat, when the main control board M is viewed through the main board case M40, it is possible to view the main control board M without reducing visibility due to light refraction, even when viewing from the surface related to the gate portion M80.

<<Structural pattern 2 of gate portion M80>> Next, the second structural pattern of gate portion M80 is configured such that main board case B is recessed (bulging out to the outside of main board case M40). . The gate part M80 in the lower part of the figure is composed of one convex part and two concave parts on the main board case A side, and the main board case A side (the part other than the gate part M80) is extended in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, it is similar to the first pattern that it is separated from the main board case surface A (flat surface) by a distance A from the tip of the convex portion and a distance B from the tip of the concave portion.

The main board case B side is recessed, and the distance from the deepest part of the recess (the part that bulges outward the most) to the protrusion on the main board case A side is C, and the distance from the tip of the recess on the main board case B side to the surface of the main board case B side (parts other than the gate part M80) extended horizontally is D. It is preferable that the relationship between C and D is D<C. In the seventh embodiment, the distance from the surface of the main board case A side (parts other than the gate part M80) extended horizontally to the surface of the main board case B side (parts other than the gate part M80) is also C, but this is not limited to this. For example, the distance from the surface of the main board case A side (parts other than the gate part M80) extended horizontally to the surface of the main board case B side (parts other than the gate part M80) extended horizontally is C', and C<C', C>C', or C≒C' may be used.

<Effect> In this way, the tip of the recess on the main board case B surface is separated by the distance D from the horizontally extended surface of the main board case B surface (portion other than the gate part M80), so that, for example, the main board It becomes possible to compensate for the decrease in the strength of the member related to the gate portion M80 on the case A side. In other words, the gate portion M80 is recessed compared to a flat surface, and if a force that attempts to destroy the main board case M40 is applied, the gate portion M80 will be thinned by the distance of the recess (for example, the distance B of the structural pattern 1). Therefore, the main board case A surface (portion other than the gate portion M80) is configured to be prevented from being easily destroyed compared to a horizontally extended surface. In this way, the main board case B side is recessed by a predetermined distance even from the surface related to the gate part M80, so that the material strength is equivalent to that of the main board case A side other than the gate part M80. It is possible to keep it.

As above, in the seventh embodiment, the arrangement and configuration of the gate part M80 in the main board case M40 have been explained in detail. It is also possible to apply the present invention to other members), and it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the gate portion M80 in the main board case M40 described above.

<<<<<Eighth embodiment: Power outage and sensor detection>>>> Next, as the eighth embodiment, we will explain the relationship between the processing at the time of power outage and the processing related to detection of the passage of a game medal (in the eighth embodiment, the credit addition processing of the game medal related to the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, the shoot sensor D40s, the first payout sensor H1, and the second payout sensor H2) when a power outage occurs in any of the following states: before the sensors related to detection of a game medal installed inside the gaming machine (for example, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, the shoot sensor D40s, the first payout sensor H1, and the second payout sensor H2) detect the passage of a game medal and the sensor is in an off state, or after detecting a notification of a game medal and the sensor is in an off->on state, or even after a game medal has passed through the sensor's detection area and the sensor is in an on->off state.

<<<<Relationship between power-off processing and medal credit addition processing>>> First, a medal inserted through the medal insertion port D170 passes through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (off → on → off) in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the medal, and the medal flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without generating an error.

The timing at which credits are added to game medals is as detailed in the third embodiment. For example, based on the description in step S1226-8, the first input sensor D20s changes from on to off, and the second input sensor D30s changes from on to off. When the state changes from off to on, the inserted game medals can be detected as bet medals and added to the credits; A game medal inserted at the timing when the second input sensor D30s is turned on or off may be detected as a bet medal, and may be added to the credit. In the eighth embodiment described in detail below, the timing at which credits are added to game medals is when the first input sensor D20s changes from on to off and the second input sensor D30s changes from off to on. configured to be possible. As mentioned above, in this example, "the occurrence of a power outage" means that the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and "detecting a power outage" means that the gaming machine detects a power outage. It is to detect the occurrence.

The time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by a program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the capacitor installed. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. Below, the parts expressed as time are this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the example range occurs as a comparison of time values, it will not deviate from the design value. It means that it is not. In addition, the same applies to times other than the time from when a power outage occurs to when a power outage is detected, and the various times exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H, etc. applicable to the configuration.

In order to define the relationship between power outage processing and game medal credit addition processing, the time from when a power outage occurs until the power outage is detected is T1, and the input reception sensor D10s is set from OFF → ON to the second input sensor. The time from D30s on to off is T2, and the time from first input sensor D20s off to on to second input sensor D30s on to on is T3. The relationship between T1, T2, and T3 that is applicable to this example will be described in detail below. Although details will be described later, it should be noted that the starting point of T2 is just an example.

<<Action pattern 1 of power-off processing and medal credit addition processing>> Figure 133 is an example of an action pattern of power-off processing and medal credit addition processing reflected along with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to insertion that this configuration has are the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the detection status of the medals at these sensors is illustrated. Note that in this action pattern, the timing at which various events occur is (a1) to (a8), and progresses from (a1) to (a8) as time passes.

In a situation where power is being supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned from off to on at timing (a1). Furthermore, both the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off. Next, at timing (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (a3), a power outage occurs. Next, at timing (a4), the first input sensor D20s is turned from off to on.

Next, at the timing of (a5), the second input sensor D30s turns from off to on (the first input sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing of (a6), the first input sensor D20s turns from on to off (the second input sensor D30s remains on), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing of (a7), the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off. Next, at the timing of (a8), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. That is, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs after a gaming medal passes through the input acceptance sensor D10s and the input acceptance sensor D10s turns from on to off, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process after the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off at the timing of (a7), so that the credit addition process can be executed normally. In the eighth embodiment, the interrupt process for detecting a power outage is configured to execute the power outage process in the same interrupt process, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute the power outage detection and power outage process in separate interrupts.

In addition, in the figure, the relationship between the aforementioned periods T1, T2, and T3 is T3<T1<T2. By making T3<T1, it is possible to execute the power-off process after executing the credit addition process. Also, the relationships of T1<T2 and T3<T2 are clear based on the flow-down process of the gaming medals.

<Effect> In this way, even if the power is cut off while the game medals are flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after passing the input reception sensor D10s), the credit addition process for the game medals is executed. By configuring the system to perform power-off processing later, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals, and the game medals are inserted into the game machine (not returned) because the blocker is on. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added despite the player's credit being added.

The configuration regarding the insertion sensor and power interruption may be as follows (1-1) to (1-3) or (2-1) to (2-3). (1-1) A power interruption occurs after the insertion acceptance sensor D10s changes from off to on (timing (a3) in FIG. 133). (1-2) The gaming machine detects the power interruption and executes the power interruption process before the first insertion sensor D20s changes from off to on (timing between (a3) and (a4) in FIG. 133). (1-3) The blocker changes from on to off, so that the gaming medal can be returned without executing the credit addition process. (2-1) A power interruption occurs after the insertion acceptance sensor D10s changes from off to on (timing (a3) in FIG. 133). (2-2) The gaming machine detects the power interruption and executes the power interruption process before the second insertion sensor D30s changes from off to on (timing between (a4) and (a5) in FIG. 133). (2-3) By turning the blocker from on to off, the game medals can be returned without executing the credit addition process.

<<Action pattern 2 of power-off processing and medal credit addition processing>> Figure 134 is an example of an action pattern of power-off processing and medal credit addition processing reflected along with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to insertion that this configuration has are the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the detection status of the medals at these sensors is illustrated. In this action pattern, the timing at which various events occur is represented as (b1) to (b8), and progresses from (b1) to (b8) as time passes.

When power is being supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, the coin insertion reception sensor D10s changes from off to on at timing (b1). Also, the first coin insertion sensor D20s and the second coin insertion sensor D30s are both off. Next, at timing (b2), the coin insertion reception sensor D10s changes from on to off. Next, at timing (b3), the first coin insertion sensor D20s changes from off to on. Next, at timing (a4), a power outage occurs.

Next, at the timing of (b5), the second insertion sensor D30s changes from OFF to ON (the first insertion sensor D20s remains ON). Next, at the timing of (b6), the first insertion sensor D20s changes from ON to OFF (the second insertion sensor D30s remains ON), and the credit addition process is executed. Next, at the timing of (b7), the second insertion sensor D30s changes from ON to OFF. Next, at the timing of (a8), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. That is, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs after the gaming medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s and the first insertion sensor D20s changes from OFF to ON, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process after the second insertion sensor D30s changes from ON to OFF at the timing of (b7), so that the credit addition process can be executed normally.

In addition, in the figure, the relationship between the aforementioned periods T1, T2, and T3 is T3<T1<T2. Note that the configuration may be such that T1<T3<T2 holds. In either configuration, as shown in the figure, even if a power outage occurs after the first input sensor D20s turns from off to on at timing (b3), the power outage processing can be executed after the credit addition processing is completed.

<Effect> In this way, even if a power outage occurs while a gaming medal is flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after the first insertion sensor D20s changes from OFF to ON), the power outage processing is performed after the credit addition processing of the gaming medal is executed, so that the inserted gaming medal can be reliably added to the credits, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added even though the gaming medal was inserted inside the gaming machine (and not returned) because the blocker is ON.

<<Variations in the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of game medals>> Furthermore, as a variation in the operation pattern of the power-off processing and the credit addition processing of game medals, for example, if the timing of the occurrence of a power outage is such that the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the power-off processing may be executed after the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is off, in other words, the power-off processing may be executed after the credit addition processing is executed.

<Effect> Even if a power outage occurs while inserting game medals, the inserted game medals are reliably added to the credits by performing power outage processing after the credit addition process for the game medals is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player in which credits are not added even though game medals are inserted into the game machine.

Also, as a modified example of the action pattern of the power-off process and the credit addition process of the gaming medal, it is possible to configure the timing of detecting the power-off to be different. For example, the timing of the power-off occurrence is the same as <<Action pattern 1 of the power-off process and the credit addition process of the gaming medal>>, and the timing of detecting the power-off is the timing when the gaming medal passes the insertion reception sensor D10s and before it reaches the first insertion sensor D20s. Based on the occurrence timing of various events based on pattern 1, as a processing flow, under a situation where power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, at the timing of (a1), the insertion reception sensor D10s turns from off to on. Also, both the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off. Next, at the timing of (a2), the insertion reception sensor D10s turns from on to off. Next, at the timing of (a3), a power-off occurs. Next, at the timing of (a4), the gaming machine detects the power-off, the power-off process is executed, and then the blocker turns off. By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs immediately after an inserted gaming medal passes through the insertion reception sensor D10s, the power outage processing can be executed before the gaming medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s, so the credit addition processing is not executed and the blocker is turned off, so the gaming medal is returned from the return port, preventing an event that would cause a disadvantage to the player.

<Effect> In this way, by executing the power-off processing before the game medals reach the first input sensor D20s, if the credit addition process related to the inserted game medals is not executed due to the occurrence of a power-off. The game machine can be configured to return the game medals to the player, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player where the game medals are inserted into the gaming machine but credits are not added. It becomes possible.

In the eighth embodiment, T2 is defined as "the time from when the insertion reception sensor D10s goes from OFF to ON until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to OFF", but this is not limited to this. T2 may be defined as "the time from when the game medal inserted through the medal insertion port becomes invisible to the player until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to OFF", or T2 may be defined as "the time from when half of the game medal inserted through the medal insertion port becomes invisible to the player until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to OFF", or T2 may be defined as "the time from when part of the game medal inserted through the medal insertion port becomes invisible to the player until the second insertion sensor D30s goes from ON to OFF".

<<<Relationship between processing during power outage and counting processing by the game medal input monitoring counter>>> Next, we will discuss the timing when power is not being supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of a power outage. The relationship between the timing and the counting process by the input monitoring counter will be explained. Referring to FIG. 135, in the path of the game medals in the medal selector DS, the medal flow path member (referred to as the chute body in the third embodiment) after passing through the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. ). In FIG. 135, a chute sensor D40s is provided downstream of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. Similarly, this is a sensor that detects whether or not medals are being inserted normally, and in particular can detect errors that occur after the credit addition process has already been executed (e.g., inserted medal retention error, inserted medal backflow error, etc.) It is configured like this.

The timing at which the game medal input monitoring counter performs the counting process is as described in detail in the third embodiment. For example, the main control board M may input the game medals at the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off. The monitoring counter performs addition processing from 0 to 1. Then, when the game medals flow down the path in the medal selector DS and, for example, the shoot sensor D40s is turned on from off, the input monitoring counter performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0. Note that the timing at which the game medal addition (subtraction) processing by the input monitoring counter is performed is not limited to this. As described below, for example, when the first input sensor turns from off to on, the input monitoring counter performs an addition process from 0 to 1, and at the timing when the chute sensor D40s changes from on to off. Any configuration may be used as long as it can monitor whether or not the game medals have passed normally, such as a configuration in which the input monitoring counter performs a subtraction process from 1 to 0. Furthermore, instead of counting game medals by the input monitoring counter in the order of addition → subtraction, it may be performed in the order of subtraction → addition (0 → -1, then -1 → 0). Note that an example of a configuration in which it is determined that an error has occurred by the input monitoring counter is that an error has occurred when the counter value C of the input monitoring counter becomes "C<-3 or C<3". It may be configured to determine that there is.

To define the relationship between the power-off process and the counting process by the medal insertion monitoring counter, the time from when the power-off occurs until the power-off is detected is T4, and the time from when the second insertion sensor D30s turns on → off until the shoot sensor D40s turns off → on is T5, and the relationship between T4 and T5 is described in detail below. The time from when the power-off occurs until the power-off is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the gaming machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the capacitor to be installed. The time from when the power-off occurs until the power-off is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (e.g., room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a rare possibility that an event that deviates greatly from the design value may occur, under basic conditions, 90% or more of the time is set to fall within the range of the design value. In the following, the time is expressed as this design value (design time), and even if an event occurs that deviates from the range shown as an example of a comparison of time values, it does not deviate from the design value. The same applies to other times besides the time from when a power outage occurs to when the power outage is detected, and it can be applied to the various configurations illustrated in this example, such as the time it takes for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H.

<<Operation pattern 1 of processing when power is turned off and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>> Figure 136 is an example of an operation pattern of processing when power is turned off and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter, reflected along with the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to insertion shown in the figure are the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of a medal (on or off). The insertion monitoring counter is also configured to perform addition and subtraction processing at specified timing (in this operation pattern, addition processing is performed when the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and subtraction processing is performed when the shoot sensor D40s goes from off to on). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (c1) to (c6), and the flow of the process is as follows: when power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on, a power outage occurs at the timing of (c1) (the timings of the various sensors at this time are the first insertion sensor D20s on, the second insertion sensor D30s off, and the shoot sensor D40s off). Next, at the timing of (c2), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from off to on. Next, at the timing of (c3), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and the addition process of the game medals is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter goes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first insertion sensor D20s goes from on to off at the timing between (c2) and (c3). Next, at the timing of (c4), the shot sensor D40s turns from off to on, the medal subtraction process is executed by the medal insertion monitoring counter, and the medal insertion monitoring counter value turns from 1 to 0.

Next, at timing (c5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned from on to off. Next, at timing (c6), the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed. In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of a power outage are executed in the same interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the power-off processing using separate interrupt processing. In addition, in the same figure, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is subtracted at the timing (c4), but the input monitoring counter is subtracted at the timing (C5) (the timing when the chute sensor turns from on to off). It may be configured to perform subtraction processing of the counter value.

Thus, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs before the gaming medal reaches the second insertion sensor D30s, the gaming machine detects the power outage and executes the power outage processing after the shoot sensor D40s turns from on to off at timing (c5), so the credit addition process and the increment/decrement process of the insertion monitoring counter can be executed normally.

In addition, in the figure, the relationship between the aforementioned periods T4 and T5 is T4>T5. By configuring in this way, even if a power outage occurs just before the addition process of the insertion monitoring counter is executed (the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is off), the power outage processing can be configured to be executed after the addition process and subtraction process by the insertion monitoring counter of the game medal is completed.

<Effect> By performing power-off processing after the medal insertion monitoring counter has executed the counting process (0→1→0), it becomes possible for the medal insertion monitoring counter to properly execute the medal counting process based on detection by various sensors, and it becomes possible to properly detect errors related to the chute sensor D40s.

<<Action Pattern 2 of Processing at Power-Off and Counting by the Medal Insertion Monitoring Counter>> FIG. 137 is an example of an action pattern of processing at power-off and counting by the medal insertion monitoring counter, reflected along with the timing chart of each sensor. In this action pattern, the timing of detecting the power-off is made different from that of action pattern 1. The sensors here are the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected the passage of a medal (on or off). In addition, the insertion monitoring counter performs addition and subtraction processing at a specified timing (in this action pattern, the addition processing is performed when the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and the subtraction processing is performed when the shoot sensor D40s goes from off to on). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are designated as (d1) to (d5), and the flow of the process is as follows: a power outage occurs at the timing of (d1) (the timings of the various sensors at this time are the first insertion sensor D20s on, the second insertion sensor D30s off, and the shoot sensor D40s off). Next, at the timing of (d2), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from off to on. Next, at the timing of (d3), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and an addition process of the game medals is executed by the insertion monitoring counter, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter goes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first insertion sensor D20s goes from on to off at the timing between (d2) and (d3). Next, at (d4), the gaming machine detects a power outage, and a power outage process is executed. Next, at the timing of (d5), the game medal reaches the chute sensor D40s, but since the power-off process has already been executed, the game medal is not detected by the chute sensor D40s. Note that the example in the figure illustrates a case in which the game medal passes through the blocker before the blocker is turned off.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of a power outage are executed in the same interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the power-off processing using separate interrupt processing.

In this way, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs before the game medal reaches the second insertion sensor D30s, the gaming machine detects the power outage at the timing of (d4) and executes the power outage processing, so the subtraction processing of the insertion monitoring counter cannot be executed before the power outage processing is executed, but the credit addition processing can be executed before the power outage processing is executed. In addition, the insertion monitoring counter is configured to, for example, cause an error when the counter value reaches 5 (even if the counter value is shifted by the insertion of one game medal, the error is not detected immediately), so even if a power outage occurs during the operation of the gaming center, a single power outage will not be judged as an error related to the insertion monitoring counter, and so as long as the credit addition processing can be executed normally, normal play can be guaranteed to continue.

<<Action pattern 3 of processing at the time of power failure and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>> Figure 138 is an example of the action pattern of processing at the time of power failure and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. In this action pattern, the timing of detecting the power failure is different from <<Action pattern 1 of processing at the time of power failure and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>>, and the timing of counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter is configured to be the same as <<Action pattern 1 of processing at the time of power failure and counting processing by the medal insertion monitoring counter>>. In addition, in this action pattern, the medal insertion monitoring counter performs an addition process when the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and performs a subtraction process when the chute sensor D40s goes from off to on. The sensors here are the second insertion sensor D30s and the chute sensor D40s, and indicate whether these sensors have detected the passage of a medal (on or off). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are designated (e1) to (e6), and the process flow is as follows: at the timing (e1), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from off to on. Next, at the timing (e2), the second insertion sensor D30s goes from on to off, and the insertion monitoring counter executes an increment process for the game medals, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter goes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, at the timing between (e2) and (e3), the first insertion sensor D20s goes from on to off. Next, a power outage occurs at the timing (e3). Next, at the timing (e4), the shoot sensor D40s goes from off to on, and the insertion monitoring counter executes a subtraction process for the game medals, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter goes from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing (e5), the shoot sensor D40s goes from on to off. Next, at the timing (e6), the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting a power outage and the process at the time of a power outage are executed in the same interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the power-off processing using separate interrupt processing.

In this way, in the figure, even if a power outage occurs after the gaming medal has passed the second insertion sensor D30s and the credit addition process has been executed, the gaming machine detects the power outage at timing (e6) and executes the power outage process, so the gaming machine can be configured to execute the power outage process after executing the addition process and subtraction process of the insertion monitoring counter.

In addition, in the same figure, it is preferable that the relationship T4>T5 holds between the periods T4 and T5 mentioned above. Since the detection of a power outage is performed after the chute sensor D40s turns from ON to OFF, the period T4 from the occurrence of a power outage to the detection of a power outage is limited to the counting process (addition and addition) of game medals by the input monitoring counter. It is preferable that the period (e.g., period (e2) to (e4)) is longer than the period during which subtraction) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the power-off process can be performed after the game medal counting process by the input monitoring counter has been reliably executed.

By configuring it in this way, by performing power-off processing after the counting process is performed by the medal insertion monitoring counter, it becomes possible to normally execute the medal counting process by the medal insertion monitoring counter based on detection by various sensors, and it becomes possible to reliably detect errors related to the chute sensor D40s.

In FIGS. 136 to 138, the timing of the addition process of the input monitoring counter is the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from on to off, and the timing of the subtraction process and the timing when the chute sensor D40s turns from off to on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured as follows, and there is no problem in combining the timing of the addition process and the timing of the subtraction process in any combination. (A1) Timing of the addition process of the dosing monitoring counter: 1st dosing sensor D20s off → on (A2) Timing of adding process of the dosing monitoring counter: 1st dosing sensor D20s on → off (A3) Adding process of the dosing monitoring counter Timing: 2nd input sensor D30s OFF → ON (A4) Timing of addition process of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s ON → OFF (B1) Timing of subtraction process of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s OFF → ON (B2 ) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s on → off

In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 138, the configuration of the input monitoring counter related to the gaming machine having the shoot sensor D40s is described in detail, but the configuration of the input monitoring counter may be applied to the gaming machine having the input acceptance sensor D10s. In that case, the timing of addition and subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter may be configured as follows, and there is no problem in combining the timing of addition processing and the timing of subtraction processing in any way. (C1) Timing of addition processing of the input monitoring counter: Insertion reception sensor D10s OFF → ON (C2) Timing of addition processing of input reception sensor D10s ON → OFF (D1) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s OFF → ON (D2) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 1st input sensor D20s ON → OFF (D3) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: 2nd input sensor D30s OFF → ON (D4 ) Timing of subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter: Second input sensor D30s on → off Also, as the game medal passes through the input acceptance sensor D10s, 1 is added to the counter value of the input monitoring counter, and then the blocker is turned off. If the game medal is returned due to the error, the counter value of the input monitoring counter will continue to be incremented by 1. Even in such a case, the gaming machine according to the present example is configured to correct the counter value of the input monitoring counter to 0 by turning the blocker from off to on after that, so that the game machine is configured to correct the counter value of the input monitoring counter to 0. It is possible to configure the system so that an abnormality does not occur in the input monitoring counter determination process.

In addition, in this example, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is incremented by 1 and then subtracted by 1. However, the counter value of the input monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 and then added by 1 (the counter value changes from 0 to -1 to 0). ''), and any of the configurations described above can be applied to this configuration.

<<<Relationship between power outage processing and game medal payout number counting processing>>> Next, we will use FIG. 139 as a timing diagram that may lead to a situation where power is not being supplied to the gaming machine due to a power outage. The timing related to the process of counting the number of game medals to be paid out will now be explained. The process of counting the number of game medals to be paid out is performed, for example, at timing 4 in FIG. 120. Specifically, the payout number counting process is performed at the timing when a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the on state is transmitted to the main control board M by displacing the release urging means H70 to the initial position again. is configured to take place. Note that the process for counting the number of paid-out coins is generally performed using an addition process in which normally paid-out game medals are added, for example, 0 → 1 → 2, etc. Note that the payout count process is a process in which the game machine counts one (may be added to or subtracted from the counter value) when it is determined that one game medal has been paid out.

The time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected can be determined with a certain degree of freedom by a program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the capacitor installed. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power outage until the power outage is detected varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. The parts expressed as time below are this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range given as an example for comparing time values occurs, it will not deviate from the design value. There will be no. In addition, the same applies to times other than the time from when a power outage occurs to when a power outage is detected, and the various times exemplified in this example, such as the time for game medals to flow down and the time related to the disk D50 of the medal payout device H, etc. applicable to the configuration.

In addition, in the same figure and Figure 120, the first dispensing sensor H10s in Figure 4 is the second dispensing sensor H2, and the second dispensing sensor H20s in Figure 4 is the first dispensing sensor H1, and when the release urging means H70 is in the initial position, the first dispensing sensor H1 = on and the second dispensing sensor H2 = off. That is, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70, the sensor states are as follows: first dispensing sensor H1 = on and second dispensing sensor H2 = off (initial position) first dispensing sensor H1 = off and second dispensing sensor H2 = off first dispensing sensor H1 = off and second dispensing sensor H2 = on first dispensing sensor H1 = off and second dispensing sensor H2 = off first dispensing sensor H1 = on and second dispensing sensor H2 = off (initial position).

<<Operation pattern of processing when power is cut off and processing of counting the number of paid out game medals>> FIG. This is an example of something. The sensors here are a first dispensing sensor H1 and a second dispensing sensor H2. In addition, in this operation pattern, the timing at which the power supply is cut off is determined as follows: Operation pattern A: The first dispensing sensor H1 is on and the second dispensing sensor H2 is off. Operation pattern B: The first dispensing sensor H1 is on → off and the second dispensing sensor The relationship between the power-off processing and the processing for counting the number of game medals to be paid out will be explained using two operation patterns: one in which the payout sensor H2 is off.

<<Operation pattern A of power-off processing and game medal payout number counting process>> First, as a process flow of operation pattern A, first, after the release biasing means H70 starts displacing from the initial position, A power outage occurs (at this time, the timing of the various sensors is that the first dispensing sensor H1 is on and the second dispensing sensor H2 is off). Thereafter, due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, the second dispensing sensor H2=off, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, the second dispensing sensor H2=on, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, and the second dispensing sensor H1=off. 2. Payout sensor H2 = OFF 1st payout sensor H1 = ON, 2nd payout sensor H2 = OFF (initial position), and the payout number counting process is executed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. Although the eighth embodiment is configured to detect a power outage and execute power off processing at the same interrupt interval, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform processing using separate interrupts.

<Effect> By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs after the release biasing means H70 starts to move from its initial position, the power outage processing can be executed after the payout count processing is executed, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unfair advantage, such as the number of payout medals not being counted even though the medals have been paid out.

<<Operation pattern B of power-off processing and game medal payout number counting process>> First, as a process flow of operation pattern B, first, the discharging biasing means H70 starts displacing from the initial position, The power is cut off after the first dispensing sensor H1=on and the second dispensing sensor H2=off (initial position).The first dispensing sensor H1=off and the second dispensing sensor H2=off occur. Thereafter, due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, the second dispensing sensor H2=on, the first dispensing sensor H1=off, the second dispensing sensor H2=off, the first dispensing sensor H1=on, and the second dispensing sensor H1=off. 2 Payout sensor H2=off (initial position), and the process of counting the number of payout coins is executed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine detects a power outage and executes a power outage process. Although the eighth embodiment is configured to detect a power outage and execute power off processing at the same interrupt interval, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform processing at the execution timing of separate interrupt processing.

<Effect> By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs after the release biasing means H70 starts to move from its initial position, the power outage processing can be executed after the payout count processing is executed, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player obtains an unfair advantage, such as the number of payout medals not being counted even though game medals have been paid out.

Note that the execution timing (execution trigger) of the payout count process is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and is as follows: (1) First payout sensor H1 = off, second payout sensor H2 = off → first payout sensor H1 = off, Timing when the second dispensing sensor H2 = on (2) First dispensing sensor H1 = off, second dispensing sensor H2 = on → first dispensing sensor H1 = off, second dispensing sensor H2 = off It can also be timing.

<<<<Ninth embodiment: Stop button operation and reel stop control>>> Next, the configuration related to the stop button and reel control that can be applied to the slot machine of this example will be described in detail below as the ninth embodiment.

In the ninth embodiment, the reel stop control in the operation of the reel stop buttons (here, the left stop button D41, the center stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) will be described. The operation control of the stepping motor related to the reel stop control is as described above, but it is configured so that after transitioning to the "reel deceleration state", which is the reel drive state shown in FIG. 35 (6), in particular, all phases of the stepping motor (e.g., four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) are excited (four-phase excitation) to stop the rotation of the reel, thereby stopping the reel. In the ninth embodiment, the process of exciting all phases (e.g., four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) in this way (four-phase excitation) may be referred to as "four-phase excitation process".

In a reel-type gaming machine, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute control to stop the spinning reels based on information indicating that the stop button sensors built into each stop button (left stop button D41, center stop button D42, right stop button D43) have changed from off to on or on to off in response to the operation of the stop buttons. Note that the operation of the stop buttons in the ninth embodiment refers to a physical operation, such as pressing the left stop button D41 or releasing the left stop button D41 from a pressed state. Also, a state in which the stop button is not being operated may be referred to as, for example, a state in which the stop button is not pressed. Also, when the stop button sensor changes from off to on in a situation in which the stop button is active, it may be referred to as the operation of the stop button being accepted.

In the ninth embodiment, mainly the operation of the stop button for stopping the spinning reels and the reel stop control will be explained. In addition, in the ninth embodiment, in order to explain in detail the relationship between the stop button operation and the reel stop control, pattern 1: 4-phase excitation processing is executed after the stop button sensor turns from on to off. Pattern 2: Broadly divided into two patterns: 4-phase excitation processing is executed before the stop button sensor turns from on to off. In the ninth embodiment, it is assumed that the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the stop control of the reels has these two patterns. Note that, as described above, the four-phase excitation process is control of the step motor that is executed when the reel drive state becomes the reel deceleration state.

The operation of the stop button (including the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, and right stop button D43) and the timing at which the stop button sensor changes from off to on and from on to off will be described. The stop button sensor is a sensor built into each stop button, and turns from off to on when the stop button is pressed a predetermined distance from the initial position (position corresponding to the non-operated state). When the stop button sensor changes from off to on, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute the reel rotation stop process according to the flow of FIG. 34. Although details will be described later, the predetermined distance for satisfying the condition for the stop button sensor to change from off to on can be changed as appropriate. For example, the distance may be the maximum distance that the stop button can be pressed, or the distance may be half the maximum distance that the stop button can be pressed.

<<Pattern in which the four-phase excitation process ends after the stop button sensor is turned off>> FIG. 140 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. In FIG. 140, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the ninth embodiment is divided into frames (a1) to (f1) for each focused event. In the ninth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels is exemplified as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is exemplified as the left stop button D41. is not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43, or the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53. It should be noted that this configuration is not applicable only to the reels and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop in all pressing orders.

In addition, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state until the left reel stops. 2 shows an example of a case where the rotor rotates a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slippage) and then stops. In addition, when the left stop button is rotated by the maximum distance according to the design, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, and then the left The time value until the reel stops (sometimes referred to as the slip time) is set to have a certain margin so that the maximum slip time according to the regulations does not exceed the maximum value according to the regulations, which is 190 ms. As an example in this example, the designed maximum slip time is set to 185 ms, and the distance corresponding to the 185 ms is set as the designed maximum distance.

(a1) to (f1) in FIG. 140 will be explained in detail. First, in (a1), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed) and the left stop button D41 is at its initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reels are rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

Then, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes called an operation or a slide), and when the left stop button D41 is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b1), the left stop button sensor turns from off to on. Here, the distance the left stop button D41 is pressed from the initial position is x. As will be described later, the left stop button D41 is configured to be pressed a maximum distance d from the initial position, and the relationship of the pressed distance is 0<x<d. At the timing of (b1), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant). When the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, a process for stopping the reel (left reel M51) is executed regardless of the operation status of the stop button (such as the time it takes to be pressed), and the reel (left reel M51) moves the maximum distance in design from the timing of (b1) and stops.

Then, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 reaches a state (c1) where it is pressed down a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position. At (c1), the left stop button sensor remains on, and the reel drive state of the left reel M51 maintains a reel deceleration standby state. Note that the time value from (b1) to (c1) varies depending on the manner in which the player operates the left stop button D41, but this example illustrates a case in which a stop operation is performed on the left stop button D41 within a short period of time (e.g., 5 ms), which is a typical time value required when a player performs a stop operation on the left stop button D41.

Thereafter, immediately after the state of (c1) is reached, the left stop button D41 is released, and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force of the left stop button D41, and at (d1) where the left stop button D41 has returned to a distance of x from the initial position (more precisely, at the timing when the distance is less than x), the left button sensor is turned from ON to OFF. Note that both (b1) and (d1) illustrate a state where the left stop button D41 is located at a distance of x from the initial position, but the distance of x from the initial position indicates the ON/OFF state of the stop button sensor, so more precisely, the stop button sensor is ON at a distance of x or more from the initial position, and OFF at a distance less than x from the initial position. Note that x may be adjusted as appropriate, and the stop button sensor may be configured to be ON when the stop button is in the initial position, and ON when the stop button is not in the initial position (when the stop button is pressed even a little). Note that the time it takes for the left stop button D41 to return to the initial position from the position where it is pressed the maximum distance d varies depending on the spring constant of the spring of the left stop button D41.

Further, in (d1), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 maintains the reel deceleration standby state.

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and in the state (e1) in which the left stop button returns to the initial position, the left stop button sensor remains off, and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position. The reel driving state of the reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. Note that the timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be earlier than the timing when the left stop button returns to the initial position, or may be at a later timing. It could be timing. In addition, to explain in detail about the four-phase excitation of the step motor, when the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (when the symbol scheduled to stop and the passing symbol match), the counter of the reel drive pulse output counter After setting the value to 100 (a value equivalent to approximately 223.5 ms), 4-phase excitation is turned on, so more precisely, the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and then approximately 0 4-phase excitation is turned on after .5ms. After that, the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter is subtracted by the interrupt processing executed while the 4-phase excitation is turned on, and when the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter reaches 0, It is configured to turn off four-phase excitation.

Then, the left stop button remains in its initial position, and the step motor for the left reel is decelerated by four-phase excitation, causing the left reel to stop at a position where it has rotated the maximum distance designed as described above, and operation of the center stop button D42 and right stop button D43 becomes valid (acceptance of the stop operation becomes valid).

In addition, in the same figure, after receiving the operation of the stop button 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button 1 stops (the stop control ends), the operation of the stop buttons other than the stop button 1 stops. The configuration is such that the operation is not valid (stopping operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of the first stop button, the other stop buttons are not enabled until the reel corresponding to the first stop button has stopped, thereby preventing the step motor from being overloaded by controlling the drive of the multiple reels at the timing of one. Even with this configuration, when the first stop button is released immediately after the stop operation is performed (when the button is pressed the maximum distance d from the initial position and released immediately), the design value of the shortest time required from the release until the stop button sensor turns from on to off can be shorter than the design value of the time from the stop button turning from off to on until the four-phase excitation of the step motor ends. In other words, even when the first stop button is released immediately after the stop operation is performed, the first stop button is configured to return to the initial position before the reel rotates the maximum distance in design and stops, in other words, before the stop operation of the other stop buttons becomes effective, so that the player can perform the stop operation of the stop button corresponding to the other reel as soon as the reel on which the other stop operation was performed stops.

In addition, when the user leaves the stop button immediately after executing the stop button stop operation in step 1, the time value for the shortest time required from the user leaving until the stop button sensor changes from on to off, and the time value for the time required for the stop button sensor to turn from off to on. Although the time value from 1 to 4-phase excitation of the step motor ends varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), the design value is a value that includes these factors. Furthermore, although there is a possibility that an event that deviates significantly from the design value may occur in rare cases, under the basic environment, 90% or more of the deviations are within the range of the design value. In this example, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range exemplified as a comparison of time values occurs, it is considered as a deviation as a design value. This means that you have not done so.

In the figure, the stop button is excited in a configuration in which it is pushed in the maximum distance d from the initial position and then immediately released, and the stop button returns to the initial position before the reel rotates the maximum designed distance and stops, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to satisfy the situation in which the stop button sensor goes from on to off before the reel rotates the maximum designed distance and stops after being pushed in the maximum distance d from the initial position and then immediately released.

<<Pattern 1 in which the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off>> Figure 141 is an example of an image diagram depicting a time series of operations to stop a reel that is spinning. In Figure 141, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stopping in the ninth embodiment is divided into frames (a2) to (f2) for each event to be focused on. In the ninth embodiment, the reel that is first to be stopped among the reels that are spinning is illustrated as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the first reel to be stopped is illustrated as the left stop button D41, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reel that is first to be stopped may be the center reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the first reel to be stopped may be the center stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be noted that this configuration is not only applicable to the reel and stop button related to the first stop, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop related to all push orders.

In addition, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state until the left reel stops. 2 shows an example of a case where the rotor rotates a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slippage) and then stops.

(a2) to (f2) in FIG. 141 will be explained in detail. First, in (a2), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed) and the left stop button D41 is at its initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reels are rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

Then, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes called operated or slid) until it is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b2), at which point the left stop button sensor turns from OFF to ON. At the timing of (b2), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from a reel constant speed state to a reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant).

Then, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the state becomes (c2) in which the left stop button D41 is pressed down a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position. In (c2), the left stop button sensor remains on, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. Note that the timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in the figure, and may be either before or after the left stop button returns to the initial position, as long as the reel is spinning in (c2).

After that, the left stop button D41 is immediately released in the state of (c2), and the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the urging force of the left stop button D41, and returns to the distance y from the initial position. At a certain point (d2), the left reel stops at a position where it has rotated a designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slip) after the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state. Note that the distance y only needs to be y<d, and may be y=x.

Then, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the force of the left stop button, and when the left stop button is a distance from the initial position less than x (e2), the left stop button sensor turns from on to off. The left stop button D41 then slides toward the initial position due to the force of the left stop button D41, and at (f2) the left stop button D41 returns to its initial position, and the stop operation of the center stop button D42 and right stop button D43 becomes valid. Note that the timing at which the stop operation of the center stop button D42 and right stop button D43 becomes valid is not limited to this, and may be the timing at which the left stop button D41 turns from on to off (and the left reel is stopped).

In addition, in the same figure, after receiving the operation of stop button 1, until the reel corresponding to stop button 1 stops (stop control ends), the operation of stop buttons other than stop button 1 stops. The configuration is such that the operation is not valid (stopping operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons do not become effective until the reel corresponding to the one stop button stops, so that multiple reels can be driven at one timing. By performing control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive load is applied to the step motor. In addition, with such a configuration, even if you release the stop button immediately after pressing the stop button in step 1 (i.e. push the maximum distance d from the initial position and release immediately), the reel will still reach its designed maximum. Since the first stop button is configured to return to the initial position after rotating a distance and stopping, the player can stop the other stop buttons if the stop button has returned to the initial position. The game can proceed smoothly.

<<Pattern 2 in which the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor turns off>> Figure 142 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. . In FIG. 142, the process from the operation of the stop button to the reel stop in the ninth embodiment is divided into frames (a3) to (f3) for each focused event. In the ninth embodiment, the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels is exemplified as the left reel M51, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first is exemplified as the left stop button D41. is not limited to. For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43, or the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53. It should be noted that this configuration is not applicable only to the reels and the stop button, but is applicable to the first stop, second stop, and third stop in all pressing orders.

The figure also shows an example of a case where the left stop button is operated (the stop button sensor changes from OFF to ON), the reel drive state changes from a constant reel speed state to a reel deceleration standby state, and the left reel rotates the maximum designed distance (also called maximum slippage) before stopping.

(a3) to (f3) in Figure 142 will be explained in detail. First, in (a3), the left stop button D41 has not been operated to stop (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is in the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is spinning (left reel M51 is spinning).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed down (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and when it is pressed a distance x from the initial position (b3), the left stop button sensor changes from off to on. Become. At the timing (b3), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the constant reel speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the rotational speed of the reel remains constant rotation).

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 is pressed down, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down a distance y from the initial position (c3). By (c3), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and at (c3), the left reel M51 comes to a stop. Also, the left stop button sensor remains on. Note that the distance y only needs to satisfy y<d.

Thereafter, the left reel M51 is pushed in, and the left stop button D41 is pressed down by a distance d, which is the maximum distance from the initial position (d3). In (d3), the left stop button sensor remains on.

Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and when the left stop button is at a distance less than x from the initial position (e3), the left stop button sensor turns from on to off. . Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force, and at (f3), the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position, and the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 become effective. becomes. Note that the timing at which the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 become effective is not limited to this, but is the timing when the left stop button D41 is turned from on to off (and the left reel is stopped). You can also use it as

In addition, in the same figure, after receiving the operation of the stop button 1, until the reel corresponding to the stop button 1 stops (the stop control ends), the operation of the stop buttons other than the stop button 1 stops. The configuration is such that the operation is not valid (stopping operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons are not enabled until the reel corresponding to the one stop button stops, thereby driving multiple reels at one timing. By performing control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive load is applied to the step motor. In addition, even in such a configuration, even if you release the stop button immediately after pressing the stop button in step 1 (i.e., if you push it the maximum distance d from the initial position and release it immediately), the reel will not work properly due to its design. The first stop button is configured to return to the initial position after rotating the maximum distance and stopping, so if the stop button has returned to the initial position, the player cannot stop the other stop buttons. This allows the game to proceed smoothly.

<<<<Tenth Embodiment Performance Display Device SH>>>> The gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be provided with a performance display device SH that displays the operating status of the gaming machine such as the ratio of accessories, A configuration including the performance display device SH will be described in detail below as a tenth embodiment.

First, a display example of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be illustrated using FIG. 143. The performance display device SH is formed by 4-digit segments lined up horizontally, the upper two digits (the two digits on the left) are the identification segment SH10, and the lower two digits (the two digits on the right) are the ratio segment SH20. It has become. The identification segment SH10 is configured to display information that allows the currently displayed item to be identified, and the ratio segment SH20 is configured to display numerical information corresponding to the currently displayed item. Further, a dot point SH30 is provided at the lower right of the lower digit (right digit) of the identification segment SH10, and the structure is configured such that the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 can be easily distinguished depending on the presence or absence of the dot point SH30. ing. Note that there is no problem even if the dot point SH30 is not provided.

<<<<Installation Position>>> The performance display device SH may be installed directly on the main control board M. If so configured, it is desirable to install it in a position where visibility is not hindered by stickers or the like attached to the main board case M40 that covers the main control board M.

<<<Display Items>>> Examples of items displayed on the performance display device SH include the following items. (a) = Cumulative advantageous section ratio "Cumulative advantageous section ratio" is the ratio of the cumulative number of games played in advantageous sections to the total number of games played (cumulative number of games); It can be calculated by ``total number of games played ÷ total number of games played x 100 (%)''. As an example, if the game progresses as follows: "Start of gaming machine operation → Normal section A → Advantageous section A → Normal section B → Advantageous section B", "(Number of games played in advantageous section A + Games in advantageous section B It can be calculated as follows: (number of games played in normal section A + number of games played in advantageous section A + number of games played in normal section B + number of games played in advantageous section B) x 100 (%).

Note that "cumulative total" refers to the period from the time the gaming machine starts operating at the gaming parlor until the calculation of the items to be displayed on the most recent performance display device SH, from the predetermined measurement start timing to the most recent performance display device SH. It shows the cumulative total from the start of measurement for displaying on the performance display device SH to the time when the calculations for the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH are performed, such as until the calculations for the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH are performed.

(b) = Continuous feature ratio for 6000 games The "continuous feature ratio" is the ratio of the total number of payouts made when the first type special feature is activated to the total number of payouts, and the "continuous feature ratio for 6000 games" can be calculated by "the number of payouts made when the first type special feature is activated during 6000 games ÷ the total number of payouts made during 6000 games × 100 (%)". As an example, if the number of payouts made when the first type special feature is activated during 6000 games is 6000, and the number of payouts made due to other triggers is 8000, it is calculated as "6000 ÷ (6000 + 8000) × 100 ≒ 42.9 (%)". Note that "6000 games" refers to the 6000 games prior to the most recent calculation of the continuous feature ratio.

(c) = Device ratio over 6,000 games "Device ratio" is the ratio of the sum of the number of payouts paid out by special devices and normal devices to the total number of payouts, and "device ratio over 6,000 games" can be calculated as "(number of payouts when a first type special device is activated during 6,000 games + number of payouts when a second type special device is activated during 6,000 games + number of payouts when a normal device is activated during 6,000 games) ÷ total number of payouts during 6,000 games × 100 (%)." As an example, if the number of game medals paid out when the first type special feature is activated during 6000 games is 5000, the number of game medals paid out when the second type special feature is activated during 6000 games is 3000, and the number of medals paid out due to other triggers during 6000 games is 8000, the calculation is "(5000 + 3000) ÷ (5000 + 3000 + 8000) x 100 = 50 (%)". Note that "6000 games" refers to the 6000 games prior to the most recent calculation of the feature ratio.

(d) = Cumulative continuous accessory ratio "Cumulative continuous accessory ratio" is calculated by "Cumulative number of coins paid out when type 1 special accessory is activated ÷ Cumulative total number of coins paid out x 100 (%)" can. As an example, if the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the first type special accessory is activated is 600000 pieces, and the number paid out due to other triggers is 800000 pieces, then "600000 ÷ (600000 + 800000) x 100 ≒ 42. 9(%)".

(e) = Cumulative accessory ratio "Cumulative accessory ratio" means "(Cumulative number of coins paid out when type 1 special accessory is activated + Cumulative number of coins paid out when type 2 special accessory is activated + Cumulative total It can be calculated as: (Number of coins paid out when the normal accessory is activated) ÷ Total number of coins paid out x 100 (%). As an example, the cumulative number of game medals to be paid out when the first type special accessory is activated: 500,000 pieces, the cumulative number of game medals to be paid out when the second type special accessory item is activated: 300,000 pieces, and the cumulative number of game medals to be paid out by other triggers. If the number of sheets is 800,000, it is calculated as "(500,000+300,000)÷(500,000+300,000+800,000)×100=50(%)".

In addition, "7U" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative advantageous zone ratio is displayed, "6Y" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the consecutive feature ratio for 6000 games is displayed, "7Y" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the feature ratio for 6000 games is displayed, "6A" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative consecutive feature ratio is displayed, and "7A" displayed in identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative feature ratio is displayed.

In FIG. 143, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio is displayed as (a), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio may be displayed as (a). Here, the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio is a ratio that can be calculated by {cumulative payout number in a game in which the push order navigation (sometimes called an instruction) on the main control board M is executed + cumulative payout number by the feature} ÷ total cumulative payout number × 100 (%), and whether the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or the cumulative instruction-included feature ratio is to be displayed on the performance display device SH can be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in a game in which the push order navigation was executed, because the stop operation was performed in a push order different from the push order navigation, the number of game medals that would be paid out would be smaller than the number of paid out symbol combinations that could have won if the stop operation was performed according to the push order navigation. Even when the button is paid out, the number of coins paid out for the symbol combination that can win if the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is calculated as the number of coins paid out in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. .

<<<<Display Mode>>> The display mode in the performance display device SH may be configured as follows: - The display is switched in the order of "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (a)..." approximately every 5 seconds. Note that the interval at which the display is switched may be changed without any problem, and the display may be configured to switch every 3 seconds, for example. - For non-relevant items, "- -" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that a non-relevant item is, for example, the advantageous zone ratio in a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous zone.・The ratio display numerical value {advantageous zone ratio (%), consecutive feature ratio (%), feature ratio (%), displayed in ratio segment SH20} is displayed with the decimal point discarded (if it is 100%, it will be displayed as "99"). ・If the ratio display numerical value is an advantageous zone ratio of 70%, a consecutive feature ratio of 60%, or a feature ratio of 70% or more, the ratio segment SH20 will be displayed flashing. ・If the cumulative number of games is less than 400 games, the ratio display will display "00". ・If the cumulative number of games is less than 6000 games, the identification segment SH10 will be displayed flashing when the consecutive feature ratio for 6000 games and the feature ratio for 6000 games are displayed flashing (including non-applicable items (for example, in a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous zone, since there is no advantageous zone ratio, the advantageous zone ratio is a non-applicable item)). ・If the cumulative number of games is less than 175,000 games, the identification segment will be displayed flashing when displaying the cumulative advantageous zone ratio. In addition, if the cumulative number of games played is less than 17,500 games, the identification segment flashes when the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the cumulative feature ratio are displayed (including gaming machines without consecutive features). In other words, the cumulative number of games played is configured to be measurable for 175,000 games or more in order to display the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, and the cumulative number of games played is configured to be measurable for 17,500 games or more in order to display the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the cumulative feature ratio.

In the tenth embodiment, the performance display device SH is configured to display the above-mentioned information (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e). The configuration in which the main control board (CPUMC of main control board M) executes processing such as calculation and display of information related to (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) is detailed below. Describe.

<<<<Memory Map>>> First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip C will be described with reference to Fig. 144. The memory map shows an address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of this, the space from "0000H" to "27FFH" is assigned to the built-in ROM C110, the space from "2800H" to "28FFH" is assigned to the register area built into each circuit in the main control chip C, the space from "F000H" to "F2FFH" is assigned to the built-in RAM C120, and the space from "FDD0H" to "FDFBH" is assigned to the XCS decode area (an area that executes decoding to interpret a given machine language as an internal representation).
are assigned to the CPU C 100. By making the CPU C 100 execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to make the CPU C 100 access the corresponding hardware.

The built-in ROM C110 has a first ROM area which is an area that mainly controls the progress of the game, and a second ROM area which is an area that mainly controls processes that differ from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related processes, and the first ROM area is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "1FFFH", and the second ROM area is allocated to the space from "2000H" to "27FFH". The first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity present in the first ROM area and accessed by the CPU C100 is configured to be larger than the data capacity present in the second ROM area and accessed by the CPU C100).

In addition, the first ROM area is a first control area in which a program code (instruction code set for the CPUC 100) is stored, and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPUC 100 based on this program code) is stored. A first data area where various types of identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) are stored, and various settings used when operating the main control chip C (operation of the random number generation circuit C140) are stored. settings, operation settings of the watchdog timer C222, etc.) are stored. Although the figure shows a memory map image in the first ROM area, the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of an unused area are merely examples.

The second ROM area also has a second control area in which program code (a set of instruction codes for CPUC100) is stored, and a second data area in which program data used by the program (read by CPUC100 processing based on this program code) is stored, and the second control area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first control area (in other words, the program code capacity present in the second control area and accessed by CPUC100 is smaller than the program code capacity present in the first control area and accessed by CPUC100), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area (in other words, the program data capacity present in the second data area and accessed by CPUC100 is smaller than the program data capacity present in the first data area and accessed by CPUC100).

On the other hand, the built-in RAMC 120 has a first RAM area which is an area for storing information mainly based on the progress of the game, a second RAM area which is an area for storing information mainly based on processing that differs from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related information, and a stack area which is used when the program needs to store data internally, with the first RAM area being allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F1FFH", the second RAM area being allocated to the space from "F200H" to "F2C9H", and the stack area being allocated to the space from "F2CAH" to "F2FFH" (however, the number of bytes in each area is merely an example).

Further, the first RAM area has a first work area which is a work area for temporarily storing information mainly related to the progress of the game, and the second RAM area mainly stores temporarily information related to errors etc. and a checksum area that is a work area for detecting errors in information temporarily stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. Note that the first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area. Further, in this embodiment, only the second RAM area has the checksum area (the first RAM area does not have it), and the checksum area has the checksum area in both the first RAM area and the second RAM area ( It is configured to manage a checksum (the sum of information temporarily stored on both sides). In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when calculating the checksum, the unused area is also included in the calculation, but the calculation is not limited to this, and the area excluding the unused area (the first The checksum may be calculated for the work area (the work area and the second work area). In addition, the error detection method is not limited to the checksum check method, but may also use other methods (for example, parity check), in which case the checksum area is This is an area for storing error detection information (for example, parity bits, etc.) required when using the method.

It should be noted that the address of the area where various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored may be any address after the address of the built-in RAM without any problem. Although there is no problem in changing addresses that are unused areas, it is preferable to provide an unused area between (addresses between) the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of a memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 144, the program code that exists in the first control area and is accessed from the CPUC 100 and the program code that exists in the second control area and is accessed from the CPUC 100 are as follows. Since they are placed separately on the memory map (with non-consecutive addresses) and an unused area is sandwiched between them, it is difficult to visually identify the placement positions of both program codes on the program source code or dump list. (The same can be said if there is an unused area in between).

Here, with regard to the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent programs, etc., modified by fraudulent acts from being written, it is preferable to configure it so that there are no unused areas (unfilled areas) (for example, by filling all unused areas with 0s, and writing used areas to lower addresses, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraudulent acts, it is preferable to configure the first control area and the first data area so that there are no unused data (for example, data referenced in gaming machines with different specifications, data used only for testing in the development stage, etc.). In addition, it is preferable to configure the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first working area, and the second working area so that they use areas to lower addresses and no unused areas are provided within the areas (addresses within the areas) (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area, which is in the range of "0000H" to "0FA7H", are not used areas). In this example, all bits in the unused area are set to "0", and any bit in the area other than the unused area is set to "1" (not "0").

In the tenth embodiment, in particular, when the main control board (CPU MC of the main control board M) performs calculation processing for information to be displayed on the performance display device SH, or the display processing for displaying information on the performance display device SH, the processing is configured to be performed in the second ROM/RAM area. Details of the processing performed in the second ROM/RAM area are explained below.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Figure 145 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for the subroutine of step 1600 in the tenth embodiment (the execution timing of this subroutine is the same as in the other embodiments). The processing of this subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and is configured to be executed periodically thereafter at a predetermined time interval (T in this example, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC 100, checking the input port of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). If No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process, which will be described later. On the other hand, if YES in step 1604, the CPU 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software) in step 1606. Next, in step 1608, the CPU 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the payment button D60, start lever D50, stop button D40, door switch D80, setting key switch M20, setting/reset button M30, power failure detection signal, input reception sensor D10s, and first input sensor. D20s, second input sensor D30s, first dispensing sensor H10s, second dispensing sensor H20s, etc. (In other words, the presence or absence of operation of these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T. ).

Next, in step 1610, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and switches the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag on and off according to the sampling results of each input port data (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over multiple samplings, it is possible to detect that the front door DU is open without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes a reel drive control process (a process related to the control of the drive of the reel M50, which will be described in detail later) for all reels (left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60, and determines whether the counter value is greater than 0. If the answer is Yes in step 1612, then in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. If the answer is No in step 1612, then proceeds to step 1614 as well. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, then the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, etc. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M judges whether all error flags are off (not shown, but all error flags such as the inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted medal number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, payout abnormality error flag, payout medal retention error flag, door switch flag, etc. are off). If the answer is Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has not been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, in the register area) an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command related to the fact that an error has been detected) and proceeds to step 1622. In step 1620, information on the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the on error flag is transmitted to the sub side. Also, the error non-detection command may be set only when the error is released from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off), and when the error is not detected, the setting process of the information may not be executed (step 1618 may not be performed). Furthermore, the error detection command may execute the setting process only when an error occurs from a state in which no error has occurred, or may execute the setting process when the type of error changes from a state in which a first error (e.g., an inserted medal retention error) to a second error (e.g., a paid medal retention error).

Next, in step 1622, the CPU 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, the set control commands will be sent). Here, the commands sent to the sub-control board S include a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (sent when the stop button is operated as the first stop) Commands related to the second reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), Commands related to the third reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after operating the stop button as the third stop) (sent immediately after operation), commands related to the stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), commands related to stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button to stop display symbols), winning/return Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (limited to advantageous sections)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever), commands related to RT status (sent when all reels are Commands related to AT status (sent between when all reels stop and when the next game starts); High security failure counter value command (sent immediately after operating the start lever), command related to the number of remaining AT games (from when all reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after operating the start lever) (transmitted), commands related to the game section (transmitted from the time all reels stop until the next game starts), and so on. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer, etc.). Although not shown, the information related to the error outputted by the external signal includes a door opening error, a loading abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a loading reception sensor retention error, and the like. Note that the door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on, and the input reception sensor retention error occurs when the input reception sensor detects that game medals are retained. It is configured so that an error will occur. Next, in step 1626, the CPU 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, lights up a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among the plurality of 7-segment LED units, and A predetermined segment of the segment is lit (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 does not have to be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes soft random number management processing (updating processing of random numbers managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPU 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU 100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether the abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is not set) Determine.

If the answer is Yes in step 1636, then in step 1637 (13), the CPU MC of the main control board M calls the count upper limit check process of the second ROM/RAM area as the process in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Although not shown, when processing in the second ROM/RAM area is called, the CPU MC of the main control board M first saves the stack pointer and switches the stack area, and sets up the second stack area for use. Next, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area to the second stack area. Next, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes processing to create and output a signal for external output from the first RAM area and register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area.

Thereafter, as shown in the figure, in step 1637-1 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the counter value of a counter (sometimes referred to as a total number of games counter) related to the total number of games played to date. A count upper limit check is performed as a check process to determine whether or not the counter value of a counter (sometimes referred to as a total payout counter) related to the total number of game medals paid out to date has reached a predetermined upper limit. Perform processing. The details of the count upper limit check process include, for example, a predetermined number of repetitions at the address of the total payout counter and the address of the total number of games counter set in a predetermined register (referred to as HL register) in the second ROM/RAM area. Check processing is performed based on the data of the count upper limit flag calculated based on the calculation processing of the minutes. Note that the data of the number of repetitions and the count upper limit flag can be stored in, for example, a B register or a C register as an unused area.

Next, in step 1637-2 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the total number of games played up to the present. In detail, the CPU MC counts the number of games played by adding the additional value (set to 1 in this case) stored in the A register, which serves as an unused area, to the address of the total number of games played counter set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area, and updates the result of the addition as data at the address set in the specified register.

Next, in step 1637-3 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the number of advantageous section games to date. The number of games played in an advantageous section is the cumulative number of games played in the advantageous section. As for the details of the process of counting the number of times of advantageous section games, first, among the data stored at the address of the game section flag set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area, a flag indicating that it is an advantageous section is selected. When this bit is "1", for example, the address of the advantageous section game counter is set in the DE register. Thereafter, data addition processing is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-4 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a process of counting the cumulative number of coins paid out up to now and the number of coins paid out during the 6000 games. Note that the number of coins to be paid out is the total number of coins to be paid out, regardless of the opportunity to pay out game medals. As for the details of the process of counting the number of payout coins, first, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (thirteenth) is not "0", The address of a total payout counter (a counter for the total number of payouts and a counter for the number of payouts during 6000 games) is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the data stored in the payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the process of adding data (in this case, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed in the same way as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register.

Next, in step 1637-5 (13th), the CPU MC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of payouts of the reel up to now and the number of payouts of the reel during 6000 games. The details of the counting process of the number of payouts of the reel are as follows: first, data of the reel operation status flag is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a specified logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the reel is in operation. Then, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the address of the reel payout counter (counter for the cumulative number of payouts of the reel and counter for the number of payouts of the reel during 6000 games) is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, the data stored in the reel payout number buffer is set in a specified register in the second ROM/RAM area. Then, similar to step 1637-2 (13th), a process of adding data (here, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed, and the result of the addition is updated as the data at the address set in a specified register. Note that the "gimmicks" in this process refer to the first type special gimmick, the second type special gimmick, and the normal gimmick.

Next, in step 1637-6 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a counting process of the cumulative number of continuous paid out bonuses up to now and the number of consecutive paid out bonuses over the 6000 games. As for the details of the process of counting the number of consecutive paid out tokens, first, data of the RB operation state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is "0", it is determined that the RB is in operation. After that, if the bit related to the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register in step 1637-1 (13th) is not "0", the data is stored in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. , sets the address of the continuous accessory payout counter (the counter for the total number of consecutive accessory payouts and the counter for the number of consecutive accessory payouts over 6000 games). Thereafter, the data stored in the continuous accessory payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Thereafter, the process of adding data (in this case, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed in the same manner as step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as data at the address set in a predetermined register. In addition, the "continuous accessory" in this process is the first type special accessory (sometimes referred to as RB).

Next, in step 1637-7 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs ratio calculation processing. Incidentally, the ratio here indicates the following. (1-1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio: Number of advantageous section games ÷ Total number of games x 100 (%) (1-2) Cumulative ratio of accessories including instructions: {Press order navigation on main control board M (also referred to as instructions) Number of coins paid out in a game in which the following is executed + Number of coins paid out due to accessory items} ÷ Number of coins paid out x 100 (%) (2) Cumulative continuous accessory ratio: Cumulative total during the operation of type 1 special accessory items Number of coins paid out ÷ Cumulative total number of coins paid out x 100 (%) (3) Cumulative ratio of bonuses: (Cumulative number of coins paid out while the first type special bonus is in operation + Cumulative total while the second type special bonus is in operation) Number of coins paid out + Cumulative number of coins paid out while the normal accessory is in operation) ÷ Total number of coins paid out x 100 (%) (4) Continuous accessory ratio between 6,000 games: 6,000 while the first type special accessory is in operation Number of coins paid out between games ÷ 6000 Total number of coins paid out between games x 100 (%) (5) Accessory ratio between 6000 games: (Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while the first type special accessory is active + Type 2 Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while the special accessory is in operation + Number of coins paid out during 6000 games while the normal accessory is active) ÷ Total number of coins paid out during 6000 games x 100 (%) Above, (1-1) to ( 5) is the target of ratio calculation in the tenth embodiment. In the 10th embodiment, the ratio calculation process is performed for each game in the advantageous section ratio of (1-1) and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio of (1-2), and in (2) to (5) is configured to perform the ratio calculation process every 400 games, but it may also be configured such that the ratio calculation process is performed for each game in (2) to (5), for example. Note that, as described above, either (1-1) or (1-2) above may be configured to be calculated and displayed in accordance with the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart of the subroutine of the ratio calculation process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-7 (thirteenth). First, in step 1637-7-1 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of ratio calculations in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Next, in step 1637-7-2 (thirteenth), the data set in the predetermined register in step 1637-7-1 (thirteenth) (the data here is data regarding the calculation number of the advantageous section ratio). get. Next, a predetermined comparison operation is performed on the data acquired in step 1637-7-3 (thirteenth), and it is determined whether the calculation number is related to the calculation of the advantageous section ratio. If it is determined in step 1637-7-3 (13th) that the calculation number is not related to the advantageous section ratio (determined No), then in step 1637-7-4 (13th), the calculation number is stored in a predetermined register. 400 Set the data (for example, 2 bytes) stored in the game counter, determine whether the data value at this time is "0", and if the data value is "0", in other words Then, if the number of games played at this time is a multiple of 400 games (if determined as Yes), in step 1637-7-5 (13th), the address data of the ratio calculation address table previously stored in the second ROM is is set in the specified register. Thereafter, in step 1637-7-6 (thirteenth), predetermined arithmetic processing for calculating a ratio is performed on the set address data.

Thereafter, in step 1637-7-7 (thirteenth), the data obtained by the arithmetic processing is set in the same register in which the data obtained in step 1637-7-2 (thirteenth) was set. Thereafter, in step 1637-7-8 (thirteenth), it is determined whether the ratio is 100% based on the data obtained by the calculation process, and if the ratio is 100%, step 1637- In Step 7-9 (13th), as described above, the data for displaying the ratio at 99% is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the same register in which the data acquired in Step 1637-7-2 (13th) was set) may be used. ) (because the ratio segment SH20 is 2 digits). Thereafter, in step 1637-7-10 (thirteenth), the obtained ratio data is stored in the HL register and the process proceeds to the next step.

In addition, in the case of Yes in step 1637-7-3 (13th), the process moves to step 1637-7-5 (13th), and in the case of No in step 1637-7-4 (13th), The process moves to step 1637-7-9 (thirteenth), and if No in step 1637-7-8 (thirteenth), the process moves to step 1637-7-10 (thirteenth).

Next, in step 1637-8 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a ratio display process. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of the subroutine of the ratio display process by the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1637-8 (13th). First, in step 1637-8-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the ratio display number in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. At this time, it is assumed that the data of the LED display counter is stored in, for example, the D register. Next, in step 1637-8-2 (13th), it is determined whether or not a display request for 1000 digits in the performance display device SH has been received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that a display request for 1000 digits in the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-3 (13th), it is determined whether or not a display request for 100 digits in the performance display device SH has been received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that a request to display 100 digits on the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-4 (13th), the data stored in the D register is obtained and a specified calculation process is performed. Next, in step 1637-8-5 (13th), it is determined based on the data stored in the D register whether a request to display 1 digit on the performance display device SH has been received. If it is determined that a request to display 1 digit on the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-6 (13th), a logical AND operation is performed on the data stored in the register in which the ratio display number is set (for example, an operation such as swapping the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits).

Next, in step 1637-8-7 (thirteenth), the address of the ratio display segment data table is set in a specific register (for example, the HL register). Next, in step 1637-8-8 (thirteenth), predetermined arithmetic processing is performed on the data stored in the HL register, and data obtained by the arithmetic operation is obtained. Next, in step 1637-8-9 (thirteenth), data related to the flashing request flag stored in advance is stored in a predetermined register, and the process moves to the next process.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart in FIG. 145, next, in step 1637-9 (13th), the main control board M returns to the call source of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1638, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt termination process, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned unrecoverable error processing.

<<Variation 1 of processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Next, a variation will be described in which the calculation processing of information to be displayed on the performance display device SH, or the display processing to display information on the performance display device SH, is processed in the second ROM/RAM area. As variation 1 of <<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> in the tenth embodiment (sometimes referred to as variation 1 from the tenth embodiment), it is possible to configure it to be executed, for example, in the game progress control processing of the main control board M (Figures 16 to 18). Below, a variation of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area will be described.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third page) related to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 14 in modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment. Note that a detailed explanation of the same processing as in FIG. 18 will be omitted. Further, since the contents of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area (other than the display processing on the performance display device SH) are the same as those in the tenth embodiment, a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that unlike the tenth embodiment in which the processing in the second ROM/RAM area is executed by interrupt processing, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the processing in the second ROM/RAM area regarding the performance display device SH is executed. It is executed in main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side, which is different from interrupt processing).

In FIG. 148, the calculation process of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH is configured to be executed after the game zone transition control process of step 3500 is performed. Note that the timing of the calculation process of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH is not limited to this timing. As long as it is within the main loop processing, it may be executed, for example, before the game zone transition control process of step 3500 is performed.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> To explain the flowchart, in step 3500, after the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes the game section transition control process, in step 3501, the CPU 100 of the main control board M As a process in the first ROM/RAM area, a count upper limit check process in the second ROM/RAM area is called.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 3501-1 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a count upper limit check process. Next, in step 3501-2 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game count process. Next, in step 3501-3 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an advantageous section game count process. Next, in step 3501-4 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-5 (13th) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a process of counting the number of paid out accessories. Next, in step 3501-6 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous accessory payout number counting process. Next, in step 3501-7 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes a ratio calculation process. Next, in step 3501-8 (13th) (variation 1), the CPU 100 of the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

In this way, in the first modified example from the tenth embodiment, the calculation process related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (calculation process of the information to be displayed on the performance display device SH), which is a process in the second ROM/RAM area, is configured to be executed as a main loop process. In addition, although details will be described later, the display process on the performance display device SH, which is a process in the second ROM/RAM area, is configured to be executed as an interrupt process.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1293, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game end process and moves on to the next process.

Next, FIG. 149 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in a first modified example from the tenth embodiment. The content of the display processing on the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM/RAM area, is the same as in the tenth embodiment, so details are omitted.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Specifically, if the update status of the built-in random number is normal (Yes) in step 1636, in step 1637 (13th) (variation 2), the CPU C100 of the main control board M calls the ratio display process of the second ROM/RAM area as the processing in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1637-1 (13th) (variation 2), the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the ratio display process. Next, in step 1637-2 (13th) (variation 2), the CPU C100 of the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>> Next, in step 1638, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt termination process, and moves on to the next process.

In this way, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, as processing related to the performance display device SH, which is processing in the second ROM/RAM area, arithmetic processing related to items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is performed in the main loop processing. Run as,
The display processing on the performance display device SH is configured to be executed as an interrupt processing.

With this configuration, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the display processing to the performance display device SH that needs to be constantly executed (updated) is executed by interrupt processing, while the constant processing By configuring the calculation processing related to items displayed on the performance display device SH that do not need to be executed (updated) to be executed for each game as main loop processing, the amount of data used can be reduced without executing unnecessary processing. can be reduced.

<<<<Tenth embodiment: Test display of performance display device SH>>> Next, the test display of the performance display device SH will be described. In the tenth embodiment and a first modified example from the tenth embodiment, the configuration relating to the display on the performance display device SH is configured to have a test display mode for checking whether any problems have occurred in the segments of the performance display device SH (for example, whether the lit parts of the segments are lit evenly, etc.). The configuration of the test display mode applicable to the gaming machine of this example will be described in detail below.

The test display mode of the performance display device SH is configured to be executed (displayed) at the following times: (1) Display starts when the power is turned on, and ends within 5 seconds. (2) Display starts when the setting change device control process starts (start of setting change mode), and ends within 5 seconds. (3) Display starts when the setting check mode starts, and is constantly displayed during the setting check mode. (4) Display starts when the gaming machine detects an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M, and is displayed until the error (abnormality) is resolved.

Figure 150 is an example of a test display on the performance display device SH when the performance display device SH is in test display mode. First, test display pattern 1 will be described. Test display pattern 1 illustrates a case where a test display is executed when the power is turned on. As described above, when a test display is executed when the power is turned on, it is preferable to end the display within 5 seconds from the start of the display, but this figure illustrates a case where the test display ends 5 seconds after the display starts.

<<10th Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 1>> Test display pattern 1 consists of a lighting pattern (a), a lighting pattern (b), and a lighting pattern (c) (this is when the test display ends). It is configured with three display modes (display mode). The lighting pattern (a) is a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Furthermore, the lighting pattern (b) is also a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit, and the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are executed alternately. As a result, all the segments, including the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20, are lit at least once, and the structure is such that it is possible to discover segments that are malfunctioning and do not light up. Note that the lighting patterns constituting the test display pattern are not limited to (a) and (b), but as a test display, at least the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 ( It is preferable that the lighting pattern is a display mode in which all segments (segments) are lit (it is also possible to use a display mode in which two lighting patterns are combined so that all the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit).

In addition, the test display pattern 1 is configured so that, for example, the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are displayed alternately in the order of (a) → (b) → (a) ..., and the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds. Then, starting from the timing when the power is turned on (0 seconds), the test display of the performance display device SH is ended when the display mode of the off pattern (c) which notifies the end of the test display is displayed 5 seconds later. Note that, since the lighting period of each lighting pattern in the test display pattern 1 is 0.5 seconds, for example, the period from (a) → (b) → (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 1 second, and the number of lighting cycles that can be test displayed in the 5-second test display period is 5, that is, the number of lighting cycles is an integer, the test display is ended after the display mode of the lighting pattern (b) is displayed for 0.5 seconds.

Although the figure shows an example of turning off the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 as shown in (c) when the test display is finished, the present invention is not limited to this. First, when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to be displayed in the display pattern described above with reference to FIG. 143 (for example, display starts from (a) in FIG. 143).

<<10th embodiment: Test display of performance display device SH: Modification of test display pattern 1>> A modification of the test display as a configuration of the performance display device SH that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example is described in detail below.

It is assumed that the lighting period of each of the lighting patterns (a) and (b) illustrated in FIG. 143 is 1 second. With this setting, the period from (a) to (b) to (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 2 seconds, and when 2 lighting cycles are completed, 4 seconds have passed, and the next lighting cycle (3rd lighting cycle) is 2 seconds. (lighting cycle) cannot be executed to the end. In such a case, execute the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) twice and finish the test display. In other words, the last lighting cycle that can be executed within 5 seconds is The test display may be configured to end when the test display is executed, or after the lighting cycle of (a) → (b) → (a) is executed twice, the test display is performed by lighting at (a) for 1 second. In other words, the lighting cycle may be repeatedly executed for a predetermined period of 5 seconds, and the test display may be terminated at the timing when the 5 seconds have elapsed.

<<Tenth embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 2>> Next, test display pattern 2 will be described. Test display pattern 2 is executed during setting confirmation mode or during an error related to an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M. Note that the game machine of this example may be configured to execute a test display during all errors (or some of the errors) that may occur.

Test display pattern 2 is composed of three display modes: on pattern (d), on pattern (e), and off pattern (c) (display mode at the end of the test display). On pattern (d) is a display mode in which all lit areas of identification segment SH10 and ratio segment SH20 are lit. On pattern (e) is a display mode in which all lit areas of identification segment SH10 and ratio segment SH20 are turned off. In this way, by alternately executing on pattern (d) and on pattern (e) as the test display pattern, all segments of identification segment SH10 and ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once, and it is configured to be possible to find segments that are not lit due to a malfunction.

Further, the test display pattern 2 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) are lit alternately as (d) → (e) → (d)... , the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.3 seconds. Then, starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered (0 seconds), test display is performed alternately for 0.3 seconds in the order of (d)→(e)→(d), etc. Note that when the setting confirmation mode ends at a predetermined timing (in this case, 3.1 seconds after the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered), the test display also ends. That is, the test display ends at the timing when the test display end condition is met, regardless of the timing of the lighting cycle.

In the figure, when the test display is completed, the discrimination segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are turned off as shown in (c), but this is not limited to the above, and when the test display is completed, the display may be configured to display the display pattern described above in FIG. 143 (for example, the display may start from (a) in FIG. 143).

<<Test display pattern 3 of tenth embodiment performance display device SH>> Next, FIG. 151 shows test display pattern 3. In comparison with test display pattern 1 and test display pattern 2, a test display when the timings at which test displays can be executed overlap will be described as test display pattern 3. Note that the display manner of the lighting patterns in the test display, the lighting period of each lighting pattern, etc. are the same as those of the test display pattern 1 and the test display pattern 2. FIG. 151 will be described in detail below.

First, to explain the period during which test display pattern 3 is performed, it is similar to test display pattern 1 in that the timing when the power is turned on is used as the starting point (0 seconds). Then, the setting confirmation mode is entered within 5 seconds after the power is turned on (here, the timing is 2.7 seconds after the power is turned on). That is, before the test display that has started to be executed when the power is turned on ends due to the passage of time, the start conditions for a new test display are satisfied with the start of the setting confirmation mode as a trigger. After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (here, 3.1 seconds after the setting confirmation mode starts), the setting confirmation mode ends and the test display appears. The process ends.

In test display pattern 3, since the setting confirmation mode is entered 2.7 seconds after the timing when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation mode does not start at the end timing of the lighting cycle described above. Even in such a case, if the test display starts with the start of the setting confirmation mode, the performance display device SH is configured to light up as a test display from the first timing of the lighting cycle. More specifically, lighting for 0.5 seconds (a) → lighting for 0.5 seconds (b) → lighting for 0.5 seconds (a) → lighting for 0.5 seconds (b) → Lights up for 0.5 seconds (a) → lights up for 0.2 seconds (b) → lights up for 0.3 seconds (a) → lights up for 0.3 seconds (b) due to setting confirmation mode Lights up→...→The test display is executed as if the test display had ended due to the completion of the setting confirmation mode.

<<10th embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Variation example 1>> In test display pattern 3 in this configuration, the period from the time the power is turned on to the end of the setting confirmation mode is 2.7 seconds + 3.1 seconds = 5.8 seconds, which exceeds the range of 5 seconds which is the test period after power is turned on. However, if the setting confirmation mode ends earlier, for example, if the period of the test display related to the setting confirmation mode is 1.5 seconds, the period from the time the power is turned on to the end of the setting confirmation mode is 2.7 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 4.2 seconds, which does not exceed the range of 5 seconds which is the test period after power is turned on. In such a situation, the test display may be configured not to be executed from the end of the setting check mode until the end of the test display period after power-on (the test display may be ended when the setting check mode is ended regardless of the end timing of the setting check mode), or the test display after power-on may be resumed for 0.8 seconds, which is the remaining period of the test display period after power-on (until 5 seconds have passed since power-on), or the test display after power-on may be resumed until the end of the test display triggered by power-on. Note that when the test display after power-on is resumed, for example, the test display may be performed for 0.8 seconds from (a) → (b) → (a) ... according to the display mode of the test display pattern 1, starting from the end of the setting check mode (at this time, it is determined that the test display in the setting check mode has ended and the power has been turned on again, but the test display period is newly set to 0.8 seconds instead of 5 seconds).

<<Tenth embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Variation 2>> The configuration in which the test displays overlap, exemplified as Variation 2 of test display pattern 3 in this configuration, is merely one example and is applicable to all combinations in which overlapping test displays are executed.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, (1) the display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds; and (2) the display starts when the settings change device control process starts (the start of the settings change mode). , the display ends within 5 seconds (3) The display starts when the setting confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the setting confirmation mode. (4) The display ends when the gaming machine detects an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M. Although the configuration is configured such that four test displays such as those described above can be executed after the display starts and are displayed until the error (abnormality) is resolved, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one or more of the test displays described above can be executed. It may be configured to obtain. It should be noted that even in such a configuration, any of the configurations related to the test display described above may be applied.

Furthermore, the test display in (3) above may be configured to execute a similar test display during the setting change mode and during the setting confirmation mode (the test display ends when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends). Furthermore, the 5-second display period for (1) and (2) above is merely an example, and there is no problem if the time value is changed.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the lighting pattern in (1) above and the lighting pattern in (3) above are different lighting patterns, but the lighting pattern is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern (lighting time/lighting out time) is the same. You can also use it as

Note that the lighting pattern of the test display can be a pattern other than the one described above, but it is preferable to configure it so that it can be distinguished from the normal lighting pattern described above in FIG. 143 (so that the administrator can visually recognize it) (by making the period for switching the lighting mode different, by making the segments that are lit different, etc.).

Note that even when the performance display device SH is executing a test display, the configuration is such that calculation processing of items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (calculation processing of information displayed on the performance display device SH) can be executed. Good too. As a specific example of such a configuration, the following configuration may be used. (1) A power outage occurs → (2) Accepts the operation of the final stop reel → (3) Executes power outage processing before executing calculation processing of items displayed on the performance display device SH → (4) Gaming machine The power supply to becomes 0 → (5) Recovery from power-off → (6) Performance display device SH enters test display mode → (7) Calculation of items to be displayed on performance display device SH during test display mode Execute the process → (8) End the test display mode → (9) Display on the performance display device SH the information that is currently displayed on the performance display device SH, corresponding to the latest calculation result. The information displayed on the performance display device SH is the information after the arithmetic processing has been performed, so it may be different from the information before the power outage occurs. In addition, even if a power outage occurs after receiving the final stop reel, if the power outage processing is executed before executing the calculation processing of the items displayed on the performance display device SH, then (3) above or later. follows the same flow.

<<Eleventh Embodiment: Configuration related to cancellation/automatic settlement>> As a configuration applicable to the gaming machine of this example, a configuration related to a gaming machine that can execute game progress suitable for the business format desired by the administrator of the gaming hall. are detailed below.

Examples of the business formats of game arcades include (1) quantitative: when a predetermined number of balls are won, game progress stops and operation of the gaming machines for that day is terminated; (2) one-time exchange: game ends once at a specific timing; and (3) lucky number system: if a specific bonus is awarded, game can continue, but if a specific bonus is awarded, game ends once. Various business formats such as these are possible. Gaming machines that can set and implement caps and automatic settlements are suitable as a configuration for gaming machines that can realize such business formats.

Furthermore, "stopping" means stopping the progress of the game when a predetermined condition is met, and "automatic settlement" means stopping the progress of the game when a specific condition is met. It is important to carry out the task without doing anything. Furthermore, stopping the progress of the game means that acceptance of the start lever operation becomes invalid, or that bets become invalid (game medals cannot be inserted due to the blocker being turned off, and acceptance of the bet button operation is invalidated). It is.

Here, as an example of the action when a game is stopped after a certain game has ended, the reels related to a certain game start to rotate, then a stopping operation is performed to stop each reel, and finally a stopping operation is performed on the reel that is still rotating (here, the right reel M53), and the reel drive state of the right reel M53 changes from a reel deceleration standby state to a reel deceleration state (the pattern to be stopped and the passing pattern match), the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is set to 100 (a value equivalent to approximately 223.5 ms), and the four-phase excitation of the step motor is then turned on. Thereafter, the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is decremented by an interrupt process executed while the four-phase excitation is turned on. (1) If the certain game is a game in which no game medals are paid out, the stopping process is not executed when the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is 90 or more (between 100 and 90), but is executed when it becomes less than 90. If the certain game is a game in which game medals are paid out, the stopping process is executed after the payout of the game medals has ended (after the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter has reached 0). (2) Regardless of whether the certain game is a game in which no game medals are paid out or not, the stopping process is executed after the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter has reached 0 (after the payout of the game medals has ended). The above configuration may be adopted. In addition, when configured as in (1) above, since there is a possibility that the reel is moving (spinning) between the time when the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter goes from 100 to 90, the game can be configured not to execute the stop processing, and to execute the stop processing after the reel goes below 90, at which point it is completely stopped. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reel has stopped and the game is over, and allows the player to recognize more quickly that it is not necessary to insert a game medal for the next game.

Furthermore, the settlement process related to automatic settlement (the settlement process executed when certain conditions are met) and the settlement process executed by operating the settlement button may be configured to be executable as the same process, or may be configured to be executable as separate, different processes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, a configuration related to cancellation and automatic settlement applicable to this example will be described in detail.

First, the predetermined conditions for the stoppage that can be selected in this example are (1) none, (2) when all applicable BBs end, (3) when BB1 ends, (4) when BB2 ends, (5) difference in number of coins exceeds 500 coins, (6) difference in number of coins exceeds 1000 coins, (7) when 3 or more AT sets end, and (8) when a specific AT ends.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for automatic settlement that can be selected in this example are configured to be selectable from nine items: (1) none, (2) when all applicable BBs end, (3) when BB1 ends, (4) when BB2 ends, (5) difference in number of sheets is more than 500 sheets, (6) difference in number of sheets is more than 1000 sheets, (7) when 3 or more AT sets end, (8) when a specific AT ends, and (9) when the game is stopped.

Regarding (5) and (6) above, if the difference in the number of coins exceeds the specified number and the player is in an advantageous state such as during a BB or during an advantageous period, the advantageous state It may be configured such that it is determined that a predetermined condition or a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the process ends. Further, in this example, the difference number of sheets is set to 500 sheets or 1000 sheets, but the configuration may be such that the administrator can set an arbitrary number of sheets. In addition, to count the difference number of sheets, a counter (sometimes referred to as MY counter, difference number counter) capable of counting the maximum number of difference sheets in one advantageous section, which will force the end of the advantageous section, is provided, The counter may be used to count the difference in number of sheets, or a counter dedicated to counting the difference in number of sheets controlled by a main control board M different from the counter may be used. Further, instead of the difference number of sheets exceeding 500 or the difference number of sheets exceeding 1000 sheets, the predetermined condition may be set to the difference number of sheets 500 or more or the difference number of sheets 1000 or more.

In addition, since the MY counter is updated only with the number of bets of 1, for example, if the number of bets of 1 is set to "3", the counter value of the MY counter will be canceled as a result of playing a prescribed game with 3 coins. Although the number of coins obtained has reached 500 coins, the actual number of coins acquired may be less than 500 coins because the game was executed with a bet other than 3 coins before the reaching timing. If the configuration is such that discontinuation is performed based on the counter value of the MY counter, discontinuation may occur even if the actual number of acquired coins is small, as described above. Therefore, by providing a counter related to the difference number of coins that is separate from the MY counter and counting the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for any number of bets, it is possible to ensure consistency between the actual number of coins acquired and the execution of cancellation. . Furthermore, since 2-bet bet games (games other than 3-bet bets) are disadvantageous games for the player by design, the 2-bet bet game may be viewed as some kind of cheating/fraud and be stopped based on the MY counter. .

Regarding (7) above, for example, it is preferable that three or more sets of AT (or ART) continue and the timing is set at the end of the AT and advantageous sections. Furthermore, in the case of having an AT that is not so-called set number management, the condition may be such that the game continues for a predetermined number of games or more.

The specific AT in (8) above may be an AT that is relatively advantageous to the player, such as an AT that is likely to allow the player to win a predetermined number of game medals or more (e.g., 500 or more).

In addition, information regarding the predetermined conditions under which limiting is executed and the specific conditions under which automatic settlement is executed is stored in a specific RAM area (dedicated RAM area), and the specific RAM area is referenced when the power is turned on to determine the predetermined conditions and the specific conditions. The dedicated RAM area is configured to be provided in the first ROM/RAM area.

Note that the timing for determining the predetermined condition and the specific condition by referring to a specific RAM area is not limited to only when the power is turned on, but also when the setting change mode ends, or when the termination/automatic payment setting mode is used. , when the setting/reset button M30 is operated, when selecting a decision item during the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode, or it may be configured to be able to be decided at a plurality of timings.

In addition, the method of changing the predetermined conditions and the specific conditions stored in the specific RAM area is configured to allow the settings to be changed by operating a stop button or the like during the setting change mode.

Note that the predetermined conditions and specific conditions illustrated in FIG. 152 are just examples, and the number of types (number of options) may be changed. Further, it may be configured to be determined based on only one item as a condition, or may be configured to be determined based on a plurality of items as a condition.

As a modification example of the predetermined condition or the specific condition, the following configuration may be used. (1) A predetermined bonus that is satisfied when the predetermined bonus is within the specified bonus (as a result of an internal lottery, the condition device related to the predetermined bonus is determined and the symbol combination related to the condition device is not stopped and displayed) This is suitable when the internal situation is relatively disadvantageous for the player (the expected value of game medals is negative (the number of coins put in is greater than the number of coins paid out), the probability of winning AT is low, etc.) be. (2) During the execution of the predetermined bonus, which is satisfied when the predetermined bonus starts, the player is in a relatively disadvantageous state (the expected value of game medals is negative (the number of inserted medals is higher than the number of medals paid out). This is suitable when the winning probability of AT is low). (3) Suitable when the probability of winning a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone in a normal zone that is satisfied when transitioning from a normal zone to an advantageous zone is high (for example, 99/100).

Next, referring to Figures 153 to 155, an example of how to change the predetermined conditions and the specific conditions will be described in detail.

First, Figure 153 is an image diagram of the transition between each mode. When switching to the setting change mode, "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" is displayed on the performance display device S40, as shown in (a) in the figure. After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the performance display device S40 displays the aforementioned options for the specified conditions as "Limit Setting Mode," as shown in (b) in the figure. Note that in (b), as no limit has been set, the specified condition is "None," and the cursor has selected "1 None." Note that if the specified condition is set to "None," the limit will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, the options for the specific conditions described above are displayed as the "automatic payment setting mode" on the effect display device S40, as shown in (c) in the figure. Note that in (c), automatic payment is not set, so the specific condition is set to "none", and the cursor also selects "1 none". Note that if the specific condition is set to "none", automatic payment will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (d) in the figure, "1: Absent" and "2: Present" are set as the "notification setting mode" on the effect display device S40. If "None" is determined as the "notification setting mode", even if the cancellation or automatic payment is made, the effect display device S40 will not issue a notification regarding the cancellation or automatic payment, and the "notification setting mode" will not be executed. If "Yes" is determined as "Yes", the effect display device S40 is configured to issue a notification regarding the cancellation or automatic settlement in the event of cancellation or automatic settlement.

Note that when the mode is changed by operating the right stop button D43, the cursor position may be configured to select "1 None" at the top, or may be configured to select the currently determined predetermined condition or specific It may be configured to select a condition or notification setting mode setting.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the mode will again change to the "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" (a) in the figure, and thereafter, each time the right stop button D43 is operated, the mode will change in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) ....

In addition, in this example, although the structure which uses the right stop button D43 as an operation member related to a mode transition was illustrated, it is an example to the last, and there is no problem also in the left stop button D41 or the middle stop button D42.

Next, FIG. 154 is an image diagram of in-mode item selection. This figure exemplifies the configuration related to the operation when selecting an item within one mode in the "stop/automatic payment setting mode" described above in FIG. 153.

By switching to the setting change mode and operating the right stop button D43 while the "Limit/Automatic Settlement Setting Mode" is displayed, the performance display device S40 displays the aforementioned options for the specified conditions as the "Limit Setting Mode" as shown in (e) in the figure (similar to (b) in Figure 153). Note that in (b), as no limit has been set, the specified condition is "None" and the cursor has selected "1 None". Note that if the specified condition is set to "None", the limit will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the middle stop button D42, the cursor in the "stop setting mode" moves as shown in (f) in the figure, and "2 When all target BBs are completed" is selected.

Thereafter, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (g) in the figure, the options for the specific conditions described above are displayed as the "automatic payment setting mode" on the effect display device S40. Note that in (g), automatic payment is not set, so the specific condition is set to "None", and the cursor also selects "1 None". Note that if the specific condition is set to "none", automatic payment will not be executed.

Thereafter, by operating the left stop button D41, the options of the predetermined conditions described above are displayed as the "stop setting mode" on the effect display device S40, as shown in (h) in the figure. That is, each time the right stop button D43 is operated, the mode changes in the order of "stop/automatic payment setting mode" → "stop setting mode" → "automatic payment setting mode" → "notification setting mode" → "stop/automatic payment setting mode". The mode is configured to change to the previous mode by operating the left stop button D41. Furthermore, by operating the middle stop button D42, the cursor in the current mode can be moved (in this example, it is moved down one level). In addition, since the cursor selected "2 When all target BBs are completed" in (f), the cursor also selected "2 When all target BBs are completed" when transitioning to (h). Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cursor may be configured to always select an initial position (such as "1 None") when a new mode transitions.

In addition, the method of determining the setting of the predetermined condition, the specific condition, and the presence or absence of a notification in Fig. 153 and Fig. 154 (the method of changing the information stored in the specific RAM) may be configured as follows: (1) The item selected by the cursor at the time of the mode transition is determined. (2) The item is determined when the cursor continues to be selected for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds). (3) The item selected by the cursor while in each mode is determined by accepting the operation of a predetermined operating member (such as the start lever). (4) The item selected by the cursor while in each mode is determined by a setting confirmation operation during the setting change mode (e.g., accepting the operation of the start lever). (5) The item selected by the cursor while in each mode is determined by turning the setting key switch from on to off as an operation to end the setting change mode. The above configurations may be configured.

Also, in a state where settings related to the limit (setting of a specified condition, sometimes referred to as setting of the limit function) and settings related to automatic settlement (setting of a specific condition, sometimes referred to as setting of the automatic settlement function) are possible, such as the "limit/automatic settlement setting mode" exemplified in FIG. 153 and FIG. 154, whether the limit function is enabled and whether the automatic settlement function is enabled when determined in the current situation may be displayed on a display unit (e.g., the payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M. As an example of a display mode, the validity/invalidity of the limit function may be displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270, with "A" indicating validity and "F" indicating invalidity, and the validity/invalidity of the automatic settlement function may be displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270. More specifically, the display mode is as follows. Stop function: Enabled, Automatic settlement function: Enabled, Payout number display D270 displays "AA" Stop function: Enabled, Automatic settlement function: Disabled, Payout number display D270 displays "AF" Stop function: Disabled, Automatic settlement function: Enabled, Payout number display D270 displays "FA" Stop function: Disabled, Automatic settlement function: Disabled, Payout number display D270 displays "FF"

The display of whether the limit function and the automatic settlement function are enabled or disabled as described above may be configured to be displayed in the limit/automatic settlement setting mode before the limit function and the automatic settlement function are determined. In such a configuration, for example, when a value other than "1 None" is selected in the limit setting mode, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "A", when "1 None" is selected in the limit setting mode, the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "F", when a value other than "1 None" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "A", and when "1 None" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 will be "F".

In addition, when the validity/invalidity of the limit function and the automatic settlement function is determined, the above-mentioned validity/invalidity of the limit function and the automatic settlement function may be displayed. In such a configuration, for example, when a value other than "1 None" is determined in the limit setting mode, "A" is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the determination, when "1 None" is determined in the limit setting mode, "F" is displayed in the tens digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time from the determination, when a value other than "1 None" is determined in the automatic settlement setting mode, "A" is displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time from the determination, and when "1 None" is determined in the automatic settlement setting mode, "F" is displayed in the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 for a predetermined time from the determination.

Note that the above-mentioned display of validity/invalidity of the cancellation function and the automatic payment function may be configured to be displayed on a display section controlled by the main control board M other than the payout number display device D270. Further, the display mode is just an example, and may be displayed in a display mode that is not used for displaying the number of game medals to be paid out, displaying the push order navigation, displaying credits, etc. as appropriate.

In addition, when displaying the validity/invalidity of the cancellation function and automatic payment function as described above on the display section controlled by the main control board M, the display section controlled by the sub-control board S (for example, The effect display device S40) may also be configured to (at the same time) display an indication of whether the cancellation function and the automatic payment function are valid or invalid. In the case of such a configuration, the display mode on the display unit controlled by the sub-control board S is appropriately displayed in a display mode that makes it easy for the administrator of the game hall to recognize whether the cancellation function and automatic payment function are enabled or disabled. You may.

Next, FIG. 155 shows the effect display device in the case where the "notification setting mode" is determined to "2 Yes" and the "termination setting mode" is determined to "3 At the end of BB1", when the suspension actually occurs. It is a display image diagram in S40.

As shown in the figure, the performance display device S40 displays a message "BB1 ends" which triggered the cancellation, and a display "300 medals acquired" which is the number of game medals obtained in BB1. When the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes", the message "Please call an attendant during suspension" will be displayed. In this way, when the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 Yes", by notifying the player that the game has been discontinued, the player can proceed with the game without being confused. Although not shown, even when automatic payment is executed, the effect display device S40 is configured to be able to display information indicating that automatic payment has been executed.

Note that the configuration of the operating members illustrated in the eleventh embodiment is just an example, and any combination of operating members that are controlled by the main control board M may be used.

In addition, the method for canceling the limit when play is stopped can be configured so that it cannot be cancelled by the player but can be cancelled by the administrator, and may be configured so that it can be cancelled by opening the front door DU (turning the key for opening the front door DU from OFF to ON) or by operating the setting/reset button M30, for example.

Furthermore, when automatic payment is executed, the configuration may be such that the game can be played (game medals can be inserted) as soon as the payment is completed, in the same way as when the player operates the payment switch. , The game may be configured to be playable after the administrator performs an operation, similar to the case of stopping the game.

153 to 155 are merely examples, and other conditions for transition may be (1) transition to the setting confirmation mode, (2) pressing and holding the set/reset button M30 (e.g., keeping it on for 3 seconds) when all reels are stopped, or (3) opening the front door DU and operating any of the operating members controlled by the main control board M. Note that when configured as in (2) or (3) above, the game arcade can transition to the limit/automatic settlement setting mode even while the arcade is open, and settings related to limit and automatic settlement can be switched.

In addition, the information in the specific RAM area mentioned above may be configured to be cleared when a setting change is made, or it may be configured not to be cleared.

<Other applicable configurations related to caps and automatic settlement> Configurations related to caps and automatic settlement that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example are described in detail below. It should be noted that one or more of the configurations described in detail below can be applied to all embodiments of this example.

It may be configured such that the process of termination and automatic settlement is executed after the process related to lighting/extinguishing the advantageous section indicator YH is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to match the lighting or extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH with the game section of the next game.

If the difference in number of coins is equal to or greater than a specified value (for example, 500 coins) and the situation advantageous to the player ends, the difference in number of coins is set to satisfy the predetermined condition or the specific condition. If the discontinuation flag or automatic settlement flag is turned on when the value exceeds the value, and the difference in the number of coins falls below the specified value again before the situation that is advantageous to the player ends (for example, an advantageous section), the discontinuation flag is turned on. Alternatively, the automatic payment flag may be configured to be turned off (cancellation or automatic payment is not executed), or may be left on (cancellation or automatic payment is executed). As a specific example, set one of the following as a predetermined condition: "5. Number of difference sheets is over 500 sheets", "6. Number of difference sheets is over 1000 sheets", "5. Number of difference sheets is 500 sheets or more", "6. Number of difference sheets is 1000 sheets or more" ( Even if a certain game is executed and the difference in the number of coins satisfies a predetermined condition, if a certain game is completed and the specified bonus is being executed (sometimes referred to as a predetermined gaming state) after the completion of the certain game. In some cases, the termination process may not be executed immediately (by turning on the flag), but may be configured to be executed when the predetermined bonus ends.

When a game is configured to stop due to a limit or automatic settlement, if a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed in a game that is limited to a limit or automatic settlement, the game may be configured to stop or automatically settle before an automatic bet related to the replay is executed, or the game may be configured to stop or automatically settle after an automatic bet is executed.

Even if play is stopped due to a limit or automatic settlement, a menu screen or QR code may be displayed by the player operating an operating member controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the sub-input button SB. By configuring it in this way, even if play is stopped due to a limit without the player realizing that play will be stopped, the game history can be saved without any problems. Furthermore, when configured in this way, data related to the game history may be retained even if a power outage occurs.

If the system is configured so that a standby screen can be displayed when a predetermined time has passed without operating any operating member (without progressing in the game) from the start of the display of an end screen (bonus end screen, advantageous zone end screen, AT end screen, etc.) that notifies the player that a favorable state has ended, the system may be configured so that if the end screen is displayed when the game is stopped due to a limit, the standby screen is not displayed even after the predetermined time has passed. Also, if a power outage occurs while the end screen is being displayed, the system may be configured so that a normal screen (a screen different from the end screen and standby screen) or the standby screen is displayed after power is restored.

If the game is configured to meet the conditions for outputting external signals related to cancellation or automatic settlement when the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, the external signal will be output even if the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement. may be configured to be continuous.

If the game is configured to stop due to cancellation or automatic payment, when the game is stopped, the lamp unit will be lit in red and the back lamp will be turned off, etc., so that the game center manager can easily recognize the stoppage of the game. It may be configured to turn on and off in a lighting mode that is easily distinguishable from when the vehicle is moving (a combination of the lighting mode of the lamp unit and the lighting mode of the back lamp).

The audio data during settlement may be the same or different for settlement performed by the player operating the settlement button and for automatic settlement.

In a situation where one or more game medals are electronically stored in the credit and one or more game medals have been bet, (1) when automatic settlement is executed, both the game medals as credit and bet are settled, and when settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, both the game medals as credit and bet are settled. (2) When automatic settlement is executed, both the game medals as credit and bet are settled, and when settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, only the game medals bet are settled. (3) When automatic settlement is executed, both the game medals as credit and bet are settled, and when settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, only the game medals stored in the credit are settled.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154, if the conditions for ending the termination/automatic settlement setting mode are met during the setting in the termination/automatic settlement setting mode (when the game starts, a power outage occurs) (e.g.), it may be configured to execute a process to confirm the item that was being selected (selected by the cursor) in the cancellation/automatic payment setting mode.

It may be configured to have a mechanical switch that can be physically switched on and off. As an example, a mechanical switch for limiting play and a mechanical switch for automatic settlement may be provided, and in such a configuration, the predetermined condition and the specific condition may be conditions that are predefined in the gaming machine. In addition, a mechanical switch related to limiting play or automatic settlement may be provided, and the limiting play or automatic settlement may be set in the limiting play/automatic settlement setting mode described above (can be set by software). Note that, in the case of having a mechanical switch, the execution condition for limiting play or automatic settlement is set when the switch is turned from off to on.

The gaming machine according to this example is configured to display an error on a display section (for example, the payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M when an error is detected (for example, when an input medal retention error is detected). However, (1) If the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, the relevant display section will not display that the game has stopped. (2) If the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement. (3) When the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, the display section displays the same display mode as when the error was detected. The display may be configured as described above.

If a predetermined error (e.g., inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of automatic payment processing, the execution of the payment processing is stopped and a predetermined error state is set (notification regarding the predetermined error is made). It may also be configured to execute In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the payout sensor detects the first payout of game medals after detecting a predetermined error (one game medal is turned on and off by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). It may be configured such that the payout related to the settlement process is stopped immediately after the payout is deemed to have been paid out.

If a specified error (for example, an error of inserted medals being stuck) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, the system may be configured to enter a specified error state (execute a notification related to the specified error) after the settlement process is completed. Furthermore, if configured in this way and game play is stopped (a stop-play process is executed) after the automatic settlement is executed, it is possible to execute a notification related to the stop of play (a notification related to the stop of play) even in the specified error state by entering a specified error state after the stop-play process is executed.

If a specified error (for example, an error of inserted medals being stuck) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to the automatic settlement, the system is configured to enter a specified error state (execute a notification related to the specified error) after the settlement process is completed, and if the game is configured to stop after the automatic settlement is executed (execute a stop-play process), the system may be configured to enter the specified error state before executing the stop-play process. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to quickly notify the user that an error state has occurred.

If a specific error (e.g., an inserted coin retention error) is detected after the reels have stopped for a game that will end, but before the game ending process is executed, a specific error state will be created after the game ending process is executed, making it possible to issue a notification related to the game ending (notification related to the game stopping) even in the specific error state.

If a specified error (e.g., an inserted coin retention error) is detected after the reels for the game that will end, but before the game ending process is executed, the system may be configured to enter a specified error state before the game ending process is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to quickly notify the user that an error state exists.

When the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the operation of the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S, such as the sub-input button SB, may be disabled.

When the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, it is preferable to configure the blocker to be turned off (game medals cannot pass through).

If a predetermined error (for example, inserted medal retention error) is detected in a situation where a notification related to cancellation or automatic settlement is being executed (for example, notified by the production control device S40), an error will occur. Notification may be performed and an external signal related to the error may be output. In addition, when executing an error notification in such a case, (1) terminate the notification related to cancellation or automatic payment and execute the error notification (the notification may be displayed on the effect display device S40 or by a speaker) (1-1) After that, if the error is cleared and the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the notification regarding cancellation or automatic payment will be restarted. (1-2) After that, if the error is canceled If the game is canceled and the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic payment, the notification regarding cancellation or automatic payment will not be restarted. (2) In order to be able to recognize both the notification regarding cancellation or automatic payment and the error notification, It may be configured as described above to notify the notification regarding cancellation or automatic payment and the error notification in different areas (or partially overlapping areas) of the effect display device S40. In addition, in this example, even if the game is stopped due to cancellation or automatic settlement, it is configured to be able to execute a process for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred.

In the limit/automatic settlement setting mode, in other words, even when any of the screens (a) to (d) in FIG. 153 is displayed on the performance display device S40, the volume and light intensity may be adjusted, or a new screen not shown in FIG. 153 (e.g., (e) different from (a) to (d)) may be provided, and the volume and light intensity may be adjusted while the new screen is displayed.

When a limit is being set (a situation in which a value other than "1 None" has been determined in the limit setting mode), the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects (effects that suggest the current setting value, and whose execution and frequency vary depending on the current setting value) may be configured to be relatively higher than when a limit is not being set (a situation in which a value other than "1 None" has been determined in the limit setting mode), and by configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play while the limit is being set.

If the predetermined conditions for executing the termination process and the specific conditions for executing the automatic settlement process are set as the same conditions, and if the same conditions are met, after the automatic settlement process is executed. It may be configured to execute a termination process. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is also possible to configure the system so that the stop processing is executed after the last game medal related to the automatic settlement process is paid out (passes the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). good.

If only the cancellation function is enabled (the predetermined conditions for cancellation are set, but the specific conditions for automatic payment are not set), or the predetermined conditions for cancellation and automatic payment processing are not set. In the case where the specific conditions to be executed are set as different conditions and the cancellation process is executed, the configuration may be such that the settlement process can be executed by operating the settlement button during the cancellation.

While the payment processing related to automatic payment is being executed, the payment processing by operating the payment button may not be executed (new payment processing may not be performed by operating the payment button).

Note that the situation in which the above-mentioned limit setting is in progress may be referred to as "the limit function is active," and the situation in which the above-mentioned limit setting is not in progress may be referred to as "the limit function is inactive" or "the limit function is not active." Furthermore, determining the specified conditions may be referred to as "satisfying the specified conditions," and the options for the specified conditions described above in FIG. 152 and the like may be referred to as "specific condition candidates," and the specific condition candidates may or may not include "1 None." Furthermore, satisfying the determined specified conditions may be referred to as "satisfying the specific conditions."

In addition, the predetermined conditions of "5. Difference number of coins exceeding 500 coins" and "6. Difference number of coins exceeding 1000 coins" described above in FIG. '', and the predetermined conditions of ``5. Difference number of coins 500 or more'' and ``6. Difference number of coins 1000 or more'' are ``the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number.'' It is sometimes called.

In addition, as described above in FIG. 152, in this example, the selection candidates for the predetermined conditions related to the cap (sometimes referred to as specific condition A selection candidates) and the selection candidates for the specific conditions related to automatic settlement (sometimes referred to as specific condition B selection candidates) are configured to overlap partially, but the selection candidates for the predetermined conditions related to the cap and the selection candidates for the specific conditions related to automatic settlement may be any of the above: (1) all candidates are different, (2) all candidates are the same, or (3) only partially the same. It should be noted that even when configured as in (2) or (3) above, the determined (set) predetermined conditions and the determined (set) specific conditions can be the same or different.

The above-mentioned stop function can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines. Specific examples of the stop processing include stopping the firing function (game balls will no longer be fired even if the firing handle D44 is operated) and disabling the entry of game balls into various ball entry ports (game balls will not be paid out even if a ball enters a winning port, or a random number will not be obtained even if a ball enters a ball entry port). Alternatives to the difference in number of coins in a reel-type gaming machine include the difference number obtained by accumulating the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out related to winning (the number of balls fired is subtracted from the number of balls paid out related to winning), and the total number of balls paid out is the cumulative number of balls paid out related to winning.

(Twelfth Embodiment) In the tenth embodiment, the configuration including the performance display device SH has been described in detail, but the configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to this example is not limited to that of the tenth embodiment. . Therefore, the configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to this example will be described in detail below as a twelfth embodiment.

First, Figure 156 shows an example of the display of the performance display device SH in the 12th embodiment. In this figure, only the differences from the 10th embodiment will be described in detail.

<Display Mode> The display mode of the performance display device SH in the twelfth embodiment is configured as follows.

As display items, (a) = Cumulative advantageous section ratio or cumulative instructional accessory ratio (b) = Continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games (c) = Accessory ratio for 6000 games (d) = Cumulative Continuous accessory ratio (e) = cumulative accessory ratio (f) = cumulative accessory state ratio is displayed.

In the performance display device SH in the twelfth embodiment, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the display is switched in the order of "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (f) → (a)..." for about 5 seconds each. If a power outage occurs in the middle of a lighting pattern, the following configuration may be used. Here, a case where a power outage occurs 2 seconds after lighting pattern (c) is reached is illustrated. (1) Lighting starts from the beginning of display item (a). (2) Lighting starts from the beginning of display item (c). (3) Lighting resumes 2 seconds after display item (c). The above configuration may be used. If the above configurations (2) and (3) are used, lighting may be started from the beginning of display item (a) when RAM clear is executed (when the setting change mode ends).

The cumulative number of plays may be the number of plays since the power was turned on, the number of plays since the RAM was cleared, the number of plays since the device was shipped from the factory, or the number of plays backed up in a specified RAM area.

(f) = Cumulative status ratio of accessories, etc. “Cumulative status ratio of accessories, etc.” Number of games + cumulative number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special accessory is not activated when the type 1 special accessory is not activated + cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special accessory is not activated It can be calculated as follows: (Number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated) ÷ Total number of games played x 100 (%). As an example, the cumulative number of games played when type 1 special accessory is activated: 300 games, the cumulative number of games played when type 2 special accessory is activated: 100 games, and the cumulative number of games played when normal accessory is activated: 100 games. , 200 games played when the first-class special accessory is not activated when the first-class accessory continuous operation device is activated, and the second-class special accessory is not activated when the second-class accessory continuous operation device is activated. If the number of games played at the time is 50 games, and the total number of games played is 30,000 games, it is calculated as "(300+100+100+200+50)/(30,000)×100=2.5(%)".

In addition, when calculating the above-mentioned cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc., if the game machine does not have a type 2 special accessory as a specification, the number of games played when the cumulative type 2 special accessory is activated , The cumulative number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated when the second type special accessory continuous activation device is activated is not used, and the cumulative number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated is calculated as "(cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated + cumulative normal number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated. Calculated as follows: Number of games played when the accessory is activated + Cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated when the first type special accessory continuous operation device is activated) ÷ Total number of games played × 100 (%) I will do it. In this way, when calculating display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, display items are calculated without using elements that are not included in the specifications of the gaming machine (display items other than the cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc.) The same applies to items).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the game executed while inside the BB or RB (RT2 in FIG. 28, etc.) The number of games played when the type special accessory is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the type 2 special accessory is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special accessory is activated Number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated + total number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated when the second type special accessory continuous operation device is activated) (Number of games played is not counted) It is configured like this.

In addition, when the memory area storing the total number of plays, which is the denominator information used when calculating the display items, is the upper limit value (for example, if the memory area is a 3-byte memory area, it is "FFFFFF (H)"), and the update process is "+1" and the digits overflow, the total number of plays may be configured not to be updated from the next game onwards. In such a configuration, the numerator information, the cumulative number of plays when the first type special device is activated, may be configured not to be updated, or "1" may be stored in the memory area storing information that the total number of plays has overflowed. In addition, the memory area storing the total number of plays may be configured to manage whether the display in the performance display device SH is turned on or blinked (the memory area used for lighting/blinking management may be used together with the memory area used for calculating the display items). In addition, the configuration regarding the overflow is not limited to only the memory area storing the total number of plays, and can be applied to any information used when calculating the display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH.

Moreover, "5H" ("5H.") displayed on the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc. is displayed.

In addition, in the performance display device SH according to the twelfth embodiment, when the ratio display value is 50% or more of the cumulative accessory status ratio or more, the ratio segment SH20 is displayed blinking.

Also, as mentioned above, the display item (a) may be configured to display either the cumulative favorable zone ratio or the cumulative command-included feature ratio, and when the cumulative favorable zone ratio is displayed, "7P" ("7P.") is displayed in the identification segment SH10, and when the cumulative command-included feature ratio is displayed, "7U" ("7U.") is displayed in the identification segment SH10.

Furthermore, as described above in the tenth embodiment, the processing related to the performance display monitor SH in the twelfth embodiment may be configured to be executed as processing in the second ROM/RAM area. When configured in this way, the ratio calculation processing of step 1637-7 (thirteenth) will be executed as processing in the second ROM/RAM area. Furthermore, as described above, when calculating the "cumulative reel etc. state ratio", it is calculated as "(cumulative number of times played when the first type special reel is activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special reel is activated + cumulative number of times played when the normal reel is activated + cumulative number of times played when the first type special reel is not activated when the first type reel continuous activation device is activated + cumulative number of times played when the second type special reel is not activated when the second type reel continuous activation device is activated) ÷ cumulative total number of times played × 100 (%)". The numerator, "the cumulative number of times played when the first type special feature is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the second type special feature is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the normal feature is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the first type special feature is not activated when the first type feature continuous activation device is activated + the cumulative number of times played when the second type special feature is not activated when the second type feature continuous activation device is activated," and the "cumulative total number of times played" used as the denominator are stored in the second RAM area.

Here, after the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal by referring to the checksum after the power is turned on (for example, after executing the processing in steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13), the power-off processing is executed. The period before calculating the checksum (for example, before executing the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36) period or setting confirmation mode period), due to the occurrence of noise, the numerator data used to calculate the "total accessory status ratio", in other words, the data stored in the second RAM area "Cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated + total number of games played when the second type special accessory is activated + total number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + total number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated + cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated There is an abnormality in one or more of the following information: ``Number of games played when type 1 special accessory object is not activated during operation + cumulative number of games played when type 2 special accessory object is not activated when type 2 special accessory object continuous operation device is activated.'' occurs and the value is changed, and the numerator is "total number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated + total number of games played when the second type special accessory is activated" than the denominator, which is the "total number of games played" Number of games played at the time + Cumulative number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + Cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated when the first type accessory continuous operation device is activated + Total number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated Even if the number of games played when the actuator is activated and the second type special accessory is not activated becomes a larger value, in the twelfth embodiment, the ratio calculation, which is a process in the second ROM/RAM area, is performed. In the process, a calculation regarding the "cumulative accessory state ratio" is executed, and based on the result of the calculation process, a display process is performed on the performance display monitor SH {for example, the ratio display process of step 1637-8 (thirteenth)} (executes the same processing as when no noise is occurring). In addition, the "cumulative accessory status ratio" is just an example, and includes the cumulative advantageous section ratio, the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games, the accessory ratio for 6000 games, Concerning the cumulative continuous accessory ratio and the cumulative total accessory ratio, if noise occurs and the information used for calculations stored in the second RAM area changes, the above-mentioned "cumulative accessory ratio" It may be configured to have the same effect as in the case of "equal state ratio". In other words, after the checksum is referenced after the power is turned on and it is determined that the power-off recovery data is normal (for example, after the processes in steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 are executed), the power-off processing is executed. The period before calculating the checksum (for example, before executing the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36) period and the period of the setting confirmation mode), the configuration is such that determination (error check processing) as to whether the numerator value is larger than the denominator value is not performed. With this configuration, even if the numerator value becomes larger than the denominator value due to noise etc. during a game just before closing time, the error will not cause any disadvantage to the player. , it becomes possible to advance the game.

Note that, during the period from when the power-off process is executed to calculate the checksum (for example, after the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36 is executed) until the power is turned on and the checksum is referenced to determine whether the power-off recovery data is normal (for example, before the processes of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 are executed) (in other words, during the period when the power is off), if an abnormality occurs in one or more pieces of information in the numerator data or denominator data used to calculate the "cumulative reels, etc. state ratio" and the value is changed due to the occurrence of noise, (1) if the result of the determination in step 1016 is No, an unrecoverable error occurs, and if the result of the determination in step 1028 is No, the RAM is initialized including the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area, or (2) if the result of the determination in step 1016 is No, an unrecoverable error occurs, and if the result of the determination in step 1028 is No, the RAM is initialized without including the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area.

Note that the configuration related to the action when the above noise occurs has been described in detail as an example for calculating the "cumulative role status ratio," but the configuration related to the action when noise occurs that can be applied to this example is not limited to only calculating the "cumulative role status ratio," but can also be applied to calculating the "cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio," the "consecutive role ratio for 6000 games," the "role ratio for 6000 games," the "cumulative consecutive role ratio," and the "cumulative role ratio."

In the twelfth embodiment, the configuration relating to the display in the performance display device SH has been described in detail, but the configuration of the twelfth embodiment can also be applied to gaming machines that do not have a performance display device SH. More specifically, gaming machines that do not have a performance display device SH may be configured to perform calculations of the display items and transmit the calculation results from the gaming machine to an external device, as in the twelfth embodiment, or to measure (count) information used to calculate the display items and transmit the measurement results (count results) from the gaming machine to an external device (calculation is performed outside the gaming machine).

(Thirteenth Embodiment) The drum type game machine of this example may be a medalless drum type game machine that does not use game medals. An example of such a configuration will be described in detail below as a thirteenth embodiment. Note that any of the above-mentioned configurations may be applied as a configuration that does not affect whether or not game medals are used. Note that a medalless drum-type gaming machine is a drum-type gaming machine that does not use game medals (including physical medals or metal pieces for detection by a sensor) but uses points.

<<<<Functional block diagram of a medal-less reel type gaming machine>>> First, FIG. 157 is a functional block diagram applicable to the medal-less reel type gaming machine of this example. The figure shows a hardware interface illustrating the physical connection via a cable, and a software interface illustrating the mode of command transmission.

<<Inside the gaming machine>> Inside the medal-less reel-type gaming machine are a main control board that controls the progress of the game, a payout control board that controls the points, and a connection terminal board that can transmit and receive information to and from the outside of the gaming machine. Although not shown, there may also be an external terminal board for outputting external signals to the outside of the gaming machine.

<Main Control Board> When the 1-bet button is operated in a valid state, a 1-card insertion switch signal, which is a signal to bet one score, is transmitted to the main control board. Note that if a new 1-piece insertion switch signal is sent to the main control board in a situation where 1 point has already been bet, the number of bets will be 2 points. Additionally, when the 3-bet button (sometimes referred to as the max-bet button) is operated in a valid state, a 3-card insertion switch signal is sent to the main control board, which is a signal to bet the score by 3 points. Ru. Incidentally, the prescribed number of gaming machines according to the figure is three points. Further, when the return button is operated in a valid state, a return button signal for returning the betted points to the player is transmitted to the main control board. Note that the betted points are sent to the payout control board, which will be described later, and the payout control board adds the points as a return of the points (hereinafter referred to as "return to the payout control board" or "return to the payout control board"). ), the returned points are added and displayed on the total score display device.

The main control board also transmits data on the number of coins inserted, which is information related to the display of the points bet, to the number of coins inserted display device, thereby displaying the points bet on the number of coins inserted display device. When points are awarded to a player as a result of a winning combination being stopped and displayed (as a result of winning), the main control board transmits data on the number of winning prizes, which is information related to the display of the number of winning prizes, to the number of winning prizes display device, thereby displaying the points to be awarded on the number of winning prizes display device. As an example of the display mode, if the points to be awarded are 8 points, the points to be awarded may be displayed directly and immediately, such as "0 → 8", or the points to be awarded in stages, such as "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 8" (the "0" in the above example may be hidden).

Although not shown, the main control board also receives a medal insertion signal, which is a signal related to the fact that a score has been bet (inserted), and an activation signal, which is a signal related to the game status (for example, whether or not a bonus is being played). The device may be configured to be able to transmit the status, a door open signal that is a signal related to the opening of the front door, and a security signal that is a signal related to the error occurrence situation to the external terminal board.

The main control board is also configured to be able to send and receive control commands to and from the payout control board (two-way communication is possible). Here, the control commands are commands related to the progress of the game, such as commands related to the payout of points, commands related to the settlement of points, input request commands to request the input of points, and commands regarding the number of electromagnetic medals related to the points stored in the gaming machine. The payout control board is also configured to be able to send a play possible signal, which is a command indicating that the game can currently proceed, to the main control board.

The main control board and the payout control board may also be connected to the connection terminal board without going through the external terminal board. In this case too, the number of parts can be reduced, the configuration can be simplified, and signal degradation can be prevented to enable proper communication. When the main control board and the payout control board are connected to the connection terminal board via the external terminal board, the external terminal board connects the main control board to the rental machine via the connection terminal board. The external terminal board receives a medal insertion signal, operating status, door opening signal, and security signal from the main control board. The external terminal board also receives a medal payout signal from the payout control board, which is a signal indicating that points will be paid out (awarded to the player). The external terminal board is also configured to be able to output to the outside of the gaming machine (in this example, a rental machine) a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that points have been bet (inserted), an operating status signal indicating the status of the game (for example, whether or not a bonus is in progress), a door opening signal indicating the opening of the front door, a security signal indicating the occurrence of an error, and a medal payout signal indicating that points have been paid out (granted to the player).

<Payout control board> The payout control board is connected to the main control board so that it can communicate bidirectionally. In addition, the payout control board is electrically connected to an external terminal board, a total score display device, and a counting button (sometimes referred to as a settlement button). When the counting button is operated in an enabled state, a counting button signal, which is a signal indicating that a settlement operation has been performed, is sent to the payout control board. In addition, the payout control board is capable of sending game medal number data, which is information related to the display of the current total score held by the player, to the total score display device, and is configured so that the total score is displayed on the total score display device. In addition, when the counting button is operated to execute score settlement, (1) it may be configured to settle both the bet score and the score stored in the payout control board (scores stored in the payout control board and displayed on the total score display device), or (2) it may be configured to settle only the bet score when there is a bet score, and settle the score stored in the payout control board when there is no bet score. Also, when the counting button is operated to settle the points, only a portion or all of the points stored in the payout control board may be settled. Furthermore, if an error occurs in the gaming machine or a game is being played, the operation of the counting button can be disabled to prevent the settlement process from being executed. In this way, points can be added or subtracted at the appropriate time, and doubts about the validity of the calculation results can be avoided. Furthermore, even if an error occurs or a game is being played, the counting button may be enabled so that the settlement process can be executed at any time.

In this example, the aforementioned total score display device includes game medals (game medals displayed on the credit number display device D200) that are electrically stored in the storage device of a game machine that uses game medals. Although it is configured to display a score corresponding to the total number of game medals including the game medals paid out to the outside of the game machine such as the medal tray D230, the total score display device and the storage device are not limited to this. You may use it together. In such a configuration, the total score display device will display a score corresponding to the number of game medals paid out to the outside of the game machine, such as the medal tray D230 in the game machine that uses game medals. .

<<Lending machine operation unit>> The components provided in the lending machine operation unit provided outside the medal-less reel type gaming machine will be described in detail below. When the replay switch is operated in an active state, a replay switch signal, which is a signal indicating that the replay switch has been operated, is transmitted to the lending machine. By transmitting the replay switch signal to the lending machine, the points related to the replay in which the player plays using the points accumulated in the previous game (for example, the points electrically accumulated in the membership card) are accumulated in the gaming machine (for example, stored in the memory area of the payout control board). In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 50 points) of points is accumulated in the gaming machine by operating the replay switch once, if the points accumulated by the player in the previous game are less than the predetermined number (for example, less than 50 points), (1) the replay switch signal is not transmitted to the lending machine, (2) the points are not accumulated (added) to the gaming machine, or (3) the points less than the predetermined number are accumulated (added) to the gaming machine.

Further, when the lending button is operated in a valid state, a lending button signal, which is a signal used when storing points to be lent in the lending machine, is transmitted to the lending machine. By transmitting the lending button signal to the gaming machine, the points are transferred from the card in which the points purchased by the player on the day are stored to the gaming machine. In addition, in a case where a predetermined number of points (for example, 50 points) are stored in the gaming machine by operating the lending button once, if the points stored in the card are less than the predetermined number (for example, 50 points), points), (1) the lending button signal is not sent to the lending machine, (2) the points are not stored (added) in the gaming machine, (3) the points less than the predetermined number are stored in the gaming machine. (addition). In addition, if the return switch is operated while being enabled, the card that stores the points purchased by the player on the same day will be returned to the player (the remaining points that were not lent out will be returned to the player). stored). Further, the player may be configured to be able to change the points that will be stored in the gaming machine by operating the lending button once.

In addition, the rental machine transmits the remaining points data, which is information related to displaying the points stored in the card purchased on the day mentioned above, to the remaining points display device. The accumulated points (sometimes referred to as the number of remaining points) are displayed (if the card purchased on the day is inserted in the rental machine). In addition, when the lending machine is able to lend out scores (scores can be transferred to the gaming machine), the lending machine transmits a lending available LED signal to the lending available LED, so that the lending available LED becomes available for lending (for example, , lights up), and the player can recognize that the item can be borrowed. Note that modes that can be rented may be lit and modes that cannot be lent may be turned off, or modes that are lentable may be lit in green, and modes that are not lentable may be lit in red. An example of whether or not it is possible to rent is if the membership card inserted into the rental machine or the card purchased on the day has points stored (more than a predetermined number of points stored). It may be configured so that

If communication is not possible between the gaming machine and the rental machine, it is preferable not to proceed with the game for score management purposes. For example, the game can be prevented from proceeding by not accepting operations on the start lever or bet button.

<<Rental Machines>> The rental machines are also configured to transmit to the hall computer the following: ball output performance information, which is various information related to the ball output of the gaming machine; a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that points have been bet (deposited); a medal payout signal, which is a signal indicating that points will be paid out (awarded to the player); an operating status, which is a signal related to the status of the game (for example, whether or not a bonus is in progress); a door opening signal, which is a signal related to the opening of the front door; and a security signal, which is a signal related to the occurrence of an error. The rental machines are also configured to transmit to the management computer, each company center, and gaming machine information center information related to the maximum number of coins difference on the day (sometimes referred to as MY), gaming machine installation information (described later), and the like.

As shown in the figure, the main control board, payout control board, connection terminal board on the gaming machine side, connection terminal board on the lending machine side, SC board, hall computer, management computer, company centers, and gaming machine information center are connected by connection cables. Here, the communication mode between the connection terminal board on the gaming machine side and the connection terminal board on the lending machine side will be described in detail using Figure 158.

Figure 158 is an example of the communication contents of a connection cable used for communication between the connection terminal board on the gaming machine side and the connection terminal board on the lending machine side. The connector of the connection cable is composed of nine pins, (1) pin 1 is used as an insulating GND (pin for isolating from GND) for signals transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (2) pin 2 is used as a GND (sometimes called ground) for the transmission signal transmitted using pin 6 for signals transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (3) pin 3 is used as a GND for the reception signal transmitted using pin 7 for signals transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). (4) pin 4 is used as a connection confirmation signal to confirm that the lending machine is connected to the gaming machine (payout control board) for signals transmitted from the payout control board side (gaming machine side) to the lending machine. (5) Pin 5 is used as an insulating GND (pin for isolating from GND) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board (gaming machine side). (6) Pin 6 is used as a signal (transmitting signal) transmitted from the payout control board (gaming machine) to the SC board (lend machine) for a signal transmitted from the payout control board (gaming machine side) to the lending machine. (7) Pin 7 is used as a signal (receiving signal) received by the payout control board (gaming machine) from the SC board (lend machine) for a signal transmitted from the SC board (lend machine) to the payout control board (gaming machine). (8) Pin 8 is used as an insulating 5V (pin for isolating from other 5V) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board (gaming machine side). (9) Pin 9 is used as an insulating 5V (pin for isolating from other 5V) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board (gaming machine side). In addition, pins 6 and 2 are twisted (the cables are twisted together), and pins 7 and 3 are twisted (the cables are twisted together).

In this example, the signal to be sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine is transmitted from pin No. 6. In other words, all the multiple types of signals that can be sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine are transmitted from pin No. 6. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be transmitted from the gaming machine to the rental machine.

In this example, the signal sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine is sent from pin 7, in other words, all of the multiple types of signals that can be sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine are sent from pin 7, but this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 159 illustrates the contents of the gaming machine information notification command (sometimes called gaming machine information notification). The gaming machine information notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine as a transmission signal sent using pin 6 of the communication cable described above in FIG. 158.

The command length of the gaming machine information notification command is variable and may differ depending on the command content, but it is composed of multiple bytes. The transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and is composed of the command length, command type, serial number, gaming machine type information, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows. The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data that is 0xXX to 0xYY (X and Y are arbitrary numbers). The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data that is 0x01. The serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 to 0xFF. The gaming machine type information of No. 4 is information indicating the type of gaming machine and is 1 byte of data. The gaming information type of No. 5 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 gaming machine performance information, 0x01 gaming machine installation information, and 0x02 HC fraud monitoring information (HC is hall computer). The gaming machine information in number 6 is either gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information, and is 40 or 42 bytes of data, in other words, 2 bytes or more of data. The checksum in number 7 is 1 byte of data. The above serial number is sometimes called the serial number.

Furthermore, with regard to the command length mentioned above, if gaming machine performance information or HC/fraud monitoring information, which is 40 bytes, is sent as gaming machine information, the total command length will be "0x2E", and if gaming machine installation information, which is 42 bytes, is sent as gaming machine information, the total command length will be "0x30".

In addition, the game machine type information No. 4 above is composed of a code, a game machine, a group name, and a management medium, and as a specific example, 0x01: reel type game machine, group A, game medal 0x02: reel It is structured like a formula game machine, B group, and game medals.

Furthermore, the gaming machine information in No. 6 above is configured to transmit one type of content corresponding to the gaming machine information type in No. 5 above. For example, if No. 5 above is gaming machine performance information, then No. 6 above will transmit information regarding the gaming status, etc. as the content of the gaming machine performance information. Furthermore, the content of the gaming machine installation information includes the manufacturer code of the main control board CPU, the manufacturer code of the payout control board CPU, product code, chip ID number, etc., and the content of the HC/fraud monitoring information includes IN/OUT information, gaming status, etc.

The contents of the gaming machine performance information may be, for example, display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH ("cumulative feature state ratio," "cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative feature ratio with instruction," "continuous feature ratio for 6000 games," "feature ratio for 6000 games," "cumulative consecutive feature ratio," "cumulative feature ratio") and information used to calculate the display items (sometimes referred to as elements, for example, the cumulative number of games played when the first type special feature was activated, the total number of games played, etc.) that may be configured to be transmittable to the outside of the gaming machine as gaming machine performance information.

The HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured to transmit error information, and in such a case, it may be configured as follows. (1) Error information related to the main control board and error information related to the dispensing control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, HC/fraud monitoring information including 1 byte of error information related to the main control board and 1 byte of error information related to the dispensing control board is configured to be transmitted. (2) Recoverable error information related to the main control board and non-recoverable error information related to the main control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, HC/fraud monitoring information including 1 byte of recoverable error information related to the main control board and 1 byte of non-recoverable error information related to the main control board is configured to be transmitted. (3) Recoverable error information related to the main control board, non-recoverable error information related to the main control board, and error information related to the dispensing control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, the HC/fraud monitoring information can be transmitted, including 1 byte of recoverable error information on the main control board, 1 byte of unrecoverable error information on the main control board, and 1 byte of error information on the dispensing control board.

Although the medalless drum-type game machine according to this example is configured to have a payout control board, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control board in this example does not have a payout control board. The responsible configuration may be configured to be executable by the main control board.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command is 1 byte, and when calculating the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command, the command length, command type, serial number, and gaming machine type information are , the game information type, and the gaming machine information, and the gaming machine information is data of 2 bytes or more. For example, when transmitting gaming machine performance information as gaming machine information, the gaming machine performance information is 40 bytes of data, but each byte is divided into 40 pieces from the 1st byte to the 40th byte. The checksum of the gaming machine information notification command is calculated using the data and the command length, command type, serial number, and gaming machine information type, which are 1-byte data. With this configuration, even if there is 2 or more bytes of data as a command, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte.

Next, Figure 160 illustrates the contents of the counting notification command (sometimes called a counting notification). The counting notification command is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine as a transmission signal sent using pin 6 of the communication cable described above in Figure 158, and is a command that can be sent based on the operation of the counting button.

The command length of the count notification command is 7 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, from the command length, command type, counting serial number, counting points, counting accumulated points, and checksum. More specifically, it is configured as follows. The length of the first command is 0x07, which is 1 byte of data. The second command type is 1-byte data of 0x02. The counting serial number No. 3 is 1-byte data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF. The fourth counting point is 1 byte of data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFA. The cumulative count number 5 is 2-byte data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFFFF. The checksum number 6 is 1 byte of data. Note that the counting serial number described above may be referred to as a counting serial number, and may be collectively referred to as a serial number and a rental serial number.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the counting notification command is 1 byte, and when calculating the checksum of the counting notification command, it is calculated from the command length, command type, counting serial number, counting points, and counting cumulative points. Although it will be calculated, the counted cumulative score is data of 2 bytes or more. For example, the cumulative count score is 2 bytes of data, but the first byte to the second byte is divided into two pieces of 1 byte data, and 1 byte data of the command length, command type, and count. The system is configured to calculate the checksum of the count notification command using the serial number and the count number. With this configuration, even if there is 2 or more bytes of data as a command, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte. Although the details will be described later, the upper limit of the cumulative score is 9999.

Next, FIG. 161 illustrates the contents of a rental notification command (sometimes referred to as a rental notification). The lending notification command is a command that the gaming machine side receives from the lending machine side as a reception signal transmitted using the No. 7 pin of the communication cable described above in FIG. 158, and is sent based on the operation of the lending button. This is the command to get it.

The command length of the loan notification command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the loan machine to the gaming machine. It is composed of the command length, command type, loan serial number, loan points, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows. The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x05. The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x13. The loan serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x00 to 0xFF. The loan points of No. 4 is 1 byte of data, which is 0x00 to 0xFF. The checksum of No. 5 is 1 byte of data. The above loan serial number is sometimes called the loan serial number, and is sometimes collectively called the serial number together with the serial number and counting serial number.

Next, FIG. 162 illustrates the contents of a lending receipt result response command (sometimes referred to as a lending receipt result response). The lending reception result response command is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side as a transmission signal sent using the No. 6 pin of the communication cable described above in FIG.

The command length of the loan receipt result response command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and it is composed of the command length, command type, loan serial number, loan point receipt result, and checksum, and is more specifically composed as follows: The command length of No. 1 is 1 byte of data that is 0x05. The command type of No. 2 is 1 byte of data that is 0x13. The loan serial number of No. 3 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00 to 0xFF. The loan point receipt result of No. 4 is 1 byte of data that is 0x00: normal, 0x01: abnormal (other values are judged to be abnormal). The checksum of No. 5 is 1 byte of data.

Next, FIG. 163 is a flow related to gaming machine information notification. This figure illustrates the transmission and reception of information between the reel-type gaming machine and the lending machine. Note that this figure shows a case where HC/fraud monitoring information is transmitted as a gaming machine information notification transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side.

First, the gaming machine is powered on, and gaming machine information notification is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side at a predetermined timing. Note that the serial number in the gaming machine information notification immediately after the power is turned on is 0. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms later, a count notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Note that the counting serial number in the counting notification immediately after the power is turned on is 0. Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notification is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Note that the rental serial number in the rental notification immediately after the power is turned on is 0. Thereafter, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Note that the lending serial number in the lending reception result response immediately after the power is turned on is 0. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is 1.

Thus, in this example, the gaming machine information notification is configured so that the serial number is 0 the first time the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by one for each command sent, going from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255. Similarly, the counting serial number is 0 the first time the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by one for each command sent, going from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255. Similarly, the loan serial number is 0 the first time the power is turned on, and thereafter is incremented by one for each command sent (each time a loan notification is sent), going from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 255.

After that, a gaming machine information notification is sent approximately every 300 ms, and a gaming machine information notification with a serial number of 255 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. After that, counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending receipt result responses are sent and received, and approximately 300 ms after a gaming machine information notification with a serial number of 255 is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine, but the serial number is configured to be 1. In other words, the serial number is 0 only immediately after the power is turned on, and thereafter it is configured to progress as follows: "1 → 2 → ... → 255 → 1 → 2 → ...".

Although not shown, as gaming machine information notifications, gaming machine installation information is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine every 30 seconds, and gaming machine performance information is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine every 120 seconds. It is configured so that If the transmission timings of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information overlap, (1) set priorities and only send commands with high priority; (2) 1 It may also be configured such that all data are transmitted in one interrupt process. In addition, as a specific example of the priority when configured as in (1) above, the configuration is as follows: "gaming machine performance information → gaming machine installation information → HC/fraud monitoring information" in descending order of priority. Alternatively, the information may be structured as follows in descending order of priority: HC/fraud monitoring information→gaming machine installation information→gaming machine performance information.

In this way, in this example, a serial number is provided for the gaming machine information notification, and the configuration is such that the consistency of commands can be maintained using the serial number (for example, when the next gaming machine information notification with the serial number 5 is If the serial number of the game machine information notification is not number 6, it can be determined that there is an abnormality). The serial number is configured to be stored in a predetermined storage area.

In addition, when transmitting a serial number, it is configured to perform special addition processing on the previously transmitted serial number (serial number stored in a predetermined storage area) and then transmit it. (1) The previous serial number is , N (N is a value less than 255), the result of executing the special addition process is "N+1". (2) When the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, 255 in this example), the result of executing the special addition process is "1". It is structured as follows. With this configuration, if 0 is sent as the serial number, devices outside the gaming machine can also recognize that the gaming machine has been turned off, making it possible to quickly detect fraud. It can be configured to do so.

Here, the above special addition process will be explained in detail. First, to explain the conventional general addition process in detail, when N=100, (A1) when performing the normal addition process of adding "+1" to "100(D)", "101(D)" is executed. D)". (A2) Furthermore, when a normal addition process of adding "+1" to "255(D)" corresponding to M is performed, a carry occurs and becomes "0(D)". On the other hand, to explain in detail the case where special addition processing is executed, (B1) when special addition processing is executed to add "+1" to "100(D)", the result is "101(D)". (B2) Also, when performing special addition processing of "+1" to "255 (D)" corresponding to M, a carry occurs by first performing normal addition processing of "+1". The carry flag becomes "0 (D)" and a carry occurs, so that the carry flag becomes "1". The special addition processing according to this example is configured such that when the carry flag becomes 1, the operation result is "1 (D)" as an arbitrary value, so "255 (D)" corresponding to M is )", the calculation result becomes "1(D)".

Note that the special addition process in this example is configured so that when the carry flag becomes 1, the calculation result becomes an arbitrary value of "1 (D)", but the arbitrary value can be changed without any problems, and it may be configured to become "100 (D)".

Note that the serial number, counting serial number, and lending serial number according to this example may be 2-byte information, and even when configured in this way, (1) the previous serial number is N (N is a value less than 65535). Sometimes, the result of executing the special addition process is "N+1". (2) When the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, in this example 65535), the result of executing the special addition process is "1". It may be configured as follows.

Although the serial number related to the gaming machine information notification has been described in detail here, the same effect applies to the counting serial number related to the counting notification and the rental serial number related to the lending notification.

Note that the above-described special addition process may be executed at any timing after transmitting the gaming machine information notification and before transmitting the next gaming machine information notification. That is, the system is configured to execute special addition processing to update the next serial number at a timing after the serial number is transmitted.

Furthermore, if the storage area for storing serial numbers related to gaming machine information notifications is the first storage area, and the storage area for storing the counting serial numbers regarding counting notifications is the second storage area, the first storage area and the second storage area are They may be configured to be continuous. Furthermore, if the gaming machine side is configured to have a storage area for storing the rental serial number regarding the rental notification, and the storage area for storing the rental serial number regarding the rental notification is set as the third storage area, the first storage area and the third storage area The storage area may be configured to be continuous, or the second storage area and the third storage area may be configured to be continuous. Note that when the power is turned on again after being turned off, as described above, the serial number stored in the first storage area and the counting serial number stored in the second storage area are The loan serial number stored in the third storage area may be set to 0 (if the gaming machine does not have the third storage area, the first storage area and the second storage area to 0).

For example, if the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area are configured to have consecutive addresses, and the serial number is "F1A0", the counting serial number is "F1A1", and the loan serial number is "F1A2", when the power is turned from off to on and a process is executed to clear the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number to 0, the address corresponding to the serial number, "F1A0", is specified to execute the zero clear, and then the process of similarly clearing the next address to 0 is repeated twice, thereby clearing the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number to 0, and the data capacity required for the program can be reduced compared to when the addresses of the serial number, counting serial number, and loan serial number are specified and cleared to 0.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to be able to transmit information regarding the performance display device from the gaming machine side to the outside of the gaming machine (rental machine, SC board) as gaming machine information notification. In such a configuration, the gaming machine information notification may be sent as gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information. good. Note that the information regarding the performance display device may be configured as follows. (1) The display items described above in Figure 156 etc. (cumulative advantageous section ratio, total instructional accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games, accessory ratio for 6000 games, cumulative consecutive accessory ratio, The cumulative ratio of accessory objects, the cumulative ratio of accessory objects, etc. status) are transmitted from the gaming machine side to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, display items are calculated within the gaming machine, and the calculated results are transmitted outside the gaming machine. (2) Elements for displaying the display items described above in FIG. 156 and the like (elements used for calculations such as the total number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated) are transmitted from the gaming machine side to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, the display items are transmitted without being calculated within the game machine, and are calculated outside the game machine (for example, on the SC board). (3) The display items mentioned above in FIG. 156 etc. (cumulative advantageous section ratio, total instructional accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio for 6000 games, accessory ratio for 6000 games, cumulative consecutive accessory ratio, The cumulative ratio of accessories, the cumulative status ratio of accessories, etc.) and the elements for displaying display items (elements used for calculations such as the number of games played when the cumulative number of first-class special accessories are activated) are input from the gaming machine side. Send outside the gaming machine.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine is configured to be able to send gaming machine information notifications to the outside at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 300 ms). When the gaming machine information notification is sent to the outside, it then sends a counting notification. However, if the gaming machine information notification cannot be sent to the outside due to the influence of noise or the like, it does not send a counting notification after that. Also, when configured in this way, if the gaming machine information notification cannot be sent to the outside due to the influence of noise or the like, it is configured such that the addition of the total points based on the operation of the lending button is not performed thereafter.

In addition, the gaming machine may be configured to transmit IN/OUT information outside the gaming machine as a gaming machine information notification. In such a case, the gaming machine information notification may be transmitted as gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information. The IN/OUT information may be configured as follows: (1) After the start lever operation is accepted for the next game in which a symbol combination related to a replay is stopped, the gaming machine transmits to the outside a gaming machine information notification indicating that the game is a game in which a symbol combination related to a replay is stopped (sometimes referred to as replay operation status information) and the number of bets in that game (e.g., 3 points). (2) After the symbol combination related to a replay is stopped, the gaming machine transmits to the outside a gaming machine information notification indicating that the game is a game in which a symbol combination related to a replay is stopped. Then, after the start lever operation is accepted, IN information on the number of bets in that game (for example, 3 points) is sent from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification. (3) After the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, OUT information indicating that the number of points is 0 is sent from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification. And after the start lever operation is accepted for the next game in which the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, IN information indicating that the number of points is 0 is sent from the gaming machine to the outside as a gaming machine information notification.

Next, FIG. 164 is a flow related to the lending notification command. In the same figure, a configuration applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example is illustrated for transmitting and receiving information between the reel-type gaming machine side and the rental machine side.

<A: Configuration 1 in which the lending button can be enabled while the reels are rotating> A certain game is executed and the reels start rotating. After that, the lending button of the lending machine is turned from OFF to ON while the reels are rotating. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points. As described above, the "total score" is all the scores that can be inserted into a medal-less reel gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of gaming medals placed on the medal tray of a general reel gaming machine that uses actual gaming medals. When applying the configuration of a medal-less reel gaming machine to the above-mentioned embodiment, there is no problem in treating what is referred to as "gaming medals" in this specification as "scores", "score information", "possessed points", "possessed points information", "gaming value", "gaming value information", etc., and there is no problem in referring to them as "scores", "score information", "possessed points", "possessed points information", "gaming value", and "gaming value information" as appropriate. There is no problem in not having "credits". The stored total score is configured to be displayed on the total score display device.

Then, a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 30, which is serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 0 and cumulative counting score = 0, which is counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and within 170 ms thereafter, a lending notification containing information on lending score = 50, which is lending serial number p, is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a lending receipt result response containing information that the lending score receipt result is normal, which is lending serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the lending score of 50 points is added to the total score, making the total score 30 + 50 = 80 points (the total score display device also displays 80 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers or the same numbers. After that, when 20 ms or more have passed and approximately 300 ms has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, another gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1.

<B: Configuration 2 in which the lending button can be activated while the reels are rotating> A certain game is executed and the reels start rotating. After that, while the reels are spinning, the rental button of the rental machine is turned from off to on. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 9980 points.

After that, a gaming machine information notification containing information with serial number n, total score = 9980, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and approximately 100ms later, counting serial number becomes m, counted points = 0, counted accumulated points = A counting notification containing information of 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, a lending notice containing information of lending serial number p and lending points = 50 is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information that the loan score receipt result is abnormal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number of 50 points is added to the total score. The total score remains at 9980 points (the display on the total score display device also remains at 9980 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1.

In the above configurations A and B, scores can be lent by operating the lend button even while the reels are rotating, but the upper limit of the total score in the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to this example The value is 9999, and if the upper limit is not exceeded even if the 50 points added based on the operation of the lending button are added, as in A above, 30 + 50 = 80, etc. While 50 points are lent out and added to the total score, as in B above, if 50 points are added based on the operation of the lend button, the upper limit of the total score If the total score exceeds 50 points, the 50 points will not be lent (not added) and the total score will remain 9980.

By configuring as described in A and B above, in order to execute the next game as smoothly as possible even when the reels are spinning, it is possible to borrow points, and the total score is set at the upper limit. It is possible to configure the system so that the problem of exceeding the limit does not occur.

In addition, in the same figure, when the upper limit of the total score is exceeded when the 50 points added based on the operation of the lending button are added, the loaning of points is not executed. However, if the total score is a predetermined value (for example, 9950), the score is not loaned (lending is not performed even if the loan button is operated). Good too.

In addition, in the same figure, the configuration is such that the loaned points are not added to the total score, and the gaming machine side sends information indicating that the loaned points reception result is abnormal as a loaned reception result response. Without limitation, information indicating that the number of loan points = 0 is sent as a lending notification sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side, in other words, if the lending machine side determines that it is possible to add the number of loan points. , information that the number of loan points = 50 is sent as a loan notice sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side, and if the number of lending points is not added, the lending notice sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side is sent. It may be configured to transmit information indicating that the score is 0.

<C: Configuration 1 in which the loan button is not enabled while the reels are spinning> A game is played and the reels start spinning. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points.

Then, a gaming machine information notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, containing information about the total score = 30 (serial number n) and information that the lending button cannot be operated (information indicating that operation of the lending button is invalid because the reels are spinning), and approximately 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, containing information about the counting points = 0 and the cumulative counting points = 0 (counting serial number m), and then within 170 ms, a lending notification is sent from the lending machine to the gaming machine, containing information about the lending points = 0 (lending serial number p).

After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 30 ( (The total score display also remains at 30 points.) Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

Then, while the reels are spinning, the rental button of the rental machine is turned from OFF to ON. Then, at a timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the transmission of the previous rental receipt result response and about 300 ms after the timing of the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information on total score = 30 and information on the rental button not being operable (information that the operation of the rental button is invalid because the reels are spinning). Then, about 100 ms later, a counting notification including information on counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and counting cumulative points = 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and within 170 ms thereafter, a rental notification including information on rental serial number p+1 and rental points = 0 is sent from the rental machine side to the gaming machine side. In this way, in the configuration of C, information indicating that the rental button cannot be operated is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, so the rental points are sent as 0 from the rental machine to the gaming machine.

After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 30 ( (The total score display also remains at 30 points.)

In this way, while the reels are spinning, a gaming machine information notification containing rental button operation disabled information (information indicating that the lending button cannot be operated because the reels are rotating) is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. By doing so, it is possible to clarify the period between the game in progress and the lending operation.

In addition, in the figure, the loan points are added to the total points based on the sending of the loan receipt result response, but it may also be configured to add the loan points to the total points based on the receiving of the loan notification.

<D: Configuration in which the bet button may be disabled during lending> Next, FIG. 165 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, the bet button is enabled, and a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 30, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side. After about 100 ms, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 0 and counting cumulative score = 0, which is the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side, and within 170 ms thereafter, a lending notification containing information on lending score = 0, which is the lending serial number p, is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending receipt result response containing information that the lending score receipt result is normal, which is the lending serial number p, is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine side, and the total score remains at 30 points (the display on the total score display device also remains at 30 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numbers or the same numbers.

Then, the rental button on the rental machine changes from OFF to ON. Then, more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the rental machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and contains information on total score = 30. Then, about 100 ms later, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the rental machine, containing information on counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and cumulative counting points = 0, and then within 170 ms, a rental notification is sent from the rental machine to the gaming machine, containing information on rental points = 50, and containing rental serial number p+1. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response with loan serial number p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, including information that the loan point receipt result is normal, and the loan points of 50 are added to the total score, making the total score 30 + 50 = 80 points (the total score display device also shows 80 points).

In this configuration, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 200 ms) immediately after the total score is added. This is when 20 ms or more has passed since the previous loan receipt result response was sent, and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lender machine, and then, as a predetermined period of time has passed since the total score was added, the bet button is enabled again.

In this way, in the configuration of D, when an addition to the total score is performed by a lending operation, the bet button is configured to be disabled for a predetermined period of time. During the period in which the bet button is disabled, the player may be notified that a loan of points is being performed. For example, the display of the total score display device may be configured to flash, or the total score display may be displayed to increase stepwise from 30 to 80. Also, a sound corresponding to the increase in the total score may be output on the sub-control board S side. Note that the predetermined period is not limited to 200 ms, and may be changed as appropriate. Note that the timing at which the addition to the total score is performed by the lending operation and the predetermined period during which the bet button is disabled may be configured to overlap, or may not overlap (the bet button is disabled immediately after the addition to the total score is performed by the lending operation).

Furthermore, in the figure, the loan points are added to the total score at the timing when the loan receipt result response is sent, but the loan points may be added to the total score at the timing when the loan notification is received. . Moreover, although the configuration is such that the operation of the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period from the timing when the loan receipt result response is transmitted, the operation of the bet button may be disabled for a predetermined period from the timing when the loan notification is received.

Furthermore, as described above, in configuration D, if the total score is added due to the gaming machine receiving a lending notification that includes 1 or more points as the number of lending points, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, if the gaming machine side receives a lending notification that includes information that the number of lending points is 0 and the total score is not added, the bet button is configured so that it does not become invalid (it does not change from valid to invalid by receiving the lending notification). ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that processes that affect the game, such as addition process to the total score and bet process, are not executed redundantly.

In the figure, a configuration in which the bet button is disabled for a specified time when points are lent is described in detail, but it is not limited to the bet button, and the start lever, insertion of a game medal, and start of reel spinning may also be configured to be disabled for a specified time when points are lent.

Note that if the machine is being loaned out when the gaming machine information notification is sent, and the loan ends before the loan notification command is received, the system is configured to allow points to be added based on the loan operation.

The bet buttons described above also include the max bet button described above, and can also be applied to the configuration related to the lighting of the max bet lamp described above in Figures 80 to 83. In other words, it is possible to combine this with the configuration described above in Figures 80 to 83, such as configuring the max bet lamp to be turned off during the period when the bet buttons described above are disabled.

<E: Configuration 1 for loan receipt result response> Next, FIG. 166 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, and the loan button is turned from off to on. After that, a gaming machine information notification containing information on total score = 30, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and about 100 ms later, a counting notification containing information on counting score = 0 and counting cumulative score = 0, which is the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and within 170 ms thereafter, a loan notification containing information on loan points = 50, which is the loan serial number 5, is sent from the loaner machine to the gaming machine. After that, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal, which is the loan serial number 5, is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner machine, and the loan points of 50 are added to the total score, making the total score 30 + 50 = 80 points (the total score display device also displays 80 points). Note that n and m above may be different numbers or may be the same number.

After that, the rental button of the rental machine turns from off to on. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information of total score=80. After that, approximately 100ms later, a counting notification including information that the counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and counting accumulated points = 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, the lending serial number becomes 1. , a lending notice including information that the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Thereafter, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response with a loan serial number of 1 and including information that the loan score receipt result is abnormal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number is not added to the total score, and the loan receipt result response is sent to the lending machine. The score remains at 80 points (the display on the total score display device also remains at 80 points). In this way, in the configuration of E, when a loan notification with loan serial number 5 is received, and then the next loan notification is received, noise etc. may occur even though the loan serial number should originally be number 6. If you receive a loan notification with the loan serial number 1 due to the influence of The information is sent from the machine to the rental machine and is configured so that it is not added to the total score.

<F: Configuration 2 related to lending reception result response> The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, and the lending button changes from off to on. Thereafter, a gaming machine information notification containing information with serial number n, total score = 30, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and approximately 100ms later, the counting serial number becomes m, counted points = 0, counted accumulated points = A counting notification containing information of 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, a lending notice containing information of lending serial number 255 and the number of lending points = 50 is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number 255 and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number of 50 points is added to the total score. The total score will be 30+50=80 points (the total score display will also be 80 points). Note that n and m may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the rental button of the rental machine turns from off to on. After that, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, at a timing when 20 ms or more has passed since the sending of the previous lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the sending timing of the previous gaming machine information notification. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information of total score=80. After that, approximately 100ms later, a counting notification including information that the counting serial number m+1, counting points = 0, and counting accumulated points = 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170ms thereafter, the lending serial number becomes 1. , a lending notice including information that the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan serial number 1 and the loan point receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the loan number of 50 points is added to the total score. The total score will be 80+50=130 points (the total score display device will also display 130 points). In this way, in the configuration of F, when a lending notification with the lending serial number 255 is received and the next lending notification is received thereafter, the lending serial number is 1, and in this example, the upper limit of the lending serial number is 255, and the next number after number 255 is number 1, so the next time after number 255, the loan notification for number 1, which is the correct loan serial number, was received, so the loan reception result includes information that the loan score reception result is normal. A response will be sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side. In this way, by cycling the lending serial numbers from 1 to 255, it is possible to maintain consistency between the gaming machine and the outside without compressing the capacity of the storage area for storing the lending serial numbers.

<A: Flow 1 related to count notification command> Next, with reference to FIG. 167, a flow related to count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and a gaming machine information notification containing the information that the total score = 200, which is a serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and then the counting button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, approximately 20ms elapses while the counting button remains on, and the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, and becomes 200 → 150 (based on the operation of the counting button, the display on the total score display device and the total (The subtraction of points is sometimes referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.) After that, about 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the information of counting serial number m, counting points = 50, counting accumulated points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side, and the counting notification is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The total score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, resulting in a total score of 150 points. Note that the timing for subtracting the display on the total score display device and the timing for subtracting the stored total score may be the same. The timing may be approximately 20 ms after the counting button is turned from off to on, in other words, the timing at which a long press of the counting button is detected, or the timing at which the counting notification is sent.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0 and which becomes the loan serial number p is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and which becomes the loan serial number p is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 150 points (the total score display device also remains at 150 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

Then, the counting button remains on, and at a timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous transmission of the rental receipt result response and about 300 ms after the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information on total score = 150. Then, about 300 ms after the timing of the subtraction of the display on the total score display device, the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, and it becomes 150 → 100. Then, about 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, a counting notification with counting serial number m+1 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, including information on counting points = 50 and counting cumulative points = 100, and the counting points of 50 are subtracted from the total score, making the total score 100.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification containing information that the loan points = 0 and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the loaner to the gaming machine. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response containing information that the loan point receipt result is normal and the loan serial number becomes p+1 is sent from the gaming machine to the loaner, and the total score remains at 150 points (the total score display device also displays 150 points).

Then, the counting button turns from on to off, and more than 20 ms has passed since the previous rental receipt response was sent, and about 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+2, and contains information that the total score = 100. Then, about 300 ms after the previous subtraction timing of the total score display device, because the counting button was turned off, the display on the total score display device is not subtracted. Then, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification was sent, a counting notification is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, containing information that the counting serial number is m+2, the counting points = 0, and the counting cumulative points = 100, and the total score remains at 100 points.

Then, within 170 ms, a loan notification with loan serial number p+2 and information that loan points = 0 is sent from the loaner side to the gaming machine side. Then, within 10 ms, a loan receipt result response with loan serial number p+2 and information that the loan point receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine side to the loaner side, and the total score remains at 100 points (the total score display device also remains at 100 points). Then, more than 20 ms after the previous loan receipt result response was sent and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the loaner machine side. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+3, and it contains information that the total score = 100.

<B: Flow 2 related to count notification command> The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and a gaming machine information notification containing the information of total score = 200 with serial number n is lent from the gaming machine side. It is sent to the machine, and then the counting button turns from off to on. After that, approximately 20 ms elapses while the counting button remains on, and the display on the total score display device is subtracted by 50, changing from 200 to 150. After that, the counting button turns from on to off, and about 100ms after the gaming machine information notification is sent, a counting notification containing the information of counting serial number m, counting points = 50, and counting accumulated points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side. The calculated score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 150 points. In this way, in configuration B, after sending the gaming machine information notification, the counting button is turned off → on, and then, after detecting a long press of the counting button (20ms have passed since it turned off → on), the counting button is turned on. Even if the counting button is turned on and then turned off before sending the notification, a counting notification containing the information that the number of counted points = 50 and the cumulative number of counted points = 50 is sent from the gaming machine side to the rental machine side as a counting notification. It is configured so that the counted score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score to make the total score 150 points.

Note that the timing of subtraction displayed on the total score display device and the timing of subtraction of the stored total score may be performed at the same time.The timing is approximately 20ms after the counting button is turned from off to on. The timing may be the timing at which a long press of the button is detected, or the timing at which the count notification is sent. If configured in this way, the configuration will be as follows. (1) Even if the counting button is turned off → on after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned on → off before sending the counting notification, the timing when the long press of the counting button is detected , the total score and the display of the total score display device can be updated. (2) Even if you turn the counting button off → on after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turn the counting button on → off before sending the counting notification, the total score will be calculated at the timing of sending the counting notification. and can update the display on the total score display device.

Further, the total score display device may be configured to be able to both store the total score and display the total score, and even in such a configuration, approximately After 20ms, in other words, it may be configured to update the total score and update the display of the total score at the timing when a long press of the count button is detected, or update the total score and update the display of the total score at the timing at which the count notification is sent. It may be configured to update the display of the total score.

Thereafter, within 170 ms, a lending notice containing information that the lending serial number p and the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10ms, a loan receipt result response containing the loan serial number p and information indicating that the loan score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine, and the total score remains at 150 points. (The display on the total score display device also remains at 150 points). Note that n, m, and p may be different numerical values or may be the same numerical value.

Then, more than 20 ms after the previous rental receipt response was sent and approximately 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, a gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine to the lending machine. The serial number in this gaming machine information notification is n+1, and it contains information that the total score is 150.

By configuring it in this way, even if the counting button is turned from OFF to ON after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned from ON to OFF before sending the counting notification, the display of the total score and total score display device can be updated, and the counting points and accumulated counting points can be sent outside the gaming machine via the counting notification. Even if the player stops operating the counting button (takes his/her hand off) at the time when he/she appears to recognize that the settlement has been made, information can be sent accurately outside the gaming machine.

Further, the configuration regarding the counting button according to this example may be configured as follows. <Configuration 1> (1) When the counting button is activated and operated for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted and a counting notification containing a predetermined number of counted points is sent. (2) The gaming machine Send gaming machine information notifications to rental machines every hour (3) When sending gaming machine information notifications, send counting notifications after a predetermined period of time (4) Receive rental notifications after sending gaming machine information notifications If the counting button is turned on and then off before doing so, the total score will be subtracted when the next counting notification is sent.

<Configuration 2> (1) When the count button is activated and operated for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted and a count notification containing a predetermined number of counted points is sent (2) The gaming machine Send gaming machine information notifications to rental machines every hour (3) When sending gaming machine information notifications, send counting notifications after a predetermined period of time (4) Receive rental notifications after sending gaming machine information notifications If the counting button is turned on and off before the count button is turned on, the total score will not be subtracted when the next counting notification is sent.

<Configuration 3> (1) When the counting button is activated and operated for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted and a counting notification containing a predetermined number of counted points is sent (2) The gaming machine Sends gaming machine information notifications to rental machines every hour (3) When gaming machine information notifications are sent, a counting notification is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed (4) After sending gaming machine information notifications, the counting button turns off →Even if it is turned on, the total score will not be subtracted at the next time the count notification is sent.

<Configuration 4> (1) When the counting button is enabled and operated continuously for a certain period of time, the total points are subtracted and a counting notification command including the counting points is sent. (2) If a power outage occurs while the counting button is on, and the power is restored afterwards with the counting button still pressed, the total points are not subtracted.

<Configuration 5> (1) When the count button is activated and operated for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted and a count notification command containing the count is sent. (2) During the wait (minimum number of points between games) Even if the count button is pressed when the timer value > 0), the reels start rotating, and if the count button is held down, the stop button cannot be operated. Moreover, the total score will not be subtracted.

<Configuration 6> During the aforementioned freeze at the start of rotation or freeze at the stop, the settlement process based on the operation of the counting button may be made executable, or the settlement process based on the operation of the counting button may not be made executable. Note that during the aforementioned freeze at the start of rotation or freeze at the stop, the addition of the total points based on the operation of the lending button may be made executable, or the addition of the total points based on the operation of the lending button may not be made executable.

<Configuration 7-1> It may be configured so that score settlement can be performed when the counting button is operated while the front door DU is open (when a door open error has occurred), and by configuring in this way, the player or manager can execute score settlement at any time regardless of whether the front door DU is open or not. <Configuration 7-2> It may be configured so that score settlement is not performed when the counting button is operated while the front door DU is open (when a door open error has occurred), and by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the gaming facility by configuring so that score settlement is not executed even if the front door DU is opened and fraud has been performed inside the gaming machine.

<Configuration 8-1> If the front door DU opens (a door opening error occurs) while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held for a long time), the score is It may be configured such that the settlement of points can be executed continuously, and by such a configuration, the player or the administrator can execute the settlement of points at any timing regardless of whether or not the front door DU is opened. can do.

<Configuration 8-2> If the front door DU opens (a door opening error occurs) while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), the score is The system may be configured so that the settlement of points is not executed, and by such a configuration, even if the front door DU is opened and fraud is committed inside the gaming machine, the settlement of points is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent situations that would be disadvantageous to the gaming parlor.

<Configuration 9-1> If a power outage occurs while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), and then the power is turned on again with the counting button still on (the counting button is pressed and held), the cumulative count points in the first counting notification after the power is turned on will be 0, and the counting serial number will also be 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the cumulative count points and other information related to the settlement after the power is turned on. <Configuration 9-2> If a power outage occurs while the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held), and then the counting button is turned off (the counting button is not operated), and then the power is turned on again, the cumulative count points in the first counting notification after the power is turned on will be 0, and the counting serial number will also be 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the cumulative count points and other information related to the settlement after the power is turned on.

<Configuration 10> The system is configured so that even if you start operating (pressing) the counting button while the power is off and turning on the power with the counting button pressed (long-pressed), payment will not be executed. You may. In other words, when performing payment based on the operation of the count button, after detecting the rise of the count button from off to on, the payment is executed by keeping it on for a predetermined period of time (detecting a long press). It may be configured so that

<<Configuration Related to Door Open Error>> Furthermore, the configuration related to the door open error according to this example may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 1> Even in a state where the front door DU is open (a state where a door open error has occurred), the above-mentioned signals sent from the gaming machine to the outside (rental machine) and signals sent from the outside (rental machine) The information received by the gaming machine may be configured to be able to be transmitted and received. More specifically, the transmission or reception of gaming machine information notifications (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending reception result responses is It may also be configured to be executable even in a state where the door DU is open (a state where a door opening error has occurred).

<Configuration 2> In the case of an unrecoverable error (for example, an error that occurs when the checksum after power is turned on is abnormal), the above-mentioned signal sent from the gaming machine to the outside (rental machine) and the external (rental machine) The gaming machine may be configured not to transmit or receive information transmitted from a rental machine (rental machine) and received by the gaming machine. More specifically, the transmission or reception of gaming machine information notifications (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending reception result responses is It may be configured such that it is not executed when the door DU is open (a state where a door opening error has occurred).

In this example, as described above, the interval for transmitting HC/fraud monitoring information from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) is set to 300 ms. In other words, the interval for transmitting gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) is set to 300 ms. Also, as described above in FIG. 35, when rotating the reel, the reel acceleration process is executed, and then the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, in other words, the reel acceleration state is switched to the reel constant speed state. As described above, one rotation (one lap) of the reel is 336 steps, and the execution interval of the interrupt process is about 2.23 ms. In the reel constant speed state, one step is rotated with one interrupt process, so the time required for the reel to rotate one lap in the reel constant speed state is 2.23 x 336 ≒ 749 ms. In this way, in this example, it is possible to transmit a gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine to the outside (rented machine) at least two or more times in the time it takes for the reel to rotate one revolution at a constant reel speed.By configuring it in this way, even if the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the gaming machine becomes abnormal due to noise or the like, it is possible to transmit a gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine at least one more time within the time it takes for the reel to rotate one revolution at a constant reel speed, so that the information transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine can be more accurate. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 35, the average reel rotation speed in the reel acceleration state is slower than the average reel rotation speed in the reel constant speed state, so the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution from the start of reel rotation to the reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state is longer than the 749 ms required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the reel constant speed state described above. Therefore, even if the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine becomes abnormal due to noise or the like during the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution from the start of reel rotation to the reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state, the gaming machine information notification can be sent from the gaming machine at least one more time within the time required for the reel to rotate one revolution in the reel constant speed state, so the information sent to the outside of the gaming machine can be more accurate.

<Combination of configurations related to this example> As described above, a gaming machine having a configuration related to this example to a configuration related to the thirteenth example has been described. The configurations from this example to the thirteenth example can be combined as appropriate, and below is a list of examples of a gaming machine that combines configurations from this example to the thirteenth example.

<Combination configuration 1> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the third embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of medal addition process using input sensor>>> in the form.

<Effect> By configuring in this way, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order will be changed regardless of which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent the situation where the navigation cannot be recognized, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but an error occurred at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time, and the credit is To provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though addition processing is not executed.

<Combination configuration 2> For example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait> in this example, and the fourth embodiment A gaming machine is constructed by combining the configurations according to <<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>>.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, for example, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, resulting in the player being unable to recognize the push order navigation no matter which display device he looks at, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a sufficient distance compared to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming medal that hits the collision section bounces back up to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combined configuration 3> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example, and the configuration related to <<<<<Drive control of medal payout device of fifth embodiment>>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which, for example, there is a delay in starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40, causing the player to be unable to recognize the push order navigation no matter which display device he looks at. This allows a player receiving a payout of game medals to receive the game medals at equal intervals from the first medal to the specified number when a specified number of game medals are paid out, providing a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

<Combination configuration 4> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the configuration related to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <<Configuration 1> of <<<Sixth Embodiment: Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payment-related processing, when commands and channels are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine configured by combining the above configurations.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which, for example, there is a delay in starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40, causing the player to be unable to recognize the push order navigation no matter which display device he looks at. It is also possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which, if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player can recognize that no problem has occurred with the gaming machine because the audio output has not ended.

<Combined configuration 5> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process using insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment and the configuration related to <<<<Fourth embodiment: medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effect> With this configuration, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time. This makes it possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though credit addition processing is not executed, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is equal to the diameter of the game medal. It is possible to provide a game machine that has a sufficient distance from the collision part and can prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341. .

<Combined configuration 6> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment and the configuration related to <<<<Fifth embodiment: Driving control of medal payout device>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, , the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the ejection port D240 by the blocker D100) cannot be executed in time, and the credit addition process is delayed. This makes it possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even when the game medals are not executed. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number of medals, and which does not give players a sense of discomfort.

<Combination Configuration 7> For example, the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of Medal Addition Process by Insertion Sensor>>> in the third embodiment, and <<Combination Configuration 1>> in the sixth embodiment. Configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication is disconnected between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of payment-related processing When commands and channels are one-to-one>>> A gaming machine configured by combining the above.

<Effect> With this configuration, for example, when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution processing of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time. It is possible to prevent game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though credit addition processing is not being executed, and the main control User-friendly feature that allows the player to recognize that there is no problem with the gaming machine because the audio output does not end even if communication between the board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. It is possible to provide gaming machines with

<Combined configuration 8> For example, a gaming machine may be configured by combining the configuration relating to the <<<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment and the configuration relating to the <<<<Fifth embodiment medal payout device drive control>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring it in this manner, for example, the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to prevent the first gaming medal that strikes the collision section from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341, and allowing the player receiving the payout of gaming medals to receive the first to the specified number of gaming medals at equal intervals when a specified number of gaming medals are paid out, providing a user-friendly gaming machine that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

<Combination Configuration 9> For example, the configuration related to <<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and the process related to <<<Sixth Embodiment Settlement in the sixth embodiment] Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board during the execution of a game machine configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of 1:1 command and channel>>> do.

<Effects> By configuring it in this manner, for example, the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to prevent the first gaming medal that strikes the collision area from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341. In the event that communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the player can be assured that the audio output has not ended, and so a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that allows the player to recognize that no problems have occurred with the gaming machine.

<Combined configuration 10> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration relating to <<<<<Fifth embodiment: Driving control of the medal payout device>>>>> in the fifth embodiment and the configuration relating to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of settlement-related processing when the relationship between the command and the channel is one to one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> With this configuration, for example, when a player receiving game medals is paid out, when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player can pay out the game medals from the first medal to the predetermined number at the same intervals. If the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while processing that involves the output of audio is performed, the game will not feel strange to the player. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which a player can recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine because the output of the sound does not end.

<Combination configuration 11> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the third embodiment Configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of medal addition process by input sensor>>> and <<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal return member A gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations according to >>>>.

<Effect> By configuring in this way, for example, the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed, so that the push order will be changed regardless of which display device the player looks at. It is possible to reliably prevent the situation where the navigation cannot be recognized, and when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but an error occurred at this timing. In this case, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and refunding the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not completed in time, and the credit is This prevents the game medals from getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the addition process is not executed, and ensures that the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is sufficient for the diameter of the game medals. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving port D341.

<Combination configuration 12> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 1> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the third embodiment Configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third Embodiment Example of medal addition process by input sensor>>> and <<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal return member A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to >>>> and the configuration related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment Driving Control of Medal Payout Device>>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effect> By configuring in this manner, for example, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing to start the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, resulting in the player being unable to recognize the push order navigation when looking at either display device. When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and having the blocker D100 pay out the game medal to the release port D240) will be delayed. This prevents game medals from entering (being swallowed) into the game machine even when the medal does not match the diameter and the credit addition process is not being executed, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is a sufficient distance compared to the diameter of the game medal, making it possible to prevent the first game medal that hits the collision part from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341, and allowing the player receiving the game medals to receive the game medals at equal intervals from the first medal to the specified number when a specified number of game medals are paid out, thereby providing a user-friendly game machine that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

<Combined configuration 13> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process by insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment, the configuration related to <<<<Fourth embodiment: Medal return member>>>>> in the fourth embodiment, the configuration related to <<<<Fifth embodiment: Driving control of medal payout device>>>>> in the fifth embodiment, and the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of settlement-related process when the command and channel are one-to-one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effect> By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which, for example, the timing at which push order navigation begins on both the push order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is delayed, resulting in the player being unable to recognize the push order navigation when looking at either display device. When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and having the blocker D100 pay out the game medal to the release port D240) will not be completed in time, and the game medal will enter the gaming machine (be swallowed) even though the credit addition process has not been performed. ) and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the medal, making it possible to prevent the first medal that strikes the collision section from bouncing back to the medal receiving opening D341; when a predetermined number of medals are paid out, the player receiving the medals can receive medals at equal intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number, so the player does not feel uncomfortable; and when communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while processing involving audio output is being performed, the player can recognize that no problem is occurring in the gaming machine because the audio output does not end, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Combined configuration 14> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <Configuration 3> of <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition process using insertion sensor>>> in the third embodiment.

<Effect> With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state) → constant reel speed → period until stop switch operation is valid), for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to the lamp. This can be executed by turning on the reel window frame lamp D310 (in this example, lighting the reel window frame lamp D310), and it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation. While the D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU 100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error and perform a predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, blocker D100 is turned off and the game medals are returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) are not executed in time, and the game medals end up getting into the game machine (swallowing) even though the credit addition process has not been executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent such problems.

<Combination configuration 15> For example, in this example, the configuration according to <Configuration 3> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the fourth embodiment A gaming machine is configured by combining the configurations according to <<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>> in the embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), so that even in gaming machines that are not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, push order navigation can be performed using the lighting of the lamps (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., making it less likely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient relative to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming medal that hits the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combination configuration 16> For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration 3> of <<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of press order navigation when there is no wait>, and the fifth embodiment The present invention is a gaming machine configured by combining the configurations related to <<<<Fifth Embodiment Driving Control of Medal Payout Device>>>>.

<Effect> With this configuration, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is changed to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state) → constant reel speed → period until stop switch operation is valid), for example, even if the game machine is not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be changed to the lamp. This can be executed using lighting (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., so that it is unlikely that the player will not be able to recognize the push order navigation, and the player who receives the payout of game medals will be able to do so by turning on the predetermined number of medals. To provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give a player a sense of discomfort since the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first to a predetermined number of game medals when the game medals are paid out.

<Combined configuration 17> For example, a gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation>> <Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> in <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of settlement-related processing when the command and channel are one-to-one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period before the minimum play time has elapsed → reel rotation starts → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop switch is effective), so that even in gaming machines that do not have a liquid crystal unit such as the performance display device S40, push order navigation can be performed using the lighting of the lamps (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., making it less likely that the player will be unable to recognize the push order navigation, and even if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the audio output will not end, allowing the player to recognize that no problem has occurred with the gaming machine, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Combined configuration 18> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<Configuration related to terminating the display of the push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of the <<<Third embodiment: An example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>>>> in the third embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 ends can be made different from the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 ends, thereby avoiding the situation where the player must simultaneously view two display devices, and the burden on the player can be reduced by being able to view the end of the push order navigation on each display device when the push order navigation occurs. When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and having the blocker D100 pay out the medals to the release port D240) cannot be completed in time, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that can prevent medals from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine even though the credit addition process has not been performed.

<Combined configuration 19> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration relating to the <<Configuration relating to terminating the display of the push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration relating to the <<<<Fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effects> With this configuration, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, two It is possible to avoid the situation of having to visually check two display devices at the same time, and the player can see the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player when playing the game. , the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collided with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving opening D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the situation of being put away.

<Combination configuration 20> For example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to display end of push order navigation>> in this example and <<<<drive control of fifth embodiment medal payout device>> in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to >>>.

<Effects> With this configuration, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, two It is possible to avoid the situation of having to visually check two display devices at the same time, and the player can see the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, reducing the burden on the player when playing the game. , when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player receiving the payout of game medals can receive the payout of game medals at the same intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number, so that the player does not feel any discomfort. It is possible to provide user-friendly gaming machines.

<Combined configuration 21> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<Configuration related to terminating the display of the push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is cut off during execution of processing related to settlement, when the relationship between the command and the channel is one to one>>> in the sixth embodiment.

<Effects> By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 ends can be made different from the timing at which the push order navigation displayed on the performance display device S40 ends, thereby avoiding the situation where the player has to view two display devices at the same time, reducing the burden on the player by allowing the player to view the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the time the push order navigation occurs, and providing a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the player to recognize that no problems have occurred with the gaming machine because the audio output does not end in the event that communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed.

<Combined configuration 22> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example with the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> of <<<Third embodiment: Example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor>>>> in the third embodiment.

<Effects> With this configuration, the player operates the stop buttons according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, it is clear which reel should be stopped next even if the reel is being pressed to stop that reel, so it is less likely that the player will suffer unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to pressing the wrong order. When the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M will determine that there is an error, and the execution process of a specified medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 to have the blocker D100 pay out the medals to the release port D240) will not be completed in time, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that can prevent medals from entering (being swallowed) into the gaming machine even though the credit addition process has not been performed.

<Combined configuration 23> For example, a gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration related to the <<reel control and push order navigation configuration>> in this example with the configuration related to the <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<Effects> With this configuration, the player can operate the stop buttons according to the push order navigation, and even when the stop button is being pressed, it is clear which reel should be stopped next even when that reel is being pressed to stop that reel, making it difficult for the player to suffer unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to pressing the wrong order, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is sufficient compared to the diameter of the gaming medal, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming medal that hits the collision part bounces back up to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combination configuration 24> For example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example, and <<<<drive control of fifth embodiment medal payout device>> in the fifth embodiment. A gaming machine configured by combining the configurations according to >>>.

<Effect> With this configuration, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, the reel to be stopped next will be pressed while the reel is being pressed due to the stop operation of the relevant reel. Even if a game medal is paid out, it is clear that even if the game medal is paid out, it will be clear that the player will not be disadvantaged unintentionally, such as not being able to get the maximum number of coins due to a mistake in the pressing order, etc. To provide a user-friendly game machine that does not give a player a sense of discomfort since game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to a predetermined number of medals when the game is played.

<Combination configuration 25> For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> and in the sixth embodiment, <<<During execution of processing related to payment in the sixth embodiment Processing when communication is cut off between the main control board and the sub-control board A gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <<Configuration 1>> in the case where commands and channels are one-to-one.

<Effects> With this configuration, the player can operate the stop buttons according to the push order navigation, and even when the stop button is being pressed, it is clear which reel should be stopped next even when that reel is being pressed to stop that reel, making it less likely that the player will suffer unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of coins due to pressing the wrong order, and even if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off while a process involving audio output is being executed, the audio output does not end, allowing the player to recognize that no problems have occurred with the gaming machine, making it possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

The above describes an example of a gaming machine that combines the configuration of this example with the configuration of the sixth embodiment, but this is just one example, and the configuration of this example and the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be combined as appropriate.

(Summary) Based on the configurations shown in the above examples, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and it is possible to combine or separate (superordinately conceptualize) these listed concepts, and to add concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above examples to these concepts.

The gaming machine according to aspect (1) includes a band-shaped reel tape (e.g., reel band MO) wound around the outer periphery of a reel base (e.g., reel frame MW), and the reel tape includes the reel tape. A plurality of types of symbols are arranged along the longitudinal direction, and the types of symbols include at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol); The maximum width value of the first symbol is larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol, and the second symbol is arranged at at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. , and the first pattern is not arranged at each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape is equal to the surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound. This gaming machine is characterized by being longer than its outer circumference.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is a reel type gaming machine including: a gaming machine main body; a front door (e.g., front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable; and a reel unit (e.g., reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body, wherein the inside of the gaming machine main body is provided with: a base portion (e.g., base portion BU) on which the reel unit is installed; a main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) installed below the base portion and in which gaming media are stored; and an auxiliary tank member (e.g., medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for evacuating excess gaming media stored in the main tank member; a slope portion (e.g., inclined surface H64) descending from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member is provided in a portion of the main tank member; the reel unit and the base portion are detachably held by a locking part (e.g., screw BS); This gaming machine is characterized in that the slope portion is located vertically below the locking part that is closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is a reel type gaming machine including a gaming machine main body, a front door (e.g., front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be openable and closable, and a reel unit (e.g., reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine main body, in which the gaming machine main body is provided with a base part (e.g., base part BU) on which the reel unit is installed, a main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) installed below the base part and storing gaming media, and an auxiliary tank member (e.g., medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for evacuating excess gaming media stored in the main tank member, the reel unit and the base part are detachably held by a locking part (e.g., screw BS), and the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the locking part that is closest to the side where the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., reel M50); a plurality of stop switches (e.g., stop button D40); a performance display unit capable of displaying performances (e.g., performance display device S40); and an operating member capable of changing the display content of the performances (e.g., sub-input button SB, cross key SB2); after the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch; a final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel among the plurality of reels that is to be stopped last, is performed to stop all of the plurality of reels, thereby completing one game; when the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time has elapsed without a bet being placed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation, the performance display unit is configured to be able to display a specific image (e.g., a standby screen); and when a predetermined operating member (e.g., sub-input button SB) is operated after one game has ended, a predetermined image (e.g., a menu screen) can be displayed on the performance display unit; When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, if a second predetermined time has elapsed while the predetermined image is still displayed from a specific timing after the operation of the predetermined operation member, the specific image can be displayed on the performance display unit, and the gaming machine is configured so that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., reel M50); a plurality of stop switches (e.g., stop button D40); a performance display unit capable of displaying performances (e.g., performance display device S40); and an operating member capable of changing the display content of the performances (e.g., sub-input button SB, cross key SB2); after the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch; a final stop switch operation, which is the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel among the plurality of reels that is to be stopped last, is performed to stop all of the plurality of reels, thereby completing one game; when the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time has elapsed without a bet being placed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation, the performance display unit is configured to be able to display a specific image (e.g., a standby screen); and when a predetermined operating member (e.g., sub-input button SB) is operated after one game has ended, a predetermined image (e.g., a menu screen) can be displayed on the performance display unit; a display unit configured to display the specific image when the specific operation member is operated and the specific image is displayed, if a second specific time has elapsed with the specific image being displayed from a specific timing after the specific operation member is operated; the second specific time is configured to be longer than the first specific time; a display unit configured to display the specific image when the specific operation member is operated and the specific image is displayed, if a specific operation member (e.g., cross key SB2) is operated before the second specific time has elapsed with the specific image being displayed from a specific timing after the specific operation member is operated, the specific image is not displayed on the display unit even if the second specific time has elapsed with the specific image being displayed from a specific timing after the specific operation member is operated; whereas a display unit configured to display the specific image when the final stop switch is operated, if the stop switch is newly operated before the first specific time has elapsed with no bet being placed from the specific timing after the final stop switch is operated, if the first specific time has elapsed with no bet being placed from the specific timing after the final stop switch is operated; This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the final stop switch operation is performed, if a bet is placed before the first predetermined time has elapsed without a bet being placed from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation, the specific image is not displayed on the performance display unit even if the first predetermined time has elapsed from the predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6) comprises a main gaming section (e.g., a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game, and a setting switch (e.g., a setting key switch) that is electrically connected to the main gaming section and is operated to transition to a setting change mode (e.g., a setting change mode) in which a setting value related to the degree of advantage for the player can be changed, the main gaming section is configured to be capable of executing an interrupt process which is a process executed at predetermined time intervals, and is configured to transition to the setting change mode when a power outage occurs in a predetermined gaming state other than the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on in a situation where no power is being supplied to the gaming machine, power is supplied to the gaming machine, a power outage occurs after transition to the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned off and power is supplied to the gaming machine, This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to transition to the setting change mode if a power outage occurs in a specified gaming state other than the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on under a situation in which power is not being supplied to the gaming machine, power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a power outage occurs before the specified time has elapsed since the start of the power supply, and power is supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (7) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of different patterns; stop switches (e.g., a left stop button D41, a center stop button D42, and a right stop button D43) provided corresponding to each of the reels and operated by a player to stop the rotation of the reels; storage means (e.g., a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming media within a predetermined range; a main gaming section (e.g., a main control board M) which controls the progress of the game; a speaker (e.g., a speaker S20) which outputs sound effects; and a sub-gaming section (e.g., a sub-control board S) which controls the output of effects, the main gaming section comprising: role selection means which executes role selection; and reel control means which, when the stop switch is operated, controls the stop of the reels to correspond to the role selection result by the role selection means. The game device is capable of executing a stored number increase process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means and a payout process for executing a payout of game media, and is configured to be able to award game media to a player when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a static symbol by the reel control means, and is configured to not execute the stored number increase process and execute a payout process when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a static symbol and a specific number of game media is awarded when the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the predetermined number minus the specific number, and is configured to execute the stored number increase process and not execute a payout process when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a static symbol and a specific number of game media is awarded when the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the predetermined number minus the specific number, when the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number but is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the specific number of game media is awarded, a payout process is executed after a stored number increase process is executed; the main game unit is configured to be capable of transmitting game medium award information to the sub game unit after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the sub game unit is configured to be capable of outputting a game medium award sound, which is a performance sound related to the awarding of game media, from a speaker based on receiving the game medium award information; when the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the specific number of game media is awarded, and the sub game unit is capable of outputting a predetermined game medium award sound (for example, a game medium award sound output when a credit is increased by one, a game medium award sound output when one game medal is paid out) based on receiving the game medium award information; When the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the specific number of game media is awarded, the predetermined game media awarding sound can be outputted based on the reception of the game media awarding information; when the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as still and the specific number of game media is awarded, the predetermined game media awarding sound can be outputted based on the reception of the game media awarding information; This gaming machine is characterized in that the time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) to when it becomes A+1 during execution of a stored number increase process is different from the time value from the start of execution of a payout process for an M (M is a natural number, 1≦M≦(N-1)) game medium to the start of execution of a payout process for an M+1 game medium during execution of a payout process to pay out N (N is a natural number, 2≦N) game media.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8) comprises a main gaming section (e.g., main control board M) that controls the progress of the game, a sub-gaming section (e.g., sub-control board S) that controls the presentation, a gaming lamp (e.g., a lamp unit) that can be lit when the presentation is executed, and a setting value display section (e.g., a setting display LED) that can display a setting value, and the gaming lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (e.g., element 6 in FIG. 77), and the lighting pattern is composed of a combination of a plurality of lighting modes (e.g., element 5 in FIG. 77), and the lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (e.g., element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (e.g., element 4 in FIG. 77), and the lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (e.g., element 2 in FIG. 77) and an extinguishing time (e.g., element 3 in FIG. 77), and the gaming machine has a plurality of lighting colors, a plurality of lighting times, and a plurality of extinguishing times, The lighting patterns include at least a first lighting pattern that can be implemented when a specified abnormality occurs, a second lighting pattern that can be implemented when a set value is displayed on the set value display unit, and a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when a specified abnormality does not occur and a set value is not displayed on the set value display unit, the first lighting pattern is configured to include a specified lighting mode, the second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the specified lighting mode, the second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode, and the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9) comprises: a storage means capable of electrically storing gaming media within a predetermined range (for example, in this example, gaming medals can be electrically stored as credits within the gaming machine); a bet switch (for example, a max bet button) which is a switch operated when betting gaming media stored in the storage means and which allows multiple gaming media to be bet; a predetermined lamp (for example, a 3 bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a predetermined number, which is the maximum number of bets per game in a predetermined gaming state, has been bet; a specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is valid; and a role determination means capable of determining a winning role, and is configured to be able to determine a replay role as the winning role determined by the role determination means; and is configured to light up the specific lamp when the predetermined gaming state is reached, a replay role has not been won in the game executed immediately before, the sum of the gaming media stored in the storage means and the number of bets is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and the number of bets is less than the predetermined number, This gaming machine is characterized in that when the specific lamp is lit and the number of bets reaches the specified number, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10) includes: a main gaming section (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game; and a sub-gaming section (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the performance; The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main gaming section is configured to be longer than the time from the occurrence of a power outage to the end of power supply to the gaming machine. The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the program of the main gaming section is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the start of the program of the sub-gaming section. This gaming machine is characterized by being configured to last for a long time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the game machine is configured to award the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, even if the reels are stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation after that, and a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, and in a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the game machine is configured to award the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, even if the reels are stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation after that, and a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, and in a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the game machine is configured to award the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, even if the reels are stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation after that, and a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means, and is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of executing a power-off process in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. The player is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player, and in a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the final stop operation by the player A symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the above, and the reel is then stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player to display the predetermined symbol combination. After that, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and in a game where the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the game value is given to the player on each reel. , the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped, and even though the player performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off is performed. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the execution, the system is configured to provide the player with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after the power is restored, and in the predetermined gaming state. In a game in which a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and the subsequent player's Even if the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power-off processing based on the detection of power-off, the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to give the player the following:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) having a plurality of types of symbols provided thereon, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and is capable of executing a freeze for slowing down the progress of a game, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In the predetermined game state and in a game in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the reels being stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a predetermined game after the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; and is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (e.g., freeze at the start of a bonus) in a predetermined game after the internal lottery means has determined a specific result and symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation thereafter, the reel control means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (e.g., freeze at the start of a bonus) in a predetermined game after the internal lottery means has determined a specific result and the reels are stopped at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, In a predetermined game after the internal lottery means has determined a specific result, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined freeze can be executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means; In a game that is in a gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. After the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by a subsequent stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player; In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the player's final Even if a stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as a stop operation, even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotational failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The reel control means is configured to award a gaming value corresponding to the combination to the player, and in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the reel control means is configured to award a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player. In a game where the predetermined game state is in the predetermined gaming state and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are stopped on each reel. After the player performs the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game can be executed regardless of the input of game value. In a game where the game is in the predetermined gaming state and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, Even though the player subsequently performed a stop operation at the specific timing as a final stop operation, a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination was displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The structure is such that the next game can be executed even after the game is played, regardless of the input of game value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability of a specific result being determined differs from that of the first drawing state, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, and in a predetermined game state and in a game in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the reel being stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means; a game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; This is a gaming machine that is characterized in that, in a game that is executed when the first lottery state is in effect, and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently stops the reels at a specific timing as the final stop operation, a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation causes a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination to be displayed, the gaming machine is configured to be able to transition to the second lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, a reel control means for controlling the reels, and a predetermined lamp (e.g., a replay lamp D290) that can be turned on when a specific result is determined, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the player performing a stop operation at the predetermined timing thereafter as the player's final stop operation, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; in a game in the predetermined gaming state and in which the internal lottery means has determined the specific result, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the specified game state and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stop operation at the specified timing, the predetermined lamp is configured to light up even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal drawing means, a reel control means for controlling the reels, and a predetermined lamp (e.g., replay lamp D290) that can be turned on when a specific result is determined, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power outage is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is in progress and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage despite the player performing a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; in a game in the predetermined game state and in which the internal lottery means has determined the specific result, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the specified game state and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stop operation at the specified timing, a power-off process is executed based on the detection of a power outage, causing a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination to be displayed, the specified lamp is configured to light up after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) includes N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, and a production sound. a speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs the following: an internal lottery means; and a reel control means that controls the reels; The player is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on the player's stop operation, and in a game where the game is in a predetermined gaming state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the final stop by the player A symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the player's operation, and the symbol combination is then stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player. After being displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and in a game where the predetermined gaming state is the predetermined game state and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels is , the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped, and even though the player subsequently performs the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the reels corresponding to the final stop operation are stopped. Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure, the player is configured to be provided with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and is executed in a specific gaming state. In a game, the player performs a stop operation on the N-1 reel at a specific timing, and after the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel, a predetermined performance is emitted from the speaker. It is configured to be able to output a sound (for example, tenpai sound), and in a game executed in the specific gaming state, a stop operation is performed at the specific timing as a stop operation for the N-1th reel by the player. However, even after symbols other than the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel due to a predetermined rotation failure on the N-1th reel, the speaker does not output a predetermined effect sound. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to output.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) has a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols, and a game value that is electronically set within a predetermined number of reels. A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can be stored in the storage means; and a bet switch (e.g., a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means. , a max bet button), a specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of indicating that the operation of the bet switch is valid, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and the reel control means is in a predetermined game state and the above-mentioned In a game where the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation, and subsequent After the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and the game is in the predetermined gaming state; In a game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the final stopping operation by the player is performed at the predetermined timing. Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. and in a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined game state is in place, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol. The symbols corresponding to the combinations are each stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a notification that the specific lamp is valid is issued. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined game state is in place, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel is , the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped, and even though the player subsequently performs the stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the reel corresponding to the final stop operation is This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that notification that the specific lamp is valid is not made even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of different patterns; a storage means (e.g., a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined range; a bet switch (e.g., a max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and which allows multiple gaming values to be bet; a specific lamp (e.g., a max bet lamp) capable of indicating that the operation of the bet switch is valid; an internal lottery means; and a reel control means which controls the reels; and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power-off is detected; and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined pattern combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means; In a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; In a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the internal lottery means is reached, even if each reel is stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter and a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of a power off process based on detection of a power off, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; The reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the specific symbol combination is displayed when the reels are stopped at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation. After that, the specific lamp is not notified that the specific lamp is active. The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, the storage means stores one or more game media, and the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and even if the reels are stopped at the specific timing as the player's final stop operation, and a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, the specific lamp is not notified that the specific lamp is active after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) comprises: a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided; a storage means (e.g., a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined range; a bet switch (e.g., a max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming value stored in the storage means and which allows multiple gaming values to be bet; a specific lamp (e.g., a max bet lamp) capable of indicating that the operation of the bet switch is valid; an internal lottery means; and a reel control means which controls the reels; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, In a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the reels are subsequently stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation to display the predetermined symbol combination, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; In a game in the predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and even after the reels are subsequently stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation to display a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the symbols corresponding to the specified symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and after the player stops the reels at a specified timing as the player's final stop operation to display the specified symbol combination, the specific lamp is activated.The storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the storage means stores one or more game media, the game is in the specified game state, and the internal lottery means determines the specified result in a game in which the reels store symbols corresponding to the specified symbol combination, and after the player stops the reels at a specified timing as the player's final stop operation to display a symbol combination other than the specified symbol combination due to a specified rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the specific lamp is activated.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) has a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of types of symbols, and a game value that is electronically set within a predetermined number of reels. A storage means (e.g., credit number display device D200) that can be stored in the storage means; and a bet switch (e.g., a bet switch that can bet a plurality of game values) that is operated when betting the game value stored in the storage means. , a max bet button), a specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of indicating that the operation of the bet switch is valid, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and the reel control means is in a predetermined game state and the above-mentioned In a game where the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation, and subsequent After the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and the game is in the predetermined gaming state; In a game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the final stopping operation by the player is performed at the predetermined timing. Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off despite the stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination will be displayed after the power is restored. one or more game media is stored in the storage means, the predetermined gaming state is present, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. In the game, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the player then performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation to display the predetermined symbol combination. Thereafter, the system is configured to notify that the specific lamp is valid, one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the predetermined gaming state is in effect, and the internal lottery means causes the In a game in which a predetermined result has been determined, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and even if the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as a final stop operation, Regardless, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, a notification that the specific lamp is valid will be made after the power is restored. This gaming machine is characterized by the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) each having a plurality of different patterns, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player as a gaming state, and is capable of executing a freeze to slow down the progress of the game, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined pattern combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a pattern corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination stopped, and after the predetermined pattern combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination is awarded to the player, In a game in which the predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the reels being stopped at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; when a termination condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (e.g., a freeze at the end of a bonus) can be executed; in a game newly executed in a situation in which the special game state is reached and the termination condition of the special game state is satisfied by awarding the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to the player, and the predetermined role has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each of the reels, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, This gaming machine is characterized in that it is a game newly executed in a special gaming state in which the end condition of the special gaming state is satisfied by granting the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and in a game in which the predetermined role has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation causes a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination to be displayed, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means, which has at least a special game state advantageous to the player as a game state, is capable of executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game, and when a power outage is detected, a power outage is detected. The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means. and in a game in which the predetermined gaming state is in place and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a pattern corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Each of the symbols to be played has been stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the player receives the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. In a game in which the predetermined game state is given and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and the subsequent In the case where a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off even though the player has performed the stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation by the player. However, after the power is restored, the system is configured to award the player with the gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the end of the bonus) occurs. A new game is executed in a special gaming state in which the ending conditions of the special gaming state are satisfied by giving the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. In a game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and a predetermined combination is selected as the final stopping operation by the player thereafter. After the stop operation is performed at the timing of , and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is executed, and a special gaming state is entered, in which the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. In a game that is newly executed in a situation where the end condition of the special gaming state is satisfied by the awarding of the winning combination, and in which the predetermined combination has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol. Even though each of the symbols corresponding to the combination has been stopped and the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power-off processing based on the detection of a power-off is executed. This gaming machine is characterized in that even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means; In a game that is in a gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. After the game is stopped, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player. In a game where the game is in the predetermined gaming state and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. After the reels are stopped, and then the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotational failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to give the player a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. and a control means, and is configured to be able to execute power-off processing when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of executing a power-off process in a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. The player is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player, and in a game in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the final stop operation by the player A symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the above, and the reel is then stopped at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player to display the predetermined symbol combination. is configured to award the player with a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the game is in the predetermined gaming state, and the internal lottery means produces a specific result different from the predetermined result. In the game in which the symbol combination is determined, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the final stopping operation by the player is then performed at a specific timing, based on the detection of a power outage. After the predetermined symbol combination has been displayed due to execution of power-off processing, the gaming machine is configured so that the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is not granted to the player. It is.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is configured such that, in the specified game state and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the next game can be executed without the insertion of gaming value, In the game in the specified game state and in which the internal lottery means has determined a specified result different from the specific result, each of the reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, and the reels are subsequently stopped at a specified timing as the player's final stopping operation, and after the specified symbol combination is displayed due to a specified rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stopping operation, the gaming machine is configured such that the next game cannot be played unless gaming value is inserted.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, the reel control means being configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the gaming machine being configured such that, in the predetermined gaming state and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a next game can be executed without the input of gaming value, This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a game in the specified game state and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stop operation at the specified timing, a specified rotation malfunction on the reel corresponding to the final stop operation causes a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination to be displayed, the next game can be executed without inserting game value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols; an internal lottery means; and a reel that controls the reels. the reel control means has at least a special game transferable state that is advantageous for the player as a game state, and is capable of executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game, and the reel control means is configured to control the internal lottery means. In a game after a specific result is determined by Until the symbol combination is stopped, the system is configured to be able to move to the special game, and in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, no stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player is allowed. The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel that is stopped by the operation, and after the player performs the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation, the special symbol combination is displayed. is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus), is not in a state where it is possible to move to a special game, and the lottery result of the winning combination by the winning lottery means is different from the specific result. In a game that results in a predetermined result, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and then the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation, and the final stop operation is performed as a final stop operation by the player. The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined freezing is not executed after the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the reel.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and is capable of executing a freeze for slowing down the progress of the game, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a predetermined game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined freeze (e.g., a freeze at the start of a bonus) after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels is stopped with a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, and even if the player subsequently performs a stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation, the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined freeze can be executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability of a specific result being determined differs from that of the first drawing state, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal drawing means, and is a game executed when the game is in the first drawing state, and in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal drawing means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination stopped, and is configured to be capable of transitioning to the second drawing state after the specific symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, This is a gaming machine that is characterized in that, in a game that is executed when the first lottery state is in effect, and in a game in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the reels are subsequently stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stopping operation, and after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure on the reel corresponding to the final stopping operation, the machine does not transition to the second role lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel that controls the reels. control means, capable of executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game, and configured to be able to execute a power-off processing when a power-off is detected, the reel control means controlling the internal lottery In a game in which a predetermined result is determined by the means, the predetermined symbol combination is configured to be able to be stopped based on a stop operation by the player, and the predetermined game state is in a predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. In a game in which the player's final stop operation is determined, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each reel that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation, and the predetermined symbol combination is then stopped as the player's final stop operation. After the stop operation is performed at the timing of and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player, and the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined gaming state and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by the internal lottery means. In a game in which the result has been determined, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even though the player subsequently performs a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation. First, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is granted to the player after the power is restored. The reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means. In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the player's final stopping operation thereafter After the stop operation is performed at a specific timing and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed, and a specific result is generated by the internal lottery means. In a predetermined game after the determination is made, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel, and even though the player performs the stopping operation at a specific timing as the final stopping operation after that, Nevertheless, even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the execution of a power-off process based on the detection of a power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine with

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage despite the player performing a stop operation at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; in a game in the predetermined game state and in which the internal lottery means has determined the specific result, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage thereafter, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be awarded to the player after power is restored; This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the game in the specified game state in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the player subsequently performs a final stop operation at the specific timing, a power-off process based on the detection of a power outage is executed, causing a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination to be displayed, the next game can be played after the power is restored without inserting game value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) comprises a plurality of reels (e.g., a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53) on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided, an internal drawing means, and a reel control means for controlling the reels, and has at least a first drawing state and a second drawing state in which the probability of determining a specific result differs from that of the first drawing state, and is configured to be capable of executing a power-off process when a power-off is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation by a player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal drawing means, In a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination stopped thereon, and after the player stops the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter to display the predetermined symbol combination, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player; In a game in which a predetermined game state is reached and the internal lottery means is reached, even if each reel stops by a stop operation other than the predetermined symbol combination at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter to display a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination due to execution of a power off process based on detection of a power off, a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; The reel control means is configured to be capable of stopping a specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means; This gaming machine is configured to be capable of transitioning to the second lottery state after a game in which the first lottery state is reached and in which, in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the specific symbol combination is displayed when the reels are stopped at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, and even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage, this gaming machine is configured to be capable of transitioning to the second lottery state after power is restored, in which, in a game in which the first lottery state is reached and in which, in a game in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if the reels are stopped at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, and a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) comprises N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) with multiple types of symbols (e.g., left reel M51, center reel M52, right reel M53), a speaker (e.g., speaker S20) that outputs sound effects, an internal lottery means, and a reel control means that controls the reels, and is configured to be able to execute a power-off process when a power outage is detected, and the reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined pattern combination based on a stop operation by the player in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and in a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and in which the predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation has a symbol corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination stopped, and after the predetermined pattern combination is displayed by stopping the reels at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, a gaming value corresponding to the predetermined pattern combination is awarded to the player, In a game in the specified game state and in which the specified result has been determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specified symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and even if a symbol combination other than the specified symbol combination is displayed due to a power-off process being executed based on detection of a power outage despite the player performing a stop operation at the specified timing as the final stop operation thereafter, the game value corresponding to the specified symbol combination is awarded to the player after power is restored; in a game executed in a specific game state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the player's stop operation for the N-1th reel, and after symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the stopped reels, a specified sound effect (for example, a ready sound) can be output from a speaker; This gaming machine is characterized in that, in a game executed in the specific game state, even if the player performs a stop operation on the N-1th reel at the specific timing, a power-off process is executed based on the detection of a power outage, causing each stopped reel to display a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to output the specified sound effect from the speaker after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) includes: a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols, an internal lottery means, and a reel that controls the reels. a control means, having at least a first lottery state as a lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least a probability of determining a specific result is different from the first lottery state; The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, and is in the first lottery state. In a game that is executed when the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player has the specified symbol combination. After the corresponding symbols are stopped and the specific symbol combination is displayed by the player's final stop operation at a specific timing, the second lottery state can be entered. In a game that is executed in the first lottery state, and in which the specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol for the specific symbol combination. Even though the corresponding symbols have been stopped and the player subsequently performs a stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation, the specific symbol is This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after a symbol combination other than the combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1) is configured to enable a stop function when a predetermined condition is met, is configured to be capable of executing a stop process that stops the progress of the game when a specific condition is met while the stop function is enabled, and is configured to be capable of setting at least one specific condition candidate from among multiple types of specific condition candidates as the specific condition.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2) is

The game is configured so that the stoppage function becomes effective when a predetermined condition is met, and the game is configured to be able to execute a stoppage process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition is met when the stoppage function is enabled. It is configured such that at least one specific condition candidate from among the specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition, and the specific condition candidate is that the number of gaming media acquired in a predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. This is a gaming machine characterized by having the following features. The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) is configured such that a stop function becomes effective when a predetermined condition is met, and performs a stop process that stops the progress of the game when a specific condition is met when the stop function is enabled. It is configured to be executable, and configured to be able to set at least one specific condition candidate as the specific condition from among multiple types of specific condition candidates, and to set the specific condition candidate as the specific condition candidate. If the number of gaming media has exceeded a predetermined number, and the specific condition is that the number of gaming media acquired in a predetermined period has exceeded a predetermined number, This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to execute the termination process if the game is in a predetermined gaming state and the specific conditions are satisfied after the game is executed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) is configured such that the stopping function is enabled when a predetermined condition is met, and performs a stopping process that stops the progress of the game when the specific condition is met when the stopping function is enabled. The game apparatus is configured to be executable, and is configured to be configured to be able to execute a determination process related to a predetermined error even when a stop process is executed to stop the progress of the game. It is a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) is configured such that the stop-off function is enabled when a predetermined condition A is met, and the automatic settlement function is enabled when a predetermined condition B is met. is configured to be able to execute a termination process that stops the progress of the game if a specific condition A is met when the automatic settlement function is enabled, and an automatic settlement process can be executed if a specific condition B is met when the automatic settlement function is enabled. The system is configured such that at least one candidate specific condition A can be set as the specific condition A from among multiple types of specific condition A candidates, and at least one candidate specific condition A can be set as the specific condition A from among multiple types of specific condition B candidates. It is configured such that one specific condition B candidate can be set as the specific condition B, and at least one of the specific condition A candidate and the specific condition B candidate is the same, and the specific condition A and the specific condition B are the same. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that conditions different from condition B can be set.

There is a demand for a gaming machine that can transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine, and there is a demand for establishing a control process for transmitting appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receiving information from outside the gaming machine (Patent Publication No. 2017-182215).

According to a gaming machine having the following configuration, it is possible to transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to transmit appropriate information outside the gaming machine or receive information from outside the gaming machine. It is possible to construct a control process for receiving.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D1) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, and a storage means capable of storing a serial number, configured to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, configured to output predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, the predetermined information including at least the serial number, capable of executing a special addition process that adds "1" to a value stored in the storage means, and characterized in that when the special addition process is executed when N (N is a value less than 255) is stored in the storage means, "N+1" is stored in the storage means, when the special addition process is executed when M (M is 255) is stored in the storage means, "1" is stored in the storage means, and when the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D2) is a gaming machine equipped with reels, a stop switch, a start switch, and a storage means capable of storing a serial number, and is capable of determining a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch. and is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, the predetermined information includes at least a serial number, and after outputting the predetermined information, the predetermined information is stored in the storage means. The stored serial number is configured to be updateable, and when the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the storage means, and when the power is on, The gaming machine is characterized in that the value stored in the storage means is configured to cyclically update from "1" to "M (M is an integer of 2 or more)".

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D3) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and the gaming machine includes: It is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside, and is configured to be able to output specific information to the outside of the gaming machine, and the types of serial numbers include serial numbers related to predetermined information and serial numbers related to specific information. The predetermined information includes at least a serial number related to the predetermined information, the specific information includes at least a serial number related to the specific information, and the predetermined information includes at least a serial number related to the specific information. and a second storage means for storing a serial number related to specific information, the addresses of the first storage means and the addresses of the second storage means are consecutive, and the power is turned off. This gaming machine is characterized in that when the power is turned on after being turned on, "0" is stored in the first storage means and "0" is stored in the second storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D4) is a gaming machine having reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, the predetermined information includes information consisting of at least X (X>1) bytes and checksum information, the checksum information consisting of 1 byte, and configured to calculate the checksum information by dividing the information consisting of X bytes into 1 byte units.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D5) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, and a total score display device, and is configured to be able to rotate the reel based on the operation of the start switch, and is configured to be able to add points based on the received lending signal when the points managed by the total score display device are less than a predetermined value while the reel is rotating, and is configured not to be able to add points based on the received lending signal when the points managed by the total score display device are equal to or greater than the predetermined value.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D6) is a gaming machine equipped with reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to rotate the reels based on the operation of the start switch, and the reels rotate. Under certain circumstances when the reels are not running, the system is configured so that points can be added based on the received lending signal, and when the reels are rotating, it is configured such that points cannot be added based on the received lending signal. This gaming machine is characterized by:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D7) is a gaming machine equipped with reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, configured to be able to determine the result of a lottery based on the operation of the start switch, configured to be able to receive a loan notification command from the outside, and the information contained in the loan notification command includes at least loan number information, and when a loan notification command containing "0" as the loan number information is received under a specified situation, it is capable of executing a bet process based on a bet operation, and when a loan notification command containing a value of "1" or more as the loan number information is received under a specified situation, it is configured not to execute a bet process based on a bet operation until a specified period has elapsed from the time of reception.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D8) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, and is configured to be able to determine the lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and is characterized in that it is able to start updating the score displayed on the total score display device even if the operation of the counting switch is not accepted after the operation of the counting switch is accepted between the output of the predetermined information to the outside and the output of the specific information to the outside, and is able to output specific information including the counting information to the outside even if the operation of the counting switch is not accepted after the operation of the counting switch is accepted between the output of the predetermined information to the outside and the output of the specific information to the outside.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D9) is a gaming machine equipped with a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, and a point management means for managing point information, characterized in that the reel is configured to be able to rotate based on the operation of the start switch, and is configured to be able to transmit a command including the point information to the outside multiple times within the period from when the reel starts to rotate until the reel completes one revolution.

There was a demand for a gaming machine that could display necessary information on a performance display device without impeding the progress of the game (Patent Publication No. 2017-202185).

According to the gaming machine having the following configuration, it is possible to display necessary information on the performance display device while not hindering the progress of the game.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (D10) is a gaming machine that includes reels, a stop switch, and a start switch, and is configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch, and the accessory is It has a first storage means that can store a value corresponding to the number of games that are activated or the accessory continuous operation device is activated, and a second storage means that can store a value that corresponds to the total number of games that the device is activated. , The system is configured to be able to calculate the state ratio of accessory objects, etc. based on the value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory is operating or the accessory continuous operation device is operating, and the value corresponding to the total number of games. , Under a predetermined situation where the power is on, a value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory stored in the first storage means is operating or the accessory continuous operating device is operating is a predetermined value. Even if the value is changed due to an abnormality and becomes larger than the value corresponding to the total number of games stored in the second storage means, it is possible to continue playing the game, and in a situation where the power is turned off, A value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory is activated or the accessory continuous operating device is activated, which is stored in the first storage means, is changed due to a predetermined abnormality and is stored in the second storage means. This gaming machine is characterized in that if the value becomes larger than the value corresponding to the total number of games played, a predetermined error state occurs after the power is turned on.

P Slot machine, DU Front door, D Door circuit board, D10s Insertion acceptance sensor, D20s First insertion sensor, D30s Second insertion sensor, D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button, D42 Center stop button, D43 Right stop button, D50 Start lever, D60 Settlement button, D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch, D90 Coin shooter, D100 Blocker, D130 Upper panel, D140 Lower panel, D150 Decorative lamp unit, D160 Reel window, D170 Coin insertion slot, D180 Start lamp, D290 Replay lamp, D300 Insertion possible lamp, D200 Number of credits display device, D210 Number of credits display lamp, D220 Bet button, D230 Coin tray, D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game status display device, D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (push sequence display device) D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member D341 Medal receiving port D342 Medal drop surface D343 Medal non-drop surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting/reset button C Main control chip, M50 Reel M51 Left reel, M52 Center reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Minimum play interval timer S Sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Reel backlight S40 Performance display device, SC Sub-control chip E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device, H10s First payout sensor H20s Second payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disk, H50a Disk rotation shaft H60 Game medal outlet, H70 Release energizing means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bet button lamp, S60 Stop button lamp K Reel board, K10 Reel motor K20 Reel sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub input button KHc High security obstacle counter, YKc-1 Counter for number of games remaining in advantageous zone FZt Freeze execution timer RU Reel unit, BU Base section, H62 Discharge guide section, H64 Inclined surface HS Medal auxiliary tank, BS Screw, DE Full detection electrode M55 First end, M57 Second end, M58 Overlapping section, M59 Gap MW Reel frame, MO Reel band M Main control board MN11ta-A First main game win/loss lottery table, MN11ta-B Second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-H Auxiliary game win/loss lottery table, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B lottery table for determining second main game symbol, MN41ta-H lottery table for determining auxiliary game symbol, MN51ta-A lottery table for determining first main game variation mode, MN51ta-B lottery table for determining second main game variation mode, MN51ta-H lottery table for determining auxiliary game variation mode, MP11t-C timer for managing first and second main game symbol variations MP11t-H timer for managing auxiliary game symbol variations, MP22t-B timer for opening electric device for second main game start port MP33c winning ball counter, MP34t timer for special game MP52c time reduction counter, MT10 command transmission buffer A first main game peripheral device, A10 first main game start port A11s first main game start port ball entry detection device, A20 first main game symbol display device A21g first main game symbol display unit, A21h First main game symbol reservation display section B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game start port B11s Second main game start port ball entry detection device, B11d Second main game start port electric device B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g Second main game symbol display section B21h Second main game symbol reservation display section C First and second main game common peripheral device, C10 First large prize opening C11s First large prize opening prize entry detection device, C11d First large prize opening electric device C20 Second large prize opening, C21s Second large prize opening prize entry detection device C21d Second large prize opening electric device, D30 Game area D44 Launch handle D32 Outer rail, D34 Inner rail H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port ball entry detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display section, H21h Auxiliary game symbol reserved display section S Sub-control board, SM Performance display control means (sub-main control board) SG Performance display device SG10 Display area, SG11 Decorative symbol display area SG12 First reserved display section, SG13 Second reserved display section KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device, KE10 Payout unit D16 Transparent plate, KR Prize ball rail KT Prize ball tank, KH Prize ball payout control board Ea Power switch, D42 Launch device E Power supply unit, D40 Launch control board DL10 Left hitting area, DR10 Right hitting area ML10 Left hitting route (first flow down route), MR10 Right hitting route (second flow down route) D50 Right hitting route outlet NKc Number of balls counter P10 Left general winning port, P20 Right general winning port HSc Left hit instruction counter, MSc Right hit instruction counter MP51c Chance bonus number counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small winning game timer, MP41t-2 Discharge standby timer C22 Specific area (V winning port), C20-1 Box-shaped member C23 Second large winning port discharge port, C23s Second large winning port discharge detection device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C22s V winning port ball entry detection device SM26c Pre-reading performance execution counter SM24t Power-on timer SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Consecutive number counter SB Sub input button, SBs Sub input button input detection device KH Prize ball payout control board, KE Prize ball payout device 3100 Transmission/reception control means 3110 Reception control means, 3111 Main side reception information temporary storage means 3112 ECO unit side received information temporary storage means, 3210 Transmission control means 3300 Payout control means, 3310 Payout process related information temporary storage means 3311a First main game start port winning counter, 3311b Second main game start port winning counter 3311c First large winning port winning counter, 3311d Second large winning port winning counter 3311e General winning port winning counter, 3312 Number of balls held counter 3313 Number of enclosed game balls counter, 3400 Launch control means 3410 Launch control related information temporary storage means, 3500 Initial processing control means at the time of power failure/power failure recovery 3510 Power failure information temporary storage means 40 Launch control device, 42 Launch device KS Prize ball permission sensors, EU ECO unit 50 Operation unit device, 2121 Normal winning detection device 2122 Normal electric role, 2221 Distribution winning detection device 2222 Distribution electric device, 2224a Shielding member 2224-1 Specific area ball entry detection device, 2224-2 Discharged ball detection device M40 Main board case, M80 Gate section CPUMC Microprocessor, SH Performance display device SH10 Identification segment, SH20 Ratio segment M90 Setting display LED

Claims (1)

A gaming machine including a reel, a stop switch, a start switch, a counting switch, and a total score display device, the gaming machine being configured to be able to determine a lottery result based on the operation of the start switch,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, even if the operation of a counting switch is accepted between when predetermined information is output to the outside and when specific information is output to the outside, and the operation of the counting switch is subsequently not accepted, the updating of the score displayed on the total score display device can be started, and, even if the operation of the counting switch is accepted between when predetermined information is output to the outside and when specific information is output to the outside, and the operation of the counting switch is subsequently not accepted, specific information including the counting information can be output to the outside.

Images